Evaluate how the dbConnect feature in AutoCAD integrates database management into its framework, and describe a scenario where it might be particularly advantageous.

The dbConnect feature in AutoCAD facilitates database management by allowing users to link drawing objects to database records, creating a dynamic exchange of data between graphical representations and database entries. This integration can be particularly advantageous in scenarios involving large architectural projects where AutoCAD drawings need to be consistently updated with inventory data from a database, ensuring all elements in the drawing reflect the most current and accurate information .

What is the function of the SPACETRANS command in AutoCAD, and how does it influence the drawing workflow?

The SPACETRANS command in AutoCAD is used to transfer objects between model space and paper space while maintaining the original properties and scale. It is crucial for workflows involving detailed drafting or layout preparation, as it ensures object integrity when transitioning across different spaces within a drawing .

Compare the functionalities of the SHELL and SLICE commands in AutoCAD regarding 3D object manipulation.

The SHELL command in AutoCAD is used to create hollow models by removing a specified thickness from the solid's boundary, effectively converting solids to shell forms. On the other hand, the SLICE command divides a 3D solid into multiple parts along a specified plane without necessarily hollowing the structure. These functionalities enable different approaches to 3D modeling, where SHELL focuses on creating lightweight structures, and SLICE allows dissecting models for analysis or further modification .

In AutoCAD, how can the DIvide command be used to distribute blocks or points evenly along a path, and what are the alignment options available for blocks?

The DIvide command in AutoCAD allows for evenly spacing point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. For blocks, the command offers an alignment option where specifying 'Yes' aligns the blocks' X axes tangent to the path at dividing points, ensuring an orientation consistent with the path. If 'No' is selected, blocks retain their original orientation .

What procedure does AutoCAD follow to create a block definition from selected objects, and what are the constraints on block naming?

To create a block definition from selected objects in AutoCAD, the Block Definition dialog box is used where the user defines and names the block. The name can include up to 255 characters with letters, numbers, and certain special characters, but it cannot contain characters used by Microsoft Windows or AutoCAD for other purposes, such as 'DIRECT', 'LIGHT', etc. .

What are the functions of the CHPROP command in AutoCAD when it comes to modifying object attributes?

The CHPROP command in AutoCAD is used to modify various attributes of objects including color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, thickness, and plot style. For example, it can change an object's color to a specified true color using RGB values or a named color from a color book. It also allows modifying the object's layer and attempts to load a new linetype if not loaded, changing the lineweight to the closest predefined value if an undefined value is entered .

What considerations does AutoCAD require when using the REGEN command in conjunction with BLIPMODE?

When using the REGEN command in conjunction with BLIPMODE, it is important to know that REGEN can be used to clear any marker blips if BLIPMODE has been enabled and needs to be reset. This command regenerates the drawing to fix the display without permanent markers clutter, ensuring the interface remains clear for further operations .

Analyze how AutoCAD manages plot style assignments and what happens if plot styles are overridden.

AutoCAD manages plot style assignments by allowing objects to be plotted with the properties defined in the assigned plot style. When using named plot styles, they can be applied directly to selected objects. Plot styles can be overridden by other assignments, allowing modifications after initial application, ensuring that the final plotted output can be precisely controlled based on the current plot style settings .

How does AutoCAD's BLIPMODE feature affect the interface, and what are the methods for removing marker blips?

BLIPMODE in AutoCAD controls the display of marker blips, which are temporary marks in the shape of a plus sign appearing where a point is specified. By default, BLIPMODE is off, and turning it on shows these markers. To remove marker blips, commands such as REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, or PAN are used to redraw or regenerate the drawing, effectively clearing the blips .

Open navigation menu

Upload

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

874 views1,322 pages

Autocad Command Reference Guide

Q: How does AutoCAD handle the hatching of areas with internal intersections, and what system variable is involved in managing the hatch associativity?

AutoCAD handles hatching in areas with internal intersections by hatching inward from the outer boundary and turning off hatching when it encounters an internal intersection. Areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number of intersections are hatched, while those with an even number are not . The HPASSOC system variable manages the hatch associativity, ensuring that a new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified .

Uploaded by

ujala

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

874 views1,322 pages

Autocad Command Reference Guide

Uploaded by

ujala

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1322

AutoCAD

Command Reference

2005
February 2004
Copyright 2004 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND
MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the
time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D
Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator
Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk
Streamline, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped,
bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), cleaner, Codec Central,
combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside
Track, IntroDV, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk
Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*,
Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat,
Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning
Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Map, AutoSnap,
AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper,
Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format,
DWF, DWFit, DWFwriter, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design,
jobnet, lustre, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual
Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.
Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame,
flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, Multi-Master Editing.
Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
AnswerWorks Copyright 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved.
Copyright 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
International CorrectSpell Spelling Correction System 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield 3.0. Copyright 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
Macromedia Flash Player Copyright 1995-2003 Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved. Macromedia and Flash are trademarks of
Macromedia, Inc.
PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in
combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or
into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut fr Gtesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL
German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."
Copyright Stade de France - Macary, Zublena et Regembal, Costantini - Architectes, ADAGP - Paris - 2003
Typefaces from the Bitstream typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust 1996. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-
Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using AutoCAD Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Using This Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Executing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
References to Other Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3DCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjust Clipping Planes Window . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3DCORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3DDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3DFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3DMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3D Orbit Cursor Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3DSIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 35
3DSOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 38

iii
3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ADCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ADCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ADCNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 56
Startup Suite Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
ARC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 66
Archive - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 69
ARCHIVE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ARRAY Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ARX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Info Palette Shortcut Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ASSISTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ATTACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ATTDEF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ATTDEF Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ATTEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ATTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 94
ATTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

iv | Contents
Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog Box . . . . . 102
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Edit Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 109
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 119
BHATCH Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
BLIPMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
BLOCK Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BLOCKICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 130
BOUNDARY Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Understanding Syntax of Expressions . . . . . . . . . 137
Formatting Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Formatting Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using AutoCAD System Variables . . . . . . . . . . 141
Converting Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . 142
Using Standard Numeric Functions. . . . . . . . . . 142
Calculating a Vector from Two Points . . . . . . . . . 143
Calculating the Length of a Vector . . . . . . . . . . 145
Obtaining a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Obtaining the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions . . . 146
Converting Points Between UCS and WCS . . . . . . . 147
Calculating a Point on a Line . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Rotating a Point About an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Obtaining an Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Calculating a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Obtaining a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Obtaining an Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Calculating a Normal Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Contents | v
Using Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
CHECKSTANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Check Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
CLEANSCREENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
CLEANSCREENOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
COLOR Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
CONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Customize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
New Toolbar Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
DBCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
DBCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
dbConnect Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Data View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Query Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Column Values Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Link Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Configure a Data Source Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 225
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 226
Export Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Export Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Export Template Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

vi | Contents
Import Query Set Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Import Template Set Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 231
Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Label Template Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 234
Link Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Link Template Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 240
New Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 241
New Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 241
New Query Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Select a Database Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 243
Select a Data Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Sort Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Synchronize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Edit Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 248
DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
DDVPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 250
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DETACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DIM and DIM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
DIMOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
DIMREASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
DIMREGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Dimension Style Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 284

Contents | vii
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes. . . 284
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 304
DIMSTYLE Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
DONUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
DSETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
DSVIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Aerial View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
DVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
DWGPROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Drawing Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 337
DXBIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
EATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Attribute Extraction Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
EDGESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Create Transmittal Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Transmittal Setups Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 362
Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 365
ETRANSMIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 385
FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Find and Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Find and Replace Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 390

viii | Contents
FOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
GOTOURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
GRAPHSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Object Grouping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Order Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
GROUP Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
HATCHEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 407
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 411
HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Select Place in Document Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 416
HYPERLINK Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
HYPERLINKOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Image Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
IMAGE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
IMAGEADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Image Adjust Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
IMAGEADJUST Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 427
IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Insert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
INSERT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
INSERTOBJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
INTERFERE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
JPGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Contents | ix
JUSTIFYTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Layer Properties Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 457
Layer States Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
New Layer State to Save Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 462
Select Linetype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Lineweight Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
LAYER Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
LAYOUTWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Layout Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
LAYTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Layer Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Edit/New Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
LEADER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
LENGTHEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Lights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 485
New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 487
New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . 489
North Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Shadow Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Geographic Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 494
LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Linetype Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 501
LINETYPE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
LSEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Landscape Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
LSLIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Landscape Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 508
LSNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

x | Contents
Landscape New Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 512
LWEIGHT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Markup Set Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
MARKUPCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
MASSPROP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
MATCHCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Property Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
MATLIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Materials Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box. . . . . . 529
Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box . . . . . . 530
MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
MENULOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 533
MENULOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 536
MENUUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
MIRROR3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 548
MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
MLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 560
Element Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Multiline Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 561
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
MSLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
MTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Multiline Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Indents and Tabs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Stack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 575
MTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Contents | xi
Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special Characters . . . 580
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab . . . . . . . . . . 587
Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab. . . . . . . . . . . 587
NETLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Create New Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Quick Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Advanced Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
NEW Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
NEWSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Change Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
OLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
OLE Text Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . 609
Add a New Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 614
Edit Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 615
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 618
Partial Open Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
OPEN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
OPENDWFMARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
OPENSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Color Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 657
Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 657
Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 658
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 660
Field Update Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Add Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Change Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

xii | Contents
Page Setup Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
New Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup) 675
Import Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 676
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
PAN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
PARTIALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Partial Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
PARTIALOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 681
PARTIALOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
PASTEASHYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
PASTEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
PASTEORIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
PASTESPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Paste Special Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
PCINWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Add Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Plot) . . 720
Plot Job Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box . . . . . . 720
PLOT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 729
PLOTSTAMP Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . 732
PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Current Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Select Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
PLOTSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
PLOTTERMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Add-a-Plotter Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Plotter Configuration Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 751

Contents | xiii
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . 752
PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .754
PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757
Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
General Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Cell Border Properties Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 761
PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .762
PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .762
PSETUPIN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .762
PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763
Publish Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Publish Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Publish) . . 770
DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 770
Publish Job Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 770
PUBLISH Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
PUBLISHTOWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
Publish to Web Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773
Purge Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
PURGE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777
QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778
Leader Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .783
QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784
QSELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784
Quick Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .787
QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788
RAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789
RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789
RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790
REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .792
REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .792
REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .792
REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793
REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793
REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795
Reference Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

xiv | Contents
REFEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
REGENALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
REGION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
REINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Re-initialization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
RENAME Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Render Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Render Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Windows Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 810
RENDSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
REPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Image Specifications Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 812
RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
RMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Materials Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box . . . . . . 822
Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box . . . . . . 825
New or Modify Granite Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . 828
New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . 829
New or Modify Wood Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . 831
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index Dialog Box . . . . . . . 833
Attach by Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
RMLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Map Markup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
RMLIN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
ROTATE3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
RPREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Rendering Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 841
Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Photo Real Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 845
Photo Raytrace Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . 847
File Output Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 850
RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Contents | xv
SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855
Save to Earlier Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Template Description Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Saveas Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
SAVEAS Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .859
Save Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
TGA Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
TIFF Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .862
SCALETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .863
SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864
Scenes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
New Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Modify Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .867
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .867
SECURITYOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869
Security Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Confirm Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Advanced Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 872
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .872
SETIDROPHANDLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .875
SETUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .876
Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Adjust Planar Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 878
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box. . . . . . . . 879
Adjust Spherical Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 881
Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 883
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement Dialog Box . . . . . . . 884
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .886
SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .886
SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .888
SHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .888
Sheet Set Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Subset Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . 895
New Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Rename & Renumber Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 896
Rename & Renumber View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 897
Import Layouts as Sheets Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . 897
Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 898
Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 900
Add Custom Property Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 901

xvi | Contents
Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 902
Sheet Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
New Sheet Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Sheet Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
View Category Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
List of Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Select Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
SHEETSETHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
SHOWMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
SIGVALIDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 908
Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . 909
SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
SOLIDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
SPACETRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Change Dictionaries Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 948
SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Configure Standards Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 959
CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . 960
STATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Statistics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
STYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Plot Style Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
SYSWINDOWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

Contents | xvii
TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .983
Insert Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
TABLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
TABLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986
TABLEEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .987
TABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .987
Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Create New Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 988
New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . 988
TABLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .992
TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .997
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .998
Special Unicode Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . .1004
Control Codes and Special Characters . . . . . . . . .1004
TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable . . . . . . . .1005
TEXTSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
TEXTTOFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
TIFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .1008
Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1010
Material Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .1012
TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
TOOLBAR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . .1012
TOOLPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
View Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016
Tool Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
TRAYSETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Tray Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1020
TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
UCS Icon Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1035
UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1037
UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1042
UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

xviii | Contents
UNION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Direction Control Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
UNITS Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
VBAIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
VBALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box . . . . . . 1054
VBAMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
VBA Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
VBARUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
Macros Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
Select Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
VBA Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
VBARUN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
VBASTMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
VBAUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
View Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
New View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
View Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
VIEW Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
VIEWPLOTDETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
Plot and Publish Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 1070
Plot and Publish Status Bar Icon Shortcut Menu. . . . . . 1071
VIEWRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
VLISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
VPCLIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Viewports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
VPORTS Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
VSLIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
Write Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
WBLOCK Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
WMFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093

Contents | xix
WMFOPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
WMF In Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .1098
WMFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
XATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
External Reference Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . .1101
XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
Xbind Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1105
XBIND Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1105
XCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
XLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
XOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Xref Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1114
Bind Xrefs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1116
XREF Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1118
ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
Zoom Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1127

Appendix A Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . 1129

Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . 1130
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . 1130
FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
MTP (Command Modifier). . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
TRACKING (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . 1132
Selection Modes (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . 1132

Appendix B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133

Appendix C Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Attach Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1208
Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . .1208
Search Folders Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1209
Batch Standards Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Batch Standards Checker Window . . . . . . . . . .1210
SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217

xx | Contents
Introduction

The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to In this chapter

AutoCAD commands, lists all AutoCAD commands in Using AutoCAD
Documentation
alphabetical order.
Using This Reference

In addition to the command listings, the Command Typographical Conventions

Reference covers several topics in the appendixes:

command aliases, system variables, dimension

variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical

database objects, and Unicode fonts.

The index for the Command Reference is at the end of

Volume II.

1
Using AutoCAD Documentation
In addition to this Command Reference, several other resources are available to
help you learn and use AutoCAD. The complete documentation set for
AutoCAD is online. You can access it from the Help menu.

Note For the latest documentation corrections and additions, refer to the
Readme file.

Using This Reference

The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands,
command options, and system variables. The explanations reflect the default
AutoCAD system variable settings and the default prototype drawing. If you
change system variable settings, the prompts on your screen might differ
from what you see here. For example, the setting of the FILEDIA system vari-
able governs whether you work in a dialog box or on the command line
when you use certain commands. See appendix B, System Variables.

Executing Commands
The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using
one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN, no further
action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing
additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
As you work with commands, note that right-clicking in the drawing area
either acts as ENTER or displays a shortcut menu. You can control this behav-
ior in the Options dialog box or with the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.

Starting Commands
You can start a command by doing one of the following:

Select the command from a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu.
Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

2 | Introduction
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section, listing the specific ways you can start that com-
mand. For example, following is the command access section for the PAN
command:

Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)

The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of

the SHORTCUTMENU system variable. The instructions in the command
access sections assume that you have made the indicated menu available.
You can exit a command at any time by pressing ESC .
Using Transparent Commands
In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The
command you start is called a transparent command. For example, to turn on
the grid while drawing a line, you can start the GRID command transparently
by preceding the command with an apostrophe. Two right angle brackets
(>>) precede prompts for transparent commands.
Command: line
Specify first point: 'grid
>>Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: on
Resuming LINE command
Specify first point:

In the Command Reference, the command access sections identify commands

that you can use transparently.
Suppressing Dialog Boxes
Many commands provide both command line and dialog box interfaces. In
most cases, when both a command line and dialog box interface are avail-
able, the command line version is preceded with a hyphen character. For
example, the command line version of GROUP is -GROUP.
You can also control the display of file dialog boxes through the FILEDIA
system variable. See appendix B, System Variables.

Using This Reference | 3

Responding to Prompts
If a command does not immediately execute, AutoCAD either displays a
dialog box or displays prompts on the command line requesting more infor-
mation. Command line prompts are structured as follows:
Command: commandname
Current settings: Setting1 Setting2 Setting3
Instructional text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/...] <default option or value>:

The optional current value line displays the current settings for the com-
mand or for system variables related to the command. The succeeding
prompts identify the type of input required to complete the command and,
when applicable, list the available options in straight brackets and a default
option or value in angle brackets. In some cases, AutoCAD determines
default options and values based on the option or value that you last speci-
fied, or based on the settings of certain system variables.
Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take.
Most command line prompts begin with the word enter, select, or specify.
These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt.

Terminology in command line prompts

If the prompt starts with... You can...

Select Select objects on the screen using your pointing

device.

Enter Enter text on the command line.

Specify Use your pointing device or enter text on the

command line to select a point location on the
screen.

Selecting Options on the Command Line

To select one of the options contained within the straight brackets, you can
enter the entire option name or only the capitalized letters, and then press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . To select the default option enclosed in angle brackets
(<>), if available, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

4 | Introduction
You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by right-click-
ing in the drawing area while the command is active. The options available
on the command line appear in the shortcut menu. For information about
how to enable or disable this shortcut menu, see Shortcut Menus in the
Users Guide.
Entering Data on the Command Line
Some prompts ask you to enter data, rather than (or as an alternative to)
choosing an option. To do so, enter the text on the command line and press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . However, be aware that when the command line prompt
requests an object name, SPACEBAR inserts a space on the command line
rather than acting as ENTER . This allows for the support of extended symbol
names.
Just as default command options are often provided, prompts may include
default values, enclosed in angle brackets (<>), when data is requested. For
example, the POLYGON command displays the following prompt, suggesting
4 as the number of sides for your polygon:
Command: polygon
Enter number of sides <4>:

To accept the default value, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

Using Wild-Card Characters on the Command Line
When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name,
variable name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to
specify names. See the table in Filter and Sort the List of Layers in the Users
Guide.

Repeating Commands
If no command is active, you can repeat the previous command by pressing
ENTER or SPACEBAR or by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing the
Repeat Command Name option from the shortcut menu.

Accessing Recently Used Commands

You can access the six most recently used commands from a shortcut menu
by right-clicking in the command window and choosing Recent Commands.

References to Other Sections

At the end of most command descriptions, youll find a section called See
Also. This section includes references to chapters in other AutoCAD guides
and other AutoCAD commands and system variables related to the current
command.

Using This Reference | 5

Typographical Conventions
To orient you to AutoCAD features as they appear on the screen, specific
terms are set in typefaces that distinguish them from the body text. Through-
out AutoCAD documentation, the following conventions are used.

Typographical conventions

Text element Example

AutoCAD commands ADCENTER, DBCONNECT, SAVE

AutoCAD system variables DIMBLK, DWGNAME, LTSCALE
AutoCAD named-objects, such as linetypes DASHDOT, STANDARD
and styles

Prompts Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:

Instructions after prompt sequences Select objects: Use an object selection method
File names and file name extensions acad.exe, Readme file, .dwg file extension
Folder or directory names Sample folder, c:\autocad 2002\support

Text you enter At the Command prompt, enter shape.

Keys you press on the keyboard CTRL, F10, ESC, ENTER

Keys you press simultaneously on the keyboard CTRL + C

AutoLISP variable names, sample code, and The variable pi is preset to a value of pi
text in ASCII files ***POP1

AutoLISP and DIESEL function names command ads_command( )

Formal arguments specified in function The string and mode arguments

definitions

6 | Introduction
You can start a command by using one of the following methods:

Click the command name on a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut

menu.
Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases. To access the acad.pgp, on the
Tools menu, click Customize Edit Custom Files Program Parameters
(acad.pgp).
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that
command.

3D
Creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects
3D creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects in common geometric
shapes, including boxes, cones, spheres, tori, wedges, and pyramids.
When you use 3D to construct polygon mesh objects, the resulting objects
are surfaces that can be hidden, shaded, or rendered.
Draw menu: Surfaces 3D Surfaces
Command line: 3d

Enter an option
[Box/Cone/DIsh/DOme/Mesh/Pyramid/Sphere/Torus/Wedge]:

Box
Creates a 3D box polygon mesh.
Specify corner point of box:
length Specify length of box: Specify a distance
Specify width of box or [Cube]: Specify a distance or enter c
width
Width
Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to
the corner point of the box.
height Specify height of box: Specify a distance
Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle
angle or enter r

3D | 7
Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you
enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X
and Y axes.
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or
relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an
angle, or press ENTER

You can define a reference angle by specifying two

points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For
example, you can rotate the box to align two specified
points on the box with a point on another object. After
defining a reference angle, specify a point for the
reference angle to align with. The box then rotates
around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation
specified for the reference angle.
If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone
determines the rotation of the box.
Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle

To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point

relative to the base point. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates by
the angle between the reference angle and the new
angle. If you want to align the box with another object,
specify two points on the target object to define the
new angle of rotation for the box.
If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the
angular distance entered relative to the first corner of
the box.

Cube
Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.
Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle
or enter r

Rotation Angle Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you
enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X
and Y axes.

8 | 3D
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or
relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an
angle, or press ENTER

You can define a reference angle by specifying two

To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point

relative to the base point. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates
the angular distance between the reference angle and
the new angle. If you want to align the box with
another object, specify two points on the target object
to define the new angle of rotation for the box.
If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the
angular distance entered relative to the first corner
point of the box.

Cone
Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.
Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
1
Radius for Base
Defines the base of the cone by its radius.
Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or
press ENTER

3D | 9
top radius Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a
truncated cone.
height
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>:
Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
base
Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0
radius
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a
top diameter = 0
truncated cone.
Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance
or press ENTER
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>:
Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

Diameter for Base

Defines the base of the cone by its diameter.
Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance
Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or
press ENTER
Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0
top diameter Radius for Top
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a
truncated cone.
height Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>:
Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

base diameter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a
truncated cone.
Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>:
Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

10 | 3D
Dish
Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius Defines the dish by its radius.

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish
<8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter.

Specify diameter of dish: Specify a distance
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish
<8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

radius diameter
1

Dome
Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius Defines the dome by its radius.

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of
dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome
<8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

3D | 11
Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter.
Specify diameter of dome: Specify a distance
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of
dome <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome
<8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

radius diameter

Mesh
4 3 Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines
drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar
N=8 to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.
1 Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2)
M=6 Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3)
2
Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4)
Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256

Pyramid
Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron.
Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3)
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point
(4) or enter t

apex point 5 Fourth Corner Point

Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid.

4 Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an

3
option
1 The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramids
2 apex, top, or ridge line.

12 | 3D
Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex).
ridge
1 Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two
points
endpoints must lie in the same direction as the base
2 points to prevent a self-intersecting wireframe.
Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point
(1)
Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a
point (2)

Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top

points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon
mesh.
Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point

Tetrahedron
Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh.
Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t

Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex).

Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle. If the
top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon
top mesh.
points 3
2 Specify first corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a
1
point (1)
Specify second corner point for top of tetrahedron: Spec-
ify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify
a point (3)

3D | 13
Sphere
Creates a spherical polygon mesh.
1
Specify center point of sphere: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

radius Radius Defines the sphere by its radius.

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of
sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter.

diameter Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance

Torus
Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current
UCS.
1
Specify center point of torus: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge,
not to the center of the tube.

Radius
torus radius Defines the torus by its radius.

tube Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

radius
The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to
the outside edge of the tube.

14 | 3D
Radius Defines the tube by its radius.
Enter number of segments around tube circumference
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of segments around torus circumference
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments around tube circumference
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of segments around torus circumference
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

Diameter
torus diameter
Defines the torus by its diameter.
tube
Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance
diameter
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to
the outside edge of the tube.
Radius Defines the tube by its radius.
Enter number of segments around tube circumference
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of segments around torus circumference
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER

Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

3D | 15
Wedge
Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face taper-
ing along the X axis.
Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1)
Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance
height Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance
1 Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle
length
width
The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter
0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane.
3DARRAY
Creates a three-dimensional array
Modify menu: 3D Operation 3D Array
Command line: 3darray

object Select objects: Use an object selection method

selected
The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array.
Enter type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <R>: Enter an option or press ENTER

Rectangular Array Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y

axis), and levels (Z axis). An array must have at least two
rows or two columns or two levels.
levels

Enter the number of rows () <1>: Enter a positive value

or press ENTER
Enter the number of columns ( | | | ) <1>: Enter a positive
value or press ENTER
columns rows Enter the number of levels ( . . . ) <1>: Enter a positive
value or press ENTER

Specifying one row requires that more than one

column be specified, and vice versa. Specifying one
level creates a two-dimensional array.
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD prompts:
Specify the distance between rows (): Specify a
distance

16 | 3DARRAY
If you specify more than one column, AutoCAD
prompts:
Specify the distance between columns ( | | | ): Specify a
distance

If you specify more than one level, AutoCAD prompts:

Specify the distance between levels ( . . . ): Specify a
distance

Positive values generate the array along the positive X,

Y, and Z axes. Negative values generate the array along
the negative X, Y, and Z axes.
Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation.
Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive
value
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Specify an
angle or press ENTER

1 The specified angle determines how far AutoCAD arrays

2 the objects about the axis of rotation. A positive
number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A
negative number produces a clockwise array rotation.
objects rotated
Rotate arrayed objects? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

Entering y or pressing ENTER rotates each array

element.
Specify center point of array: Specify a point (1)
objects not rotated Specify second point on axis of rotation: Specify a point
(2)

3DCLIP
Starts the interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window

3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Adjust Clipping Planes.
Command line: 3dclip

AutoCAD displays the Adjust Clipping Planes window.

3DCLIP | 17
Adjust Clipping Planes Window
The Adjust Clipping Planes window displays objects rotated at a 90-degree
angle from the current 3D Orbit view. You set the clipping planes in the
Adjust Clipping Planes window, and the results are displayed in the main 3D
Orbit view. Use the Adjust Clipping Planes toolbar, or right-click in the
Adjust Clipping Planes window and select an option from the shortcut
menu.

Adjust Clipping Planes Shortcut Menu

To choose any of the following options, right-click in the Adjust Clipping
Planes window.
Adjust Front Adjusts only the front clipping plane. The line near the
Clipping bottom of the window adjusts the front clipping plane.
If a check mark is displayed next to Front Clipping On,
you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you
move the line up or down.

Adjust Back Adjusts only the back clipping plane. The line near the
Clipping top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane. If a
check mark is displayed next to Back Clipping On, you
can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move
the line up or down.

Create Slice Causes the back and front clipping planes to move
together, which shows you a slice of the objects in the
3D Orbit view. Adjust the front and back clipping
planes, and then choose Create Slice. You can then
move the front and back clipping planes as one unit.

18 | 3DCLIP
Pan Displays the pan cursor, a hand cursor that you can use
to pan the clipping plane. Hold down the pick button
and drag the cursor in any direction. The pan cursor
stays active until you click another button.
Zoom Displays the zoom cursor, a magnifying-glass cursor
that you can use to enlarge or reduce the clipping
plane. To enlarge the image, hold down the pick button
and drag the cursor toward the top of Adjust Clipping
Planes window. To reduce the image, hold down the
pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of
the window.
Front Clipping Turns the front clipping plane on or off. A check mark
On indicates that the front clipping plane is on, and you
can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the
front clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn
the front clipping plane off and remove the check
mark.
Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. A check mark
indicates that the back clipping plane is on, and you
can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the
back clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn
the back clipping plane off and remove the check mark.
Reset Resets the the window and clipping plane to the extents
of the drawing.
Close the Adjust Clipping Planes window by clicking the Close button in the
upper-right corner of the window. Closing the Adjust Clipping Planes win-
dow does not turn the clipping planes off. You can rotate the view in 3DORBIT
and still see the effect of the clipping planes. As you rotate the view, different
portions of the objects are clipped as they pass in and out of the clipping
planes.
To turn clipping planes off, right-click in the drawing area and choose More
from the shortcut menu. A check mark in front of Front Clipping On or Back
Clipping On indicates that the clipping plane is on. Choose the option that
you want to turn off. Or, choose More Adjust Clipping Planes from the
shortcut menu. Right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window, and ensure
that the Front Clipping On and Back Clipping On options arent checked.

3DCLIP | 19
3DCONFIG
Provides a command-line interface to the 3D graphics systems configuration settings
If you enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt, the following prompt is dis-
played on the command line:
Enter option: [Adaptive degradation/Dynamic tessellation/Render options/
Geometry/acceLeration/eXit] <Adaptive degradation>: Enter the configuration
you want to change or press ENTER to change adaptive degradation settings.

You will stay in the 3DCONFIG command until you enter eXit or press ESC.

Adaptive Degradation
Specifies the display options to which the view can degrade to maintain the
speed of the view manipulation. For example, if a large drawing is currently
Gouraud shaded, you can select Wireframe to allow the drawing to degrade
to a wireframe representation of the view.
You can turn on one or more than one of the available options. If more than
one option is turned on, the display changes to the most detailed option first
and then degrades until it reaches the least detailed option.
Configure: Adaptive Degradation
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want adaptive degradation
turned on or off

If Adaptive Degradation is turned on, you can specify the type. If no type is
specified, then no degradation will occur.

Current display options: Wireframe Bounding Box

Enter option [Flat shaded/Wireframe/Bounding box/Maintain speed fps/eXit]
<Flat shaded>: Specify the type of adaptive degradation you want to use
Configure: Flat shaded
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want flat-shaded display
turned on or off
Configure: Wireframe
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want wireframe display
turned on or off
Configure: Bounding box
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want bounding box display
turned on or off
Configure: Maintain speed fps
Enter speed <5>: Enter a value between 1 and 60 to adjust the frame rate

Flat Shaded Specifies that the display can change to flat shaded.

20 | 3DCONFIG
Wireframe Specifies that the display can change to wireframe. This
uses less of the system resources and allows the drawing
to move at a faster speed.
Bounding Box Specifies that the display can change to a bounding
box. A box is displayed in place of each object in your
view. This choice requires the least amount of system
resources.
Maintain Speed Specifies the display speed in frames per second. The
FPS drawing degrades to maintain the specified speed.

Dynamic Tessellation
Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing.
AutoCAD draws objects using many short lines (or triangles when drawing
spheres). These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing
appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines.
Configure: Dynamic tessellation
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want dynamic tessellation
turned on or off

If Dynamic Tessellation is turned on, you can specify the number of surface
tessellations, curve tessellations, or tessellations to cache.

Configure: Dynamic tessellation

Enter option [Surface tessellation/Curve tessellation/Tessellations to cache/eXit]
<Surface tessellations>: Specify the type of dynamic tessellation you want to use
Configure: Surface tessellation
Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100
Configure: Curve tessellation
Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100
Configure: Tessellations to cache
Enter number of tessellations to cache <3>: Enter a value between 1 and 10

Surface Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your

Tessellation drawing. The lower numbers provide less detail; the
higher numbers provide more detail but use more
tessellation lines and more memory.
Curve Determines the amount of detail for curves in your
Tessellation drawing. The lower numbers provide less detail; the
higher numbers provide more detail but use more
tessellation lines and more memory.

3DCONFIG | 21
Number of Configures your system according to memory and
Tessellations to performance requirements. A cache is a special memory
Cache subsystem that stores frequently accessed information.
The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation.
When the number of tessellations to cache is set to 1,
the tessellation for all viewports is the same and may
cause some objects in the drawing to be regenerated as
you zoom in and out.
Setting the number of tessellations to cache to 2 or
more is useful when you have more than one viewport
with different views. Increasing the number requires
more memory.

Render Options
Makes settings available for enhancing the display of lights, materials, tex-
tures, and transparency in 3D views. This includes objects in the 3D Orbit
view and objects shaded using the SHADEMODE command.
Configure: Render options
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want to turn on render options
Configure: Render options
Enter option [Lights/Materials/Backgrounds/eXit] <Lights>: Specify whether you
want to configure lights, materials, or backgrounds
Configure: Lights
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want lights turned on or off
Configure: Materials
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want materials turned on or
off
Configure: Backgrounds
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want backgrounds turned on
or off

If Render Options is turned on, you can specify if you want lights, materials,
and backgrounds turned on or off.
Lights In 3D views, illuminates objects and attached materials
by lights that were defined with the LIGHT command. If
this option is not selected, or if the LIGHT command has
not been used for the drawing, then the default lighting
for 3D views is used.
Materials In 3D views, displays materials for objects that have
materials that were attached using the RMAT command.
If the object has no attached material, the default global

22 | 3DCONFIG
material is used. If this option is not selected, or if the
RMAT command has not been used in the drawing, then
no materials are displayed.
Backgrounds Specifies that backgrounds will be displayed in 3D
views while navigating and editing.
Configure: Textures
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want textures turned on or off
Configure: Transparency
Enter mode [Low/Medium/High] <Low>: Select a transparency level

If Materials is turned on, you can also configure textures and transparency.
Enable Textures In 3D views, shows textures attached to objects using
the RMAT and SETUV commands. Materials must also be
turned on for textures to be visible.
Transparency Adjusts the transparency quality to improve image
quality, but at the expense of redraw time. At the low-
quality setting, a screen-door effect achieves
transparency without sacrificing speed. At the medium-
quality setting, blending improves image quality. At the
high-quality setting, blending and extra processing
produce an image free of visual artifacts, but at the cost
of drawing speed. Materials must also be turned on for
transparency to be visible.

Geometry
Determines how to display isolines in 3D and whether to display back faces
in 3D.
Configure: Geometry
Enter option [Isolines on top/Discard backfaces] <Isolines on top>: Specify an
option to configure
Configure: Isolines on top
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want isolines on top
Configure: Discard backfaces
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want back faces to be
discarded

Isolines on Top Displays isolines for front and back faces in all shade
modes except Hidden. Isolines for the back faces are
displayed on top of the shading for the objects in 3D.
Turning this option off hides the isolines for the back
faces.

3DCONFIG | 23
Discard Back Discards back faces when drawing objects. You cannot
Faces see the effect of discarding back faces on some objects,
such as spheres, because you cannot see the back face
even when it is present. The effect of discarding back
faces is visible on objects such as those that dont have
a top. Discarding back faces enhances performance.

Acceleration
Specifies whether you want to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D.
Configure: Acceleration
Enter option [Hardware/Software/eXit] <Hardware>: Specify whether you want
to configure hardware or software
Configure: Hardware
Enter option [Driver name/Geometry acceleration/Antialias lines/eXit] <Driver
name>: Specify an option to configure
Available drivers: wopengl8.hdi
Enter driver name <wopengl8.hdi>: Enter a driver name
Configure: Geometry acceleration
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want geometry acceleration
turned on or off
Configure: Antialias lines
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want anti-alias lines turned
on or off

If you select Hardware, you can also specify whether geometry acceleration
and anti-alias lines are turned on or off.
Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration. Select to use the
hardware graphics card to perform most of the drawing
tasks in 3D. This speeds up the drawing time.
When you select Hardware, the default driver is set to
the wopengl8.hdi driver that is included with AutoCAD.
If you select the Driver Name option, you can select a
driver from a list of available hardware-accelerated
drivers found in the AutoCAD drv directory. If you want
to use a hardware driver from another vendor, it must
be supported by the Heidi Graphics System.
Software Specifies software acceleration. Select to use the
software graphics system to perform all of the drawing
tasks in 3D.

24 | 3DCONFIG
Geometry Specifies whether to use geometry acceleration.
Acceleration Geometry acceleration must be supported by your
graphics card. See your vendor documentation for
information on your graphics card.
Using geometry acceleration makes more efficient use
of the graphics card. With this option turned on, you
are drawing in single precision. Use this option only if
you know that your drawing is within the single-
precision limit.
Anti-alias Lines Specifies using anti-aliasing lines. Lines appear
smoother and less gradient.

Exit
Exits the 3DCONFIG command.

3DCORBIT
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to set the objects in the 3D view into con-
tinuous motion

3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Continuous Orbit.
Command line: 3dcorbit

3DCORBIT changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous lines

encircling it. Click in the drawing area and drag the pointing device in any
direction to start the objects moving in the direction that youre dragging.
Release the button on the pointing device and the objects continue their
orbit in the direction that you specified. The speed of the cursor movement
determines the speed at which the objects spin.

3DCORBIT | 25
You can change the direction of the continuous orbit by clicking and
dragging again. You can also change the display of the continuous orbit by
right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing an option from the shortcut
menu. For example, you can choose Visual Aids Grid to add a grid to the
view without exiting Continuous Orbit.

3DDISTANCE
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away
3DDISTANCE simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the objects
or farther away. Unlike 3DZOOM, 3DDISTANCE does not exaggerate the per-
spective with which you view the objects or make them appear distorted.

3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Adjust Distance.
Command line: 3ddistance

3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one
pointing down. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of
the screen moves the camera closer to the objects, making them appear
larger. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the
screen moves the camera away from the objects, making them appear
smaller.

3DFACE
Creates a three-dimensional face
3DFACE creates a three- or four-sided surface anywhere in 3D space. You can
specify different Z coordinate values for each corner point of a 3D face, but
if you do, the 3D face cannot be extruded. 3DFACE differs from SOLID, which
creates a three- or four-sided surface that is parallel to the current user coor-
dinate system (UCS) and cannot use different Z coordinate values for each
corner point. Also, 3DFACE creates a surface that is not filled in; SOLID creates
a filled-in surface.

Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces 3D Face
Command line: 3dface

Specify first point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (1) or enter i

26 | 3DDISTANCE
First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering
the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural
clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal
3D face. If you locate all four points on the same plane,
AutoCAD creates a planar face that is similar to a region
object. When you shade or render the object, planar
faces are filled.
Invisible Controls which edges of a 3D face are visible, allowing
for accurate modeling of objects with holes. Entering i
or invisible before the first point of an edge makes the
edge invisible.
The invisible specification must precede any object
snap modes, XYZ filters, or coordinate input for that
edge. You can create a 3D face in which all edges are
invisible. Such a face is a phantom; it does not appear
in wireframe presentations but can hide material in line
drawings. 3D faces do appear in shaded renderings.
You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces.

visible edges invisible edges

Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i

5
Specify third point or [Invisible] <exit>: Specify a point (3), enter i, or press
6 ENTER
4
Specify fourth point or [Invisible] <create three-sided face>: Specify a point (4),
enter i, or press ENTER
3
AutoCAD repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts until you press
1 ENTER . Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish
2 entering points, press ENTER .

3DFACE | 27
3DMESH
Creates a free-form polygon mesh

Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces 3D mesh
Command line: 3dmesh

Enter size of mesh in M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256

N Enter size of mesh in N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256

Note 3DMESH is designed primarily for programmers. Other users should use
M the 3D command.

AutoCAD defines a polygon mesh by a matrix, the size of which is deter-

mined by M and N size values. M N equals the number of vertices that you
must specify.
Specify location for vertex (0, 0): Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate
open mesh
AutoCAD defines the location of each vertex in the mesh by m and n, the row
and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0).
You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before
specifying vertices in row m + 1.
Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a
mesh depends on the position of its vertices.

closed mesh 3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You
can close a mesh with PEDIT.
3DORBIT
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D
3DORBIT enables you to manipulate the view of 3D objects by clicking and
dragging your pointing device.
You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before start-
ing the command. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade the video
display.

28 | 3DMESH
You can display ambient, point, distant, and spot lights defined with the
LIGHT command in 3D Orbit view. To display these lights, you must set
SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On, or
Gouraud Shaded Edges On. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE options
do not display lights. To turn on lights, from the Tools menu, choose
Options. In the Options dialog box, choose the System tab. On the System
tab under Current 3D Graphics Display, choose Properties.
View menu: 3D Orbit
Command line: 3dorbit, 3do

3DORBIT activates a 3D view in the current viewport. If the user coordinate

system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS
appears in the 3D Orbit view.
The 3D Orbit view displays an arcball, which is a circle divided into four
quadrants by smaller circles. When 3DORBIT is active, the target of the view
stays stationary and the camera location, or point of view, moves around the
target. The center of the arcball, not the center of the objects youre
viewing, is the target point.

Note You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active.

Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor
icon, indicating the direction in which the view rotates.
While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options
from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing but-
tons on the 3D Orbit toolbar. See 3DOrbit Shortcut Menu on page 30.

3D Orbit Cursor Icons

View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor
as follows:
Sphere Encircled When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it
by Two Lines changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you
click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely
around the objects. It works as if your cursor were
grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging
it around the target point. You can drag horizontally,
vertically, and diagonally using this method.
Circular Arrow When you move the cursor outside the arcball, it
becomes a circular arrow. Clicking outside the arcball

3DORBIT | 29
and dragging the cursor around the arcball causes the
view to move around an axis that extends through the
center of the arcball, perpendicular to the screen. This
is called a roll.
If you drag the cursor into the arcball it changes to a
sphere encircled by two lines and the view moves freely.
If you move the cursor back outside the arcball, you
revert to a roll.
Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the left or right side of the arcball, it becomes a
horizontal ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of
these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y
axis through the middle of the arcball.
Vertical Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the top or bottom of the arcball, it becomes a vertical
ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these
points rotates the view around the horizontal or X axis
through the middle of the arcball.

3DOrbit Shortcut Menu

When the 3DORBIT command is active, you can change the view using one
or more of the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access the 3D Orbit
shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.

Pan
Moves objects in the view horizontally and vertically. See 3DPAN.

Zoom
Simulates the effect of a cameras zoom lens. See 3DZOOM.

Orbit
Returns the view to Orbit mode after use of the other menu commands, such
as Zoom, Pan, or Continuous Orbit.

More
Accesses one of the following view options:
Adjust Distance Simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the
object or farther away. See 3DDISTANCE.

30 | 3DORBIT
Swivel Camera Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates
the effect of turning the camera. See 3DSWIVEL.
Continuous Orbit Changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous
lines encircling it and enables you to set the objects into
continuous motion. See 3DCORBIT.
Zoom Window Changes the cursor to a window icon so you can select
a specific area that you want the zoom to focus on.
When the cursor changes, click and drag the cursor to
draw a window around the area you want to select.
When you release the pick button, the drawing is
zoomed in and focused on the area you selected.
Zoom Extents Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects.
Orbit Maintains Z Keeps the Z axis in its current orientation when
dragging horizontally within the arcball circle, or when
dragging from the small circles on the left or right side
of the arcball. When using 3D Orbit, use this option to
keep the object from tumbling end-over-end. This
option is useful for changing the view of such drawings
as buildings, cars, and maps. This setting is saved with
the user profile.
Orbit Uses Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing
AutoTarget rather than on the center of the viewport. This feature
is turned on by default.
Adjust Clipping Opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window. See 3DCLIP.
Planes
Front Clipping Turns the front clipping plane on or off. A check mark
On in front of this option indicates that the front clipping
plane is on and you can see the results of moving the
line that adjusts the front clipping plane. See 3DCLIP.
Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. A check mark
in front of this option indicates that the back clipping
plane is on and you can see the results of moving the
line that adjusts the back clipping plane. See 3DCLIP.

3DORBIT | 31
Projection
Provides the projection options. A check mark displayed in front of an option
indicates that the option is selected.
Parallel Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing
never converge at a single point. The shapes in your
drawing always remain the same and do not appear
distorted when they are closer.
Perspective Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines
converge at one point. Objects appear to recede into the
distance, and parts of the objects appear larger and
closer to you. The shapes are somewhat distorted when
the object is very close. This view correlates more
closely to what your eye sees.

Shading Modes
Provides methods for shading objects.
Wireframe Displays the objects in the 3D Orbit view using lines
and curves to represent boundaries.
Hidden Displays the objects in the 3D Orbit view as wireframes
with the lines representing the back faces hidden.
Flat Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view between the
polygon faces. This gives the objects a faceted, less
smooth appearance.
Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view and smooths
the edges between polygon faces. This gives the objects
a smoother, more realistic appearance.
Flat Shaded, Combines the Flat Shaded and Wireframe options. The
Edges On objects are flat shaded with the wireframe showing.
Gouraud Shaded, Combines the Gouraud Shaded and Wireframe options.
Edges On The objects are Gouraud Shaded with the wireframe
showing.

Visual Aids
Provides aids to visualizing the objects.
Compass Draws a 3D sphere within the arcball composed of three
lines representing the X, Y, and Z axes.

32 | 3DORBIT
Grid Displays a two-dimensional array of lines similar to
graph paper. This grid is oriented along the X and Y
axes.
Before starting 3DORBIT, you can use the GRID
command to set system variables that control the grid
display. The number of major grid lines corresponds to
the value you set using the Grid Spacing option of the
GRID command, which is stored in the GRIDUNIT
system variable. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical
lines are drawn between the major lines.
UCS Icon Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Each axis is labeled X,
Y, or Z. The X axis is red, the Y axis is green, and the Z
axis is blue.

Reset View
Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started
3DORBIT.

Preset Views
Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric.
Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model.

3DORBITCTR
Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view
3DORBITCTR starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you spec-
ify with your pointing device.
If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR ignores the spec-
ified point and uses the default center of rotation.
3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget feature of the 3DORBIT command.

Command line: 3dorbitctr

3DORBITCTR | 33
3DPAN
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically

3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Pan.
Command line: 3dpan

3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. When you click and drag the
cursor, the view moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view
vertically, horizontally, or diagonally.
You can view your entire drawing, or select one or more objects before enter-
ing 3DPAN. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade video performance.

3DPOLY
Creates a polyline of line segments in 3D space

new point Draw menu: 3D Polyline

previous Command line: 3dpoly

point
Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1)
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option

Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the
before Undo after Undo specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you
press ENTER to end the command.
Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing
from the previous point.
closing
segment Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first
point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D
polyline must contain at least two lines.
3DSIN
Imports a 3D Studio (3DS) file
3DSIN reads 3D Studio geometry and rendering data (3DS files), including
meshes, materials, mapping, lights, and cameras. 3DSIN cannot import 3D
Studio procedural materials or smoothing groups.

34 | 3DPAN
Imported objects are assigned an AutoCAD color as close as possible to the
objects 3D Studio color.
3D Studio lights are converted to the nearest AutoCAD equivalent. Ambient
light loses its color. Omni lights become point lights. Spotlights become
AutoCAD spotlights. 3D Studio cameras become AutoCAD named views.
If the name of any 3D Studio object conflicts with a name already in the
AutoCAD drawing, the 3D Studio name is assigned a sequence number to
resolve the conflict. The name might be truncated to resolve the conflict.
Insert menu: 3D Studio
Command line: 3dsin

AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio File Import dialog box (a standard file selec-
tion dialog box). After you choose a file to import, AutoCAD displays the 3D
Studio File Import Options dialog box.

3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box

Lists available and selected 3D objects, saves 3D objects to layers, and han-
dles objects that use multiple materials.

3DSIN | 35
Available Objects
Displays the names of all objects in the 3D Studio file. You can select up to
70 objects.
Object Name and Displays the type and assigned name of each object.
Type
Add All Adds all of the objects in the Available Objects list to
the Selected Objects list.
Add Adds the objects currently selected in the Available
Objects list to the Selected Objects list.

Selected Objects
Displays the selected 3D Studio objects to import.
Object Name Displays the type and assigned name of each object.
and Type
Remove Removes objects selected in the Selected Objects list
and returns them to the Available Objects list.
Remove All Removes all objects from the Selected Objects list and
returns them to the Available Objects list.

Save to Layers
Controls how 3D Studio objects are assigned to layers in the AutoCAD
drawing.
By Object Creates a layer for each object in the 3D Studio file and
places the object on that layer. The name of the layer is
the same as the name of the object.
By Material Creates a layer for each material in the 3D Studio file
and places objects to which that material is attached on
that layer. The name of the layer is the same as the
name of the material.
By Object Color Creates a layer for each object color in the 3D Studio
file. AutoCAD places each 3D Studio object on the layer
corresponding to its color. The name of the layer is
COLORnn, where nn is the 3D Studio color index. If the
3D Studio file contains objects with no color, AutoCAD
places these objects on a layer called COLORNONE.
Single Layer Creates a single layer called AVLAYER and places all
objects on that layer.

36 | 3DSIN
Multiple Material Objects
3D Studio assigns materials by face, element, or object. AutoCAD assigns
materials by object only. When AutoCAD encounters a 3D Studio object
assigned multiple materials, AutoCAD must find a way to handle the
assignment.
Always Prompt
Displays the Material Assignment Alert dialog box for each object with mul-
tiple materials. The dialog box displays the name of the object. The options
you select determine how 3DSIN handles the assignment. The options are as
follows:
Split Object by Splits the object into multiple objects, one for each
Materials material. This preserves the material assignments that
were made in the 3D Studio file. It also increases the
complexity of the drawing geometry.
Assign First Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-
Material material object to the entire object. See the 3D Studio
documentation for an explanation of how the first-
assigned material is determined.
Select a Material Assigns one of the materials that was assigned to the
object in the 3D Studio file to the entire object. Select
the material from the list below this option, or choose
NONE to revert to the AutoCAD default material.

Split by Material
Splits all objects with multiple materials into multiple objects, one for each
material. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D
Studio file. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry.
Assign First Material
Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-material object to the
entire object. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how
the first-assigned material is determined.
Dont Assign a Material
Assigns no material to each multiple-material object. This option loses all
material assignment information but preserves the 3D Studio geometry. The
object reverts to the AutoCAD default material.

3DSIN | 37
3DSOUT
Exports to a 3D Studio (3DS) file
You can use AutoCAD geometry and rendering data with 3D Studio by con-
verting a drawing to the 3DS file format with 3DSOUT.
3DSOUT exports only those AutoCAD objects with surface characteristics. A
line or an arc must have a nonzero thickness. A trace or a polyline must have
a nonzero width or thickness. Circles, polygon meshes, and polyface meshes
are always exported. Solids and 3D faces must have at least three unique ver-
tices. Geometry is tessellated on export, as necessary. AME (Advanced
Modeling Extension ) and AutoSurf objects must be converted to meshes
before you use 3DSOUT.
3DSOUT converts AutoCAD named views to 3D Studio cameras and Photo
Real or Photo Raytrace lights to the nearest 3D Studio equivalent. Point lights
become omni lights. Spotlights and distant lights become 3D Studio
spotlights.
If the name of any AutoCAD object conflicts with a name already in the 3D
Studio drawing, the AutoCAD name is assigned a sequence number to resolve
the conflict. The name may have to be truncated to accommodate the
sequence number.
Command line: 3dsout

Select objects: Use an object selection method

AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio Output File dialog box (a standard file selec-
tion dialog box). After you enter a name for the new file, AutoCAD displays
the 3D Studio File Export Options dialog box.

3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box

Defines the source of 3D objects, converts blocks into 3D objects, and per-
forms smoothing and welding during the export process.

Note 3DSOUT cannot convert a selection set containing more than 65,535
vertices. If necessary, simplify the geometry using the Auto-Welding option (see
Welding on page 40).

38
Derive 3D Studio Objects From
Specifies how to group AutoCAD objects into 3D Studio objects.
Layer Creates an object from the objects on each AutoCAD
drawing layer. The name of the new object is based on the
AutoCAD layer name.
AutoCAD Creates an object from the objects that share an ACI
Color Index number. The name of the new object is based on the color.
(ACI)
AutoCAD Creates an object from all AutoCAD objects of the same
Object Type type. The name of the object is based on the AutoCAD
object type.

AutoCAD Blocks
Splits a block into its components and converts them to 3D Studio objects
according to the mode set under Derive 3D Studio Objects From.
Override (Each Overrides the current Derive setting and converts each
Block Is One block into a single 3D Studio object.
Object)

Smoothing
Assigns 3D Studio smoothing groups based on the controls set in this area.
Auto- Creates 3D Studio smoothing groups. If this option is
Smoothing cleared, AutoCAD assigns no smoothing to new 3D Studio
objects.

3DSOUT | 39
Degrees Specifies the threshold angle for smoothing. If the angle
between two face normals is greater than this value,
AutoCAD does not smooth the face normals.

Welding
Simplifies the geometry and improves rendering time by welding congruent
or nearby vertices into a single vertex.
Auto-Welding Welds vertices. If this option is cleared, vertices remain
unchanged upon export.
Threshold Specifies a distance in WCS coordinates of the AutoCAD
drawing. If the distance between two vertices is less than
or equal to this value, AutoCAD welds the vertices into a
single vertex. The default value is 0.001. You can enter any
positive value up to eight characters in length. The
decimal point can be in any location.

3DSWIVEL
Starts the interactive 3D view and simulates the effect of turning the camera

3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Swivel Camera.
Command line: 3dswivel

3DSWIVEL changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of
turning a camera on a tripod. This command changes the target of the view.
For example, if you were pointing a camera at an object and then turned the
camera to the right, the object would move to the left in your viewing area.
Or, if you pointed the camera up, the objects would move down in your
viewing area. Swivel simulates this motion by using the cursor as the
cameras viewfinder.

40 | 3DSWIVEL
3DZOOM
Starts the interactive 3D view so you can zoom in and out on the view

3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Zoom.
Command line: 3dzoom

3DZOOM simulates the effect of a cameras zoom lens. It makes objects appear
closer and farther away but does not change the position of the camera.
Zooming in magnifies the image. This also exaggerates the perspective with
which you view the objects if youre using perspective projection. It may
slightly distort the shape of some objects.
Zoom changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus ()
signs. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen
zooms in on the image, making the objects appear larger or closer. Clicking
and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen zooms out
and makes the object appear smaller or farther away.

3DZOOM | 41
42
ABOUT
Displays information about AutoCAD
Help menu: About
Command line: about (or 'about for transparent use)

AutoCAD displays copyright information and product information.

Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial
number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agree-
ment. You can save the product information as a text file.

ACISIN
Imports an ACIS file
ACIS (a solid modeler produced by Spatial Technology, Inc.) provides a solid
modeling file format that AutoCAD can use. AutoCAD reads the model
stored in the ACIS file format and creates a body object, solid, or region in
the AutoCAD drawing.
Insert menu: ACIS File
Command line: acisin

AutoCAD displays the Select ACIS File dialog box. Select the file to import
in the File Name list. AutoCAD imports the SAT (ASCII) ACIS file into your
AutoCAD drawing.

ACISOUT
Exports AutoCAD solid objects to an ACIS file
ACIS provides a solid modeling file format that AutoCAD can use to store
solid objects. An AutoCAD solid, a body, or a region can be stored as an SAT
(ASCII) file.

Note When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to
set the ACISOUTVER system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. For
example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14, set ACISOUTVER to 16.

Command line: acisout

Select objects: Use an object selection method

ABOUT | 43
AutoCAD ignores selected objects that are not solids or regions and displays
the Create ACIS File dialog box. Enter the name of the file you want to create.
AutoCAD exports the selected objects to an ASCII file.

ADCCLOSE
Closes DesignCenter
Command line: adcclose

Closes the DesignCenter window.

ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns

Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: DesignCenter
Command line: adcenter

DesignCenter is displayed.

DesignCenter Window
Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes
blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs).
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and
access options.
When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab, the following two
panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content:

Content area (right pane)

Tree view (left pane)

44 | ADCCLOSE
content area

tree view

content preview

content description

Content Area (DesignCenter)

Displays the content of the container currently selected in the tree view. A
container is a network, computer, disk, folder, file, or web address (URL) con-
taining information accessible by DesignCenter. Depending on the container
selected in tree view, the content area typically displays the following:

Folders containing drawings or other files

Drawings
Named objects contained in drawings. Named objects include blocks,
xrefs, layouts, layers, dimension styles, and text styles
Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns
Web-based content
Custom content developed by third-party applications

From the content area, you can insert blocks or hatch patterns or attach
external references in a drawing by dragging, by double-clicking, or by right-
clicking and choosing Insert Block, Attach Xref, or Copy. You can drag or
right-click to add other content to drawings, such as layers, dimension styles,
and layouts. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool
palettes.

Note You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the tree view or the content area.

ADCENTER | 45
Load
Displays the Load dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Use Load
to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web, and then to
select content to load in the content area.
Back
Returns to the most recent location in the history list.
Forward
Returns to the next later location in the history list.
Up
Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container.
Stop (DC Online tab)
Stops the current transfer.
Reload (DC Online tab)
Reloads the current page.
Search
Displays the Search dialog box (see page 48), where you can specify search
criteria to locate drawings, blocks, and nongraphical objects within
drawings.
Search also displays custom content saved on your desktop.
Favorites
Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. The Favorites
folder contains shortcuts to items you access often. You can add items to
Favorites either by right-clicking the content area or right-clicking an item in
the tree view, and then clicking Add to Favorites. To delete an item from
Favorites, use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then
use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu.

Note AutoCAD automatically adds the DesignCenter folder to Favorites. This

folder contains drawings with discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in
drawings.

Home
Returns DesignCenter to your home folder. On installation, the home folder
is set to ...\Sample\DesignCenter. Change the home folder using the shortcut
menu in the tree view.
Tree View Toggle
Displays and hides the tree view. Hide the tree view if you need more space
in your drawing area. When the tree view is hidden, you can use the content
area to navigate to containers and to load content.

46 | ADCENTER
The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you're using the History
list in the tree view.
Preview
Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below the content
area. If there is no preview image saved with the selected item, the Preview
area is empty.
Description
Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a pane below the
content area. If a preview image is also displayed, the description is displayed
below it. If there is no description saved with the selected item, the Descrip-
tion area is empty.
Views
Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the con-
tent area. You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button
repeatedly to cycle through the display formats. The default view varies for
the type of content currently loaded in the content area.
Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon
format.
Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon
format.
List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list.
Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded
content. You can sort the items by name, size, type, and
other properties, depending on the type of content that
is loaded in the content area.
Refresh (Shortcut Menu Only)
Refreshes the display in the content area to reflect any changes you have
made. Right-click the content area background and click Refresh on the
shortcut menu.

Tree View (DesignCenter)

Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network
drives, a list of open drawings, custom content, and a history of the last loca-
tions you accessed. Select an item in the tree view to display its contents in
the content area.

ADCENTER | 47
Note In the sample\designcenter folder are drawings containing discipline-
specific blocks that you can insert in drawings. These drawings are called symbol
library drawings.

Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view
options.
Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your
computer and network drives, including My Computer
and Network Neighborhood.
You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file
name, directory location, or network path in the
DesignCenter tree view. See ADCNAVIGATE.
Open Drawings Displays all drawings currently open in the AutoCAD
session, including drawings that are minimized.
History Displays a list of the files that you opened most recently
in DesignCenter. With the history displayed, right-click
a file to display information about the file or to delete
the file from the History list.
DC Online Accesses the DesignCenter Online web page. When you
establish a web connection, two panes are viewed on
the Welcome page. The left side displays folders
containing symbol libraries, manufacturer sites, and
additional content libraries. When a symbol is selected,
it is displayed on the right side and can be downloaded
into your drawing.

Search Dialog Box

Searches for content such as drawings, hatch patterns, and blocks.

48 | ADCENTER
Look For Specifies the type of content to search for. The content
type you specify determines which tabs are displayed in
the Search dialog box and the search fields it provides.
The Date Modified and Advanced tabs are displayed
only when the Drawings option is selected in Look For.
In Specifies a search path name. To enter multiple paths,
separate them with semicolons. Use Browse to select a
path from a tree view list.
Browse Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box,
in which you can specify the drives and folders to
search.
Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path.
Search Now Starts the search based on criteria you specify.
Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in
the Search Results panel.
New Search Clears the Search For the Word(s) box and places the
cursor in the box.
Search Results Displays the results of the search in resizable columns.
Panel Double-click an item to load it into DesignCenter.

ADCENTER | 49
Search Tabs (Search Dialog Box)
Displays search fields relevant to the type of content specified in the Look For
list. The name of the tab reflects the content type. You can use wild-card
characters to extend or limit your search patterns.
Search for the Specifies the text string to look for in the field you
Word(s) specify. Use the following wild-card characters to
broaden your search:
* (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used
anywhere in the search string.
? (Question mark): Matches any single character; for
example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on.

This option is available on the Drawings tab and, when

available, the Custom Content tab.
In the Field(s) Specifies the property fields to search. For drawings, all
fields other than File Name are derived from the
information entered in the Drawing Properties dialog
box (DWGPROPS).
This option is available on the Drawings tab and the
Custom Content tab.
Note Custom content developed by third-party
applications may not provide fields for searches using the
Search dialog box.
Search for the Specifies the name of the drawing, block, layer, xref, or
Name other content type that you want to find.
This option is available on all tabs except Drawings and
Custom Content.

Date Modified Tab (Search Dialog Box)

Finds content that was created or modified during a certain time period.
All Files
Finds all the files that match the criteria you specify on other tabs, regardless
of creation date or date modified. This is the default setting.

50 | ADCENTER
Find All Files Created or Modified
Finds files created or modified during a specific time period. The search
locates files that match the criteria you specify on this and other tabs.
Between Searches for files created or modified between the dates
you specify.
During the Searches for files created or modified within the
Previous number of months you specify.
Month(s)
During the Searches for files created or modified within the
Previous Day(s) number of days you specify.

Advanced Tab (Search Dialog Box)

Finds content within drawings; this tab is available only when you select
Drawings in Look For.
Containing Specifies the type of text in a drawing that you want to
search for. For example, you can search for text
contained within a block attribute, such as a
manufacturer's catalog number.
Containing Text Specifies the text you want to search for.
Size Is Specifies a minimum or maximum file size. Select At
Least or At Most, and enter a value in KB.

ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path
Command line: adcnavigate

Enter pathname <current>:

The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the
DesignCenter Folders tab.
At the prompt, you can enter a path in any of the following formats:

Folder path: c:\project files\electrical

Folder path and a file name: c:\project files\electrical\circuit2.dwg
UNC (universal naming convention) network path:
\\server1\campus_project

ADCNAVIGATE | 51
DesignCenter is displayed, with the Folder tab active, and the path or draw-
ing file that you specified is loaded.
ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target
domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter.

ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
Use ALIGN to move, rotate, or scale objects into alignment with other objects.
Add source points to the objects you want to align, and add destination points
to the objects to which you want the source objects to align. You can add up
to three pairs of source and destination points to align an object.
Modify menu: 3D Operation Align
Command line: align

Select objects: Select the objects you want to align and press ENTER

ALIGN Using One Specify first source point: Specify a point (1)
Pair of Points Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2)
Specify second source point: Press ENTER

When you select only one source point and destination

point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from
the source point (1) to the destination point (2).

1
2

two points specified result

ALIGN Using Two Specify first source point: Specify a point (1)
Pairs of Points Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2)
Specify second source point: Specify a point (3)
Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4)
Specify third source point: Press ENTER
Scale objects based on alignment points [Yes/No] <No>:
Enter y or press ENTER

52 | ALIGN
1
3
2

objects selected four points specified result

When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate,
and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with
other objects.
The first set of source and destination points defines the
base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of
points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4).
After you enter the second set of points, AutoCAD
prompts you to scale the object. AutoCAD uses the
distance between the first and second destination
points (2, 4) as the reference length to which the object
is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning
objects using two point pairs.
Note If you use two source and destination points to
perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working
planes, you get unpredictable results.
ALIGN Using Specify first source point: Specify a point (1)
Three Pairs of Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2)
Points Specify second source point: Specify a point (3)
Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4)
Specify third source point: Specify a point (5)
Specify third destination point: Specify a point (6)

ALIGN | 53
3
5 6

1
2
4

objects selected six points specified result

When you select three point pairs, you can move and
rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other
objects.
The selected objects move from the source point (1) to
the destination point (2).
The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns
with the destination object (2 and 4).
The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so
that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).

AMECONVERT
Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects
Command line: ameconvert

Select objects: Use an object selection method

The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release
2 or 2.1 regions or solids. AutoCAD ignores all other objects.
Because of increased accuracy in the new AutoCAD solid modeler, AME
models may look slightly different after conversion. This difference is notice-
able where the previous version of the AutoCAD solid modeler identified the
surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same
plane. The new AutoCAD solid modelers finer tolerance may interpret these
surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with
aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes.
Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer
approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being
slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid
material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and
that of the new modeler.

54 | AMECONVERT
Likewise, updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly
below the surface, creating a hole through the solid, leaving the original
shape unaltered. Also, drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original
surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or
chamfer.

APERTURE
Controls the size of the object snap target box
Command line: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)

Object snap target height (150 pixels) <current>: Enter a value (150) or press
ENTER

Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target
box. The APBOX system variable controls whether the object snap target box
target
is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size
box
of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You
can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab.
APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at
target
box the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the
PICKBOX system variable.

APPLOAD
Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup
If you need to use applications that are not automatically loaded when you
start AutoCAD, you can use APPLOAD to load applications, unload applica-
tions, store a history list of applications youve loaded, and create a start-up
list of applications to be loaded each time you start AutoCAD.
You can load applications of the following file types:

AutoLISP (.lsp)
ObjectARX (.arx)
VBA (.dvb)
ObjectDBX (.dbx)
Fast Load AutoLISP (.fas)
Visual LISP executables (.vlx)

APERTURE | 55
Some ObjectARX applications require user interaction upon loading the
application and may not load properly with APPLOAD. Use the ARX command
to load these applications.
Tools menu: Load Application
Command line: appload

AutoCAD displays the Load/Unload Applications dialog box.

Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box

Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at
startup.

The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file
selection dialog box (see page 609). Following are descriptions of the addi-
tional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box:
Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently
selected either in the files list or on the History List tab.
Load is unavailable until you select a file that you can
load. AutoCAD loads ObjectARX, VBA, and DBX
applications immediately, but LSP, VLX, and FAS

56 | APPLOAD
applications are queued and then loaded when you
close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box.
If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads
the application when applicable. You cannot reload
ObjectARX applications. In this case, you must first
unload the ObjectARX application and then load it
again. The Load option is also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking a file on the History List tab.
Loaded Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently
Applications loaded applications. LISP routines are displayed in this
list only if you loaded them in the Load/Unload
Applications dialog box. You can drag files into this list
from the files list or from any application with dragging
capabilities, such as Microsoft Windows Explorer.
If you use the AutoCAD web browser to load an
application, the web browser downloads the
application to a temporary location on your machine.
This is the location from which AutoCAD loads the
application, as displayed in this list.
You can also unload certain applications from this list.
See the Unload option for details. Files that you cannot
unload are not available for selection.
History List Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of
applications that you previously loaded with Add To
History selected. You can drag files into this list from
the files list, or from any application with dragging
capabilities, such as Windows Explorer. If Add To
History is not selected when you drag files into this list,
the dragged files are loaded but not added to the history
list.
You can load and remove applications from this list, but
to unload applications, you must use the Loaded
Applications tab. See the Load, Unload, and Remove
options.
Add to History Adds any applications that you load to the history list.
You may prefer to clear this option when loading
applications with the AutoCAD web browser, because
these applications are unavailable once the cache for
the applications temporary location is emptied.

APPLOAD | 57
Unload Unloads the selected applications. Unload is available
only when you select a file that you can unload on the
Loaded Applications tab. LISP applications cannot be
unloaded, nor can ObjectARX applications that are not
registered for unloading.
Remove Removes the selected applications from the history list.
Remove is available only when you select a file on the
History List tab. Note that Remove does not unload the
selected application. The Remove option is also
available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an
application on the History List tab.
Startup Suite Contains a list of applications that are loaded each time
you start AutoCAD. You can drag application files from
the files list, or from any application with dragging
capabilities such as Windows Explorer, into the Startup
Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite. Click the
Start-up Suite icon or Contents to display the Startup
Suite dialog box. You can also add files to the Startup
Suite by right-clicking an application on the History
List tab and choosing Add to Startup Suite from the
shortcut menu.
You cannot add applications that you load with the
AutoCAD web browser to the Startup Suite.
Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading
and unloading operations.

Startup Suite Dialog Box

Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite. These are the
applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD.

58 | APPLOAD
List of Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the
Applications application files to load at startup.
Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You
can use this dialog box to select files to add to the
startup suite.
Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite.

ARC
Creates an arc

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Arc
Command line: arc

Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: Specify a point, enter ce, or press ENTER to
start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline

Start Point
Specifies the starting point of the arc.

Note If you press ENTER without specifying a point, AutoCAD uses the end-
point of the last drawn line or arc and immediately prompts you to specify the
endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc,
or polyline.

Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]:

ARC | 59
Second Point
2 Draws an arc using three specified points on the arcs circumference. The first
3 point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second
1 point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)

You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:

End Point Using the center point (2), draws an arc

counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an
endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the
center point through the third point (3).
The arc does not necessarily pass through this third
point, as shown in the illustration.
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1)
using a center point (2) with a specified included angle.
If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle: Specify an angle

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the

distance of a straight line between the start point and
endpoint.
If the chord length is positive, AutoCAD draws the
minor arc counterclockwise from the start point. If the
chord length is negative, AutoCAD draws the major arc
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord: Specify a length

60 | ARC
included
angle

3 1 2
1 2 1
2
length of
chord

End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:

Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1)
to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn
from the center point (3) through the second point
specified (2).
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1)
to an endpoint (2), with a specified included angle. If
the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify
an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise

Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates

any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise,
beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an
endpoint (2). AutoCAD determines the direction from
the start point.
Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:

Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start

point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative,
AutoCAD draws the major arc.
Specify radius of arc:

imaginary
ray
2 2
angle 2
3 1 2
direction 1 1
center point 1
radius

ARC | 61
Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify start point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:

End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2)
to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn
from the center point (1) through a specified point (3).
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2)
using a center point (1) with a specified included angle.
If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle:

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the

included angle

3 2 2
1 2 1
1
length
of chord

Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline

Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press
ENTER at the first prompt.

1 Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1)

62 | ARC
ARCHIVE
Packages the current sheet set files to be archived
Command line: archive

The Archive a Sheet Set dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -archive at the Command prompt, ARCHIVE displays prompts on
the command line.

Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box

Packages the files associated with the current sheet set so that they can be
archived.
All files to be included in the archive package are indicated by a check mark
next to the file name. To remove a file from the archive package, select the
check box. Right-click in the file display area to display a shortcut menu,
from which you can clear all check marks or apply check marks to all files.

Note Make sure that the files to be archived are not currently open in any
application.

Sheets Tab
Lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and
according to subset organization. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set
Manager. Archive can be selected from the shortcut menu displayed when
the top-level sheet set node is right-clicked, or archive can be entered on the
command line.

ARCHIVE | 63
Files Tree Tab
Lists the files to be included in the archive package in a hierarchical tree for-
mat. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related
xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive pack-
age or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not
included in the archive package.

64 | ARCHIVE
Files Table Tab
Displays the files to be included in the archive package in a table format. By
default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs,
plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package or
remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not
included in the archive package.

Add File
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an addi-
tional file to include in the archive package. This button is available on both
the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab.
Enter Notes to Be Included with This Archive Package
Provides a space where you can enter notes related to the archive package.
The notes are included in the archive report. You can specify a template of
default notes to be included with all your archive packages by creating an
ASCII text file called archive.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified
by the Support File Search Path option on the Files tab in the Options dialog
box.
Modify Archive Setup
Displays the Modify Archive Setup dialog box, in which you can specify
options for the archive package.

ARCHIVE | 65
View Report
Displays report information that is included with the archive package.
Includes any archive notes that you entered. If you have created a text file of
default notes, the notes are also included in the report.
Save As Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify
a location in which to save a report file. Note that a
report file is automatically included with all archive
packages that you generate; by choosing Save As, you
can save an additional copy of a report file for reference
purposes.

Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box

Archive Package Type

Specifies the type of archive package created.
Folder Creates an archive package of uncompressed files in a
new or existing folder.

66 | ARCHIVE
Self-Extracting Creates an archive package of files as a compressed, self-
Executable extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting
EXE file decompresses the archive package and restores
the files.
Zip Creates an archive package of files as a compressed ZIP
file. To restore the files, you need a decompression
utility such as the shareware application PKZIP or
WinZip.
File Format
Specifies the file format to which all drawings included in the archive pack-
age will be converted. You can select an AutoCAD drawing file format from
the drop-down list.
Archive File Folder
Specifies the location in which the archive package is created. Lists the last
nine locations in which archive packages were created. To specify a new loca-
tion, click Browse and navigate to the location you want.
If this field is left blank, the archive file is created in the folder containing the
sheet set data (DST) file.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can navigate to a
location where you create the archive package.
Archive File Name
Specifies the method for naming the archive package. Displays the default
file name for the archive package. This option is not available if the archive
package type is set to Folder.
Prompt for a File Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you
Name can enter the name of the archive package.
Increment File Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already
Name if exists, a number is added to the end. This number is
Necessary incremented each time a new archive package is saved.
Overwrite if Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already
Necessary exists, the existing file is automatically overwritten.

ARCHIVE | 67
Archive Options
Use Organized Duplicates the folder structure for the files being
Folder Structure transmitted. The root folder is the top-level folder
within a hierarchical folder tree. The following
considerations apply:

Relative paths remain unchanged. Relative paths

outside the source root folder retain up to one level
of the folder path above them, and are placed in the
root folder.
Absolute paths within the root folder tree are
converted to relative paths. Absolute paths retain up
to one level of the folder path above them, and are
placed in the root folder.
Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are
converted to No Path and are moved to the root
folder or to a folder within the root folder tree.
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary.
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files
for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST)
file, however, is placed in the root folder.

This option is not available if youre saving an archive

package to an Internet location.
Source Root Defines the source root folder for relative paths of
Folder drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs. This option
determines the source root folder for the Use Organized
Folder Structure option.
The source root folder also contains the sheet set data
(DST) file when a sheet set is archived.
Browse Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which
you can navigate to specify a source root folder.
Place All Files in All files are installed to a single, specified target folder
One Folder when the archive package is created.
Keep Files and Preserves the folder structure of all files in the archive
Folders As Is package. This option is not available if youre saving an
archive package to an Internet location.
Include Fonts Includes any associated font files (TXT and SHX) with
the archive package.

68 | ARCHIVE
Set Default Changes the printer/plotter setting in the archive
Plotter to None package to None.
Prompt for Opens the Archive - Set Password dialog box (see page
Password 69), where you can specify a password for your archive
package.
Include Sheet Set Includes the sheet set data (DST) file, label block
Data and Files drawing files, callout block drawing files, and drawing
template (DWT) files with the archive package.

Archive - Set Password Dialog Box

Password for Compressed Archive Package

Provides a space for an optional password for the archive package. When
others attempt to open the archive package, they must provide this password
to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder archive
packages.
Password Confirmation
Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password
field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.

ARCHIVE Command Line

If you enter -archive at the Command prompt, ARCHIVE displays prompts on
the command line.
Sheet Set name or [?] <current>: Enter a predefined sheet set name, enter ? to
display a list of sheet sets, or press ENTER

The sheet set name specifies a sheet set to use for the archive package. This
option is available only when a sheet set is open.

ARCHIVE | 69
AREA
Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas
Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system
variables.

Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry Area
Command line: area

Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter

an option

First Corner Point

Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. All points
1 5 must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate
3 system (UCS).
2 4
defining an area Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total: Specify a point (2)
and perimeter
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to com-
plete the definition of the perimeter.
If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were
area defined
drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perime-
ter, AutoCAD adds in that line length.

Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the
area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids.

Note 2D solids (created with the SOLID command) do not have an area
reported.

Select objects:

70 | AREA
If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were
drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perime-
ter, however, AutoCAD ignores that line.

open polyline area defined

selected

The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or
length) calculations.

Add
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you con-
tinue to define areas. The Add option calculates the individual areas and
perimeters of defined areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined
areas and objects. You can use the Subtract option to subtract specified areas
from the total area.
wide polyline
Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter an
option
Calculates the area and perimeter you define by
First Corner Point
selecting points. All points must lie in a plane parallel
to the XY plane of the current UCS.
2
1 Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (ADD
3
mode): Specify a point (2)
defined area to
be added Specify points to define a polygon (3). Press ENTER.
AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter and returns
the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points
or objects since Add mode was turned on.
If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates
the area as if a line were drawn from the last point
new area
entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter,
AutoCAD adds that line length.

AREA | 71
Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object.
(ADD mode) Select objects:

AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter and returns

the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points
or objects since Add mode was turned on.
If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the
area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered
to the first. When calculating the perimeter, however,
AutoCAD ignores that line.
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area
and perimeter calculations.
selected area to
Subtract Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of
be subtracted
the total area as you subtract specified areas.

Subtract
remaining area
Similar to the Add option, but subtracts areas and perimeters.
ARRAY
Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern
Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select mul-
tiple objects from which to construct the array, AutoCAD counts the objects
as one item to be copied and arrayed.

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Array
Command line: array

The Array dialog box is displayed. You can create rectangular or polar arrays
by choosing the appropriate option.
If you enter -array at the Command prompt, ARRAY displays prompts on the
command line (see page 78).

72 | ARRAY
Array Dialog Box
Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern. Use the Rectangular Array
option to create an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.
Use the Polar Array option to create an array by copying the selected objects
around a center point.

Rectangular Array
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.

distance
1 between rows

object selected
distance between columns

Rows
Specifies the number of rows in the array.

ARRAY | 73
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you
specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might
take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array
elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set
by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for
example, enter (setenv MaxArray 200000) at the Command prompt.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns in the array.
If you specify one column, you must specify more than one row. If you spec-
ify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a
while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array ele-
ments that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by
the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for exam-
ple, enter (setenv MaxArray 200000) at the Command prompt.
Offset Distance and Direction
Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the arrays
offset.
Row Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add
rows downward, specify a negative value. To specify
row spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both
Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button.
Column Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. To
add columns to the left, specify a negative value. To
specify column spacing with the pointing device, use
the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset
button.
Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation. This angle is normally 0,
so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to
the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. You can
change the measurement conventions for angles using
UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect
the angle of arrays.
Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
use the pointing device to set the row and column
spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a
rectangle.

74 | ARRAY
Pick Row Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
use the pointing device to specify the distance between
rows. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points and
uses the distance and direction between the points to
specify the value in Row Offset.
Pick Column Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
Offset use the pointing device to specify the distance between
columns. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points
and uses the distance and direction between the points
to specify the value in Column Offset.
Pick Angle of Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
Array specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or
using the pointing device to specify two points. You can
change the measurement conventions for angles using
UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect
the angle of arrays.

Polar Array
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a center point.
1

1
2 2

polar array with polar array angle to

objects rotated fill=180; objects not
rotated

Center Point
Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and
Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the
location.
Pick Center Point
Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing
device to specify the center point in the AutoCAD drawing area.
Method and Values
Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array.

ARRAY | 75
Method Sets the method used to position objects. This setting
controls which of the Method and Value fields are
available for specifying values. For example, if the
method is Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill, the
related fields are available for specifying values; the
Angle Between Items field is not available.
Total Number of Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant
Items array. The default value is 4.
Angle to Fill Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle
between the base points of the first and last elements in
the array. A positive value specifies counterclockwise
rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation.
The default value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted.
Angle Between Sets the included angle between the base points of the
Items arrayed objects and the center of the array. Enter a
positive value. The default direction value is 90.
Note You can choose the Pick buttons and use the
pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and
Angle Between Items.
Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
define the included angle between the base points of
the first and last elements in the array. AutoCAD
prompts you to select a point relative to another point
in the AutoCAD drawing area.
Pick Angle Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
Between Items define the included angle between the base points of
the arrayed objects and the center of the array.
AutoCAD prompts you to select a point relative to
another point in the AutoCAD drawing area.
Rotate Items as Copied
Rotates the items in the array, as shown in the preview area.
More/Less
Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off.
When you choose More, additional options are displayed, and the name of
this button changes to Less.

76 | ARRAY
Object Base Point
Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will
remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects
are arrayed. To construct a polar array, AutoCAD determines the distance
from the arrays center point to a reference (base) point on the last object
selected. The point used depends on the type of object, as shown in the fol-
lowing table.

Base point settings by object

Object type Default base point

Arc, circle, ellipse Center point

Polygon, rectangle First corner

Donut, line, polyline, 3D polyline, ray, Starting point

spline

Block, paragraph text, single-line text Insertion point

Construction lines Midpoint

Region Grip point

Set to Objects Uses the default base point of the object to position the
Default arrayed object. To manually set the base point, clear
this option.
Base Point Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate. Choose Pick
Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and
specify a point. After you specify a point, the Array
dialog box is redisplayed.
Note To avoid unexpected results, set the base point
manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not
want to rotate the objects.

ARRAY | 77
Select Objects
Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before
or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array
dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily
closes. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER . The Array dialog box
is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select
Objects button.
Note If you select multiple objects, the base point of the last selected object is
used to construct the array.

Preview Area
Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the dia-
log box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to
another field after changing a setting.

Preview
Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing.
Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes.

ARRAY Command Line

If you enter -array at the Command prompt, ARRAY displays prompts on the
command line.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

Rectangular
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.

distance
1 between rows

object selected
distance between columns

Enter the number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER

78 | ARRAY
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice
versa.
AutoCAD assumes the selected object, or cornerstone element, to be in the
lower-left corner, and generates the array up and to the right.
The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corre-
sponding lengths of the object to be arrayed.
Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):

To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between
rows. AutoCAD skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the oppo-
site corners of a rectangle.
Specify the distance between columns (|||):

To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between
columns. AutoCAD constructs rectangular arrays along a baseline defined by
the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns
are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option
of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The SNA-
PANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle.

If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD
might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of
array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit
is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000,
for example, enter (setenv MaxArray 200000) at the Command prompt.

Polar
Creates an array defined by specifying a center point or base point about
which AutoCAD replicates the selected objects.
1

1
2 2

polar array with polar array angle to

objects rotated fill=180; objects not
rotated

Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new
base point

ARRAY | 79
Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point.
Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the
selected objects that will remain at a constant distance
from the center point of the array as the objects are
arrayed.
Specify the base point of objects: Specify a point

Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER

If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the
angle to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not pro-
vide the number of items), you must specify both.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation

AutoCAD sees 0 as no response. You can enter 0 for angle to fill only if you
specify the number of items.
If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if
you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press
ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for the angle between items:

Angle between items: Specify an angle

If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or
pressed ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate
the direction of the array:
Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation

AutoCAD determines the distance from the arrays center point to a reference
point on the last object selected. AutoCAD uses the center point of a circle or
arc, the insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point of text, and
one endpoint of a line or trace.
Rotate arrayed objects? <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

In a polar array, AutoCAD uses the reference point of the last object in the
selection set for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window
or crossing selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing
an object from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be
the last object selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and
replicate it.

80 | ARRAY
ARX
Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications
ObjectARX applications can be third-party programs or internal applications
such as Render or the Multiline Text Editor.
Command line: arx

Enter an option [?/Load/Unload/Commands/Options]:

?List Applications
Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications.

Load
Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application.

Unload
Unloads the specified ObjectARX application.
Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload:

Commands
Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are
described in the ObjectARX Developers Guide).

Options
Presents developer-related ObjectARX application options. These options are
explained in greater detail in the ObjectARX Developers Guide.
Enter an option [Group/CLasses/Services]: Enter an option or press ENTER

Group Causes the specified group of commands to be the first

group searched when resolving the names of AutoCAD
commands.
Classes Displays a class hierarchy of C++ classes derived from
objects registered in the system.
Services Lists the names of all registered services.

ARX | 81
ASSIST
Opens Quick Help in the Info Palette, which provides context-sensitive information
Help menu: Quick Help
Command line: assist (or 'assist for transparent use)

Quick Help in the Info palette continually monitors the commands in

progress and displays information that is directly related to the active com-
mand or dialog box. You can can freeze or lock the information displayed at
any time. For example, you might want to lock a procedure displayed in the
Info Palette as you follow the steps in the procedure.
Several options are available through the Info palette shortcut menu.

Info Palette Shortcut Menu

Provides options for working in the Info palette and controlling the Quick
Help information displayed. Right-click inside the Info palette.
Home Displays information that describes how to use Quick
Help and the Info Palette.
Back Moves backward through the history of Help topics
that you have viewed.
Forward Moves forward through the history of Help topics that
you have viewed.
Print Prints the current Help topic.
Lock Freezes the Quick Help information displayed in the
Info palette.

ASSISTCLOSE
Closes Quick Help and the Info palette
Command line: assistclose (or 'assistclose for transparent use)

Closes Quick Help and the Info palette.

82 | ASSIST
ATTACHURL
Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing
Command line: attachurl

Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Enter a or press ENTER

Area
Creates the URLLAYER layer, draws a polyline on that layer, and attaches a
URL to the polyline.
First corner: Click in the drawing to indicate the lower-left corner of the area
Other corner: Click to indicate the upper-right corner of the area
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL

The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to URL-
LAYER. The default color is red. When you move the cursor over the area in
the drawing, the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL
is attached to the area.

Object
Attaches a URL to the selected object.
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL

When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing, the cursor
changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object.

ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute defi-
nition is a template for creating an attribute; it specifies the properties of an
attribute and the prompts displayed when the block is inserted.
When you finish defining the attribute, the attribute tag that you specified
is displayed in the drawing.

ATTACHURL | 83
When you later include the attribute tag in a block definition using the
BLOCK command, AutoCAD erases the attribute tag from the drawing if you
have selected the Delete option in the Block Definition dialog box. When
you insert the block, AutoCAD displays the attribute value at the same loca-
tion in the block, with the same text style and alignment.
Draw menu: Block Define Attributes
Command line: attdef

The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, ATTDEF displays prompts on
the command line (see page 86).

Attribute Definition Dialog Box

Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text
options for an attribute.

Mode
Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the
block in a drawing.
The default values are stored in the AFLAGS system variable. Changing the
AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and
does not affect existing attribute definitions.

84 | ATTDEF
Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or
printed when you insert the block. ATTDISP overrides
Invisible mode.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct
when you insert the block.
Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a
block containing a preset attribute.

Attribute
Sets attribute data. You can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading
blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash
(\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two
backslashes.
Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the
drawing. Enter the attribute tag using any combination
of characters except spaces. AutoCAD changes
lowercase letters to uppercase.
Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert
a block containing this attribute definition. If you do
not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as a
prompt. If you select Constant in the Mode area, the
Prompt option is not available.
Value Specifies the default attribute value.
Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box. You can insert a field as
Button all or part of the value for an attribute.

Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or select
Specify On-screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of
the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.

Text Options
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
Justification Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT
for a description of the justification options.
Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text.
Currently loaded text styles are displayed. To load or
create a text style, see STYLE.

ATTDEF | 85
Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value,
or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing
device. The height is measured from the origin to the
location you specify. If you select a text style that has
fixed height (anything other than 0.0), or if you select
Align in the Justification list, the Height option is not
available.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a
value, or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle
with your pointing device. The rotation angle is
measured from the origin to the location you specify. If
you select Align or Fit in the Justification list, the
Rotation option is not available.

Align Below Previous Attribute Definition

Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. If you
have not previously created an attribute definition, this option is not
available.

ATTDEF Command Line

If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, ATTDEF displays prompts on
the command line.
Current attribute modes: Invisible=current Constant=current Verify=current
Preset=current
Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset] <done>:
Enter attribute tag name: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation
points
Enter attribute prompt: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this
prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter default attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this
prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is
displayed only if you turned on Constant mode)

Attribute Modes
The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode
(either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, or p toggles the modes on or off.
Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings. The
AFLAGS system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to
set the default modes.

86 | ATTDEF
Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you
insert the block. ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is
correct when you insert the block.
Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a
block containing a preset attribute.

Attribute Tag Name

Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in
the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclama-
tion marks (!). AutoCAD changes lowercase letters to uppercase.

Attribute Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing
this attribute definition. If you press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the attribute tag
as the prompt. If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt is not displayed.

Default Attribute Value

Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when
a block is inserted into your drawing. A default value is not required. If you
turn on Constant mode, AutoCAD skips this prompt and displays the
Attribute Value prompt instead.
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
attribute tag instead of requesting a text string.
Current text style: Standard Text height: 0.2000
Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER

For a description of each option, see TEXT.

Attribute Value
Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if
you turn on Constant mode.
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
attribute tag instead of requesting a text string.
Current text style: Standard Text height: 0.2000
Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER

For a description of each option, see TEXT.

ATTDEF | 87
ATTDISP
Globally controls attribute visibility
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. ATTDISP controls
whether the attributes in your drawing are visible.
attribute
View menu: Display Attribute Display
Command line: attdisp (or 'attdisp for transparent use)

Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] <current>:

AutoCAD regenerates the drawing after you change the visibility unless
ATTDISP on
REGENAUTO, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The current visi-
bility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE system variable.
Normal Retains the current visibility of each attribute. Visible
attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes are not
displayed.
On Makes all attributes visible.
ATTDISP off
Off Makes all attributes invisible.
ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. In the Edit
Attributes dialog box, you can edit individual, nonconstant attribute values
associated with a specific block. To change attribute properties such as posi-
tion, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT and edit attribute values and properties
individually or globally, independent of the block.
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values for a specific block:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Single
Command line: attedit

Select block reference: Select a block with attributes

The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed.

88 | ATTDISP
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values and properties inde-
pendent of a block:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Global
Command line: -attedit

AutoCAD displays prompts on the command line (see page 86).

Edit Attributes Dialog Box

Displays the first eight attribute values contained in the block. Edit the
attribute values. If the block contains additional attributes, use Previous and
Next to navigate through the list. You cannot edit attribute values on locked
layers.
To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut
menu to display the Field dialog box.
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use
-ATTEDIT.

ATTEDIT Command Line

If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, ATTEDIT displays prompts on
the command line.
Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to edit
attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally

ATTEDIT | 89
Yes
Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be
visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER , or enter a block name or a
partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to
specific blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER , or enter a tag or a partial tag
with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER , or specify a value or a value
name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute
values

Attribute values are case sensitive.

Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS

AutoCAD marks the first attribute in the selection set with an X. You can
change any properties of the attribute you select.
attributes selected
Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] <N>:
Enter the property to change, or press ENTER for the next attribute

If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does
not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of
the options except Next, AutoCAD prompts for a new value. The X remains
X on first attribute on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute.
Value
Changes or replaces an attribute value.
Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press ENTER

Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value.

X on next attribute
Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press
ENTER
Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER

Either string can be null. AutoCAD interprets the ? and

* characters literally, not as wild-card characters.

90 | ATTEDIT
Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute
value.
Enter new attribute value: Enter a new attribute value or
press ENTER

If you press ENTER , the attribute value is empty (null).

Position
Changes the text insertion point.
Specify new text insertion point: Specify a point or press ENTER
position changed If the attribute is aligned, AutoCAD prompts for both ends of a new text
baseline.
Height
Changes the text height.
Specify new height <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press ENTER

height changed When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the
specified point and the start point of the text.
Angle
Changes the rotation angle.
Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press
ENTER

angle changed If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the
specified point and the start point of the text.
Style
Changes the style setting.
Enter new text style: Enter a style name or press ENTER
style changed
Layer
Changes the layer.
Enter new layer name <current>: Enter a layer name or press ENTER
Color
Changes the color.
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or
number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<BYLAYER>: Enter a color, enter t, enter
co, or press ENTER

ATTEDIT | 91
You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer
or byblock.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255
separated by commas to specify a true color

Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for
the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book
that has been installed, such as PANTONE

If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you

to enter the color name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in
the selected color book, such as PANTONE573

Next
Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more
attributes, ATTEDIT ends.

No
Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible
and invisible attributes.
Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with
another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or
all of the attributes.
Performing global editing of attribute values.
Edit only attributes visible on screen? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to
edit only visible attributes, or enter n to edit all attributes

Yes Edits only visible attributes.

Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER , or spec-
ify a block name or a partial block name with wild-card
characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER , or
specify a tag or a partial tag with wild-card characters (? or
*) to narrow the selection to specific attributes
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER , or
specify a value or a partial value with wild-card characters
(? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute values

92 | ATTEDIT
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty
(null) attributes, which normally are not visible and
cannot be selected, enter a backslash (\).
Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the cur-
rent UCS

Select the attribute you want to change.

Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press
ENTER
Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER

Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters

are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters.
No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes
to attributes are not reflected immediately. AutoCAD
regenerates the drawing at the end of the command
unless REGENAUTO, which controls automatic
regeneration, is off.
Enter block name specification <*>: Enter a full block
name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or
*), or press ENTER to select attributes in all blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Enter a full attribute
tag name or a partial name with wild-card characters (? or
*), or press ENTER to select attributes in all attribute tags
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Enter a full
attribute value or a partial value with wild-card characters
(? or *), or press ENTER to select all attributes

Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty

(null) attributes, which normally are not visible, enter a
backslash (\).
AutoCAD selects the attributes that match the specified
block name, attribute tag, and attribute value.
Enter string to change: Enter the attribute value you want
to change, or press ENTER to append a new value to the
existing value(s)
Enter new string: Enter the new value to replace the speci-
fied value or to append to selected values

Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters

are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters.

ATTEDIT | 93
ATTEXT
Extracts attribute data
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. Use ATTEXT to
extract the data stored in the attribute into a file.
Command line: attext

The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, ATTEXT displays prompts on
the command line (see page 95).

Attribute Extraction Dialog Box

Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which
you want to extract information, and the template and output file names for
the information.

File Format
Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
Comma Generates a file containing one record for each block
Delimited File reference in the drawing that has at least one matching
(CDF) attribute tag in the template file. Commas separate the
fields of each record. Single quotation marks enclose
the character fields.

94 | ATTEXT
Space Delimited Generates a file containing one record for each block
File (SDF) reference in the drawing that has at least one matching
attribute tag in the template file. The fields of each
record have a fixed width; therefore, field separators or
character string delimiters are not appropriate.
DXF Format Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange
Extract File (DXX) File format containing only block reference, attribute,
and end-of-sequence objects. DXF format extraction
requires no template. The file name extension .dxx
distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.

Select Objects
Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with
attributes. When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens, Number Found
shows the number of objects you selected.

Template File
Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file
name in the box, or choose Template File to search for existing template files
using a standard file selection dialog box. The default file extension is .txt. If
you select DXF under File Format, the Template File option is not available.
For information about creating a template file, see Attach Data to Blocks
(Block Attributes) in the Users Guide.

Output File
Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. Enter the
path and file name for the extracted attribute data, or choose Output File to
search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box.
AutoCAD appends the .txt file name extension for CDF or SDF files and the
.dxx file name extension for DXF files.

ATTEXT Command Line

If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, ATTEXT displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf/Objects] <C>:
Enter an option or press ENTER

ATTEXT | 95
CDF: Comma- Generates a file containing one record for each block
Delimited File reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of
each record. Single quotation marks enclose the
character fields.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name
of an existing attribute extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for
the output file. The extract files file name extension is
.txt for CDF or SDF format.
SDF: Space- Generates a file containing one record for each block
Delimited File reference in the drawing. The fields of each record have
a fixed width; therefore, field separators or character
string delimiters are not used.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name
of an existing attribute extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for
the output file. The extract files file name extension is
.txt for CDF or SDF format.
DXF: Drawing Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange
Interchange File File format containing only block reference, attribute,
and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction
requires no template. The file name extension .dxx
distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for
the output file. The extract files file name extension is
.dxx for DXF format.
Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.
Select object: Use an object selection method
Enter attribute extraction type [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf] <C>: Enter
an option or press ENTER

96 | ATTEXT
ATTREDEF
Redefines a block and updates associated attributes
Command line: attredef

Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine:

Select objects for new block:
Select objects:
Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point

New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values.
Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. AutoCAD
deletes any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition.

ATTSYNC
Updates all instances of a specified block with the current attributes defined for the block

Modify II toolbar:
Command line: attsync

Enter an option [?/Name/Select] <Select>:

You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the cur-
rent attributes defined for the blocks. ATTSYNC does not change any values
assigned to attributes in existing blocks.
Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the
name of the block you want to update.
Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block
whose attributes you want to update.
If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error
message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block.

ATTREDEF | 97
AUDIT
Evaluates the integrity of a drawing
AUDIT is a diagnostic tool for examining the current drawing and correcting
errors. For every error detected, AutoCAD provides a description of the error
and recommends corrective action.
File menu: Drawing Utilities Audit
Command line: audit

Fix any errors detected? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the
Previous selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects
that belong to the current paper space or model space.
If you set the AUDITCTL system variable to 1, AUDIT creates an ASCII file
describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same
directory as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt.
If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER to retrieve
the drawing and correct its errors.

98 | AUDIT
BACKGROUND
Sets up the background for your scene

Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Background
Command line: background

The Background dialog box is displayed.

Background Dialog Box

Defines the type, color, effects, and position of the background for your
drawing.

Solid
Selects a one-color background. Use the color controls to specify the color.

Gradient
Specifies a two- or three-color gradient background. Use the color controls
and Horizon, Height, and Rotation to define the gradient.
A three-color gradient is the default. To create a two-color gradient, set
Height to 0 so that Render uses only the Top and Bottom colors.

BACKGROUND | 99
Image
Uses a bitmap file for the background.

Merge
Uses the current image as the background. This option is available only when
Viewport is selected as Destination in the Render dialog box. See RENDER.

Colors
Sets color for a solid or gradient background.
Top/Middle/ Sets colors. For a solid background, set the Top color;
Bottom the others are not available. For a two-color gradient,
set the Top and Bottom colors and set Height to 0. For
a three-color gradient, set the Top, Middle, and Bottom
colors. All three colors are available (by clicking the
corresponding color tiles) when you select Gradient.
None of the colors is available when you select Image.
Only Top is available when you select Solid.
Color Controls Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red, green, blue
(RGB) color system or the hue, lightness, saturation
(HLS) color system. Select RGB to adjust the individual
red, green, and blue components of the selected color.
Select HLS to adjust the individual hue, lightness, and
saturation components of the selected color.
Select Custom Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the color
Color of the background, you can select from the 255
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and
color book colors.
AutoCAD Uses the current AutoCAD background color. Available
Background only with a solid background. This option is on by
default.

Preview
Displays a preview of the current Background settings.

100 | BACKGROUND
Image
Specifies the image file name. You can use the following file types for back-
ground images: BMP, JPG, PCX, TGA, and TIFF.
Name Specifies the name of the image file to use. You can also
use Find File to select a file.
Find File Displays a standard file selection dialog box. Use this
dialog box to select the background image file to use.
Adjust Bitmap Displays the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement
dialog box (see page 102).

Environment
Defines an environment in which you can create additional reflection and
refraction effects on objects with reflective, raytraced materials. With the
Photo Real renderer, the result is a mirrored effect; with the Photo Raytrace
renderer, the result is a raytraced environment.
Name Specifies the image file name to create the raytraced
environment.
Use Background Specifies that the selected objects in the current
drawing reflect the background you specify. If you use
an image file, the objects reflect that image rather than
the background image. You can use the following file
types for environment images: BMP, JPG, PCX, TGA,
and TIFF.
The program maps the environment onto a sphere
surrounding the scene, and the Photo Raytrace renderer
uses it in addition to the geometry to determine
reflections and refraction.
Find File Displays a standard file selection dialog box, in which
you can select the background image file to use.

Horizon
Represents the percentage of unrotated height. Use the box or scroll bar to
set the value. Only available for gradient backgrounds.

Height
Represents a percentage of the second color in a three-color gradient. Use the
box or scroll bar to set the value. The start point of the second color is
determined by the Horizon setting. If the value is 0, the result is a two-color
gradient that uses the Top and Bottom colors.

BACKGROUND | 101
Rotation
Sets an angle at which you can rotate a gradient background. Rotation is not
available with a solid or image background. Use the box or scroll bar to set
the value.

Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog

Box
Controls options that apply to the background image. The Offset, Scale, and
Tiling controls all work the same as they do in the Adjust Material Bitmap
Placement dialog box (see page 825), except that they apply to the back-
ground image instead of a mapped material image. Offset and Scale refer to
X,Y coordinates, not U,V coordinates.

Offset and Scale

Sets the offset and scale. Offset values can range from 1 to 1 on either axis
(X or Y). Adjust a value by using the scroll bars to the right and below the
diagram (enclosed by the outer box labeled Offset), or by entering values in
X and Y Offset.
Scale values can range from 0.1 to 10 on either axis (X or Y). Adjust a value
by using the scroll bars to the left and above the diagram (enclosed by the
inner box labeled Scale), or by entering values in X and Y Scale.

Maintain Aspect Ratio

Locks the X and Y coordinates together. When Maintain Aspect Ratio is
turned on, moving one scroll bar moves the other, and a value you enter in
X or Y Scale changes the other.

Fit to Screen
Fits the image to your screen. If you select Use Image Aspect Ratio, the pro-
gram fits the larger dimension to the screen while maintaining the images
aspect ratio.

Use Image Aspect Ratio

Uses the aspect ratio of the image file. You can still change Offset and Scale,
but the Maintain Aspect Ratio option is locked to the On setting.

Tiling
Controls how the bitmap is tiled with two radio buttons.
Tile Tiles the bitmap (the default).
Crop Does not tile the bitmap.

102 | BACKGROUND
If you select Tile and you change the offset so the bitmap rectangle appears
outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is not centered within the draw-
ing area when you render it. (During tiling, the offset acts as a displacement,
not an absolute position.) However, if you select Crop, the bitmap is rendered
only where you place it, as indicated by the diagram (enclosed by the inner
box labeled Scale) in the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog box. If
the diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap
does not appear in a rendering.

Center
Sets the Offset coordinates to 0 (centers the image).

BASE
Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing
Use BASE if you plan to insert the current drawing into, or externally refer-
ence the drawing from, other drawings and you need a base point other than
0,0,0. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other
drawings, this base point is used as the insertion base point.

Note The BASE command and the INSBASE system variable report values in the
current UCS units.

Draw menu: Block Base

Command line: base (or 'base for transparent use)

Enter base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER

BATTMAN
Edits attribute properties of a block definition

Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Block Attribute Manager
Command line: battman

The Block Attribute Manager is displayed.

If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message
is displayed.

BASE | 103
Block Attribute Manager
Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing. You can
edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks, and
change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when insert-
ing a block.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default,
Tag, Prompt, Default, and Mode attribute properties are displayed in the
attribute list. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed
in the list by choosing Settings.
For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the
number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout.
Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block
from the drawing area. When you choose Select Block,
the dialog box closes until you select a block from the
drawing or cancel by pressing ESC .
If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new
block before you save the attribute changes you made,
you are prompted to save the changes before selecting
another block.
Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that
have attributes. Select the block whose attributes you
want to modify.
Sync Updates all instances of the selected block with the
attribute properties currently defined. This does not
affect any values assigned to attributes in each block.
Move Up Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt
sequence. The Move Up button is not available when a
constant attribute is selected.
Move Down Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt
sequence. The Move Down button is not available
when a constant attribute is selected.
Edit Opens the Edit Attribute dialog box, where you can
modify attribute properties.

104 | BATTMAN
Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block
definition. If Apply Changes to Existing References is
selected in the Settings dialog box before you choose
Remove, the attribute is removed from all instances of
the block in the current drawing. The Remove button is
not available for blocks with only one attribute.
Settings Opens the Settings dialog box, where you can
customize how attribute information is listed in the
Block Attribute Manager.
Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you
have made and leaves the Block Attribute Manager
open.

Edit Attribute Dialog Box

Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition.
Auto Preview Controls whether or not the drawing area is
Changes immediately updated to display any visible attribute
changes you make. If Auto Preview Changes is selected,
changes are immediately visible. If Auto Preview
Changes is cleared, changes are not immediately
visible.
Clearing Auto Preview Changes results in a small
improvement in performance. Auto Preview Changes is
not available if Apply Changes to Existing References is
not selected.
The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs:

Attribute
Text Options
Properties

Attribute Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)

Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the
assigned value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts
users to enter a value. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that iden-
tifies the attribute.

BATTMAN | 105
Mode
Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears.
Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If
selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area.
If cleared, displays the attribute value.
Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default
value. You cannot change this property. If a check mark
is shown in the check box, the attribute is set to its
default value and cannot be changed. If the check box
is empty, you can assign a value to the attribute.
Verify Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts
you to verify the values you assign to the attribute
when inserting a new instance of the block. If this
option is cleared, verification is not performed.
Preset Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected,
sets the attribute to its default value when the block is
inserted. If cleared, ignores the attributes default value
and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the
block.
Data
Data options set the attribute text that is displayed.
Tag Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute.
Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you
insert the block.
Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when
you insert the block.

Text Options Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)

106 | BATTMAN
Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed
backwards.
Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside
down.
Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a
value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value
greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away
from its vertical axis.

Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)

Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and line-
type for the attributes line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a
plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text.
Color Specifies the attributes text color.
Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles,
the Plot Style list is not available.
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of attribute text.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if
the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.

Settings Dialog Box

Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager.
Display in List Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute
list. Only the selected properties are displayed in the
list.
The Tag property is always selected.
Select All Selects all properties.
Clear All Clears all properties.

BATTMAN | 107
Emphasize Turns duplicate tag emphasis on and off. If this option
Duplicate Tags is selected, duplicate attribute tags are displayed in red
type in the attribute list. If this option is cleared,
duplicate tags are not emphasized in the attribute list.
Apply Changes to Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances
Existing of the block whose attributes you are modifying. If
References selected, updates all instances of the block with the new
attribute definitions. If cleared, updates only new
instances of the block with the new attribute
definitions.
You can choose Sync in the Block Attribute Manager to
apply changes immediately to existing block instances.
This temporarily overrides the Apply Changes to
Existing References option.

BHATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill
BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch or fill,
either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a specified point
within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as boundaries. It then
fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern, a solid color, or a gradient. BHATCH
creates an associative hatch or fill, which is updated when its boundaries are
modified, or a nonassociative hatch or fill, which is independent of its
boundaries. You can preview any hatch or fill and adjust the definition.
Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch or
fill, editing hatched or gradient-filled geometry can produce unexpected
results. In this event, delete the object containing the hatch or fill and redo
the hatch or fill.

108 | BHATCH
Note By default, AutoCAD wont create a hatch pattern that consists of over
10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To
reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv MaxHatch 50000) at
the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and
10,000,000.

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Hatch
Command line: bhatch

The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt, BHATCH displays prompts on
the command line (see page 120).

Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box

Defines the boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for
hatch and gradient fill objects.

Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen. The
objects must form an enclosed area. How AutoCAD detects objects using this
option depends on which island detection method is selected on the
Advanced tab. For example, if the island detection method is Flood,
AutoCAD detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and
includes them in the boundary definition. The island detection style (which
you also set on the Advanced tab) then determines how to hatch the detected
islands.
When you select Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and
AutoCAD displays a prompt.
Select internal point: Specify a point within the area to be hatched or filled
Select internal point: Specify a point, enter u or undo to undo the last selection,
or press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog box

BHATCH | 109
While specifying points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last or all point specifications,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.

internal point selected hatch boundary result

Select Objects
Specifies objects for hatching or filling. The dialog box closes temporarily,
and AutoCAD prompts you to select objects.

object selected hatch boundary result

When you use the Select Objects option, AutoCAD does not detect interior
objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected bound-
ary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current Island Detection
Style (which you set on the Advanced tab).

object selected text selected result

Each time you choose Select Objects, AutoCAD clears the previous selection
set.

110 | BHATCH
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.

Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that AutoCAD
detects as islands when you use the Pick Points option. You cannot remove
the outer boundary.

internal point selected object removed result

View Selections
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined
boundaries with the hatch or fill settings that you last previewed. This option
is unavailable when no boundary has been defined.

Inherit Properties
Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of one
object. After selecting the associative hatch or fill object whose properties
you want the hatch or fill to inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area
and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick
Points options to create boundaries.
See Pick Points on page 109 and Select Objects on page 110.

Draw Order
Assigns draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all
other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hach boundary, or in
front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable)

BHATCH | 111
Composition
Controls whether the hatch or gradient fill is associative or nonassociative.
This setting is stored in the system variable HPASSOC.
Associative Creates a hatch or fill that is updated when you modify
its boundaries.
Nonassociative Creates a hatch or fill that is independent of its
boundaries.

Preview
Dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with
the current hatch or fill settings. Click in the drawing or press ESC to return
to the dialog box. Right-click or press ENTER to accept the hatch or fill. This
option is not available when you have not yet specified points or selected
objects to define your boundaries.

Hatch Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)

Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.

112 | BHATCH
Type
Sets the pattern type.
Predefined Specifies a predefined AutoCAD pattern. These patterns
are stored in the acad.pat and acadiso.pat files. You can
control the angle and scale of any predefined pattern.
For predefined ISO patterns, you can also control the
ISO pen width.
Note When you use the Solid predefined pattern, the
boundary must be closed and must not intersect itself. In
addition, if the hatch area contains more than one loop,
the loops must not intersect. These limitations do not
apply to standard hatch patterns.
User Defined Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype
in your drawing. You can control the angle and spacing
of the lines in your user-defined pattern.
Custom Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file
that you have added to the AutoCAD search path. (To
use the patterns in the supplied acad.pat and acadiso.pat
files, choose Predefined.) You can control the angle and
scale of any custom pattern.
Pattern
Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most recently used predefined
patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in
the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is available only if you set
Type to Predefined.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 119),
in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to
help you make a selection.
Swatch
Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display
the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 119). When the SOLID pattern
is selected, you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select
Color dialog box (see page 172).

BHATCH | 113
Custom Pattern
Lists the available custom patterns. The six most recently used custom pat-
terns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the
HPNAME system variable. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you
set Type to Custom.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 119),
in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help
you make a selection.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. AutoCAD stores the angle in the HPANG system variable.
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. AutoCAD stores the
scale in the HPSCALE system variable. This option is available only if you set
Type to Predefined or Custom.
Relative to Paper Space
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you
can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout.
This option is available only from a layout.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. AutoCAD stores the
spacing in the HPSPACE system variable. This option is available only if you
set Type to User Defined.
ISO Pen Width
Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This
option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one
of the available ISO patterns.

114 | BHATCH
Advanced Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)
Defines how AutoCAD creates and hatches or fills boundaries.

Island Detection Style

Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost
boundary. If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an island detection style
has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, its often
best to use the Normal style.

BHATCH | 115
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If
AutoCAD encounters an internal intersection, it turns
off hatching or filling until it encounters another
intersection. Thus, areas separated from the outside of
the hatched or filled area by an odd number of
intersections are hatched or filled, and areas separated
by an even number of intersections are not. You can
also set the Normal style by adding ,N to the pattern
name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
AutoCAD turns hatching or filling off if it encounters
an internal intersection. Because this process starts
from both ends of each hatch or fill line, AutoCAD
hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure
and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set
the Outer style by adding ,O to the pattern name in the
HPNAME system variable.

.
. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through
them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding ,I to
the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.

Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.

The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select
objects to define your boundaries.
Object Type
Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and the object type that
AutoCAD applies to those objects.
Retain Adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing.
Boundaries
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object.
AutoCAD creates the boundary as a region or a
polyline. This option is available only if you select
Retain Boundaries.
For more information about regions, see Create and
Combine Areas (Regions) in the Users Guide.

116 | BHATCH
Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary from
a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select
Objects to define a boundary.
By default, when you use Pick Points to define a boundary, AutoCAD
analyzes all objects visible in the current viewport. By redefining the bound-
ary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without
having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining the
boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because AutoCAD exam-
ines fewer objects.
Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything visible in the
current viewport. Selecting this option discards any
current boundary set and uses everything visible in the
current viewport.
Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you
selected with New. If you have not created a boundary
set with New, the Existing Set option is not available.
New Prompts you to select the objects that define the
boundary set. AutoCAD includes only the hatchable or
fillable objects you select when it constructs the new
boundary set. AutoCAD discards any existing boundary
set, replacing it with the new boundary set defined by
the objects you select. If you dont select any objects,
AutoCAD retains any current set.
Until you exit BHATCH or create a new boundary set,
AutoCAD ignores objects that do not exist in the
boundary set when you define your boundaries by
using Pick Points.
Island Detection Method
Specifies whether to include objects within the outermost boundary as
boundary objects. These internal objects are known as islands.
Flood Includes islands as boundary objects.
Ray Casting Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest
object and then traces the boundary in a
counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as
boundary objects.
Gap Tolerance
Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary.
The default value, 0, specifies that the objects enclose the area, with no gaps.

BHATCH | 117
Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of
gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary. Any
gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored, and the
boundary is treated as closed. (HPGAPTOL system variable)

Gradient Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)

Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.

One Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and
lighter tints of one color. When One Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a
color swatch with Browse button and a Shade and Tint slider.
Two Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. When Two
Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a color swatch with a Browse button for
color 1 and for color 2.
Color Swatch
Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click the Browse button [...] to display
the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color,
true color, or color book color. The default color displayed is the current color
in the drawing.
Shade and Tint Slider
Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected
color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.

118 | BHATCH
Centered
Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not
selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of
a light source to the left of the object.
Angle
Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the
current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch
patterns.
Gradient Patterns
Displays nine fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear
sweep, spherical, and parabolic.

Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box

Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns. The dialog
box organizes patterns on four tabs with images arranged alphabetically on
each tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK.

ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with AutoCAD.

ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with AutoCAD.
Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped
with AutoCAD.

BHATCH | 119
Custom Displays all patterns defined in any custom PAT file that
you have added to the search path, which is set in the
Options dialog box, Files tab.

BHATCH Command Line

If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt, BHATCH displays prompts on
the command line.
Specify internal point or [Properties/Select/Remove islands/Advanced/DRaw
order]: Specify a point or enter an option

Internal Point
Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen that form
an enclosed area. If you turn on Island Detection, objects within the outer-
most boundary are detected as islands. Hatching applied is associative and in
the current style.

Properties
Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply.
Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or
custom pattern name, enter s, enter u, enter ?, or press ENTER

Pattern Name Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or

Predefined or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file.
Custom Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch
style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*)
to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch
block.
Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a scale or
press ENTER
Specify an angle for the pattern <current>: Specify an
angle or press ENTER

?List Pattern Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the
Names acad.pat file.
Pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER

120 | BHATCH
Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first BHATCH
command line prompt, where you can define a
boundary.
Note The boundary of a solid-fill hatch must be closed
and must not intersect itself. In addition, if the hatch area
contains more than one loop, the loops must not intersect.
These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns.
User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. Enter u, followed by an
optional hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk
(*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a
hatch block.
Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an
angle for the pattern or press ENTER
Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the
distance between pattern lines or press ENTER
Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify
a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original
lines, or press ENTER

Select
Selects objects for hatching.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary set objects defined as islands by the Internal
Point option.
Select island to remove: Select an island

Advanced
Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the hatch boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Retain boundary/Island detection/Style/
Associativity]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects that AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary
from a specified internal point.
Specify candidate set for boundary [New/Everything] <current>: Enter an option
or press ENTER

BHATCH | 121
New Creates a boundary set from a selection set you define.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the

current viewport. Selecting this option discards any
current boundary set and uses everything visible in the
drawing or in the current viewport.
Retain Boundary
Specifies whether to add the temporary boundary objects to the drawing
after hatching is completed.
Retain derived boundaries? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

Island Detection
Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary
objects.
Do you want island detection? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method.

Enter type of ray casting [Nearest/+X/-X/+Y/-Y/Angle] <current>: Enter an
option or press ENTER

Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest
object and then traces the boundary in a
ray casting counterclockwise direction.
direction (+X)
+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point
you specify to the first object encountered and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point
you specify to the first object encountered and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
ray casting
direction (-X)
+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point
you specify to the first object encountered and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point
you specify to the first object encountered and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

ray casting
direction (+Y)

122 | BHATCH
Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you
specify to the first object encountered and then traces
the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
Specify ray casting angle: Specify an angle
Style
Specifies the method used to hatch objects within the outermost hatch
boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no
effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, its often best to use
ray casting the Normal style.
direction (-Y)
Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.

AutoCAD stores the Ignore style code by adding ,I to the
pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches inward from the outer boundary. AutoCAD
turns hatching off if it encounters an internal
intersection and doesnt turn it back on. Because this
process starts from both ends of each hatch line,
AutoCAD hatches only the outermost level of the
structure and leaves the internal structure blank.
AutoCAD stores the Outer style code by adding ,O to
the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Normal Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD
encounters an internal intersection, it turns off
hatching until it encounters another intersection.
Thus, areas separated from the outside of the hatched
area by an odd number of intersections are hatched,
while areas separated by an even number of
intersections are not. AutoCAD stores the Normal style
code by adding ,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME
system variable.
Associativity
Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are
modified.
A new hatch patterns associativity is set by the HPASSOC system variable.
Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in the
HPASSOC system variable.

Do you want associativity? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

BHATCH | 123
Gap Tolerance
Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as
a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects enclose the
area, with no gaps.
Specify a boundary gap tolerance value <0>: Enter a value, in drawing units, from
0 to 5000

Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify in the gap tolerance
are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed.

Draw Order
Specifies the draw order of the hatch or fill.
Enter draw order [do Not assign/send to Back/bring to Front/send beHind
boundary/bring in front of bounDary] <send beHind boundary>: Enter an
option, or press ENTER to accept the default and return to the previous prompt

BLIPMODE
Controls the display of marker blips
Command line: blipmode (or 'blipmode for transparent use)

Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER

When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+)
appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.

objects drawn with objects drawn with

BLIPMODE on BLIPMODE off

To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other com-
mands that redraw or regenerate the drawing.

124 | BLIPMODE
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from objects you select

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Block Make
Command line: block

The Block Definition dialog box is displayed.

If you enter block at the Command prompt, BLOCK displays prompts on the
command line (see page 127).

Block Definition Dialog Box

Defines and names a block.

BLOCK | 125
Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes, if the system vari-
able EXTNAMES is set to 1.
The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.

Note You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER, RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and
OVERHEAD as valid block names.

Base Point
Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X Specifies the X coordinate value.
Y Specifies the Y coordinate value.
Z Specifies the Z coordinate value.
Pick Insertion Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can
Base Point specify an insertion base point in the current drawing.

Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or
delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you
create the block.
Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily
while you select the objects for the block. When you
finish selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the
Block Definition dialog box.
Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box (see page 785),
which defines a selection set.
Retain Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the
drawing after you create the block.
Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the
drawing after you create the block.
Delete Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you
create the block.
Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects.

126 | BLOCK
Preview Icon
Determines whether to save a preview icon with the block definition and
specifies the source of the icon.
Do Not Include Specifies that no icon is created.
an Icon
Create Icon from Creates a preview icon to be saved with the block
Block Geometry definition from the geometry of the objects in the
block.
Preview Image Displays an image of the preview icon youve specified.

Drag and Drop Units

Specifies the units to which the block is scaled when it is dragged into a draw-
ing using DesignCenter or i-drop.

Description
Specifies the text description associated with the block.

Hyperlink
Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box (see page 414), which you can use to
associate a hyperlink with the block definition.

BLOCK Command Line

If you enter -block at the Command prompt, BLOCK displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes if the system variable
EXTNAMES is set to 1.

If you enter the name of an existing block, AutoCAD prompts you as follows:
Block NAME already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press
ENTER

BLOCK | 127
By redefining a block, you automatically update all references to that block.
Attributes attached to existing block references remain unchanged in the
drawing. However, new insertions of the block do not prompt for attributes
unless the attribute definitions are included in the new block definition (use
ATTREDEF to redefine blocks that contain attributes).

Specify insertion base point: Specify a point (1)

1
AutoCAD uses the point specified as the base point for subsequent insertions
of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of the block or its lower-left
corner. The base point is also the point about which you can rotate the block
during insertion. A block with 0 rotation is oriented according to the UCS in
effect when it was created. Entering a 3D point inserts the block at a specific
elevation. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current elevation.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

AutoCAD defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point,
and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the draw-
ing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command
immediately after BLOCK.
objects selected
as a block The insertion base point becomes the origin of the blocks coordinate system,
which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block.
When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned
parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation
in space by setting the UCS first.

?List Previously Defined Blocks

Lists the block names in the text window.
Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER

In the list, external references (xrefs) are indicated with the notation
Xref: resolved

In addition, externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated

with the notation
xdep: XREFNAME

128 | BLOCK
where xrefname is the name of an externally referenced drawing. The follow-
ing terms are used in the list:

User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list.

External References: Number of xrefs in the list.
Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list.
Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the
drawing.

BLOCKICON
Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter
File menu: Drawing Utilities Update Block Icons
Command line: blockicon

Enter block names <*>: Specify block names, or press ENTER to update all blocks

Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release
of AutoCAD. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wild-
card characters. For example, enter b1,?2, to specify that block B1 and all
two-character blocks ending with 2 should be updated.
After you enter the block names, AutoCAD displays a message describing the
process as it proceeds. Press ESC at any time to stop.

BMPOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format
Command line: bmpout

The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is dis-
played. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects
and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER

AutoCAD creates a bitmap file that contains the objects you select. The file
reflects what is displayed on the screen.

Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.

BLOCKICON | 129
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area
Draw menu: Boundary
Command line: boundary

The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays
prompts on the command line (see page 131).

Boundary Creation Dialog Box

Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for defin-
ing boundaries from points you specify. The Boundary Creation dialog box
is a limited version of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box. To access the
other options in this dialog box, use BHATCH.

For information about all options in this dialog box, see Boundary Hatch
and Fill Dialog Box on page 109.
Once you set the available options, choose Pick Points to specify points in
your drawing to create the boundaries.

130 | BOUNDARY
BOUNDARY Command Line
If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays
prompts on the command line.
Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a

Internal Point
Creates a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify
a point inside the area.

Advanced Options
Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option or
press ENTER to return to the previous prompt

Boundary Set Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when it

creates a boundary from a specified point. For
information about defining a boundary set on the
command line, see the BHATCH command line option
Advanced on page 121.
Island Detection Specifies whether AutoCAD uses objects within the
outermost boundary as boundary objects. For
information about specifying island detection on the
command line, see the BHATCH command line option
Advanced on page 121.
Object Type Specifies the type of object AutoCAD creates as the
boundary.
Enter type of boundary object [Region/Polyline] <current>:
Enter an option or press ENTER

BOX
Creates a three-dimensional solid box
Once you create a box, you cannot stretch it or change its size. However, you
can extrude the faces of a box with SOLIDEDIT.

Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Box

BOX | 131
Command line: box

Specify corner of box or [CEnter]<0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER for
corner of box, or enter c for center

Corner of Box
Defines the first corner of the box.
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
1
2
Corner Specifies the other corner of the box.
Specify height: Specify a distance

Entering a positive value draws the height along the

height positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the height along the negative Z axis.
Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.
Specify length: Specify a distance

Entering a positive value draws the length along the

positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current UCS. Entering a
negative value draws the length along the negative X,
Y, and Z axes.
length
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you
specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width
to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
Specify length: Specify a distance
height Specify width: Specify a distance
Specify height: Specify a distance

length Entering a positive value draws the length, width, or

width height along the positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current
UCS. Entering a negative value draws the length, width,
or height along the negative X, Y, and Z axes.
Center
Creates the box by using a specified center point.
1
Specify center of box <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point or enter an option

132 | BOX
Corner Specifies a point for the corner of the box.
Specify height: Specify a distance

Entering a positive value draws the height along the

positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the height along the negative Z axis.
Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.
Specify length: Specify a distance

Entering a positive value draws the length along the

length positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current UCS. Entering a
negative value draws the length along the negative X,
Y, and Z axes.
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you
specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width
to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
Specify length: Specify a distance
Specify width: Specify a distance
height
Specify height: Specify a distance

length Entering a positive value draws the length, width, or

width height along the positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current
UCS. Entering a negative value draws the length, width,
or height along the negative X, Y, and Z axes.

BOX | 133
BREAK
Breaks the selected object between two points

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Break
Command line: break

Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1)
on an object

The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If
you select the object by using your pointing device, AutoCAD both selects
the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next
prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the
2
1 first point.

before break Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or
enter f

Second Break Specifies the second point for AutoCAD to use to break
after break Point the object.
First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point
that you specify.
Specify first break point:
Specify second break point:

AutoCAD erases the portion of the object between the two points that you
specify. If the second point is not on the object, AutoCAD selects the nearest
point on the object; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline,
specify the second point beyond the end to be removed.
To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for
both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the
second point.
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other
object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed.
AutoCAD converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting
counterclockwise from the first to the second point.

134 | BREAK
2 1

1 2

BROWSER
Launches the default web browser defined in your systems registry

Web toolbar:
Command line: browser

Enter Web location (URL) <current>: Press ENTER or enter a new location; you
dont need to enter http:// before the location

Pressing ENTER displays your web browser, which automatically connects to

the location you specify. Because BROWSER does not append http:// to web
locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.

Note BROWSER requires that you have Netscape Navigator 3.0 (or later) or
Microsoft Internet Explorer installed.

BROWSER | 135
136
CAL
Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions
Command line: cal (or 'cal for transparent use)

CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or

integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the
object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. You can insert AutoLISP
variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expres-
sion back to an AutoLISP variable. You can use these arithmetic and vector
expressions in any AutoCAD command that expects points, vectors, or
numbers.

Understanding Syntax of Expressions

CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of
precedence:

Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set

Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division
second, and addition and subtraction last
Operators of equal precedence from left to right

Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with
the operators in the following table.

Numeric operators

Operator Operation

() Groups expressions

^ Indicates exponentiation

*,/ Multiplies, divides

+, Adds, subtracts

CAL | 137
The following are examples of numeric expressions:
3
3 + 0.6
(5.8^2) + PI

Vector Expressions
A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions
combined with the operators in the following table.

Vector operators

Operator Operation

() Groups expressions

& Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector)

[a,b,c]&[x,y,z] = [ (b*z) (c*y) , (c*x) (a*z) , (a*y) (b*x) ]

* Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number)

[a,b,c]*[x,y,z] = ax + by + cz

*, / Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number

a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z]

+, Adds, subtracts vectors (points)

[a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z]

The following are examples of vector expressions:

A+[1,2,3] provides the point positioned [1,2,3] units relative to point A.
The expression
[2<45<45] + [2<45<0] [1.02, 3.5, 2]
adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are in spher-
ical coordinates.

Formatting Feet and Inches

Enter feet and inches using the following format:
feet'-inches" or feet'inches"
The expression converts to a real number based on inches, as shown in the
following examples:

138 | CAL
2'-5" converts to 2*12+5 = 29
5" converts to 0*12+5 = 5
2' converts to 2*12+0 = 24

Formatting Angles
The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the fol-
lowing format:
degdmin'sec"
You must enter 0 and d (0d) when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree
(minutes and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are
zero.
Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number fol-
lowed by g to enter angles in grads.
The following examples show ways of entering angles:
124.6r
14g
5d10'20"
0d10'20"
AutoCAD converts angles entered in any format to decimal degrees.
Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.

Using Points and Vectors

Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines
a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space.
Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions,
such as nor and vec, return a vector.

Formatting Points and Vectors

A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]):
[r1,r2,r3]
The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and
so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and vec-
tors are displayed as lines with arrows.

CAL | 139
CAL supports points expressed in all AutoCAD formats.

Point formats

Coordinate system Point format

Polar [dist<angle]

Cylindrical [dist<angle,z]

Spherical [dist<angle1<angle2]

Relative Uses the @ prefix [@x,y,z]

WCS (instead of UCS) Uses the * prefix [*x,y,z]

You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate

values of zero and a comma immediately preceding the right bracket (]).
The following are valid points:
[1,2] is the same as [1,2,0]
[,,3] is the same as [0,0,3]
[ ] is the same as [0,0,0]
In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coor-
dinate system with respect to the (WCS). The distance is 1+2=3; the angles
are 10+20=30 degrees and 45 degrees, 20 minutes.
[@*1+2<10+20<45d20"]
The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its
components:
[2*(1.0+3.3),0.41.1,2*1.4]
The following example uses the Endpoint object snap and the vector [2,0,3]
to calculate a point that is offset from a selected endpoint:
end + [2,,3]
The calculated point is offset 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Z
direction relative to the selected endpoint.

140 | CAL
Using AutoLISP Variables
You can use AutoLISP variables within arithmetic expressions. The variables
must be one of the following types: real, integer, or 2D or 3D point (vector).
This example defines a point positioned 5 units in the X direction and 1 unit
in the Y direction from the point stored in AutoLISP variable A.
A+[5,1]
If you enter an AutoLISP variable with a name containing a character with
special meaning in CAL, such as +, , *, or /, enclose the variable name in
apostrophes ('), for example:
'number-of-holes'

Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables

To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable, precede the arithmetic expression
with the variable name and the equal sign (=). Later, you can use the value of
this variable for other calculations.
This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1
and R1.
Command: cal
>> Expression: P1=cen+[1,0]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Command: cal
>> Expression: R1=dist(end,end)/3
>> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint

This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1:

Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: 'cal
>> Expression: P1+[0,1]
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal
>> Expression: R1+0.5

Using AutoCAD System Variables

You can use the getvar AutoLISP function to read the value of an AutoCAD
system variable.
The syntax is
(getvar "variable_name")

CAL | 141
The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of
the view in the current viewport.
(setq c (getvar viewctr))

Converting Units of Measurement

The cvunit AutoLISP function converts either a number or a point from one
unit of measurement to another. See the acad.unt file for a list of units that
you can convert. The syntax is
cvunit(value, from_unit, to_unit)
The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters:
cvunit(1,inch,cm)

Using Standard Numeric Functions

CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table.

Numeric functions

Function Description

sin(angle) Sine of the angle

cos(angle) Cosine of the angle

tang(angle) Tangent of the angle

asin(real) Arcsine of the number; the number must be between 1 and 1

acos(real) Arccosine of the number; the number must be between 1 and 1

atan(real) Arctangent of the number

ln(real) Natural log of the number

log(real) Base-10 log of the number

exp(real) Natural exponent of the number

exp10(real) Base-10 exponent of the number

sqr(real) Square of the number

sqrt(real) Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative

142 | CAL
Numeric functions (continued)

Function Description

abs(real) Absolute value of the number

round(real) Number rounded to the nearest integer

trunc(real) Integer portion of the number

r2d(angle) Angles in radians converted to degrees; for example, r2d(pi) converts

the constant pi to 180 degrees

d2r(angle) Angles in degrees converted to radians; for example, d2r(180) converts

180 degrees to radians and returns the value of the constant pi

pi The constant pi

Calculating a Vector from Two Points

The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points.
vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2.
vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
The following example uses CAL to move selected objects 3 units in the direc-
tion from the center of one selected circle to the center of another selected
circle:
Command: move
Select objects
Specify base point or displacement: 'cal
>> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen)
Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point or press ENTER

CAL | 143
The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point
calculations.

Examples of vector and point calculations

Expression Meaning

vec(a,b) Determines vector translation from point a to point b.

vec1(a,b) Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b.

L*vec1(a,b) Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a to

point b.

a+v Determines point b, which is a translation of the point a

through vector v.

a+[5<20] Determines point b positioned 5 units away from point a under

the angle of 20 degrees. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar
coordinates.

b b a
a a

vec(a,b) vec1(a,b) L*vec1(a,b)

b
v
a
a

a+v a+[5<20]

144 | CAL
Calculating the Length of a Vector
The abs function calculates the length of a vector.
abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real
number.
In spherical coordinates (dist<ang<ang), the dist is the
length of the vector.
The following example calculates the length of the
vector [1,2,3]:
abs([1,2,3])

Obtaining a Point by Cursor

To enter a point using the pointing device, use the cur function. AutoCAD
prompts you to specify a point and uses the coordinate values of the point in
the expression. The point coordinate values are expressed in terms of the cur-
rent UCS. The cur function sets the value of the AutoCAD variable LAST-
POINT.

The following example adds the vector [3.6,2.4,0]the result of 1.2*[3,2]

to the point you select. This expression produces a point that is offset from
the selected point.
cur+1.2*[3,2]

Obtaining the Last-Specified Point

Use the @ character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last
point, as shown in the following example:
Command: line
Specify first point: 'cal
>> Expression: cen+[0,1]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal
>> Expression: @+3*vec1(cen,cen)

The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the
first selected circle. The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first
point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle
to the center of the second selected circle.

CAL | 145
Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic
Expressions
You can use the AutoCAD Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions.
AutoCAD prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the
appropriate snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes
greatly simplifies entering coordinates relative to other objects.
When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For
example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes
set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable.

CAL Snap modes

Abbreviation Snap mode

END ENDPOINT

INS INSERT

INT INTERSECTION

MID MIDPOINT

CEN CENTER

NEA NEAREST

NOD NODE

QUA QUADRANT

PER PERPENDICULAR

TAN TANGENT

The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL
expression:
(cen+end)/2
CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the mid-
point between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected
object.

146 | CAL
Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for
an object and returns a point 1 unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of
the selected object:
mid+[,1]
The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the cen-
troid of a triangle defined by three endpoints:
(end+end+end)/3

Converting Points Between UCS and WCS

Normally, AutoCAD assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current
UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS.
w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current
UCS.
u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the
WCS.
You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS:
w2u([0,0,0])

Filtering the X, Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector

The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or
vector.

Point-filter functions

Function Description

xyof(p1) X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0

xzof(p1) X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0

yzof(p1) Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0

xof(p1) X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0

yof(p1) Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0

zof(p1) Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.0

rxof(p1) X component of a point

CAL | 147
Point-filter functions (continued)

Function Description

ryof(p1) Y component of a point

rzof(p1) Z component of a point

The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in

spherical coordinates:
zof([2<45<45])
The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are
taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b:
xyof(a)+zof(b)

Calculating a Point on a Line

The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the
position of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or
parametrically by a t parameter.
pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1
and p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the
point from the point p1.
plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1
and p2. The parameter t defines the parametric position
of the point on the line.
The following are examples of the parameter t:
If t=0 the point is p1
If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2
If t=1 the point is p2

Rotating a Point About an Axis

The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point.
rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis
passing through the point origin, as shown in the
following example:

148 | CAL
ang

origin
p

rot(p,AxP1,AxP2, Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis

ang) passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the
following example. The axis is oriented from the first
point to the second point.

AxP2

ang

p
AxP1

Obtaining an Intersection Point

The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points.
ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines
(p1,p2) and (p3,p4). AutoCAD considers all points
three-dimensional.
ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4, Determines the intersection point between a line
p5) (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points
(p3,p4,p5).

Calculating a Distance
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2.
This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1p2).
dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and
the line passing through points p1 and p2.

CAL | 149
p1

shortest distance

90
p

dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane

defined by three points (p1,p2,p3).
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2.
This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1p2).

p2 90

p3
p1

The following example returns half the distance

between the centers of two selected objects:
dist(cen,cen)/2

The following example finds the distance between the

point 3,2,4 and a plane you define by selecting three
endpoints:
dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end)

Obtaining a Radius
The rad function determines the radius of a selected object.

150 | CAL
rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object
can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment.
The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE
command. The radius of the new circle is two-thirds of
the radius of the selected polyline arc segment:
Command: circle

Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tan-

gent radius)]: cen
of Select the circle
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal
>> Expression: 2/3*rad
>> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD
function: Select the circle

arc

new circle

center

Obtaining an Angle
The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are
measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-
dimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case.
ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v.
The vector v is considered 2D, projected on the XY
plane of the current UCS.
ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line
(p1,p2), oriented from p1 to p2. The points are
considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current
UCS.
ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and
(apex,p2). The points are considered 2D, projected on
the XY plane of the current UCS.

CAL | 151
ang(apex,p1,p2, Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and
p) (apex,p2). The lines are considered 3D. The last
parameter, point p, is used to define the orientation of
the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with
respect to the axis going from apex to p.
The following examples show how angles are measured.

v
p1

X
0,0 0,0
ang(v) ang(p1, p2)

p2 p
Y

apex p2

apex
p1

X
0,0 p1
ang(p1,p2) ang (apex,p1,p2,p)

You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the
ang function, as shown in the following example:
Command: cal
>> Expression: ang(end,end,end)

Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.

Calculating a Normal Vector

The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to
a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal,
not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain
another point.

152 | CAL
nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector
of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This
normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object
coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.
nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to
vector v. Both vectors are considered 2D, projected on
the XY plane of the current UCS. The orientation of the
resulting normal vector points to the left of the original
vector v.
nor(p1,p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1,p2.
The line is oriented from p1 to p2. The orientation of
the resulting normal vector points to the left from the
original line (p1,p2).
nor(p1,p2,p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane
defined by the three points p1, p2, and p3. The
orientation of the normal vector is such that the given
points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal.
The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated:

nor nor(v)

p3
p2

p2
p1
p1
nor (p1,p2) nor (p1,p2,p3)

CAL | 153
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected
object. AutoCAD displays the object in plan view and does not distort the
object by the parallel projection.
Command: vpoint
Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current
Specify a view point or [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: 'cal
>> Expression: nor
>> Select circle, arc or polyline for NOR function:

Using Shortcut Functions

The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that
combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode.

Shortcut functions

Function Shortcut for Description

dee dist(end,end) Distance between two endpoints

ille ill(end,end,end,end) Intersection of two lines defined by four

endpoints

mee (end+end)/2 Midpoint between two endpoints

nee nor(end,end) Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two

endpoints

vee vec(end,end) Vector from two endpoints

vee1 vec1(end,end) Unit vector from two endpoints

154 | CAL
CAMERA
Sets a different camera and target location
Setting the camera and target locations gives you a different view of objects
in your drawing.

camera at A, target at B

camera location and target point camera at B, target at A

View toolbar:
Command line: camera

Current camera position is: current

Current camera target is: current
Specify new camera position <current>: Enter a value or specify a point

Sets the point from which you view the objects in your model.
Specify new camera target <current>: Enter a value or specify a point

Sets the point in your model that you are viewing.

To set the camera and target locations for a 3D Orbit view, enter the CAMERA
command before starting 3DORBIT.

CAMERA | 155
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects
If both objects you want to chamfer are on the same layer, the chamfer is
created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer is created on the current layer.
This is also true for color, linetype, and lineweight.

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Chamfer
Command line: chamfer

(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current

Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]:

first selected line second selected line result

Note Chamfering an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line
segments removes hatch associativity. If you defined the boundary from a
polyline, associativity is maintained.

First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer,
or the edge of a three-dimensional solid to chamfer.
Select second line:

If the two lines you select are polyline segments, they must be adjacent to
each other or separated by no more than one segment. If theyre separated
by one line or arc segment, AutoCAD deletes the segment and replaces it with
a chamfer line.
If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two
surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface.
Base surface selection...
Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] <OK>: Enter n or o, or press
ENTER

156 | CHAMFER
Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface.
Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge.
Specify base surface chamfer distance <current>:
Specify other surface chamfer distance <current>:

After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges
of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the
edges at once.
Select an edge or [Loop]: Select an edge, enter l, or press ENTER

first edge selected first base surface second base surface

Edge
Selects an individual edge to chamfer.

select edge edge selected chamfered edge

Loop
Switches to Edge Loop mode.
Select an edge loop or [Edge]: Select an edge, enter e, or press ENTER

Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface.

CHAMFER | 157
selecting edge loop edge selected chamfered
edge loop

Edge Switches to Edge mode.

Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.
Select 2D polyline:

AutoCAD chamfers the intersecting line segments at each vertex of the

polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline.
If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the
chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.

selected polyline result

Distance
Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
Specify first chamfer distance <current>:
Specify second chamfer distance <current>:

equal distances unequal distances

If you set both distances to zero, AutoCAD extends or trims the two lines so
they end at the same point.

158 | CHAMFER
Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an
angle for the second line.
Specify chamfer length on the first line <current>:
Specify chamfer angle from the first line <current>:

chamfer distance
first
selected

second angle
selected

Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the chamfer line
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>:

Note Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to
0.

If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting

lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not inter-
sect, AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to
0, AutoCAD creates the chamfer without trimming the selected lines.

Method
Controls whether AutoCAD uses two distances or a distance and an angle to
create the chamfer.
Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] <current>:

Multiple
Bevels the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the main
prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.

CHAMFER | 159
If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the chamfers you created with the Multiple option are removed if you
click Undo.

CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects
Command line: change

Select objects:

Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the
current user coordinate system (UCS).
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you
get varying results depending on the object selection sequence. The easiest
way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only
objects other than lines in a selection set.
Specify change point or [Properties]: Specify a new point, or press ENTER to enter
new values

Change Point or Values

Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you
select.
Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are
closest to the change point to the new point, unless
Ortho mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, AutoCAD
modifies the selected lines so that they become parallel
to either the X or the Y axis rather than moving their
endpoints to the specified coordinate.

2 2
1 1
Ortho off Ortho on

Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one
circle, AutoCAD moves on to the next circle and repeats
the prompt.
Specify new circle radius <no change>:

160 | CHANGE
Text Changes text position and other properties.
Specify new text insertion point <no change>:

Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing

ENTER leaves the text in its original position.

Enter new text style <current>:

If the text has a fixed height, AutoCAD skips the next

prompt.
Specify new height <current>:
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Enter new text <current>:

AutoCAD highlights the next object and displays the

prompts relating to it.
Attribute Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that
Definitions is not part of a block.
Specify new text insertion point:

Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing

ENTER leaves the text at its original position.

Enter new text style <current>:

If the text has a fixed height, AutoCAD skips the next

prompt.
Specify new height <current>:
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Enter new text <current>:
Enter new tag <current>:
Enter new prompt <current>:
Enter new default value <current>:

CHANGE | 161
Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block.
Specify new block insertion point: Specify a point (1), or
press ENTER

Specifying a new location repositions the block.

1 Pressing ENTER leaves the block in its original position.
Specify new block rotation angle <current>:

AutoCAD rotates the block about its insertion point to

the specified angle.

Properties
Modifies properties of existing objects.
Enter property to change [Color/Elev/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/
PLotstyle]:

Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot
styles.

If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, AutoCAD displays varies as the current value.
You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change
prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.

Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a
number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press
ENTER

162 | CHANGE
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255
separated by commas to specify a true color

Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for
the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that
has been installed, such as PANTONE

If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you

to enter the color name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the
selected color book, such as Pantone573

Elev
Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.
Specify new elevation <current>:

You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same
Z value.

CHANGE | 163
z z
Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
y
y Enter new layer name <current>:

Ltype
x x
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Elev = 0 Elev = 2
Enter new linetype name <current>:

If the new linetype is not loaded, AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.

Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:

Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are pre-
defined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest
predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:

Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:

Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport

object has no effect.

Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of
property settings that is saved in a plot style table.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ?

164 | CHANGE
Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. When you
plot the drawing, objects are plotted with the properties
defined in the designated plot style. Plot styles assigned
to objects can be overridden by other plot style
assignments.
?List Plot Styles Lists all the plot style names defined in the drawing.

CHECKSTANDARDS
Checks the current drawing for standards violations

CAD Standards toolbar:

Tools menu: CAD Standards Check
Command line: checkstandards

The Check Standards dialog box is displayed.

Check Standards Dialog Box

Analyzes the current drawing for standards violations.
Problem Provides a description of a nonstandard object in the
current drawing. To fix a problem, select a replacement
from the Replace With list, and then click Fix.
Replace With Lists possible replacements for the current standards
violation. If a recommended fix is available, it is
preceded by a check mark. If a recommended fix is not
available, no items are highlighted in the Replace With
list.
Preview of Indicates the properties of the nonstandard AutoCAD
Changes object that will be changed if the fix currently selected
in the Replace With list is applied.
Fix Fixes the nonstandard AutoCAD object using the item
currently selected in the Replace With list, and
advances to the next nonstandard object in the current
drawing. This button is unavailable if a recommended
fix does not exist or if an item is not highlighted in the
Replace With list.
Next Problem Advances to the next nonstandard AutoCAD object in
the current drawing without applying a fix.

CHECKSTANDARDS | 165
Mark This Flags the current problem as ignored. If the Show
Problem as Ignored Problems option is turned off in the CAD
Ignored Standards Settings dialog box, problems flagged as
ignored are not displayed the next time the drawing is
checked.
Settings Displays the CAD Standards Settings dialog box, which
specifies additional settings for the Check Standards
dialog box and the Configure Standards dialog box.
Close Closes the Check Standards dialog box without
applying a fix to the standards violation currently
displayed in Problem.

CHPROP
Changes the color, layer, linetype, linetype scale factor, lineweight, thickness, and plot style
of an object
Command line: chprop

Select objects:
Enter property to change [Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/
PLotstyle]:

Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot
styles.

If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, AutoCAD displays varies as the current value.

166 | CHPROP
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255
separated by commas to specify a true color

Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for
the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that
has been installed, such as PANTONE

If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you

to enter the color name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the
selected color book, such as Pantone573

Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Enter new layer name <current>:

Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Enter new linetype name <current>:

If the new linetype is not loaded, AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.

Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:

CHPROP | 167
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are pre-
defined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest
predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:

Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:

Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport

object has no effect.

Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of
property settings that is saved in a plot style table. This option is displayed
only when you are using named plot styles.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ?

Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. When you
plot the drawing, objects are plotted with the properties
defined in the designated plot style. Plot styles assigned
to objects can be overridden by other plot style
assignments.
?List Plot Styles Lists all the plot styles defined in the drawing.

168 | CHPROP
CIRCLE
Creates a circle
You can create a circle by beginning with the center point or one of three
points on the circumference, or you can select objects to which the circle is
tangent.

Note To draw an isometric circle, use the Isocircle option of the ELLIPSE com-
mand. The Isocircle option is available for ELLIPSE only when the Style option of
Snap mode is set to Isometric (see DSETTINGS).

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Circle
Command line: circle

Specify center point for circle or [3P (Three Points)/2P (Two Points)/Ttr (tan tan
radius)]: Specify a point or enter an option

Center Point
1 Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: Specify a point, enter a value, enter d, or
press ENTER
2
radius Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify
a point (2). The distance between this point and the
center point determines the radius of the circle.
Draws a circle using the center point and a specified
1 Diameter
distance for the diameter.
2 Specify diameter of circle <current>: Specify a point (2),
diameter enter a value, or press ENTER

CIRCLE | 169
1 3P (Three Points)
2 Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
Specify first point on circle: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point on circle: Specify a point (2)
3
3P Specify third point on circle: Specify a point (3)

1
2P (Two Points)
Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
Specify first endpoint of circles diameter: Specify a point (1)
2 Specify second endpoint of circles diameter: Specify a point (2)
2P
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)
Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select a circle, arc, or line
Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select a circle, arc, or line
Specify radius of circle <current>:

Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. AutoCAD
tan, tan, radius draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the
selected points.

CLEANSCREENON
Clears the screen of all user interface items except the menu bar and the status bar
View menu: Clean Screen
Command line: cleanscreenon

The screen displays only the menu bar, the Model and layout tabs at the bot-
tom of the drawing, and the command line. Use CLEANSCREENOFF to restore
display of toolbars, tool palette windows, the Properties palette, and
DesignCenter. Press CTRL +0 (zero) to switch between CLEANSCREENON and
CLEANSCREENOFF.

170 | CLEANSCREENON
CLEANSCREENOFF
Restores display of toolbars, tool palette windows, Properties palette, and DesignCenter
View menu: Clean Screen
Command line: cleanscreenoff

Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. Use
CLEANSCREENON to clear the screen of all user interface items except the
menu bar and the status bar. Press CTRL +0 (zero) to switch between
CLEANSCREENON and CLEANSCREENOFF.

CLOSE
Closes the current drawing
File menu: Close
Command line: close

AutoCAD closes the current drawing. If you modified the drawing since it
was last saved, AutoCAD prompts you to save or discard the changes.
You can close a file that has been opened in Read-only mode if you have
made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to
a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.

CLOSEALL
Closes all currently open drawings
Window menu: Close All
Command line: closeall

Closes all open drawings. A message box is displayed for each unsaved draw-
ing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.

COLOR
Sets the color for new objects
Format menu: Color
Command line: color (or 'color for transparent use)

The Select Color dialog box is displayed.

CLEANSCREENOFF | 171
If you enter -color at the Command prompt, COLOR displays prompts on the
command line (see page 176).

Select Color Dialog Box

You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by
selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and
Color Book colors.

color numbers
10249

color numbers 19
color BYBLOCK or
color numbers
BYLAYER
250255

color name current color

or number preview tile

Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)

Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
Specifies a color for new objects using the AutoCAD Color Index. This palette
contains colors 1 through 255. If you select an ACI color, the name or num-
ber of the color is displayed in the Color box as the current color.
Index Color
Indicates the ACI color value for the selected color.
Red, Green, Blue
Indicates the RGB color value for the selected color.
Bylayer
Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which
you create them. The colors being used in available layers are displayed next
to the BYLAYER button. When you click this button, the color assigned to the
objects layer is selected.

172 | COLOR
Byblock
Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on
your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert
the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block
inherit the current Color setting. The colors being used in available blocks are
displayed next to the BYBLOCK button. Once the new object is part of a block,
the color assigned to the block is selected.

Note The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT command.

Color
Specifies a color name, the BYLAYER and BYBLOCK colors, or an ACI number
of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the objects current color.
Old
Displays the previously selected color of the object.
New
Displays the currently selected color of the object.

True Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)

Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue,
Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue
(RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true
color functionality.
HSL Color Model
Specifies to use the HSL color model for selecting colors. The options avail-
able on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color
model is specified.
Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the
values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors.
Hue Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific
wavelength of light within the visible spectrum. To
specify a hue, move the crosshairs (from side to side)
over the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue
box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid
hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees.

COLOR | 173
Saturation Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a
color to look more pure while low saturation causes a
color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation,
move the crosshairs (from top to bottom) over the color
spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box.
Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid
saturation values are from 0 to 100%.
Luminance Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color
luminance, adjust the bar on the color slider or specify
a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values
are from 0 to 100%. A value of 0% represents the color
black, 100% represents white, and 50% represents the
optimal brightness for the color. Adjusting this value
also affects the RGB value.
RGB Color Model
Specifies to use the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options avail-
able on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color
model is specified.
Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The val-
ues specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green,
and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated
to create a wide range of colors.
Red Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider
on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the
Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in
the HSL color mode values.
Green Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the
slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255
in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it will be
reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Blue Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the
slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255
in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will be
reflected in the HSL color mode values.

174 | COLOR
Color
Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made
to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the fol-
lowing format: 000,000,000.
True Color Stored as RGB
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Old
Displays the previously selected color of the object.
New
Displays the currently selected color of the object.

Color Books Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)

Specifies colors using third-party color books (such as PANTONE ) or user-
defined color books. Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab
displays the name of the selected color book.
Color Book
Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. You can select a
color book from the drop-down list. This list consists of all the color books
that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Options dialog
box.
To load a color book, use the Color Book Locations option in the Options dia-
log box, on the Files tab. The default location for color books is \sup-
port\color. If there are no color books installed, the Color Book drop-down list
is unavailable.
When you select a color book, the colors and the assigned color names are
displayed. AutoCAD supports color books containing up to 10 colors per
page. If a color book is not paginated, AutoCAD organizes the colors into
pages containing 7 colors per page.

COLOR | 175
To navigate through color book pages, select an area on the color slider or use
the up and down arrows to browse the color book. The corresponding colors
and color names are displayed by page as you navigate through the color
book.
RGB Equivalent
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Color
Indicates the currently selected color book color.
Old
Displays the previously selected color of the object.
New
Displays the currently selected color of the object.

COLOR Command Line

If you enter -color at the Command prompt, COLOR displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter default object color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<BYLAYER>: Enter a color, enter
t, enter co, or press ENTER

You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or num-
ber), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the
names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red
by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red.
You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, AutoCAD draws
all new objects in the default color (white or black, depending on your back-
ground color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block
in a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR.

Warning! If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that
make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex
results.

If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on
which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about
assigning a color to a layer.

176 | COLOR
True Color
Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas
to specify a true color

Color Book
Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed,
such as Pantone

If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color
name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book,
such as Pantone 573

COMPILE
Compiles shape files and PostScript font files
Before you can use AutoCAD shape files as fonts or shapes in a drawing, you
must compile or convert them into SHX files. You can then use LOAD to
insert the SHX files into a drawing. Compiling PostScript font PFB files
improves the loading speed of drawings that use them.
Command line: compile

AutoCAD displays the Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box.
AutoCAD compiles it into a file with this name, and automatically adds the
file name extension .shx.

CONE
Creates a three-dimensional solid cone
A cone is a solid primitive with a circular or elliptical base tapering symmet-
rically to a point perpendicular to its base.

Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Cone

COMPILE | 177
Command line: cone

Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current

1 Specify center point for base of cone or [Elliptical] <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1),
enter e, or press ENTER

Center Point for Base

Defines the center of the circular base of the cone.
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius for Base

Defines the radius of the circle.
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a

Height Defines the height of the cone. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height
along the negative Z axis.
Apex Specifies the apex of the cone, which defines the height
of the cone and the orientation with respect to the Z
axis.
Specify apex point:

Diameter
Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cone.
Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a

Height Defines the height of the cone. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height
along the negative Z axis.

178 | CONE
Apex Specifies the apex of the cone, which defines the height
of the cone and the orientation with respect to the Z
axis.
Specify apex point: Specify a point (2)

height

radius diameter

Elliptical
Creates a cone with an elliptical base.
1
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone or [Center]: Specify a point (1)
or enter c

Axis Endpoint
Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its axes. Specify a second point
to define the diameter of one axis and a third point to specify the radius of
the other axis.
Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a

Height Defines the height of the cone. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height
along the negative Z axis.

CONE | 179
Apex Specifies the apex, which defines the height and
orientation of the cone with respect to the axis.
Specify apex point: Specify a point (4)

4
height

3 2

Center
Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its center point and the radius of
each axis.
Specify center point of ellipse for base of cone <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or
press ENTER
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a

Height Defines the height of the cone. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height
along the negative Z axis.
Apex Specifies the apex, which defines the height and
orientation of the cone with respect to the first axis
specified.
Specify apex point: Specify a point (4)

4
1
height

3 2

CONVERT
Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier
Since Release 14, AutoCAD creates 2D polylines and associative hatches
using an optimized format that saves memory and disk space. Use CONVERT

180 | CONVERT
to update hatches or polylines created in releases earlier than AutoCAD
Release 14 or AutoCAD LT 97.
Command line: convert

Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] <All>: Enter h for hatches,

p for polylines, or a for both

Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing.

Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter
s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects
in the drawing

Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing.

Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter
s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects
in the drawing

All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing.

Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter
s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects
in the drawing

AutoCAD displays one or both of the following messages:

number hatch objects converted
number 2d polyline objects converted

Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous

release is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a
hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS
since creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recom-
mended that you use the Select option so that you can check your results.
In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default,
the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated automati-
cally when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in the old
format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an older
drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded.

Note Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old
format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Editing
commands make no distinction between the two formats.

CONVERT | 181
CONVERTCTB
Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB)
Command line: convertctb

Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box),
where you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to
convert. The Save As dialog box is then displayed. If necessary, specify a new
location or name for the converted plot style table file.
CONVERTCTB saves a copy of a color-dependent plot style table as a named
plot style table, which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot
styles. The original color-dependent plot style table is not affected by
CONVERTCTB. The default location for the new named plot style table file is
in the AutoCAD Plot Styles folder. The default name for the new named plot
style table file is the same as the color-dependent plot style table name.
CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color that has unique plot
properties, one named plot style for each group of colors that are assigned the
same plot properties, and a default named plot style called NORMAL.
For example, if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the
same plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the
named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style, and STYLE 1, which
assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the color-
dependent plot style table. However, suppose that all the colors in a color-
dependent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two
colors, BLUE and GREEN. If these colors each have unique plot properties,
CONVERTCTB creates four named plot styles in the named plot style table:
NORMAL, the default plot style; STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties of
GREEN; STYLE 2, which assumes the plot properties of BLUE; and STYLE 3,
which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the other colors.
CONVERTCTB gives the plot styles in the new named plot style table generic
names such as STYLE 1, STYLE 2. You can modify these generic plot style
names in the the Plot Style Table Editor. Click the Edit button on the Plot
Device tab in the Page Setup dialog box. If you want to rename the plot
styles, you must do so before applying them to drawing layouts.

CONVERTPSTYLES
Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles
A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles, but not both.

182 | CONVERTCTB
CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color-dependent
plot styles to named plot styles, or from named plot styles to color-
dependent plot styles, depending on which plot style method the drawing is
currently using.
For example, a drawing using color-dependent plot styles assigns plot prop-
erties to objects and layers by color. In other words, all objects with the same
color have the same plot properties. CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing
to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent
of color assignment. In other words, all objects with the same color can have
different plot properties.
When you convert a drawing, CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system
variable to the appropriate setting (1 = named, 0 = color-dependent).
Command line: convertpstyles

Converting drawings from color-dependent plot styles to named plot

styles
Converting drawings from named plot styles to color-dependent plot
styles

Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to

Named Plot Styles
A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before con-
verting the drawing. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables
assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB.
AutoCAD displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the con-
verted drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES requires you to select a named plot style table that was con-
verted using CONVERTCTB or created from a PC2 or PCP file. Normally you
should select the named plot style table that was converted from the color-
dependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space
and to all layouts. Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style (from
the converted plot style table) that has the same plot properties that their
color-dependent plot style had. Drawing objects that had the same color-
dependent plot style as their layer are assigned the named plot style
BYLAYER. Drawing objects that had a color-dependent plot style that was
different from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same
properties that their color-dependent plot style had.

CONVERTPSTYLES | 183
After a drawing is converted to named plot styles, you can change the named
plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model
space or layouts. You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects.

Converting Drawings from Named to Color-

Dependent Plot Styles
A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and
named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached.
After a drawing is converted to color-dependent plot styles, you can assign a
color-dependent plot style table. Plot styles will be applied by color.

COPY
Duplicates objects
Modify toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy Selection.
Command line: copy

Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER

Specify base point or displacement, or [Multiple]: Specify a point for a single
copy or enter m for multiple copies

Base Point or Makes a single copy.

Displacement
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as
displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER

If you specify two points, AutoCAD uses the first point

as a base point and places a single copy relative to that
object selected
base point. The two points you specify define a
displacement to determine how far the selected objects
are moved and in what direction.
1 If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of
Displacement prompt, the first point is interpreted as a
relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify
2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next
prompt, the object moves 2 units in the X direction and
2
3 units in the Y direction from its current position. In
single copy
this case, the first point is usually entered at the
keyboard.

184 | COPY
Note The @ symbol should not be entered as part of this
displacement coordinate.
Multiple Makes multiple copies using one COPY command.
AutoCAD prompts for an insertion base point for the
selection object.
Specify base point:
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as
displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER

If you specify a point, AutoCAD places a copy at that

point relative to the base point. The Specify Second
multiple copies Point of Displacement prompt is repeated for
placement of multiple copies of the object. If you press
ENTER , the command ends.

COPYBASE
Copies objects with a specified base point
Use COPYBASE to specify a base point when copying objects. The base point
enables you to position the copied objects precisely when pasting them
within the same drawing or into another drawing.
Edit menu: Copy with Base Point
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy with Base Point.
Command line: copybase

Specify base point:

Select objects:

The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. Use PASTECLIP to move the
copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to
another document. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE,
AutoCAD places it relative to the specified base point.

COPYCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard
Use COPYCLIP to copy objects or command line text from an AutoCAD draw-
ing to another Microsoft Windows application.

Standard toolbar:

COPYBASE | 185
Edit menu: Copy
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy.
Command line: copyclip

Select objects:

COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the
contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object.

Note You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing
area, AutoCAD copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on
the command line or in the text window, AutoCAD copies the selected text to
the Clipboard.

COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard
The prompts and other text displayed on the command line in the current
session are the command line history. Use scroll bars or open the text win-
dow to see the whole history. You can drag the top edge of the command line
window to change its size.
Command line: copyhist

The text is copied to the Clipboard.

COPYLINK
Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications
Edit menu: Copy Link
Command line: copylink

COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. You can paste the con-
tents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object.

186 | COPYHIST
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes toolbars, buttons, shortcut keys, and tool palettes
Tools menu: Customize
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Command line: customize

The Customize dialog box is displayed.

Note You can use -TOOLBAR to display, close, or position a toolbar from the
command line.

Customize Dialog Box

Provides an interface for customizing toolbars, buttons, and shortcut keys.

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Adds buttons to the default AutoCAD toolbars, removes buttons you use
infrequently, and creates toolbars.

Categories Displays a list of all the AutoCAD menus that you can
use to filter the Commands list. You can filter this list
by selecting a menu name.

CUSTOMIZE | 187
Commands Displays a list of the commands associated with the
menu you selected under Categories. To add a
command (button) to a toolbar, drag the command
from the Commands list to a toolbar in the AutoCAD
window. To remove a command from a toolbar, drag its
button from the toolbar to the drawing area while the
Customize dialog box is displayed. To create a new
toolbar, drag a command from the Commands list to
the drawing area.
Show Image and Displays the button image and name in the Commands
Name list. When Show Image and Name is clear, only the
button images are displayed.

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Displays, creates, renames, and removes toolbars. Button size and tooltip
controls are also provided.

Toolbars Displays or hides toolbars. A check mark next to its

name indicates that a toolbar is displayed. To hide a
toolbar, clear its check box.

188 | CUSTOMIZE
Menu GroXup Displays a list of AutoCAD menu groups. The toolbars
that belong to the selected menu group are displayed in
the Toolbars list. If the toolbars you want to display,
hide, or edit belong to a menu group other than
AutoCAD, select that menu group.
Menu groups are listed in the order in which they were
installed. The menu group that was installed first has
precedence regarding shortcut keys.
New Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, in which you can
create a new toolbar.
Rename Renames the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list.
Delete Removes the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list.
Large Buttons Displays buttons in a larger format at 32 by 30 pixels.
The default display size is 16 by 15 pixels.
Show Tooltips on Displays tooltips when you move the cursor over
Toolbars buttons on the toolbar.
Show Shortcut Displays shortcut keys when you move the cursor over
Keys in Tooltip buttons on the toolbar.

Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Displays or modifies the properties of any button on a toolbar. Select a button
or flyout from a toolbar to view or modify its properties. If you select a but-
ton, the Button Properties tab is displayed. If you select a flyout, the Flyout
Properties tab is displayed.
Button Properties Tab
Displays or modifies the properties of any button on a toolbar. To access this
tab, select a button on a toolbar while the Properties tab of the Customize
dialog box is displayed.

CUSTOMIZE | 189
Name Displays the tooltip for the selected button.
Description Displays the status bar Help message for the command
associated with the selected button.
Button Image Displays an enlarged bitmap image of the selected
button.
Edit Opens the Button Editor dialog box.
Macro Associated Displays the AutoCAD menu macro that runs the
with This Button command associated with the selected button.
List of Button Displays a scrollable list of all button images from
Images which you can select an image to replace the one for the
selected toolbar button.
Apply Applies specified changes to the button you selected
from the toolbar. This button is unavailable until you
make modifications to a toolbar button.
Reset Discards any changes you made to a toolbar buttons
properties and restores its original settings.

190 | CUSTOMIZE
Flyout Properties Tab
Displays or modifies the properties of any flyout button on a toolbar. To
access this tab, select a flyout button on a toolbar while the Properties tab of
the Customize dialog box is displayed.

Toolbar Displays a list of available toolbars with the current

Associated with flyout toolbar selected. To substitute a different toolbar
This Flyout with the flyout, select a toolbar from the list and choose
Apply.
Toolbar Preview Displays the buttons of the currently selected toolbar.
Apply Substitutes a new toolbar for the selected flyout. This
button is unavailable until you select a new toolbar
from the Toolbar Name list.
Reset Discards any changes you made to a flyout button and
restores its original toolbar settings.

Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Assigns keyboard shortcuts to commands.

CUSTOMIZE | 191
Categories Lists all standard menus, custom menus, and toolbars.
When you select a menu or toolbar from the list, the
associated menu or toolbar items are displayed in the
Commands list.
Commands Specifies the command you want to customize. If the
selected command has a shortcut key or access key
assigned to it, the key combination is displayed under
Current Keys.
Menu Group Specifies the current menu (MNU) file. AutoCAD has a
standard menu group called ACAD.
Menu groups are listed in the order in which they were
installed. The menu group that was installed first has
precedence regarding shortcut keys. For example, if you
assign CTRL+B to insert blocks in the first menu file and
then assign CTRL+B to insert external references in the
second menu file, CTRL+B inserts blocks.

192 | CUSTOMIZE
Current Keys Displays the key combination defined as a shortcut key
for the selected menu or toolbar item.
Press New Specifies a key combination to be used as the keyboard
Shortcut Key shortcut for the selected menu or toolbar item. To
specify a value, simultaneously press CTRL and a letter
on the keyboard. You can also simultaneously press
CTRL+SHIFT and a letter.

You cannot reassign shortcut keys that are internally

assigned to Windows; for example, F10, CTRL+F4,
CTRL+F6, or CTRL+ALT+DEL. If you use an invalid key
combination, AutoCAD does not show the
combination in the edit box. Try using another key
combination.
If the keyboard shortcut you specify is already assigned
to another AutoCAD command, the Currently
assigned to message is displayed.
Assign Assigns the new shortcut key to the selected command.
Remove Removes the shortcut key assignment from the selected
command.
Note AutoCAD automatically assigns many commands
to shortcut keys. You can reassign these shortcut keys to
perform different actions, but you cannot remove them.
Show All Shows shortcut key assignments for all menu groups.
The Shortcut Keys dialog box lists the command, menu
group, and category associated with each shortcut key.

CUSTOMIZE | 193
Tool Palettes Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Creates, modifies, and organizes tool palettes. Imports and exports tool
palette files.

Tool Palettes Lists all available tool palettes. Click and drag a tool
palette to move it up or down in the list. Right-click a
tool palette in the list to rename, delete, or export the
tool palette. (When you export a tool palette, its saved
to a file with an .xtp extension.) Right-click in the Tool
Palettes area to import a tool palette or to create a new,
blank one.
Palette Groups Displays in a tree view the organization of your tool
palettes. Click and drag a tool palette to move it into
another group. Right-click a tool palette group and
then click Set Current on the shortcut menu to display
that group of tool palettes. The shortcut menu also
provides options to

Create a new group

Delete an existing group
Rename an existing group
Remove a tool palette from a group

Current Palette Displays the name of the tool palette group currently
Group shown. Displays All Palettes when all available tool
palettes are shown.

194 | CUSTOMIZE
New Toolbar Dialog Box
Creates a new toolbar. To add buttons to the toolbar, use the Commands Tab
(Customize Dialog Box) (see page 187).

Toolbar Name
Specifies a name for the new toolbar.

Save Toolbar in Menu Group

Specifies a menu group for the new toolbar.

Button Editor Dialog Box

Modifies or creates buttons.

Button Image
Displays the button at its actual size.

CUSTOMIZE | 195
Editing Tools
Provides tools for editing the button image.
Pencil Edits one pixel at a time using the current color. Click
and drag the pointing device to edit several pixels
simultaneously.
Line Creates lines using the current color. Click and drag to
set the start point and draw the line. Release to
complete the line.
Circle Creates circles using the current color. Click to set the
center and drag to set the radius. Release to complete
the circle.
Erase Sets pixels to white. Click and drag over colored pixels
to change them to white.

Color Palette
Sets the current color used by the editing tools.

More
Opens the True Color tab in the Select Color dialog box. If you select a true
color, it is displayed in the color swatch.

Editing Area
Provides a close-up view of the button image for editing.

Grid
Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel.

Clear
Clears the editing area.

Open
Opens an existing button image for editing. Button images are stored as
bitmap (BMP) files.

Undo
Undoes the last action.

Save
Saves the customized button image.

196 | CUSTOMIZE
Save As
Saves the customized button image using a different name or a different
location.

CUTCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard and removes the objects from the drawing

Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Cut
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Cut.
Command line: cutclip

Select objects:

CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from
the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or
drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP
does not create OLE link information.

CYLINDER
Creates a three-dimensional solid cylinder
A cylinder is a solid primitive similar to an extruded circle or ellipse but with-
out a taper.

Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Cylinder
Command line: cylinder

Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current

Specify center point for base of cylinder or [Elliptical] <0,0,0>: Specify a center
point (1), enter e, or press ENTER

Center Point
1
Defines the center of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify radius for base of cylinder or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

CUTCLIP | 197
Radius
Defines the radius of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c

Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the
cylinder along the negative Z axis.
Center of Other Defines the center point of the other end of the
End cylinder.
Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a point (2)

Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the

Z orientation of the cylinder.

2
height

radius

Diameter
Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify diameter for base of cylinder:
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c

Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the
cylinder along the negative axis.
Center of Other Defines the center point of the other end of the
End cylinder.
Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a point (2)

Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the

Z orientation of the cylinder.

198 | CYLINDER
2
height

diameter

Elliptical
Creates a cylinder with an elliptical base.
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder or [Center]: Specify a point
1 (1) or enter c

Axis Endpoint
Defines the axes of the elliptical base of the cylinder.
Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3)

The second point defines the diameter of one axis. A third point defines the
radius of the other axis.
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c

Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a positive

4
height

3 2

CYLINDER | 199
Center
Defines the elliptical base of the cylinder by its center point and the radius
of each axis.
Specify center point of ellipse for base of cylinder <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or
press ENTER
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance (4) or
enter c

1
3 2

Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a positive

4
height

200 | CYLINDER
DBCCLOSE
Closes the dbConnect Manager
Tools menu: Choose dbConnect when the dbConnect Manager is open.
Command line: dbcclose

DBCLOSE closes the dbConnect Manager and removes the dbConnect menu
from the menu bar.

DBCONNECT
Provides an AutoCAD interface to external database tables
DBCONNECT starts the dbConnect Manager, from which you can view and
edit database tables, execute Structured Query Language (SQL) queries, and
link table records to graphical objects.
DBCONNECT replaces the ASE commands that were available in previous
releases of AutoCAD.
Tools menu: dbConnect
Command line: dbconnect

AutoCAD displays the dbConnect Manager and adds the dbConnect menu
to the menu bar.
The four primary interfaces (the dbConnect Manager, the Data View window,
the Query Editor, and the Link Select dialog box) are described first, followed
by descriptions of each additional dialog box presented in alphabetical order.
The Column Values dialog box, a sub-dialog box of the Query Editor, is
described in the Query Editor section. The section describing each dialog box
contains a list of methods that you can use to access it.

dbConnect Manager (see page 202)

Data View window (see page 207)
Query Editor (see page 215)
Link Select dialog box (see page 223)
Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page 225)
Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 226)
Export Links dialog box (see page 228)
Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228)
Export Template Set dialog box (see page 229)
Find dialog box (see page 229)
Format dialog box (see page 230)
Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230)

DBCCLOSE | 201
Import Template Set dialog box (see page 231)
Label Template dialog box (see page 231)
Label Template Properties dialog box (see page 234)
Link Conversion dialog box (see page 235)
Link Manager (see page 238)
Link Template dialog box (see page 239)
Link Template Properties dialog box (see page 240)
New Label Template dialog box (see page 241)
New Link Template dialog box (see page 241)
New Query dialog box (see page 242)
Replace dialog box (see page 242)
Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 243)
Select a Data Object dialog box (see page 244)
Sort dialog box (see page 244)
Synchronize dialog box (see page 245)

dbConnect Manager
Provides the primary interface for the connectivity feature. By default, the
dbConnect Manager opens as a docked window on the left side of the AutoCAD
drawing area.

drawing node
link template

label template
query
data sources
node
table

data source

When you open the dbConnect Manager, a small red X is displayed in the
lower right corner of each database and data object. The X indicates that
these objects are currently unconnected. To connect to a database or data
object, double-click it in the dbConnect Manager.

202 | DBCONNECT
dbConnect Manager Buttons
Display and manipulate database objects.

View Table

Edit Table New Label

Template
New Link
Execute Query
Template

New Query

View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode.

This button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or label template is selected in the tree view.
Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode. This
button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or label template is selected in the tree view.
Execute Query Executes a query. This button is not available unless a
query is selected in the tree view.
New Query Displays the New Query dialog box (see page 242). This
button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or query is selected. If a query is selected, you
can use this button to display the Query Editor (see
page 215), in which you can edit the query.
New Link Displays the New Link Template dialog box (see page
Template 241). This button is not available unless a single table or
link template is selected. If a link template is selected,
you can use this button to display the Link Template
dialog box (see page 239), in which you can edit the
link template. Not available for link templates with
links already defined in a drawing.
New Label Displays the New Label Template dialog box (see page
Template 241). This button is not available unless a single table,
link template, or label template is selected. If a label
template is selected, you can use this button to display
the Label Template dialog box (see page 231), in which
you can edit the label template.

DBCONNECT | 203
dbConnect Manager Tree View
Contains nodes for each drawing thats currently open and a Data Sources
node that contains all available data sources configured on your system.

Drawing Nodes Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for an open drawing. Right-click the node of an
open drawing.
Export Template Opens the Export Template Set dialog box (see page
Set 229), in which you can save all link and label templates
stored in the drawing to an external file.
Import Template Opens the Import Template Set dialog box (see page
Set 231), in which you can import a set of link and label
templates that are stored in an external file.
Export Query Set Opens the Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228),
in which you can save all queries stored in the drawing
to an external file. The exported query set is saved with
the file extension .dbq.
Import Query Set Opens the Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230),
in which you can import a set of queries stored in an
external file with the file extension .dbq.
Show Labels Turns on visibility of all labels in the selected drawing.
Hide Labels Turns off visibility of all labels in the selected drawing.
Reload Labels Refreshes the field values of the labels in the selected
drawing, updating them to reflect any changes made in
the source database table.

Database Objects Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for database objects (such as link templates, label
templates, and queries) attached to the drawing nodes. Different database
objects have different subsets of menu options available to them. For exam-
ple, the shortcut menu options that are displayed when you right-click a
query differ from the options that are available when you right-click a link
template. The following shortcut menu options are available for various
database objects.
View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode.
Available only for link templates.
Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode.
Available only for link templates.

204 | DBCONNECT
Edit Opens a dialog box in which you can edit the properties
of the selected database object. Available for link
templates, label templates, and queries. Not available
for link templates with links already defined in the
drawing.
Delete Deletes the selected database object. Available for link
templates, label templates, and queries.
Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected database object and inserts
it in the current drawing. Available for link templates,
label templates, and queries.
Rename Opens a dialog box in which you can rename the
selected database object. Available for link templates,
label templates, and queries. Not available for link
templates with links already defined in the drawing.
New Query Opens the New Query dialog box (see page 242).
Available only for link templates.
Link Select Opens the Link Select dialog box (see page 223).
Available only for link templates.
New Label Opens the New Label Template dialog box (see page
Template 241). Available only for link templates.
Show Labels Displays all labels that are associated with the selected
database object. Available for link templates and label
templates.
Hide Labels Hides all labels that are associated with the selected
database object. Available for link templates and label
templates.
Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the
selected link template. Available only for link
templates.
Delete Labels Deletes all labels in the current drawing that use the
selected label template. Available only for label
templates.
Synchronize Verifies that all links in the current drawing based on
the selected link template contain valid values. Any
detected problems are reported in the Synchronize
dialog box (see page 245). Available only for link
templates.

DBCONNECT | 205
Reload Refreshes the field values of all labels associated with
the selected label template in the current drawing,
updating them to reflect any changes made in the
source database table. Available only for label
templates.
Execute Executes the selected query. Available only for queries.
Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the
selected link template. Available only for link
templates.

Data Sources Node Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for data sources. Right-click the data sources node.
Configure Data Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page
Source 225) where you can configure a new data source or edit
an existing one.

Data Objects Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for data objects. Right-click a data object (such as
a catalog or table) in the data sources node.
Connect Establishes a connection to the selected data object.
Available for data sources, catalogs, and schemas.
Disconnect Closes the connection to the selected data object.
Available for data sources, catalogs, and schemas.
Synchronize Opens the Synchronize dialog box (see page 245).
Available only for connected data sources.
Configure Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page
225) where you can configure a new data source or edit
an existing one. Available only for disconnected data
sources.
View Table Opens the selected database table in Read-only mode.
Available only for tables.
Edit Table Opens the selected database table in Edit mode.
Available only for tables.
New Link Opens the New Link Template dialog box (see page
Template 241). Available only for database tables.

206 | DBCONNECT
New Label Opens the New Label Template dialog box (see page
Template 241). Available only for database tables.
New Query Opens the New Query dialog box (see page 242).
Available only for database tables.

Data View Window

Provides the primary interface for viewing and editing external database
tables from within AutoCAD. You can open this dialog box using the follow-
ing methods:

View Table dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a link template, a label template, or a
table from the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table.
dbConnect menu: View Data View External Table, Edit External Table,
View Linked Table, or Edit Linked Table. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in
Edit Table which you can select a database table to open.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a database table in the
dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table.
Pointing device: Double-click a database table or a link template in the
dbConnect Manager. Double-clicking a link template that has no links cre-
ated in the drawing its associated with opens the Link Template dialog box
(see page 239). The database table is opened in either Edit mode or Read-only
mode, depending on the dbConnect Settings specified on the System tab of
the Options dialog box. See OPTIONS.

The Data View window displays records from the selected database table. The
Data View comprises a set of buttons, a grid window for viewing and editing
records, and a set of navigation controls for navigating through the record
set. After you open the Data View window, the Data View menu is added to
the menu bar. By default, the Data View is opened undocked with the Allow
Docking option turned off. To enable docking, right-click one of the Data
View buttons, and then choose Allow Docking from the shortcut menu.
The appearance of the Data View window is governed by your computers
system settings, and it can be changed in the Windows Control Panel. Text
in the cells is displayed using the system window text color. If the database
table is opened in Read-only mode, the cell background is shown using the
system 3D objects button shade color (light gray by default). If it is opened
in Edit mode, the cell background is shown using the system window color
(white by default). When a cell is selected, it is shown using the system-
selected items background and text colors.

DBCONNECT | 207
Link and Label Settings

Data View Buttons

Create links and display linked records and graphical objects.
Link
Links the currently selected database table row or rows to one or more
graphical objects. AutoCAD creates the link and, if desired, the label from the
currently selected link and label templates in the Data View window. To
change the current link creation setting, choose the Link and Label Settings
button. Three distinct link methods are available:
Link Creates a link to one or more graphical objects without
creating a corresponding label. If the current drawing
has a selection set already established, a link is created
for each object in the selection set. If the current
drawing does not have a current selection set, you are
prompted to select objects to link to.
Create Creates a freestanding label that isnt associated with a
Freestanding graphical object. You are prompted to specify an
Label insertion point for the label.
Create Attached Creates a link to one or more graphical objects and
Label creates a corresponding label. If the current drawing has
a selection set already established, a link is created for
all objects in the selection set. If the current drawing
does not have a current selection set, you are prompted
to select objects to link to.

208 | DBCONNECT
View Linked Objects in Drawing
Selects graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing that are linked to
the currently selected Data View row or rows.
View Linked Records in Table
Selects records in the Data View window that are linked to the current selec-
tion set of graphical objects.
AutoView Linked Objects in Drawing
Displays linked objects automatically in the current drawing as you select
rows from the database table.
AutoView Linked Records in Table
Displays linked records automatically in the Data View window as you select
graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing.
Print Data View
Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Microsoft
Windows system printer.
Data View and Query Options
Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 226), in which
you can specify a number of settings that affect the interaction and display of
linked objects in the Data View window and the current AutoCAD drawing.
Query, Return to Query, and Return to Link Select
Opens either the New Query dialog box (see page 242), the Query Editor (see
page 215), or the Link Select dialog box (see page 223), depending on the
method used to open the Data View window. If the Data View window was
opened to view or edit a database table, this buttons tooltip is Query, and
choosing it opens the New Query dialog box. If the Data View window was
opened to return the results of a query, this buttons tooltip is Return to
Query, and choosing it returns you to the Query Editor. If the Data View win-
dow was opened to return the results of a Link Select operation, this buttons
tooltip is Return to Link Select, and choosing it returns you to the Link Select
dialog box.
Link Template List
Creates a new link template, or specifies a link template from those that are
defined for the open table. The selected link template is applied when you
create new links in the current drawing. To create a new link template, select
the New Link Template option from the Link Template list, and then choose
the Link button flyout.

DBCONNECT | 209
Label Template List
Creates a new label template, or specifies a label template from those that are
defined for the currently selected table. The selected label template is applied
when you create new labels in the current drawing. To create a new label
template, select the New Label Template option from the Label Template list
and choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label
button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the selected database
table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog box is displayed
(see page 241).

Data View Grid Window

Displays a subset of the records from a database table. You can select records
by clicking the following elements:

Column header: Selects all records in that column. Double-clicking a col-

umn header sorts its records in ascending order. Double-clicking a column
header a second time sorts its records in descending order.
Record header: Selects an individual record. Double-clicking a record
header selects any graphical objects that the record is linked to in the
drawing area.
Grid cell: Selects one field of a given record. Double-clicking a cell selects
it for editing.
Grid header: Selects the entire table. Double-clicking the grid header com-
mits any changes made during an editing session and closes the Data View
window.

grid headers column headers

grid cells
record headers

Column Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected
column headers.
Sort Opens the Sort dialog box (see page 244), in which you
can select a combination of up to five columns to use in
specifying a sort order for the Data View.
Hide Removes all selected columns from the Data View
display.
Unhide All Restores all hidden columns to the Data View display.
Available only if you have hidden one or more
columns.

210 | DBCONNECT
Freeze Freezes all selected columns so that they do not scroll
when you use the horizontal scroll bar. Available only if
the selected columns are contiguous.
Unfreeze All Unfreezes all frozen columns so that they scroll when
you use the horizontal scroll bar. Available only if you
have frozen one or more columns.
Align Aligns the current column. Standard right-aligns
numeric fields and left-aligns all others, Left left-aligns
the column cells, Center center-aligns the cells, and
Right right-aligns the cells.
Find Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229), which you
can use to search for a specific value. Find is limited to
the values stored in the currently selected column.
Replace Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 242), which you
can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a
replacement value that you specify. Replace is limited
to the values stored in the currently selected column.
Available only for database tables that are opened in
Edit mode.

Cell Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click the selected cell.
View Linked Indicates graphical objects in the current AutoCAD
Objects drawing that are linked to the selected database record.
Link Links the current row to a graphical object. AutoCAD
creates the link and, if desired, the label from the
currently selected link and label templates in the Data
View. You can specify whether a link, a freestanding
label, or an attached label is created by changing the
settings from the Link and Label Settings cell shortcut
menu option.
Link and Label Lists the currently selected link creation mode. You
Settings can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an
attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu
option is chosen.
Find Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229), which you
can use to search for a specific value. The Find shortcut
menu option limits its search to records contained in
the same column as the currently selected cell.

DBCONNECT | 211
Replace Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 242), which you
can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a
replacement value that you specify. Replace limits its
search to records contained in the same column as the
currently selected cell. Available only for database
tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Edit Enables you to change the value of the currently
selected cell. Available only for database tables that are
opened in Edit mode.
Cut Clears the current cell and copies its value to the
Clipboard. Available only for database tables that are
opened in Edit mode.
Copy Copies the value from the current cell to the Clipboard.
Paste Inserts the value currently stored on the Clipboard into
the selected cell. Available only for database tables that
are opened in Edit mode.
Clear Deletes the value in the current cell. Available only for
database tables that are opened in Edit mode.

Record Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected
record headers.
View Linked Indicates graphical objects in the current AutoCAD
Objects drawing that are linked to the selected database records.
Link Links the selected row or rows to one or more graphical
objects. AutoCAD creates the link and, if desired, the
label from the currently selected link and label
templates in the Data View window. You can specify
whether a link, a freestanding label, or an attached label
is created by choosing the Link and Label Settings
shortcut menu option.
Link and Label Lists the currently selected link creation mode. You
Settings can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an
attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu
option is chosen.
Copy Copies the selected records to the Clipboard.
Delete Record Deletes the selected records. Available only for database
tables that are opened in Edit mode.

212 | DBCONNECT
Add New Record Adds a new record with blank field values to the end of
the record set. Available only for database tables that
are opened in Edit mode.
Clear All Marks Clears record selection marks from the selected records
in the Data View window.

Grid Header Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click the grid header.
Commit Saves all changes made in the Data View window to the
source database table and closes the Data View window.
Available only when a database table is open in Edit
mode and you have edited its values.
Restore Undoes any changes made to a database table during an
editing session and closes the Data View window.
Available only when a database table is open in Edit
mode and you have edited its values.
Unhide All Restores any hidden columns to the Data View window
Columns display.
Unfreeze All Unfreezes any frozen columns so that they scroll when
Columns you use the horizontal scroll bar.
Clear All Marks Clears all record selection marks from the Data View
window.
Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window in the Data View
window, in which you can preview your printed report.
Print Prints the contents of the Data View window to the
current Windows system printer.
Format Opens the Format dialog box (see page 230), in which
you can control how data is displayed in the Data View
window.

DBCONNECT | 213
Navigation Controls
Cycle quickly through the records in the Data View window. The following
controls are available:
First Button Selects the first record.
Previous Button Selects the previous record.
Next Button Selects the next record.
Last Button Selects the last record.

First button Last button

Previous button Next button
record
number

Data View Print Preview Window

Loads into the Data View window a preview image of how the current table
appears when you print it. When the Data View window is in Preview mode,
none of the primary Data View buttons is available and the navigation but-
tons are removed from the bottom of the window. You can open this dialog
box using the following methods:
Data View menu: Print Preview
Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and
choose Print Preview.

214 | DBCONNECT
Print Opens the default system Print dialog box.
Next Page Presents a preview image of the next page of the
database table.
Prev Page Restores the preview image of the previous page of the
database table.
Two Page Toggles the display between one and two preview
pages. If you choose Two Page, the name of the button
changes to One Page and vice versa.
Zoom In Magnifies the preview page so that you can view the
details more closely.
Zoom Out Shrinks the preview page to display a larger region of
the database table.
Close Closes the Data View Print Preview window and
restores the default Data View window display.

Query Editor
Consists of a series of four tabs that you can use to build and execute queries.
If you are creating a new query, the New Query dialog box (see page 242) is
displayed first. You can open the Query Editor using the following methods:
dbConnect buttons: Select a database table or a link template in the
dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button.
Data View buttons: Choose the Query or Return to Query button in the Data
View window.
dbConnect menu: Queries New Query on an External Table, New Query
on a Link Template, or Edit Query. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which
you can select a database object to query.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table or link template in the
dbConnect Manager and choose New Query, or right-click a query and
choose Edit.

DBCONNECT | 215
Quick Query Tab (Query Editor)
Develops simple queries based on a single database field, single operator, and
single value.

Field Lists the fields from the current database table, from
which you can select one to apply to the query.
Operator Displays a list of available operators that can be applied
to the query. For information about operators, see
Construct Simple Queries in the Users Guide.
Value Specifies a value for the field that you are using to
construct your query.
Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the
database table in the Column Values dialog box (see
page 222), from which you can select the value you
want.
Indicate Records Indicates records that match your search criterion in
in Data View the Data View window.
Indicate Objects Indicates linked objects that match your search
in Drawing criterion in the current AutoCAD drawing.

216 | DBCONNECT
Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box
(see page 226).

Range Query Tab (Query Editor)

Constructs a query that returns all records or AutoCAD objects that fall
within a given range of values.

Field Lists the fields from the current database table, from
which you can select one to apply to the query.
From Specifies the first value of the range. The query returns
all records or graphical objects that are greater than or
equal to this value.
Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the
(From, Through) database table in the Column Values dialog box (see
page 222), from which you can select the value you
want.

DBCONNECT | 217
Through Specifies the second value of the range. The query
returns all records or graphical objects that are less than
or equal to this value.
Indicate Records Indicates records that match your search criterion in
in Data View the Data View window.
Indicate Objects Indicates linked objects that match your search
in Drawing criterion in the current AutoCAD drawing.
Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box
(see page 226).

Query Builder Tab (Query Editor)

Constructs queries based on multiple search criteria. You can also group cri-
teria parenthetically, select which fields to display in the returned query, and
specify a sort order for the fields.

218 | DBCONNECT
Query Builder Grid
Provides a space for you to construct queries based on multiple search
parameters.
Parenthetical Groups a series of search criteria by bracketing them
Grouping within parentheses. You can nest up to four sets of
parentheses within a single statement. To insert a
beginning parenthesis, click in the cell to the left of the
first Field cell that you want to group. To insert an end
parenthesis, click in the cell to the right of the last Value
cell that you want to group.
Field Provides a space where you can select the field or fields
to include in your query. Double-click in the Field cell
of the current row to display a list of available fields
from the current database table that you can use in
constructing your query. To add an additional
parameter, specify an operator and a value for the
current row and then select the Logical cell.
Operator Provides a space where you can select an operator to
apply to the query condition of the current row.
Double-click in the Operator cell to display a list of
operators that you can use in constructing your query.
Value Provides a space where you can specify a value for the
query condition of the current row. Click in the Value
cell and enter a value, or choose the [...] button to
retrieve a list of available values for the selected field in
the Column Values dialog box (see page 222).
Logical Provides either an And or an Or operator to the query
statement. Click in the Logical cell to add an And value.
To change the value to Or, click in the Logical cell
again.
Fields in Table
Displays a list of available fields from the current database table, from which
you can specify the fields to display in the Data View window when the
query is executed. If you dont specify any fields to display, the query displays
all fields from the database table. Double-clicking in a field in this list or
selecting a field and choosing Add (Show Fields) adds the field to the list of
those that are displayed in the Data View window by the returned query. You
can also drag fields to add them to the Show Fields and Sort By areas.

DBCONNECT | 219
Show Fields
Specifies the fields that are displayed in the Data View window when the
query is executed. To remove a field from this list, drag it from the list to any
area on the Query Builder tab.
Add (Show Fields)
Adds a field to include in the Data View window display of the returned query.
To add a field, select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add.
Sort By
Specifies a sort order for the returned query. The first field added to the Sort
By list is the primary sort. To change the sort order for a field, drag the field
to a new location in the Sort By list. By default, fields are added to the Sort
By list in an ascending sort order. To apply a descending sort, select a field and
choose the Ascending/Descending Sort button, or double-click in the field.
To remove a field, drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab
or select the field and press DELETE .
Add (Sort By)
Adds a field to the Sort By list. To add a sort field, select it in the Fields in
Table list window and then choose Add. Repeat for additional fields that you
want to apply to the sort.
Ascending/Descending Sort
Reverses the sort order for the currently selected field. If an ascending sort
order is currently applied, choosing this button reverses the sort to descend-
ing order, and vice versa.
Indicate Records in Data View
Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window.
Indicate Objects in Drawing
Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current
AutoCAD drawing.
Execute
Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close
Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store
Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options
Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 226).

220 | DBCONNECT
SQL Query Tab (Query Editor)
Constructs any query statement that conforms with the SQL 92 protocol.
The SQL Query tab provides both a query editor text box where you can type
a free-form SQL statement and a set of tools to assist you in constructing
your query. As not all database management systems are fully compliant
with the SQL 92 standard, you should review your systems documentation
to see what SQL commands are valid for your particular database.

SQL Text Editor Provides a space for you to type a free-form SQL query
or add elements that you select using the various SQL
Query tools.
Table Lists all database tables that are available in the current
data source. You can add database tables to the SQL text
editor by double-clicking them, by selecting them and
choosing Add in the Table area, by dragging them from
the Table list to the SQL text editor, or by entering their
names directly in the SQL text editor.
Add (Table) Adds the currently selected database table to the SQL
text editor.
Fields Displays a list of the fields in the selected database table.
You can add fields to the SQL text editor by double-
clicking them, by selecting them and choosing Add in
the Fields area, or by dragging them from the Fields list
to the SQL text editor.
Add (Fields) Adds the selected field to the SQL text editor.

DBCONNECT | 221
Operator Displays a list of operators that you can apply to your
query.
Add (Operator) Adds the selected operator to the SQL text editor.
Values Specifies a value for the selected field.
Add (Values) Adds the value specified in the Values area to the SQL
text editor.
[...] Button Returns a list of available values for the specified field
from the selected database table in the Column Values
dialog box (see page 222), from which you can select a
value to apply to the query.
Indicate Records Indicates records that match your search criteria in the
in Data View Data View window.
Indicate Objects Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria
in Drawing in the current AutoCAD drawing.
Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store Saves the query with the current drawing.
Check Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without
actually executing it. This function helps you isolate
syntax errors before you issue your query.
Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box
(see page 226).

Column Values Dialog Box

Lists values for the selected database column; you can select a value to apply
to the current operation.
Column Values Lists all values for the selected database column. Select
a value from the list and choose OK to apply it to the
current operation. If you are constructing a query using
the In operator, you can add additional values to the
query by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT key as you select
values.

222 | DBCONNECT
Link Select Dialog Box
Constructs iterative selection sets of AutoCAD graphical objects and database
records. The Link Select dialog box, known as ASE Select in previous releases
of AutoCAD, is an advanced implementation of the Query Editor. You begin
a Link Select operation by creating an initial query or selection set of
graphical objects (set A), which can be operated on by an additional query or
selection set (set B). The results of the returned operation become the new
running selection set (set A), and you can apply additional queries or selec-
tion sets to further refine your running query.
In order to work with the Link Select dialog box, you must have a drawing
open that has a number of links already created. You can open this dialog box
using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Links Link Select
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Link Select.

The Link Select dialog box contains the Quick Query, Range Query, and
Query Builder tabs from the Query Editor (see page 215), and the following
additional controls.

DBCONNECT | 223
Do
Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set. The fol-
lowing operators are available:
Select Creates an initial query or selection set. This selection
set can be refined through subsequent Link Select
operations.
Union Adds the results of the new query or selection set to the
running selection set. This operation returns all records
or objects that are members of set A or set B.

Intersect Returns the intersection of the existing running

selection and the results of the new query or drawing
selection. This operation returns all records or objects
that are members of set A and set B.
Subtract A - B Subtracts the results of the new query or drawing
selection from the existing running selection.
Subtract B - A Subtracts the existing running selection from the
results of the new query or drawing selection.
Using
Lists available link templates that you can apply to the current selection set.

Use Query
Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns
a selection set to the Link Select operation.

Select in Drawing
Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that
you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link
Select operation.

Execute/Select
Executes the current Link Select query or temporarily dismisses the Link
Select dialog box so you can select graphical objects from the AutoCAD draw-
ing. If the Use Query option is selected, the Execute button is displayed. If
the Select in Drawing option is selected, the Select button is displayed. After
choosing the Execute or Select button, you can apply more queries or select
additional graphical objects to further refine your selection set.

224 | DBCONNECT
Venn Diagram
Displays a diagram of the currently selected Do operation.

Reset
Clears the Link Select dialog box and discards all previous actions so that you
can begin a new Link Select operation.

Cancel
Closes the dialog box and discards all actions.

Finish
Completes the Link Select operation and closes the dialog box. Returns either
a selection set of AutoCAD graphical objects, a subset of Data View records,
or both, depending on the parameters specified in the Link Select operation.

Status Bar
Displays the current status information based on the running Link Select
operation. The current drawing and table are displayed, as well as the num-
ber of linked objects and records that currently meet the specified Link Select
parameters.

Configure a Data Source Dialog Box

Configures an external database so it can be accessed from AutoCAD. For
detailed information about configuring a particular database system, refer to
the acad_asi.hlp file in AutoCAD Help. You can open this dialog box using the
following methods:
dbConnect menu: Data Sources Configure
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Data Sources node and choose Configure
Data Source.
Data Source Specifies a name for the OLE DB data source that you
Name are configuring.
Data Sources Lists all OLE DB data sources configured for use with
AutoCAD that are present on your system.
OK Opens the Microsoft Data Links Properties dialog box,
in which you can continue configuring your data
source.

DBCONNECT | 225
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box
Controls a number of settings related to the display of linked records and
objects and the processing of SQL queries. You can open this dialog box using
the following methods:

Data View buttons:

Data View menu: Options. (The Data View menu is available only if you cur-
rently have a database table open in the Data View window.)

AutoPan and Zoom

Control how linked objects are displayed in the current AutoCAD drawing
when you select their corresponding records in the Data View window.
Automatically Pans the AutoCAD drawing automatically to display
Pan Drawing objects that are associated with the current selection set
of Data View records.
Automatically Zooms the AutoCAD drawing automatically so that all
Zoom Drawing objects associated with the current record set are
displayed.
Zoom Factor Specifies a zoom factor that limits the size of the extents
of the indicated object set to a defined percentage of the
drawing area. The available range is 20 to 90 percent
with a default value of 50 percent. A value of 50 percent
means that either the height of the extents is 50 percent
of the height of the window, or the width of the extents
is 50 percent of the window, whichever value is less.

226 | DBCONNECT
Record Indication Settings
Control the appearance of linked records in the Data View window when
their corresponding objects are selected in the current drawing.
Show Only Displays in the Data View window only the record set
Indicated Records that is associated with the current AutoCAD selection
set. Any records not linked to the current drawing
selection set are not displayed.
Show All Records, Displays all records in the current database table. All
Select Indicated records that are linked to the current selection set are
Records selected in the Data View window.
Mark Indicated Applies a marking color to linked Data View records to
Records clearly differentiate them from records without links.
Marking Color Specifies the marking color to apply to linked Data
View records. The default color is yellow.

Query Options
Specify options for SQL query processing.
Send as Native Issues queries to database tables in the format of the
SQL source table rather than SQL 92 format. You can use this
option to issue proprietary commands in native
database format.
Automatically Automatically stores queries when they are executed
Store with the current drawing.

Accumulate Options
Control the accumulation of selection and record sets.
Accumulate Adds additional objects to the selection set as you select
Selection Set in additional Data View records. If this option is cleared,
Drawing the current drawing indicates a new set of objects each
time you select a new set of Data View records.
Accumulate Adds additional records to the record set as you select
Record Set in additional AutoCAD graphical objects. If this option is
Data View cleared, the Data View window indicates a new set of
records each time you select a new set of graphical
objects.

DBCONNECT | 227
Export Links Dialog Box
Exports a set of links that are associated with a selection set of AutoCAD
graphical objects. You can open this dialog box using the following method:
dbConnect menu: Links Export Links

If more than one link template exists for the set of graphical objects that you
select, the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 243) is displayed, in
which you can select a link template whose links you want to export.

Include Fields Specifies the database table fields to export. The key
fields for the selected link template are included
automatically. AutoCAD also exports the handle of the
object that each link is associated with.
File Name Specifies a name for the exported link file.
Save as Type Specifies the file format for the exported links. You can
save the file in the native database format of the current
database table or as a comma-delimited or space-
delimited text file.
Link Template Displays the name of the link template whose links
Name youre exporting.

Export Query Set Dialog Box

Exports a set of queries that are associated with the current drawing. You can
open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Queries Export Query Set

228 | DBCONNECT
Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager, right-click the drawing node of
a drawing that contains one or more queries and choose Export Query Set.

File Name Specifies a name for the query set.

Save as Type Specifies the file format for the query set. Query sets are
always saved with the .dbq file extension.

Export Template Set Dialog Box

Exports a set of link templates and label templates that are associated with
the current drawing. You can open this dialog box using the following
methods:
dbConnect menu: Templates Export Template Set
Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager, right-click the drawing node of
a drawing that has one or more templates defined and choose Export
Template Set.

File Name Specifies a name for the template set.

Save as Type Specifies the file format for the template set. Template
sets are always saved with the .dbt extension.

Find Dialog Box

Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data
View table. The search is limited to a single table column. It is not possible to
conduct a global search that scans all columns in the table. You can open this
dialog box using the following methods:
Data View menu: Find. (The Data View menu is available only if you cur-
rently have a database table open in the Data View window.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a record header or a single cell in the Data View
window and choose Find.

Find What Specifies the value to search for.

Match Case Searches for the exact value, including case, of what
you enter in Find What. If this option is cleared,
AutoCAD searches for the value regardless of case.
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that youre
searching for.
Direction Toggles the direction that AutoCAD searches for the
specified value in the Data View window.

DBCONNECT | 229
Format Dialog Box
Controls how database table records are displayed in the Data View window.
You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
Data View menu: Format. (The Data View menu is available only if you cur-
rently have a database table open in the Data View window.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and
choose Format.

Font Specifies the font style that is applied to the current

Data View table.
Outline Specifies a style to apply to the current font. The
available options are Normal, Italic, Bold, Bold Italic, Not
Bold, and Not Italic.
Size Specifies the size in points that is applied to the current
font.
Effects Applies additional formatting to the Data View window
display. Strikeout draws a line through the center of all
column data. Underline applies an underline to all
column data.
Textcolor Specifies the color that is applied to the Data View table
records.
Preview Displays how the current Format option values look
when applied to the Data View window.

Import Query Set Dialog Box

Imports a set of queries into the current AutoCAD drawing. If the query set
contains a name that matches a query in the current drawing, AutoCAD dis-
plays an alert box where you can enter a different name for the query. You
can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Queries Import Query Set
Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Import Query Set.

230 | DBCONNECT
Look In Specifies the directory where the query set is located.
File Name Specifies the name of the query set to import.
Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the query set that youre
importing. Query sets always have the .dbq extension.

Import Template Set Dialog Box

Imports a set of link templates and label templates into the current AutoCAD
drawing. If the template set contains a link or label template with a name
that matches a template in the current drawing, AutoCAD displays an alert
box where you can enter a different name for the template. You can open this
dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Templates Import Template Set
Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Import Template Set.

Look In Specifies the directory where the template set is located.

File Name Specifies the name of the template set to import.
Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the template set that
youre importing. Template sets always have the .dbt
extension.

Label Template Dialog Box

Applies formatting to labels. The Label Template dialog box is a modified
version of the Multiline Text Editor that provides two additional tabs for
applying formatting to labels. The options on the primary Multiline Text
Editor tabs can be used to apply additional formatting to the multiline text
label objects. For more information about the Multiline Text Editor, see
MTEXT.

Before the Label Template dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the New
Label Template dialog box (see page 241), in which you can name the label
template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a database table, link template, or label
template in the dbConnect Manager, and choose the New Label Template
button. If a label template is selected, AutoCAD opens the Label Template
dialog box without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box.

DBCONNECT | 231
Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template
list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create
Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the
selected database table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog
box (see page 241) is displayed.
dbConnect menu: Templates New Label Template. Select a link template
in the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 243) and choose
Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a database table in the
dbConnect Manager and choose New Label Template.
Pointing device: Double-click a label template in the dbConnect Manager.
This method opens the Label Template dialog box directly without first dis-
playing the New Label Template dialog box.

Label Fields Tab (Label Template Dialog Box)

Specifies which database table fields are displayed when you create labels
based on this template.

Field Displays a list of available fields from the current

database table that you can include in your label. You
may include any number of fields from the source table.
Add Adds the selected field in the Field list to the label.
Table Displays the name of the current database table.

232 | DBCONNECT
Label Offset Tab (Label Template Dialog Box)
Defines X and Y coordinate offsets for the insertion point of both your label
and, if it is an attached label, its associated leader object.

Start Specifies the start point for the leader object. The point
is defined with respect to the extents of the graphical
object that the label is attached to. The Start option has
no effect on freestanding labels, as they have no
associated leader object.
Leader Offset Specifies an X and Y offset for the multiline text object
with respect to the associated leader object. By default,
the X and Y Leader Offset options are set to 1,
indicating that the label text is offset 1 unit in the X and
Y planes from the tip of the leader object. The Leader
Offset settings apply only to attached labels.
Tip Offset Specifies the leader tip or label text offset values for
attached and freestanding labels. For attached labels,
the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the value
specified in Start for the tip of the leader object. For
freestanding labels, the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y
offset from the insertion point you specified for the
label.

DBCONNECT | 233
Label Template Properties Dialog Box
Displays the full data source path to a label templates database table. You can
use this dialog box to update a label template with new data source
information.
Before the Label Template Properties dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the
Select a Database Object dialog box, from which you can select a label
template.
You can open this dialog box using the following method:
dbConnect menu: Templates Label Template Properties

Template Name Displays the name of the selected label template.

Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new data
source from this list to apply to the label template.
Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new catalog
from this list to apply to the label template.
Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new schema
from this list to apply to the label template.
Table Displays the name of the database table specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new database
table from this list to apply to the label template.
Fields Displays the fields specified for the selected label
template.

234 | DBCONNECT
Link Conversion Dialog Box
Converts links created in AutoCAD Release 12, Release 13, and Release 14 to
AutoCAD 2000 (and later) format. You can open this dialog box using the fol-
lowing method:
dbConnect menu: Link Conversion

Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from
AutoCAD 2000 and later, the link conversion process requires that you spec-
ify a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension (ASE) link values to the
new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later. For example, you must identify
the environment used by a particular link in Release 14 and specify the cor-
responding data source that you want substituted for this environment in
AutoCAD 2000 and later. Similar mappings must be established between all
old ASE link values and the new values that you want substituted for them.

DBCONNECT | 235
Link Format
Specifies the format of the link that you are converting. Different fields are
displayed depending on whether you select R12 or R13/R14.

Old Link Format (R12)

Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that youre
converting.
DBMS Specifies the database management system used by the
link that youre converting.
Database Specifies the database used by the link that youre
converting.
Table Specifies the database table used by the link that youre
converting.

Old Link Format (R13/R14)

Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that youre
converting.
Environment Specifies the environment used by the link that youre
converting.
Catalog Specifies the catalog used by the link that youre
converting.
Schema Specifies the schema used by the link that youre
converting.
Table Specifies the database table used by the link that youre
converting.
Link Path Name Specifies the link path name used by the link that
youre converting.

236 | DBCONNECT
New Link Format
Specifies the path to the database table used by the converted link.
Data Source Lists available data sources that you can select for the
converted link.
Catalog Lists available catalogs that you can select for the
converted link.
Schema Lists available schemas that you can select for the
converted link.
Table Lists available database tables that you can select for the
converted link.
Link Template Lists available link templates that you can select for the
converted link.

OK
Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file and closes the
dialog box.

Apply
Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file but keeps the dia-
log box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links.

Cancel
Closes the dialog box without converting any links.

DBCONNECT | 237
Link Manager
Edits the values of the key fields for a selected linked object. You can open
the Link Manager using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Links Link Manager. Select a linked graphical object.
Shortcut menu: Select and then right-click a linked graphical object, and
then choose Link Link Manager.

Link Templates Lists all link templates that are associated with the
selected graphical object. Select the link template
whose link values you want to view or edit.
Key Displays the key fields of the currently selected link
template.
Value Displays all key values that are defined for the selected
link. To display a list of values for a specific field, click
a Value cell and choose [...].
Delete Deletes the currently selected link from the graphical
object its associated with.

238 | DBCONNECT
Link Template Dialog Box
Specifies the key fields that are used by a link template.
Before the Link Template dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the New Link
Template dialog box (see page 241), in which you can name the link tem-
plate. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a database table in the dbConnect Man-
ager and choose the New Link Template button.
Data View buttons: Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list,
and then choose the Link button flyout.
Link dbConnect menu: Templates New Link Template. Navigate to and select a
database table from the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 243)
and choose Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table in the dbConnect Manager and
choose New Link Template.
Pointing device: Double-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager.
This method opens the Link Template dialog box directly, without first dis-
playing the New Link Template dialog box.

DBCONNECT | 239
Template Name Displays the name of the link template.
Table Displays the current database table. The first line lists
the name of the table, and the second line lists the full
data source path to the table in the following syntax:
environment.catalog.schema.table
Key Fields Displays all fields that are available for the current
database table, as well as the field type and, in the case
of character fields, the field length. You specify the link
templates key fields by selecting the check box to the
left of the field name.

Link Template Properties Dialog Box

Displays the full data source path to a link templates table. You can use this
dialog box to update a link template with new data source information.
Before the Link Template Properties dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the
Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 243), from which you can select
a link template.
You can open this dialog box using the following method:
dbConnect menu: Templates Link Template Properties

Template Name Displays the name of the selected link template.

Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new data source
from this list to apply to the link template.
Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new catalog
from this list to apply to the link template.
Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new schema
from this list to apply to the link template.
Table Displays the name of the database table specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new table from
this list to apply to the link template.
Keys Displays the key fields specified for the selected link
template.

240 | DBCONNECT
New Label Template Dialog Box
Creates a new label template.You can open this dialog box using the follow-
ing methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a database table in the dbConnect Man-
ager and choose the New Label Template button.
Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template
list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create
Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the
selected database table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog
box (see page 241) is displayed.
dbConnect menu: Templates New Label Template. Select a link template
from the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 243) and choose
Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table in the dbConnect Manager and
choose New Label Template.

After you enter a name for the label template and choose Continue, the Label
Template dialog box (see page 231) opens, in which you specify the fields to
display in your label and how to format them.
New Label Specifies a name for the label template.
Template Name
Start with Lists available label templates in the current drawing,
Template from which you can select one to use as a start point for
your new label template.

New Link Template Dialog Box

Creates a new link template. You can open this dialog box using the follow-
ing methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a database table in the dbConnect Man-
ager and choose the New Link Template button.
Data View buttons: Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list,
and then choose the Link button flyout.
Link dbConnect menu: Templates New Link Template. Navigate to and then
select a database table in the Select Data Object dialog box (see page 244) and
choose Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose
New Link Template.

DBCONNECT | 241
After you enter a name for the link template and choose Continue, the Link
Template dialog box (see page 239) opens, in which you specify the key fields
that the link uses.
New Link Specifies a name for the link template.
Template Name
Start with Lists all available link templates from the current
Template drawing, from which you can select one to use as a
starting point for the new link template.

New Query Dialog Box

Creates a new query and opens the Query Editor. You can open this dialog
box using the following methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a link template, database table, or exist-
ing query in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button.
dbConnect menu: Queries New Query on an External Table, New Query
on a Link Template. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which you can select
a database object to query.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template, database table, or existing query
in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query.

After you enter a name for the query and choose Continue, the Query Editor
(see page 215) is displayed, in which you can construct a new query.
New Query Specifies a name for the query.
Name
Existing Query Lists all available queries from the current drawing.
Names

Replace Dialog Box

Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data
View table. You can specify a replacement value that overwrites the value
that youre searching for. The search is limited to a single database table col-
umn. It is not possible to conduct a global search that scans all columns in
the database table. You can open this dialog box using the following
methods:
Data View menu: Replace. (This menu is available only if you have a database
table open in the Data View window.)

242 | DBCONNECT
Shortcut menu: Right-click a single cell or column header in the Data View
window and choose Replace.

Find What Specifies the value to search for.

Replace With Specifies a replacement value for the value that youre
searching for.
Match Case Searches for the exact value, including case, of what
you enter in Find What. If this option is cleared,
AutoCAD searches for the value regardless of case.
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that youre
searching for.
Replace Replaces the next occurrence of the value that youre
searching for with the value specified in Replace With.
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the value that youre
searching for with the value specified in Replace With.

Select a Database Object Dialog Box

Displays a list of the database objects, such as link templates, label templates,
or queries, that are associated with the current drawing. You can select a data-
base object from this list to apply to the current operation. You can open this
dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Templates New Label Template, Edit Link Template, Edit
Label Template, Delete Link Template, or Delete Label Template; Queries
Execute Query, New Query on a Link Template, Edit Query, or Delete Query;
Links Delete Links; Labels Reload Labels, Show Labels, Hide Labels, or
Delete Labels; View Data View Linked Table, Edit Linked Table

Database Object Lists the available database objects that are associated
List with the current drawing, from which you must select
one to apply to the current operation.
OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a
secondary dialog box in which you can continue the
current operation. If, for example, you are creating a
new label template, the New Label Template dialog box
is displayed.

DBCONNECT | 243
Select a Data Object Dialog Box
Displays the Data Sources node of the dbConnect Manager, from which you
can navigate to and select a database table that the current operation is
applied to. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Data Sources Connect; Templates New Link
Template; Queries New Query on an External Table; View Data View
External Table, Edit External Table
Tree View Lists the available data sources, from which you can
Window select a database table to apply to the current operation.
OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a
secondary dialog box or window, in which you can
continue the current operation. If, for example, you are
creating a new link template, the New Link Template
dialog box is displayed.

Sort Dialog Box

Specifies a sort order that is applied to the database table records displayed in
the Data View window. You can select a combination of up to five columns
to apply to the sort order. You can open this dialog box using the following
method:
Shortcut menu: Right-click a column header in the Data View window and
choose Sort.

Sort By Specifies the primary column to apply to the sort

operation. The data from this column is sorted first, and
then the data from any additional Then By columns
that are specified is sorted.
Ascending Applies an ascending sort order to the selected column.
The column data is ordered with the smallest value at
the beginning of the Data View record set and the
largest value at the end of the record set.
Descending Applies a descending sort order to the selected column.
The column data is ordered with the largest value at the
beginning of the Data View record set and the smallest
value at the end of the record set.
Then By Specifies an additional column to apply to the sort
operation.

244 | DBCONNECT
Reset Clears all columns that are specified for the current sort
order so that you can specify a new sort order.

Synchronize Dialog Box

Updates links that AutoCAD is unable to resolve. Links can become invalid
if you change the underlying structure of their source database table, or if you
move the source table to a new location. In these cases, the structure speci-
fied by the link template used to create the links is no longer valid, and link
templates and any associated links must be updated.
The Synchronize dialog box provides a list of detected errors. Certain errors
(such as a resized column in the source database table) can be fixed directly
from the Synchronize dialog box. Other errors (such as links that point to
nonexistent records) must be fixed in the source database table.
You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Synchronize
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Synchronize.

Errors Displays a list of errors detected. You can select an error

to fix.
Description Provides a brief description of the error selected in the
Errors list.
Fix Fixes the currently selected error.
Delete Deletes the invalid link template and any associated
links from the current drawing.

DBCONNECT | 245
Close Closes the dialog box.
Indicate Drawing Indicates all objects in the current drawing that are
Objects associated with the invalid link template.

DBLCLKEDIT
Controls double-click behavior
Command line: dblclkedit

Enter double-click editing mode [ON/OFF] <ON>:

If double-click editing is turned on, one of several dialog boxes may be dis-
played, depending on the object type that is double-clicked.
When you double-click most objects, the Properties palette is displayed.
Double-clicking some types of objects displays specialized editors that are
more powerful, convenient, or frequently used. Objects that display special-
ized editors when double-clicked include

Attribute: Displays the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (DDEDIT).

Attribute within a block: Displays the Enhanced Attribute Editor (EATTEDIT).
Block: Displays the Reference Edit dialog box (REFEDIT).
Hatch: Displays the Hatch Edit dialog box (HATCHEDIT).
Leader text: Displays the Multiline Text Editor (DDEDIT).
Multiline: Displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box (MLEDIT).
Multiline text: Displays the Multiline Text Editor (DDEDIT).
Text: Displays the Edit Text dialog box (DDEDIT).
Xref: Displays the Reference Edit dialog box (REFEDIT).

Note The DBLCLKEDIT command must be on and the PICKFIRST system vari-
able must be on (set to 1, the default) for double-clicking to work.

DBLIST
Lists database information for each object in the drawing dblist

The text window displays information about each object in the current draw-
ing. AutoCAD pauses when the window fills with information. Press ENTER
to resume output, or press ESC to cancel.

246 | DBLCLKEDIT
DDEDIT
Edits text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute
definition is a template for creating an attribute. A feature control frame is a
container for the tolerance information for a single dimension.

Text toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Mtext Edit or Text Edit.
Command line: ddedit

Select an annotation object or [Undo]:

Object Selection Displays one of four dialog boxes, depending on the

type of text you select:

Text created using TEXT or DTEXT displays the Edit

Text dialog box (see page 247).
Text created using MTEXT displays the Multiline Text
Editor (see page 567).
Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition)
display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (see
page 248).
Feature control frames display the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box (see page 1008).

DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to

end the command.
Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous
value. You can use this option immediately after
editing.

Edit Text Dialog Box

Modifies text created with TEXT or DTEXT. Enter the new text and choose OK
to update the object.
To add a field to the text, right-click the text where you want to insert the
field and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog
box.

DDEDIT | 247
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Modifies an attribute definitions tag, prompt, and default value.
Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute
in the drawing. The tag can contain any characters
except spaces or exclamation marks (!). Lowercase
letters are automatically changed to uppercase.
Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when
you insert a block containing this attribute definition.
If you need leading blanks in the prompt, start the
string with a backslash (\). If the first character must be
a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.
Default Specifies the default attribute value. If you need leading
blanks in the default value, start the string with a
backslash (\). If the first character must be a backslash,
start the string with two backslashes.
To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert
Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog
box.

DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects
Format menu: Point Style
Command line: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use)

The Point Style dialog box is displayed.

Point Style Dialog Box

Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting
an icon.

248 | DDPTYPE
Point Display Images
Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in
the PDMODE system variable.

Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen
or in absolute units. AutoCAD stores the point display size in the PDSIZE sys-
tem variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value.
Set Size Relative Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen
to Screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom
in or out.
Set Size in Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify
Absolute Units under Point Size. AutoCAD displays points larger or
smaller when you zoom in or out.

DDPTYPE | 249
DDVPOINT
Sets the three-dimensional viewing direction
View menu: 3D Views Viewpoint Presets
Command line: ddvpoint

The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed.

Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box

Defines 3D view settings.

Set Viewing Angles

Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system
(WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS).

Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS.

Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS.

250 | DDVPOINT
From
Specifies viewing angles.
X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis.
XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane.
You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm
indicates the new angle. The gray arm indicates the current angle. Specify an
angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the
bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that
region. If you select the inner arc or an area inside it, the angle is not rounded
off, and the result may be a fractional number.

Set to Plan View

Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view (XY plane) relative to the
selected coordinate system.

DELAY
Provides a timed pause within a script
Command line: delay (or 'delay for transparent use)

Enter delay time (in milliseconds): Enter a value from 0 through 32,767
milliseconds

Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays
the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The long-
est delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.

DETACHURL
Removes hyperlinks in a drawing
Command line: detachurl

Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection

Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the
polyline is deleted. You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer.

DELAY | 251
DIM and DIM1
Accesses Dimensioning mode
DIM and DIM1 start Dimensioning mode, in which you can use the dimen-
sioning subcommands from earlier releases of AutoCAD. (DIM and DIM1 are
provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain
in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command. Use
DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the
Command prompt.
Command line: dim or dim1

Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command

The Dim prompt indicates that youre in Dimensioning mode. In Dimen-

sioning mode, you can use a special set of dimensioning commands instead
of the main dimensioning commands. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e
or exit, or press ESC .

Dimensioning Mode Commands

The following commands are available at the DIM prompt.

Dimensioning mode commands

Command Description

EXIT Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt. You
can also press ESC to exit Dimensioning mode.

REDRAW Redraws the current viewport.

STYLE Changes the current text style.

UNDO or U Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any
new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning
mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.

252 | DIM and DIM1

The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the
rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these
Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD command.

Dimensioning mode command equivalents

Dimensioning mode Equivalent

command command

ALIGNED DIMALIGNED

ANGULAR DIMANGULAR

BASELINE DIMBASELINE

CENTER DIMCENTER

CONTINUE DIMCONTINUE

DIAMETER DIMDIAMETER

HOMETEXT DIMEDIT Home

HORIZONTAL DIMLINEAR Horizontal

LEADER LEADER

NEWTEXT DIMEDIT New

OBLIQUE DIMEDIT Oblique

ORDINATE DIMORDINATE

OVERRIDE DIMOVERRIDE

RADIUS DIMRADIUS

RESTORE -DIMSTYLE Restore

ROTATED DIMLINEAR Rotated

SAVE -DIMSTYLE Save

STATUS -DIMSTYLE Status

TEDIT DIMTEDIT

TROTATE DIMEDIT Rotate

DIM and DIM1 | 253

Dimensioning mode command equivalents (continued)

Dimensioning mode Equivalent

command command

UPDATE -DIMSTYLE Apply

VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE Variables

VERTICAL DIMLINEAR Vertical

DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Aligned
Command line: dimaligned

Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point for manual
extension lines, or press ENTER for automatic extension lines

After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines, the following
prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option

254 | DIMALIGNED
Extension Line Origin
Specifies the first extension line origin (1). AutoCAD prompts you to specify
the second one.
Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)

2
point specification dimension line loca-
tion designated

Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
Select object to dimension:

For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc
segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly
scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the exten-
sion lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance
specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Mod-
ify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE). AutoCAD
stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.

offset from origin

(stored in DIMEXO)

object selected dimension line location

designated

DIMALIGNED | 255
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of
the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the
first extension line.

Dimension Line Location

Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction
to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED
command ends.

Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 567), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measure-
ment, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control
codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1004.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Change Existing Objects, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.

256 | DIMALIGNED
Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:

Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measure-
ment. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
before Angle
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:

Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
after Angle
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line
Location prompt.
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Angular
Command line: dimangular

Select arc, circle, line, or <specify vertex>: Select an arc, circle, or line, or press
ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points

After you define the angle to dimension, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:

DIMANGULAR | 257
Arc Selection
Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point
angular dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc end-
points become the origin points of the extension lines.
AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines.
AutoCAD draws the extension lines from the angle endpoints to the intersec-
angle vertex tion of the dimension line.

1
Circle Selection
2 Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center
of the circle is the angle vertex.
Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (2)
angle
vertex The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and
does not have to lie on the circle.

Line Selection
Defines the angle using two lines.
Select second line:

AutoCAD determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle
and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line
spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not inter-
angle displayed sect the lines being dimensioned, AutoCAD adds extension lines as needed
depends on cur- to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees.
sor position
Three-Point Specification
Creates a dimension based on three points you specify.
2 Specify angle vertex: Specify a point (1)
3
1 Specify first angle endpoint: Specify a point (2)
Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (3)

The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints. If you need
extension lines, the endpoints are used as origin points.
AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines.
The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection
of the dimension line.

258 | DIMANGULAR
Dimension Arc Line Location
Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction
to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR
ends.

Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 567), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement,
enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes
and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1004.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Change Existing Objects, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.

Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:

Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measure-
ment. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

DIMANGULAR | 259
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:

Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimen-
sion or a selected dimension
DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same
baseline. AutoCAD uses a baseline increment value to offset each new dimen-
sion line and to avoid overlaying the previous dimension line. The baseline
increment value is specified in Baseline Spacing on the Lines and Arrows tab
of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see page
286). AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMDLI system variable. Baseline
dimensioning is also called parallel dimensioning.

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Baseline
Command line: dimbaseline

If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to

select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the base-
line dimension.
Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension

Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that
was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angu-
lar, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension

If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:

Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>:

To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC . The current dimen-
sion style determines the appearance of the text.

260 | DIMBASELINE
Second Extension Line Origin
By default, AutoCAD uses the first extension line of the base dimension as
the extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default
behavior, explicitly select the base dimension; the extension line origin
becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point
of the selection. When you select a second point, AutoCAD draws the base-
line dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin
prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To select another linear, ordinate,
or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press
ENTER .

Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension

Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.

angular baseline dimensioning linear baseline dimensioning

Feature Location
Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline
dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select
a feature location, AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the
Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To select
another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the base-
line dimension, press ENTER .
Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension

Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.

DIMBASELINE | 261
Undo
Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session.

Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
base for the baseline dimension. After you select a base dimension, AutoCAD
redisplays the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify
Feature Location prompt.

DIMCENTER
Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Center Mark
center mark
Command line: dimcenter

Select arc or circle: Use an object selection method

You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size
centerlines when you set up the dimension style. See DIMSTYLE. You can also change cen-
ter mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable.

DIMCONTINUE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the pre-
vious dimension or a selected dimension
DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions, such as several shorter
dimensions that add up to the total measurement. Continued dimensioning
is also known as chain dimensioning.
When you create linear continued dimensions, the first extension line is sup-
pressed and the placement of text and arrowheads might include a leader
line. These appear as overrides for the continued dimension (the DIMSE1 sys-
tem variable is on, and the DIMTMOVE system variable is 1).

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Continue
Command line: dimcontinue

262 | DIMCENTER
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to
select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the con-
tinued dimension.
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension

If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:

Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>:

To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC . The current dimen-
sion style determines the appearance of the text.

Second Extension Line Origin

Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the
1
first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension
style determines the appearance of the text.
After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD redisplays the Specify a
Second Extension Line Origin prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To
select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for
the continued dimension, press ENTER .
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension

Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.

Feature Location
Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued
dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select
a feature location, AutoCAD draws the continued dimension and redisplays
the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To
select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for
the continued dimension, press ENTER .
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension

Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.

DIMCONTINUE | 263
Undo
Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.

Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD
redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify
Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC .

DIMDIAMETER
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs
DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on
the size of the circle or arc, the options set for the dimension style (see DIM-
STYLE), and the position of the cursor. The dimension style controls center
marks and centerlines. AutoCAD does not draw a center mark or a centerline
when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. AutoCAD stores the
setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system variable.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the diameter line is greater than
15 degrees from horizontal and is outside the circle or arc, AutoCAD draws a
hook line one arrowhead long next to the dimension text, as shown in the
first two illustrations.

Different types of diameter dimensions

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Diameter
Command line: dimdiameter

Select arc or circle:

264 | DIMDIAMETER
AutoCAD measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter sym-
bol () in front of it. The position of the cursor determines the location of
the dimension line. As you move the cursor, the dimension moves around or
inside the circle or arc.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option

Dimension Line Location

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the
location, AutoCAD draws the dimension.

Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 567), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement,
enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes
and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1004.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Change Existing Objects, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension
text.

Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:

DIMDIAMETER | 265
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measure-
ment. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to rep-
resent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:

Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line
Location prompt.

DIMDISASSOCIATE
Removes associativity from selected dimensions
DIMDISASSOCIATE converts selected dimensions that are associated with geo-
metric objects into non-associative dimensions.
Command line: dimdisassociate

Select dimensions to disassociate: Select one or more dimensions and then press
ENTER

DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimen-

sions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than
the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative dimen-
sions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these
dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and
the number that are disassociated.

266 | DIMDISASSOCIATE
DIMEDIT
Edits dimensions
DIMEDIT affects dimension text and extension lines on one or more dimen-
sion objects. The Home, New, and Rotate options affect dimension text. The
Oblique option controls the angle of extension lines.

Dimension toolbar:
Command line: dimedit

Enter type of dimension editing [Home/New/Rotate/Oblique] <Home>: Enter

an option or press ENTER

Home Moves rotated dimension text back to its default

position.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select
dimension objects

before Home after Home

The selected dimension text is returned to its default

position and rotation as specified in its dimension style.
New Changes dimension text using the Multiline Text Editor
(see page 567).

before New after New

AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with

angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the
generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix
before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and

DIMEDIT | 267
Unicode character strings to enter special characters or
symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters
on page 1004.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete
the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and
then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display them by entering
square brackets ([ ]). For more information about
formatting dimension text, see Change Existing
Objects, in the Users Guide.
Rotate Rotates dimension text. This option is similar to the
Angle option of DIMTEDIT.
Enter text angle:

Entering 0 places the text in its default orientation,

which is determined by the vertical and horizontal text
settings on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE.
rotated text The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this
orientation.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select
dimension objects

Oblique Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for

linear dimensions. AutoCAD creates linear dimensions
with extension lines perpendicular to the direction of
the dimension line. The Oblique option is useful when
extension lines conflict with other features of the
drawing.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select
dimension objects

Enter oblique angle (press ENTER for none): Enter an

angle or press ENTER

268 | DIMEDIT
DIMLINEAR
Creates linear dimensions

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Linear
Command line: dimlinear

Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point or press
ENTER to select an object to dimension

After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension,
the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/
Rotated]: Specify a point or enter an option

DIMLINEAR | 269
First Extension Line Origin
Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify
the origin point of the first.
Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)

2
point specification

Dimension Line Location

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the
direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location,
AutoCAD draws the dimension.

dimension line
location designated

270 | DIMLINEAR
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Change Existing Objects, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.

Text
Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:

Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measure-
ment. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to rep-
resent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:

Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 90 degrees, enter 90.

before Angle after Angle

DIMLINEAR | 271
Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option

Dimension Line Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line.
Location After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the
dimension.
Mtext, Text, These text editing and formatting options are identical
Angle in all dimension commands. See the option
descriptions provided earlier in this command.

Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option

Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Specify angle of dimension line <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER

272 | DIMLINEAR
Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
Select object to dimension:

For polylines and other explodable objects, AutoCAD dimensions only the
individual line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a non-
uniformly scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, AutoCAD uses the line or arc endpoints as the
origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the end-
points by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and
Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
See DIMSTYLE. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.
offset from origin
(DIMEXO system
variable)

object selected dimension line location

designated

If you select a circle, AutoCAD uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of
the extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the
north or south quadrant point, AutoCAD draws a horizontal dimension.
When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant
point, AutoCAD draws a vertical dimension.

DIMLINEAR | 273
DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate point dimensions
Ordinate dimensions display the X or Y ordinate of a feature along with a
simple leader line. These dimensions are also known as datum dimensions.
AutoCAD uses the current user coordinate system (UCS) to determine the
measured X or Y ordinate and draws the leader line in a direction orthogonal
to the axes of the current UCS. The absolute value of the coordinate is used
according to the prevailing standards for ordinate dimensions.

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Ordinate
Command line: dimordinate

Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object

Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point
or enter an option

Leader Endpoint Uses the difference between the feature location and
Specification the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or
a Y ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y
ordinate is greater, the dimension measures the X
ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate.
Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the
orientation of the leader line and dimension text.
Xdatum
AutoCAD displays the Leader Endpoint prompt, where
you can specify the endpoint.
Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation
of the leader line and dimension text. AutoCAD
Ydatum displays the Leader Endpoint prompts, where you can
specify the endpoint.

274 | DIMORDINATE
Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 567), which
you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD
represents the generated measurement with angle
brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the
generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix
before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and
Unicode character strings to enter special characters or
symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters
on page 1004.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete
the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and
then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display them by entering
square brackets ([ ]). For more information about
formatting dimension text, see Change Existing
Objects, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance
of the generated measurements. After you choose OK,
AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt.
Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line.
AutoCAD displays the generated dimension
measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text,
or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement

To include the generated measurement, use angle

brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog
boxes. After you press ENTER , AutoCAD redisplays the
Leader Endpoint prompt.

DIMORDINATE | 275
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:

Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45

degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the
Leader Endpoint prompt.

DIMOVERRIDE
Overrides dimensioning system variables
DIMOVERRIDE overrides dimensioning system variable settings that are asso-
ciated with a dimension object but doesn't affect the current dimension style.
You can also use the command to clear overrides from dimensions.
Dimension menu: Override
Command line: dimoverride

Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: Enter the name
of a dimension variable, or enter c

Dimension Overrides the value of the dimensioning system

Variable Name variable you specify.
to Override
Enter new value for dimension variable <current>: Enter a
value or press ENTER

If you enter a new value, AutoCAD redisplays the

Dimension Variable Name to Override prompt. If you
press ENTER , AutoCAD prompts you to select the
dimensions.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the
dimensions

AutoCAD applies the overrides to the selected

dimensions.

276 | DIMOVERRIDE
Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the
dimensions

AutoCAD clears the overrides, and the dimension

objects return to the settings defined by their
dimension style.

DIMRADIUS
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs
A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at
the arc or circle end. AutoCAD draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system
variable is not set to 0.
DIMRADIUS draws different types of radial dimensions depending on the size
of the circle or arc, the options in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. AutoCAD
stores the values of the options in the DIMUPT, DIMTOFL, DIMATFIT, DIMTIH,
DIMTOH, DIMJUST, and DIMTAD system variables.

For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is
greater than 15 degrees from horizontal, AutoCAD draws a hook line, also
called a dogleg or landing, one arrowhead long, next to the dimension text.

AutoCAD measures the radius and displays the text with the letter R in front
of it.

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Radius
Command line: dimradius

Select arc or circle:

Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter

an option

DIMRADIUS | 277
Dimension Line Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line.
Location After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the
dimension.
Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 567), which
you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD
represents the generated measurement with angle
brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the
generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix
before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and
Unicode character strings to enter special characters or
symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters
on page 1004.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete
the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and
then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display them by entering
square brackets ([ ]). For more information about
formatting dimension text, see Change Existing
Objects in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance
of the generated measurements. After you choose OK,
AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line.
AutoCAD displays the generated dimension
measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text,
or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement

To include the generated measurement, use angle

brackets (< >) to represent the generated
measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units
by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog
boxes.
After you press ENTER , the Dimension Line Location
prompt is displayed.

278 | DIMRADIUS
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:

Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45

degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD displays the
Dimension Line Location prompt.

DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects
With DIMREASSOCIATE, a nonassociative dimension can be associated to geo-
metric objects, or the existing associations in an associative dimension can
be changed.
Dimension menu: Reassociate Dimensions
Command line: dimreassociate

Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects

Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association

points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is dis-
played for each association point prompt. If the definition point of the cur-
rent dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears as
an X; if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside
a box.

Note The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse.

Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were
already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed
dimensions.
The prompts for the different types of dimensions are
Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object]
<next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select
a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt

Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an

object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next
dimension object, if any

DIMREASSOCIATE | 279
Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object]
<next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select
a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt

Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an

object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next
dimension object, if any

Angular (Three Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] <next>: Spec-
Point) ify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a cir-
cle, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt

Specify first angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object

snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt

Specify second angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object

snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any

Angular (Two Select first line <next>: Select a line, or press ENTER to
Line) skip to the next prompt

Select second line <next>: Select another line, or press

ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any

Diameter Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle, or press

ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any

Leader Specify leader association point <next>: Specify an object

snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any

Ordinate Specify feature location <next>: Specify an object snap

location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any

Radius Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle, or press

ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any

Note DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension.

Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings.

280 | DIMREASSOCIATE
DIMREGEN
Updates the locations of all associative dimensions
Command line: dimregen

The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are

updated.
Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in
three cases:

After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model

space active, update associative dimensions created in paper space.
After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version
of AutoCAD, update associative dimensions if the dimensioned objects
have been modified.
After opening a drawing containing external references that are dimen-
sioned in the current drawing, update associative dimensions if the asso-
ciated external reference geometry has been modified.

DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles
A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the
appearance of the dimension. By creating dimension styles, you can set all
relevant dimensioning system variables and control the layout and appear-
ance of any dimension.
Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings.
For example, within a dimension style, you can create a secondary style for
radius dimensions and another secondary style for angular dimensions.
AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the type of dimension you
create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type, the pri-
mary dimension-style settings are used.

Styles toolbar:
Format menu: Dimension Style
Dimension menu: Style
Command line: dimstyle

DIMREGEN | 281
The Dimension Style Manager is displayed.
If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, AutoCAD presents options
on the command line (see page 305).

Dimension Style Manager

Creates new styles, sets the current style, modifies styles, sets overrides on the
current style, and compares styles.

Current Dimstyle
Displays the current dimension style. AutoCAD assigns styles to all dimen-
sions. If you do not change the current style, AutoCAD assigns the default
STANDARD style to dimensions.

Styles
Displays all dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted.
The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed. To make a
style current, select it and choose Set Current.
Unless you select Dont List Styles in Xrefs, AutoCAD displays dimension
styles in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally ref-
erenced named objects. (See Overview of External References in the Users
Guide.) Although you cannot change, rename, or make current externally ref-
erenced dimension styles, you can create new styles based on them.

282 | DIMSTYLE
Right-click in the Styles list to display a shortcut menu that you can use to
set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a
style that is current or in use in the current drawing.

List
Provides options that control which dimension styles are displayed.
All Styles Displays all dimension styles.
Styles in Use Displays only the dimension styles that are referenced
by dimensions in the drawing.

Dont List Styles in Xrefs

Suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings
under Styles.

Set Current
Sets the style selected under Styles to current.

New
Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you can
define new dimension styles. See New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes on page 284.

Modify
Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can modify
dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New
Dimension Style dialog box. See New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes on page 284.

Override
Displays the Override Current Style dialog box, in which you can set tempo-
rary overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those
in the New Dimension Style dialog box. See New, Modify, and Override
Dimension Style Dialog Boxes on page 284. AutoCAD displays overrides as
unsaved changes under the dimension in the Styles list.

Compare
Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box (see page 304), which
compares the properties of two dimension styles or lists all the properties of
one style.

DIMSTYLE | 283
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box
Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one,
and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply.
New Style Name Names the new style.
Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new
style, you change only the properties that differ from
the properties you start with.
Use For Creates a style that applies only to specific dimension
types. For example, suppose that the text color for the
STANDARD style is black, but you want the text to be
blue only for diameter dimensions. Under Start With,
select STANDARD, and under Use For, select Diameter.
New Style Name becomes unavailable because you are
defining a substyle of STANDARD. After you change the
text color to blue in the New Dimension Style dialog
box, Diameter is displayed as a substyle under
STANDARD in the Dimension Style Manager. When you
use the STANDARD style for diameter dimensions, the
text is blue. When you use STANDARD for all other
dimension types, the text is black.
Continue Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box, in which
you define the new style properties.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style

Dialog Boxes
Set properties for dimension styles. When you choose Continue in the Create
New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is dis-
played. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dia-
log box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you
selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box.
Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager dis-
plays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog
box. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension
Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an existing
dimension style rather than creating a new one.
The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option.

284 | DIMSTYLE
Lines and Arrows Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style
Dialog Boxes)
Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrow-
heads, and center marks.

Dimension Lines
Sets the dimension line properties.
Color Sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 172). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRD system variable)
You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. (DIMLWD
system variable)

DIMSTYLE | 285
Extend Beyond Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past
Ticks the extension line when you use oblique, architectural,
tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE
system variable)

extension

Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a

baseline dimension. Enter a distance. This value is
stored in the DIMDLI system variable. For information
about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE.
Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines. Dim Line 1
suppresses the first dimension line; Dim Line 2
spacing suppresses the second dimension line. (DIMSD1 and
DIMSD2 system variables)

1 2 1 2

first dimension line second dimension line

suppressed suppressed

Extension Lines
Controls the appearance of the extension lines.
Color Sets the color for the extension line. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 172). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRE system variable.)
You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE
system variable)
Extend Beyond Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above
Dim Lines the dimension line. (DIMEXE system variable)
extension

286 | DIMSTYLE
Offset From Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the
Origin points on the drawing that define the dimension.
(DIMEXO system variable)

offset

Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. Ext Line 1

suppresses the first extension line; Ext Line 2 suppresses
the second extension line. (DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system
variables)

1 2 1 2
first extension line second extension line
suppressed suppressed

Arrowheads
Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads.
1st Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When
you change the first arrowhead type, the second
arrowhead automatically changes to match it.
(DIMBLK1 system variable)
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User
Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is
displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead
block. (The block must be in the drawing.)
2nd Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line.
(DIMBLK2 system variable)
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User
Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is
displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead
block. (The block must be in the drawing.)

DIMSTYLE | 287
Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK
system variable)
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User
Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is
displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead
block. (The block must be in the drawing.)
Arrow Size Sets the size of arrowheads. (DIMASZ system variable)
Center Marks for Circles
Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and
radial dimensions. The DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS com-
mands use center marks and centerlines. For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS,
AutoCAD draws the center mark only if you place the dimension line outside
the circle or arc.
Type Provides three center mark type options:

Mark: Creates a center mark. The size of the center

mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN
system variable.
Line: Creates a centerline. The size of the centerline
is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system
variable.
None: Creates no center mark or centerline. The
value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable.

Size Sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN

system variable)

288 | DIMSTYLE
Text Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog
Boxes)
Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.

Text Appearance
Controls the dimension text format and size.
Text Style Displays and sets the current style for dimension text.
Select a style from the list. To create and modify styles
for dimension text, choose the [...] button next to the
list. (DIMTXSTY system variable)
Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box (see page 967), in
which you can define or modify text styles.
Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 172). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRT system variable)
You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

DIMSTYLE | 289
Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. If a
fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text
style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the
text height set here. If you want to use the height set on
the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style
is set to 0. (DIMTXT system variable)
Fraction Height Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text.
Scale This option is available only when Fractional is selected
as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab. The value
entered here is multiplied by the text height to
determine the height of dimension fractions relative to
dimension text. (DIMTFAC system variable)
Draw Frame Draws a frame around dimension text. Selecting this
Around Text option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system
variable to a negative value.
Text Placement
Controls the placement of dimension text.
Vertical Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in
relation to the dimension line. The vertical setting is
stored in the DIMTAD system variable. Vertical position
options include the following:

Centered: Centers the dimension text between the

two parts of the dimension line.
Above: Places the dimension text above the
dimension line. The distance from the dimension
line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the
current text gap. See Offset from Dim Line on page
292.
Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the
dimension line farthest away from the first defining
point.
JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a
Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation.

290 | DIMSTYLE
Centered Above Outside JIS

Horizontal Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text in

relation to the dimension line and the extension lines.
The horizontal setting is stored in the DIMJUST system
variable. Horizontal position options include the
following:

Centered: Centers the dimension text along the

dimension line between the extension lines.
At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first
extension line along the dimension line. The
distance between the extension line and the text is
twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See
Arrowheads on page 287 and Offset from Dim
Line on page 292.
At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second
extension line along the dimension line. The
distance between the extension line and the text is
twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See
Arrowheads on page 287 and Offset from Dim
Line on page 292.

1 2 1 2
centered first extension second extension
line line

Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the

first extension line.
Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the
second extension line.

DIMSTYLE | 291
1 2 1 2
text over first extension line text over second extension line

Offset from Dim Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around
Line the dimension text when the dimension line is broken
to accommodate the dimension text.
AutoCAD also uses this value as the minimum length
required for dimension line segments.
AutoCAD positions text inside the extension lines only
if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text
gap. Text above or below the dimension line is placed
inside only if the arrowheads, dimension text, and a
margin leave enough room for the text gap. (DIMGAP
system variable)

DIMGAP = 0 DIMGAP = 0.1

Text Alignment
Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether
it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system
variables)
Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position.
Aligned With Aligns text with the dimension line.
Dimension Line
ISO Standard Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside
the extension lines, but aligns it horizontally when text
is outside the extension lines.
Fit Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes)
Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the
dimension line.

292 | DIMSTYLE
Fit Options
Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available
between the extension lines.
When space is available, AutoCAD places text and arrowheads between the
extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the
Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables)
Either the Text Places text and arrowheads as follows:
or the Arrows,
Whichever Fits When enough space is available for text and
Best arrowheads, places both between the extension
lines. Otherwise, AutoCAD moves either the text or
the arrowheads based on the best fit.
When enough space is available for text only, places
text between the extension lines and places
arrowheads outside the extension lines.
When enough space is available for arrowheads only,
places them between the extension lines and places
text outside the extension lines.
When space is available for neither text nor
arrowheads, places them both outside the extension
lines.

DIMSTYLE | 293
Arrows Places text and arrowheads as follows:

When enough space is available for text and

arrowheads, places both between the extension
lines.
When space is available for arrowheads only, places
them between the extension lines and places text
outside them.
When not enough space is available for arrowheads,
places both text and arrowheads outside the
extension lines.

Text Places text and arrowheads as follows:

When space is available for text and arrowheads,

places both between the extension lines.
When space is available for text only, places the text
between the extension lines and places arrowheads
outside them.
When not enough space is available for text, places
both text and arrowheads outside the extension
lines.

Both Text and When not enough space is available for text and
Arrows arrowheads, places both outside the extension lines.
Always Keep Text Always places text between extension lines. This value
Between Ext is stored in the DIMTIX system variable.
Lines
Suppress Arrows Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available
If They Dont Fit inside the extension lines. (DIMSOXD system variable)
Inside Extension
Lines
Text Placement
Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default posi-
tion, that is, the position defined by the dimension style. (DIMTMOVE system
variable)
Beside the Places dimension text beside the dimension line.
Dimension Line
Over the If text is moved away from the dimension line, creates
Dimension Line, a leader connecting the text to the dimension line.
with a Leader AutoCAD omits the leader when text is too close to the
dimension line.

294 | DIMSTYLE
Over the Keeps the dimension line in the same place when text
Dimension Line, is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension
Without a Leader line is not connected to the dimension line with a
leader.
Scale for Dimension Features
Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling.
Use Overall Scale Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify
Of size, distance, or spacing, including text and arrowhead
sizes. This scale does not change dimension
measurement values. This value is stored in the
DIMSCALE system variable.

Scale Dimension Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between

to Layout (Paper the current model space viewport and paper space. This
Space) value is stored as 0 in the DIMSCALE system variable.
When you work in paper space, but not in a model
space viewport, or when TILEMODE is set to 1, AutoCAD
uses the default scale factor of 1.0 for the DIMSCALE
system variable.
Fine Tuning
Sets additional fit options.
Place Text Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places
Manually When the text at the position you specify at the Dimension
Dimensioning Line Location prompt. This value is stored in the
DIMUPT system variable.

Always Draw Dim Draws dimension lines between the measured points
Line Between Ext even when AutoCAD places the arrowheads outside the
Lines measured points. This value is stored in the DIMTOFL
system variable.

DIMSTYLE | 295
Primary Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style
Dialog Boxes)
Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes
and suffixes for dimension text.

Linear Dimensions
Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions.
Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types
except Angular. This value is stored in the DIMLUNIT
system variable.
The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are
based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way
that tolerance values use this system variable).
Precision Sets the number of decimal places in the dimension
text. This value is stored in the DIMDEC system variable.
Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions. This value is stored in the
DIMFRAC system variable.

Decimal Sets the separator for decimal formats. This value is

Separator stored in the DIMDSEP system variable.

296 | DIMSTYLE
Round Off Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all
dimension types except Angular.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to
the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you enter a value of
1.0, AutoCAD rounds all dimension distances to the
nearest integer. This value is stored in the DIMRND
system variable.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point
depends on the Precision setting.
Prefix Indicates a prefix for the dimension text. You can enter
text or use control codes to display special symbols (see
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1004).
For example, entering the control code %%c displays
the diameter symbol. When you enter a prefix, it
overrides any default prefixes such as those used in
diameter () and radius (R) dimensioning. This value is
stored in the DIMPOST system variable.
If you specify tolerances, AutoCAD adds the prefix to
the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Suffix Indicates a suffix for the dimension text. You can enter
text or use control codes to display special symbols (see
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1004).
For example, entering the text mm results in dimension
text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you
enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. This
value is stored in DIMPOST.
If you specify tolerances, AutoCAD adds the suffix to
the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Measurement Defines measurement scale options as follows:
Scale
Scale Factor: Sets a scale factor for linear dimension
measurements. AutoCAD multiplies the dimension
measurement by the value entered here. For
example, if you enter 2, AutoCAD displays a 1-inch
dimension as 2 inches. The value does not apply to
angular dimensions and is not applied to rounding
values or to plus or minus tolerance values. This
value is stored in the DIMLFAC system variable.
Apply to Layout Dimensions Only: Applies the linear
scale value only to dimensions created in layouts.

DIMSTYLE | 297
This sets the length scale factor to reflect the zoom
scale factor for objects in a model space viewport.
When you select this option, the length scaling
value is stored as a negative value in the DIMLFAC
system variable.

Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros,

and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Zero
suppression settings also affect real-to-string
conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and
angtos functions. AutoCAD stores this value in the
DIMZIN system variable.

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal

dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal
dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5,
and 30.0000 becomes 30.
0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is less than one
foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is an integral
number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

Angular Dimensions
Sets the current angle format for angular dimensions.
Units Format Sets the angular units format. This value is stored in the
DIMAUNIT system variable.

Precision Sets the number of decimal places for angular

dimensions. This value is stored in the DIMADEC system
variable.
Zero Suppression Suppresses leading and trailing zeros. This value is
stored in DIMAZIN.

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal

dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal
dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5,
and 30.0000 becomes 30.

298 | DIMSTYLE
Alternate Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style
Dialog Boxes)
Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their
format and precision.

Display Alternate Units

Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. AutoCAD sets the
DIMALT system variable to 1.

Alternate Units
Sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except
Angular.
Unit Format Sets the alternate units format. This value is stored in
the DIMALTU system variable.
The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are
based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance
values use this system variable).
Precision Sets the number of decimal places in the alternate units.
This value is stored in the DIMALTD system variable.

DIMSTYLE | 299
Multiplier for Specifies a multiplier to use as the conversion factor
Alternate Units between primary and alternate units. To determine the
value of alternate units, AutoCAD multiplies all linear
distances (measured by dimensions and coordinates) by
the current linear scale value.
The length scaling value changes the generated
measurement value. The value has no effect on angular
dimensions, and AutoCAD does not apply it to the
rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values.
This value is stored in the DIMALTF system variable.
Round Distances Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension
To types except Angular.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements
are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you
enter a value of 1.0, AutoCAD rounds all dimension
measurements to the nearest integer.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point
depends on the Precision setting. The alternate
rounding value is stored in the DIMALTRND system
variable.
Prefix Indicates a prefix for the alternate dimension text. You
can enter text or use control codes to display special
symbols (see Control Codes and Special Characters
on page 1004). For example, entering the control code
%%c displays the diameter symbol. This value is stored
in the DIMAPOST system variable.
Suffix Includes the suffix in the alternate dimension text. You
can enter text or use control codes to display special
symbols (see Control Codes and Special Characters
on page 1004). For example, entering the text cm
results in dimension text similar to that shown in the
illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any
default suffixes. This value is stored in the DIMAPOST
system variable.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero. This value is stored in the DIMALTZ system variable.
Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.

300 | DIMSTYLE
Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes
30.
0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For
example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is an integral number of
feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Placement
Controls the placement of alternate units. These values are stored in the
DIMAPOST system variable.

After Primary Places alternate units after the primary units.

Value
Below Primary Places alternate units below the primary units.
Value

Tolerances Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog

Boxes)
Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances.

DIMSTYLE | 301
Tolerance Format
Controls the tolerance format.
Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance.

None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system

variable is set to 0.
Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of
tolerance in which AutoCAD applies a single value
of variation to the dimension measurement. A
appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance
value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL system variable is
set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression.
AutoCAD applies different plus and minus values of
variation to the dimension measurement. A plus
sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in
Upper Value, and a minus sign () precedes the
tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL
system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system
variable is set to 0.
Limits: Creates a limit dimension in which AutoCAD
displays a maximum and a minimum value, one
over the other. The maximum value is the
dimension value plus the value entered in Upper
Value. The minimum value is the dimension value
minus the value entered in Lower Value. The
DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. The DIMLIM
system variable is set to 1.
Basic: Creates a basic dimension in which AutoCAD
draws a box around the full extents of the
dimension. The distance between the text and the
box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP
system variable.

Precision Sets the number of decimal places. This value is stored

in the DIMTDEC system variable.
Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you
select Symmetrical in Method, AutoCAD uses this value
for the tolerance. This value is stored in the DIMTP
system variable.
Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. This value
is stored in the DIMTM system variable.

302 | DIMSTYLE
Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio
of the tolerance height to the main dimension text
height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system
variable.
Vertical Position Controls text justification for symmetrical and
deviation tolerances.

Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the

main dimension text. When you select this option,
the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2.
Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of
the main dimension text. When you select this
option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1.
Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of
the main dimension text. When you select this
option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0.

Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero. Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string
conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. This
value is stored in the DIMTZIN system variable.
Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes
30.
0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For
example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is an integral number of
feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Alternate Unit Tolerance
Sets the precision and zero suppression rules for alternate tolerance units.
Precision Sets the number of decimal places. This value is stored
in the DIMALTTD system variable.

DIMSTYLE | 303
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros,
and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. This
value is stored in the DIMALTTZ system variable.

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal

dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal
dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5,
and 30.0000 becomes 30.
0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is less than 1
foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is an integral
number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box

Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of
one style. You can print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and
then paste to other Microsoft Windows applications.

Print to Clipboard
button

Compare Sets the first dimension style to compare.

With Sets the second dimension style to compare. If you set
With to <none> or to the same style as Compare,
AutoCAD displays all properties for the style.

304 | DIMSTYLE
Comparison results are displayed automatically under
the following headings:

Description of the dimension style property

System variable that controls the property
System variable values of style properties that differ
for each dimension style

Print to Clipboard Prints results of the style comparison to the Windows

button Clipboard. You can then paste the results to other
Windows applications, such as word processors and
spreadsheets.

DIMSTYLE Command Line

If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, DIMSTYLE displays prompts
on the command line:
Current dimension style: <current>
Enter a dimension style option
[Save/Restore/STatus/Variables/Apply/?] <Restore>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

Save
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension
style.
Enter name for new dimension style or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?

Name
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimen-
sion style using the name you enter. The new dimension style becomes the
current one.
If you enter the name of an existing dimension style, AutoCAD prompts:
That name is already in use, redefine it? <N>: Enter y or press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD regenerates associative dimensions that use the rede-
fined dimension style.

DIMSTYLE | 305
To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to
save and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the
Enter Name for New Dimension Style prompt. AutoCAD displays only set-
tings that differ, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting
of the compared style in the second column. After displaying the differences,
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
?List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card
characters, or press ENTER to list all dimension styles

After listing the named dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous
prompt.

Restore
Restores dimensioning system variable settings to those of a selected dimen-
sion style.
Enter dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?, or
press ENTER to select a dimension

Name
Makes the dimension style you enter the current dimension style.
To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to
restore and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at
the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings
that differ, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the
compared style in the second column. After displaying the differences,
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
?List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER

After listing the dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Select Dimension
Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style.
Select dimension:

Status
Displays the current values of all dimension system variables. After listing the
variables, DIMSTYLE ends.

306 | DIMSTYLE
Variables
Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected
dimensions without modifying the current settings.
Enter a dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?,
or press ENTER to select dimensions

Name
Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name
you enter. After listing the variables, DIMSTYLE ends.
To display the differences between a particular dimension style and the cur-
rent style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension
Style Name prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ, with the
current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in
the second column. After displaying the differences, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
?List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER

After listing the dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Select Dimension
Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension
object you select.
Select dimension:

Apply
Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to selected dimen-
sion objects, permanently overriding any existing dimension styles applied
to these objects.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select a dimension object

AutoCAD does not update the dimension line spacing between existing base-
line dimensions (see the DIMDLI system variable), nor do dimension text vari-
able settings update existing leader text.

?List Dimension Styles

Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card
characters, or press ENTER

DIMSTYLE | 307
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text

Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Align Text
Command line: dimtedit

Select dimension: Select a dimension object

AutoCAD prompts you for the new location of the dimension text.
Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]:
Specify a point or enter an option

dimension text with left dimension text posi- dimension text posi-
and right justification tioned by cursor tioned by angle

Location for Updates the location of the dimension text

Dimension Text dynamically as you drag it. To determine whether text
appears above, below, or in the middle of the
dimension line, use the Text tab in the New, Modify,
and Override Dimension Style dialog box.
Left Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension
line. This option works only with linear, radial, and
diameter dimensions.

before Left after Left

Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension

line. This option works only with linear, radial, and
diameter dimensions.

308 | DIMTEDIT
before Right after Right

Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line.

Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position.

before Home after Home

Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Enter text angle:

before Angle after Angle 90

The center point of the text does not change. If the text
moves or the dimension is regenerated, AutoCAD keeps
the orientation set by the text angle. Entering an angle
of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation.

DIST
Measures the distance and angle between two points

Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry Distance
Command line: dist (or 'dist for transparent use)

Specify first point: Specify a point

Specify second point: Specify a point
Distance = calculated distance, Angle in XY plane = angle,
Angle from XY plane = angle
Delta X = change in X, Delta Y = change in Y, Delta Z = change in Z

DIST | 309
AutoCAD reports the true 3D distance between points. The angle in the XY
plane is relative to the current X axis. The angle from the XY plane is relative
to the current XY plane. DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or
second point if you omit the Z coordinate value.
AutoCAD displays the distance using the current units format.

delta Z
angle from
XY plane

angle in
XY plane
delta X delta Y

DIVIDE
Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object
DIVIDE marks off a specified number of equal lengths on a selected object by
placing point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of the object.
Objects that you can divide include arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs,
polylines, and splines.
Draw menu: Point Divide
Command line: divide

Select object to divide: Use an object selection method

Enter number of segments or [Block]: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767, or
enter b

310 | DIVIDE
Number of Segments
Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects.
The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts. Point Display mode
(PDMODE) has been set such that the points can be seen.

select polyline divided into five parts

Block
Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object.
Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the
drawing
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER

Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be

tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the
dividing points.
No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.
Enter number of segments: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767

The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block con-
sisting of a vertically oriented ellipse.

block not aligned block aligned

DIVIDE | 311
DONUT
Draws filled circles and rings
inside A donut is constructed of a closed polyline composed of wide arc segments.
diameter How AutoCAD fills the interior of a donut depends on the current setting of
the FILL command.
Draw menu: Donut
Command line: donut
outside
diameter Specify inside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle.

1 2
Specify outside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify center of donut or <exit>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER to end the
command

AutoCAD sets the location of the donut based on the center point. After you
specify the diameters, AutoCAD prompts you for the locations at which to
draw donuts. AutoCAD draws a donut at each point specified (2).

DRAGMODE
Controls the way AutoCAD displays dragged objects
You can draw new objects dynamically and drag them into position on the
screen. You can also drag existing objects with many editing commands.
With some computer configurations, dragging can be time consuming. Use
DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.

Command line: dragmode (or 'dragmode for transparent use)

Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER

On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where

DRAGMODE on appropriate in a drawing or editing command to
initiate dragging.
Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those
embedded in menu items.
Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it.
Dragging is performed whenever it is possible. Entering
DRAGMODE off drag each time is not necessary.

312 | DONUT
DRAWORDER
Changes the draw order of images and other objects
Generally, overlapping objects such as text, wide polylines, and solid-filled
polygons are displayed in the order they are created: newly created objects in
front of existing objects. You use DRAWORDER to change the draw order, or
display and plotting order, of any object in the drawing database.
Whenever you use DRAWORDER, objects you select are assigned a draw order
(display or plotting order) that is saved with the drawing. In addition to mov-
ing objects to the front or back of the drawing sort order, you can order
objects relative to other objects (that is, above or below selected objects).

Draw Order toolbar:

Tools menu: Draw Order
Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click, and then click Draw Order.
Command line: draworder

Select objects: Use an object selection method

Enter object ordering option [Above objects/Under objects/Front/Back]
<Back>: Enter an option or press ENTER

Above Objects Moves the selected object above the specified reference
objects.
Select reference objects: Use an object selection method

Under Objects Moves the selected objects below the specified reference
objects.
Select reference objects: Use an object selection method

Front Moves the selected objects to the top of the order of

objects in the drawing.
Back Moves the selected objects to the bottom of the order of
objects in the drawing.
When you change the draw order (display and plotting order) of multiple
objects, AutoCAD maintains the relative draw order of the selected objects.

DRAWORDER | 313
By default, when you create new objects from existing ones (for example,
FILLET or PEDIT), the new objects are assigned the draw order of the original
object you selected first. By default, while you edit an object (for example,
MOVE or STRETCH), the object is displayed on top of all objects in the draw-
ing. When you are finished editing, AutoCAD partially regenerates your
drawing so that the object is displayed according to its correct draw order.
This can result in some edit operations taking slightly longer. You can use
DRAWORDERCTL to change the default draw order settings. TEXTTOFRONT
changes the draw order of all text and dimensions in the drawing.

DSETTINGS
Specifies settings for Snap mode, grid, and polar and object snap tracking
DSETTINGS specifies the settings for a number of drafting aids to help you
draw more quickly and precisely. Settings include Snap mode, the grid, object
snaps, and polar and object snap tracking.
Tools menu: Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, or Otrack on the status
bar and choose Settings.
Command line: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use)

The Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box

Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids in three categories:
Snap and Grid, Polar Tracking, and Object Snap.

Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Specifies Snap and Grid settings.

314 | DSETTINGS
Snap On
Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking
Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9 , or by using the SNAPMODE system
variable.
Snap
Controls an invisible grid that restricts cursor movement to specified
intervals.
Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value
must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system
variable)
Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value
must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system
variable)
Angle Rotates the snap grid by the angle specified. (SNAPANG
system variable)
X Base Specifies an X base coordinate point for the grid.
(SNAPBASE system variable)
Y Base Specifies a Y base coordinate point for the grid.
(SNAPBASE system variable)

DSETTINGS | 315
Polar Spacing
Controls the PolarSnap increment distance.
Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is
selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the
PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X
Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in
conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap
tracking. If neither tracking feature is enabled, the Polar
Distance setting has no effect. (POLARDIST system
variable)
Grid On
Turns the grid dots on or off. You can also turn grid dots mode on or off by
clicking Grid on the status bar, by pressing F7 , or by using the GRIDMODE
system variable.
Grid
Controls the display of a dot grid that helps you visualize distances.

Note The limits of the dot grid are controlled by the LIMITS command.

Grid X Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the X direction. If this value
is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap X Spacing.
(GRIDUNIT system variable)
Grid Y Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the Y direction. If this value
is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap Y Spacing.
(GRIDUNIT system variable)
Snap Type & Style
Controls Snap mode settings.
Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid. (SNAPTYPE system variable)

Rectangular Snap: Sets the snap style to standard

Rectangular snap mode. When the snap type is set to
Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to
a rectangular snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable)
Isometric Snap: Sets the snap style to Isometric snap
mode. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and
Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to an isometric
snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable)

316 | DSETTINGS
PolarSnap Sets the snap type to Polar. When Snap mode is on and
you specify points with polar tracking turned on, the
cursor snaps along polar alignment angles set on the
Polar Tracking tab relative to the starting polar tracking
point. (SNAPTYPE system variable)

Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Controls the AutoTrack settings.

Polar Tracking On
Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by
pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Polar Angle Settings
Sets the angles used with polar tracking.
Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar
tracking alignment paths. You can enter any angle, or
select a common angle of 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10,
OR 5 degrees from the list. (POLARANG system variable)

DSETTINGS | 317
Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for
polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also
controlled by the POLARMODE system variable, and the
list of additional angles is also controlled by the
POLARADDANG system variable.

Note Additional angles are absolute, not incremental.

New Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment
angles.
Note Before adding fractional angles, you must set the
AUPREC system variable to the appropriate decimal
precision to avoid undesired rounding. For example, if the
value of AUPREC is 0 (the default value), all fractional angles
you enter are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Delete Deletes selected additional angles.
Object Snap Tracking Settings
Sets options for object snap tracking.
Track Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object
Orthogonally snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points
Only when object snap tracking is on. This setting is also
controlled by the POLARMODE system variable.
Track Using All Permits the cursor to track along any polar angle
Polar Angle tracking path for acquired osnap points when object
Settings snap tracking is on while specifying points. This setting
is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable.

Note Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and
object snap tracking on and off.

Polar Angle Measurement

Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured.
Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user
coordinate system (UCS).
Relative to Last Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn.
Segment

318 | DSETTINGS
Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)
Controls running object snap settings. With running object snap settings,
also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an
object. When more than one option is selected, AutoCAD applies the
selected snap modes to return a point closest to the center of the aperture
box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.

Object Snap On
Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under
Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (OSMODE system
variable)
Object Snap Tracking On
Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking, the cursor
can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when
specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn
on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP system variable)

DSETTINGS | 319
Object Snap Modes
Specifies the running object snap modes. Select one or more options.
Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc,
line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray,
or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.

selection point

snap point

Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc,

line, multiline, polyline segment, region, solid, spline,
or xline.

selection point

snap point

Center Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical

arc.

selection point
snap point

Node Snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or

dimension text origin.

Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or

elliptical arc.

snap point

selection point

320 | DSETTINGS
Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse,
elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region,
spline, or xline.
Extended Intersection snaps to the potential
intersection of two objects that would intersect if the
objects were extended along their natural paths.
AutoCAD automatically turns on Extended Intersection
when you specify the Intersection object snap
individually. Extended Intersection is not available as a
running object snap.

Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work

with edges or corners of 3D solids.

Note You might get varying results if you have both the
Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object
snaps turned on at the same time.
Extension Causes a temporary extension line or arc to be displayed
when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects,
so you can specify points on the extension.
Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a
shape, or text.
selection point

snap point

Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse,

elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region,
solid, spline, or xline. AutoCAD automatically turns on
Deferred Perpendicular snap mode when the object
you are drawing requires that you complete more than
one perpendicular snap. You can use a line, arc, circle,
polyline, ray, xline, multiline, or 3D solid edge as an
object from which to draw a perpendicular line. You can

DSETTINGS | 321
use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines
between such objects. When the aperture box passes
over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point, AutoCAD
displays an AutoSnap tooltip and marker.

selection point
snap point

Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical

arc, or spline. AutoCAD automatically turns on
Deferred Tangent snap mode when the object you are
drawing requires that you complete more than one
tangent snap. For example, you can use Deferred
Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs,
polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes
over a Deferred Tangent snap point, AutoCAD displays
a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip.

selection point snap point

Note When you use the From option in conjunction with

the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines
from arcs or circles, the first point drawn is tangent to the
arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the
drawing area.
Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse,
elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline, ray, spline,
or xline.
Apparent Snaps to the visual intersection of two objects that are
Intersection not in the same plane.
Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent
intersection of two objects (arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical
arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that
do not intersect in 3D space but may appear to intersect
in the current view.
Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the
imaginary intersection of two objects that would
appear to intersect if the objects were extended along

322 | DSETTINGS
their natural paths. AutoCAD automatically turns on
Extended Apparent Intersection when you specify the
Apparent Intersection object snap individually.
Extended Apparent Intersection is not available as a
running object snap.
Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection do not
work with edges or corners of 3D solids.
Note You might get varying results if you have both the
Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object
snaps turned on at the same time.
Parallel Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever
AutoCAD prompts you for the second point of a
vector. After specifying the first point of a vector, if
you move the cursor over a straight line segment of
another object, AutoCAD acquires the point. When the
path of the object you create is parallel to the line
segment, AutoCAD displays an alignment path, which
you can use to create the parallel object.
Select All Turns on all object snap modes.
Clear All Turns off all object snap modes.

Options
Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box (see page 624). You can-
not access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box if
you are running DSETTINGS transparently.

DSVIEWER
Opens the Aerial View window
The Aerial View window is a navigation tool. It displays a view of the entire
drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly locate and move to a
specific area. With the Aerial View window open, you can zoom and pan
without choosing a menu option or entering a command.
In paper space, the Aerial View window shows only paper space objects,
including viewport borders. Real-time updating of the AutoCAD window
from the Aerial View window is not available in paper space.
View menu: Aerial View
Command line: dsviewer

DSVIEWER | 323
The Aerial View window is displayed.

Aerial View Window

Displays the entire drawing; AutoCAD marks the current view with a wide
outline box.

Zoom In Global

Zoom Out
View box

View Menu (Aerial View Window)

Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the
drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window, the Zoom
Out menu option and button are unavailable. When the current view nearly
fills the Aerial View window, the Zoom In menu option and button are
unavailable. If both of these conditions exist at the same time, such as after
using ZOOM Extents, both options are unavailable. All of the menu options
are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in
the Aerial View window.
Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial
View window by zooming in by a factor of 2, centered
on the current view box.

324 | DSVIEWER
Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the
Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2,
centered on the current view box.

Global Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the
Aerial View window.

DSVIEWER | 325
Options Menu (Aerial View Window)
Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the
drawing. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you
can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window.
Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport
automatically when multiple viewports are displayed.
When Auto Viewport is off, AutoCAD does not update
the Aerial View window to match the current viewport.
Dynamic Update Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the
drawing. When Dynamic Update is off, AutoCAD does
not update the Aerial View window until you click in
the Aerial View window.
Realtime Zoom Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom
using the Aerial View window.

DVIEW
Defines parallel projection or perspective views
To help you view a model from any point in space, DVIEW uses a camera-
target metaphor. The line of sight, or viewing direction, is the line between
the camera and the target.
DVIEW uses objects you select or a special block named DVIEWBLOCK to dis-
play a preview image. The preview image shows the changes you make in the
view. When you end the command, AutoCAD regenerates the drawing based
on the view you set.
Transparent ZOOM, DSVIEWER, PAN, and scroll bars are not available in
DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM
and PAN, DSVIEWER, and scroll bars are not available while that view is
current.

target

camera
plan view 3D perspective view

326 | DVIEW
Command line: dview

Select objects or <use DVIEWBLOCK>:

Enter option
[CAmera/TArget/Distance/POints/PAn/Zoom/TWist/CLip/Hide/Off/Undo]:
Specify a point with your pointing device, or enter an option

Object Selection
Specifies objects to use in the preview image as you change views. Selecting
too many objects slows image dragging and updating.

DVIEWBLOCK
If you press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt, AutoCAD uses DVIEWBLOCK
for the preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a
111-unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illus-
tration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view
(moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view).

graphics cursor

DVIEW | 327
Point Specification
Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing
device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction
changes about the target point as you move the pointing device.
Enter direction and magnitude angles: Enter angles between 0 degrees and 360
degrees, or specify a point with your pointing device

Enter both angles, separated by a comma. The angles must be positive. The
direction angle indicates the front of the view, and the magnitude angle
determines how far the view rolls.

Camera
Specifies a new camera position by rotating the camera about the target
point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.
Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>,
or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an
angle, or press ENTER

Camera Location Sets the cameras position based on the specified point.
Enter Angle from Sets the cameras position at an angle above or below
the XY Plane the XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from
above, and an angle of 90 looks up from below. A
camera angle of 0 degrees places the camera parallel to
the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS).
When you toggle the angle input mode or specify the
angle from the XY plane, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
so you see only the positions available for that angle.
Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and
you can use the cursor to rotate the camera.
Enter Angle in XY Sets the cameras position at an angle in the XY plane
Plane from X Axis relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle
measures from 180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of
0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the
origin.

328 | DVIEW
camera at A

plan view camera rotated to B

The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left

from its initial position, leaving its angle from the XY
plane unchanged.
Toggle (Angle Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
From) angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
so you see only the positions available for that angle.
Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and
you can use the cursor to rotate the camera.

Target
Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera. The
effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one
vantage point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.
Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>,
or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an
angle, or press ENTER

DVIEW | 329
Enter Angle from Sets the target's position at an angle above or below the
the XY Plane XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from
above, and an angle of 90 looks up from below. A
target angle of 0 degrees means that the target is parallel
to the XY plane of the UCS.
After you toggle the angle input mode or specify the
angle from the XY plane, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
so you see only the positions available for that angle.
Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and
you can use the cursor to rotate the target.
Enter Angle in XY Sets the targets position at an angle in the XY plane
Plane from X Axis relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle
measures from 180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of
0 degrees means you look down the X axis of the UCS
toward the origin.

target at A

camera
plan view target at B

The illustration shows the effect of moving the target

point from left to right, leaving its angle from the XY
plane unchanged.

330 | DVIEW
Toggle (Angle Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
From) angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
so you see only the positions available for that angle.
Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and
you can use the cursor to rotate the target.

Distance
Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This
option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the
camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspec-
tive icon replaces the coordinate system icon. AutoCAD prompts for the new
camera-to-target distance.
Specify new camera-target distance <current>: Enter a distance or press ENTER

A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x,
with 1x representing the current distance. Moving the slider bar to the right
increases the distance between camera and target. Moving it to the left
decreases that distance. To turn off perspective viewing, choose the Off
option from the main DVIEW prompt.
If the target and camera points are close together, or if you specify a long-
focal-length lens, you might see very little of your drawing when you specify
a new distance. If you see little or none of your drawing, try the maximum
scale value (16x) or enter a large distance. To magnify the drawing without
turning perspective viewing on, use the Zoom option of DVIEW (see page
333).

DVIEW | 331
camera at A

plan view camera at B

The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight
relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant.

Points
Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use
XYZ point filters. You must specify these points in a nonperspective view. If
perspective viewing is on, AutoCAD turns it off while you specify new cam-
era and target locations, and then redisplays the preview image in perspec-
tive view.
Specify target point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER

To help you define a new line of sight, AutoCAD draws a rubber-band line
from the current camera position to the crosshairs. AutoCAD prompts you
for a new camera location.
Specify camera point <current>: Specify a point, enter direction and magnitude
angles, or press ENTER

A rubber-band line connects the target point to the crosshairs to help you
place the camera relative to the target. The illustration shows the change in
view as you swap the camera and target points. Lens and distance settings are
the same in each case.

332 | DVIEW
camera at A, target at B

camera location and target point

camera at B, target at A

For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point
Specification on page 328.

Pan
Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification.
Specify displacement base point: Specify a point
Specify second point: Specify a point

Zoom
If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent
size of objects in the current viewport.
Specify zoom scale factor <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER

A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with
1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases
the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale.
If perspective viewing is on, Zoom adjusts the camera lens length, which
changes the field of view and causes more or less of the drawing to be visible
at a given camera and target distance. The default lens length is 50mm,

DVIEW | 333
simulating what youd see with a 35mm camera and a 50mm lens. Increasing
the lens length is similar to switching to a telephoto lens. Decreasing the lens
length widens the field of view, as with a wide-angle lens.
Specify lens length <50.000mm>: Specify a value or press ENTER

A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with
1x representing the current lens length. Moving the slider bar to the right
increases the lens length. Moving it to the left decreases the lens length.

lens length = 50mm

plan view lens length = 25mm

Twist
Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. AutoCAD measures the twist
angle counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right.
Specify view twist angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER

334 | DVIEW
Clip
Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front
of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible
walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the
camera and target.
Enter clipping option [Back/Front/Off] <Off>: Enter an option or press ENTER

Back
Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane.
Specify distance from target or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance, enter an
option, or press ENTER

Distance from Positions the back clipping plane and turns on back
Target clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane
between the target and the camera. A negative distance
places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to
drag the clipping plane.
On Turns on back clipping at the current clipping distance.
Off Turns off back clipping.

Front
Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane.
Specify distance from target or [set to Eye (camera)/ON/OFF] <current>: Specify
a distance, enter e, or press ENTER

Distance from Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front
Target clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane
between the target and the camera. A negative distance
places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to
drag the clipping plane.
Eye Positions the front clipping plane at the camera.

DVIEW | 335
On Turns on front clipping. This option is available only
when perspective viewing is off.
Off Turns off front clipping. This option is available only
when perspective viewing is off.

back clip

front clip

camera
position of clipping planes view resulting from
camera position

Off
Turns off front and back clipping. If perspective viewing is on, front clipping
remains on at the camera position.

Hide
Suppresses hidden lines on the selected objects to aid in visualization.
AutoCAD considers circles, solids, traces, regions, wide polyline segments,
3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero
thickness to be opaque surfaces that hide objects.This hidden line suppres-
sion is quicker than that performed by HIDE, but it can't be plotted.

Off
Turns off perspective viewing. The Distance option turns on perspective
viewing.

Undo
Reverses the effects of the last DVIEW action. You can undo multiple DVIEW
operations.

336 | DVIEW
DWGPROPS
Sets and displays the properties of the current drawing
File menu: Drawing Properties
Command line: dwgprops

The Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed.

Drawing Properties Dialog Box

Displays read-only statistics or general information about your drawing,
assigns summary properties, and assigns names and values to custom prop-
erties. These custom properties can help you identify your drawing.
Document properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field
dialog box.

General Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Displays read-only information about the drawing file. This data is derived
from the operating system.

DWGPROPS | 337
File Name
Shows the file icon and the file name.
File Type, Location, Size
Shows the file type, the file location, and the size of the file.
MS-DOS Name, Created, Modified, Accessed
Shows MS-DOS name, when the file was created, and the date and time it was
last modified and last accessed.
Attributes
Shows system-level file attributes. These values can be modified in Windows
Explorer.
Read-Only Indicates that the file is read-only; it cannot be changed
or deleted accidentally.
Archive Indicates that this file should be archived. AutoCAD
uses this setting to determine which files should be
backed up.
Hidden Indicates that the file is hidden; you cannot see or use
it unless you know its name.
System Indicates that the file is a system file. An AutoCAD
drawing cannot have the System attribute set.

Summary Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Displays properties such as author, title, and subject that are predefined. For
example, you can add keywords to all your drawing files and then use
DesignCenter to search for all drawing files with a particular keyword.

338 | DWGPROPS
Title Specifies the title you want to use when searching for
this drawing. The title can be different from the
drawing file name.
Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing. You can use the
subject name to group drawings that have the same
subject.
Author Specifies the author of the drawing. The author name
can only be entered or changed by the user. To change
the author, delete the existing name and enter a new
one.
Keywords Specifies the keywords you want to use to locate the
drawing.
Comments Provides a space to add comments to the drawing.
Hyperlink Base Specifies the base address that AutoCAD uses for all
relative links inserted within the drawing. You can
specify an Internet location, for example, http://
www.autodesk.com, or a path to a folder on a network
drive.

DWGPROPS | 339
Statistics Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)
Displays data such as the dates the drawing was created and last modified.
These file properties are automatically maintained for you and can help you
search for drawings created or modified during a specific period.

Note If AutoCAD detects that the drawing was last saved using an application
other than Autodesk software, a warning message is displayed. This value is
stored in the DWGCHECK system variable.

Created Displays the date and time the drawing was created.
This value is stored in the TDCREATE system variable.
Modified Displays the date and time the drawing was last
modified. This value is stored in the TDUPDATE system
variable.
Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the
file. The Last Saved By name is stored in the
LOGINNAME system variable.

Revision Number Displays the revision number.

340 | DWGPROPS
Total Editing Displays the total amount of editing time in the
Time drawing. This value is stored in the TDINDWG system
variable.

Custom Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Assigns custom properties to the drawing. For example, you could create a
custom property called Project and assign the actual project name as the
value. To assign the same custom properties to a group of drawings, create the
custom properties in a drawing template file.
Custom properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog
box. AutoCAD also provides access to the properties data using programming
interfaces, such as AutoLISP.

Custom Lists names and values of custom properties for the

Properties current drawing.
Add Displays the Add Custom Property dialog box, where
you can enter a name and a value for the new custom
property. The name must be unique. The value can be
left blank.

DWGPROPS | 341
Delete Deletes the custom property that is selected in the list.
Note If you delete a custom property that is used in a
field, the field displays #### the next time it is updated.

DXBIN
Imports specially coded binary files
Insert menu: Drawing Exchange Binary
Command line: dxbin

The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is dis-
played. Enter the name of the file to import.

342 | DXBIN
EATTEDIT
Edits attributes in a block reference

Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Single
Command line: eattedit

Select a block:

You are prompted to select a block in the drawing area. After you select a
block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed.
If the block you select does not contain attributes, or if you select something
that is not a block, an error message is displayed, and you are prompted to
select another block.

Enhanced Attribute Editor

Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of
each attribute. You can change the attribute properties and values.
Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block
from the drawing area. When you choose Select Block,
the dialog box closes until you select a block from the
drawing or cancel by pressing ESC .
If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new
block before you save the attribute changes you made,
you are prompted to save the changes before selecting
another block.
Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you
have made, and leaves the Enhanced Attribute Editor
open.
The Enhanced Attribute Editor contains the following tabs:

Attribute
Text Options
Properties

Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Displays the tag, prompt, and value assigned to each attribute. You can
change only the attribute value.

EATTEDIT | 343
Value The value assigned to the selected attribute.
To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert
Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog
box.

Text Options Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Sets the properties that define the way an attributes text is displayed in the
drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.
Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Default
values for this text style are assigned to the text
properties displayed in this dialog box.
Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-,
or right-justified).
Height Specifies the height of the attribute text.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text.
Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed
backwards.
Upside down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed
upside down.
Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text.
Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text.
Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted
away from its vertical axis.

Properties Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the lineweight, linetype, and
color for the attribute text. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a
plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute.
Color Specifies the color of the attribute.
Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles,
the Plot Style list is not available.

344 | EATTEDIT
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if
the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.

EATTEXT
Exports block attribute information to an external file

Modify II toolbar:
Tools menu: Attribute Extraction
Command line: eattext

The Attribute Extraction wizard is displayed.

Attribute Extraction Wizard

Specifies the set of blocks from which to extract block attribute information,
the types of block attribute information you want, and the block attributes
to be extracted.
The Attribute Extraction wizard includes the following pages:

Select Drawing
Settings
Use Template
Select Attributes
View Output
Save Template
Export

Select Drawing Page

Allows you to select drawing files from which to extract block attribute
information.
Select Objects Makes the Select Objects button available.
Select Objects Allows you to close the wizard temporarily while you
Button select the set of blocks in the drawing area from which
you want to extract block attribute information.
Current Drawing Specifies that block attribute information is extracted
from all blocks in the current drawing.
Select Drawings Makes the [...] button available.

EATTEXT | 345
[...] Button Displays the Select File dialog box, where you can locate
and select drawing files from which to extract block
attribute information.
Drawing Files Displays the selected drawing files that contain the
block attributes you want to extract.
Next Displays the Settings page.

Settings Page
Allows you to specify whether to extract block attribute information from
external reference files and nested blocks.
Include Xrefs Specifies that block attribute information is extracted
from external references (xrefs).
Include Nested Specifies that block attribute information is extracted
Blocks from blocks nested in other blocks.
Next Displays the Use Template page.

Use Template Page

Allows you to use the block attribute settings from templates previously
saved in a template file with the .blk file name extension.
No Template Specifies that block attribute settings from a template
file are not used.
Use Template Makes the Use Template button available.
Use Template Displays the Select File dialog box, where you can locate
Button and select a block attribute template file to use.
Next Displays the Select Attributes page.

Select Attributes Page

Allows you to select blocks and attributes.
Blocks Displays the list of blocks in the selected drawings.
Select the box next to a block name to display that
blocks attributes in the Attributes for Block list. In the
Block Alias column, you can assign an alias to the block.
The Number column displays the number of instances
of the block that are present in the selected drawings.

346 | EATTEXT
Attributes for Displays a list of block attributes corresponding to the
Block block or blocks selected. Select the check box next to an
attribute name to extract the information for that
attribute. The Value column displays the value of the
block attribute. In the Alias column, you can assign an
alias to the block attribute.
Check All Selects all blocks or block attributes for extraction.
Uncheck All Clears the selection of all blocks or block attributes.
Next Displays the View Output page.

View Output Page

Allows you to preview the block attributes to be extracted. The list displays
the attributes currently selected for extraction.
Two different views of the information can be displayed:

Attributes for each block by block name. The Block Name column displays
the names of blocks selected for attribute extraction. The Attribute col-
umn displays the name of the attribute. The Value column displays the
value of the attribute. The Count column displays the number of
attributes in the drawing with the same name and value.
Values for each block attribute by block name. The Block Name column
displays the names of the blocks selected for attribute extraction; other
columns display names of attributes associated with each block. The rows
display the values for each attribute.

In exported files, Enhanced Attribute Extract renames blocks that have the
same name but different attributes that are found in multiple drawings or
xrefs. For each instance after the first one of duplicate-named blocks with dif-
ferent attributes, Enhanced Attribute Extract renames the block by append-
ing to the block name a tilde character (~) and the path name and file in
which the block was found. For example, suppose that a block named WND
is in both c:\drawings\offic.dwg and c:\drawings\adminoffice.dwg, but the
block has different attributes in each file. When you use Enhanced Attribute
Extract, the instance of WND in the first file is shown with the block name
WND; the instance of WND in the second file is shown with the block name
WND~c:\drawings\adminoffice.dwg.
Alternate View Switches between the two views of the information.
Copy to Copies all or selected portions of the information to the
Clipboard Clipboard.
Next Displays the Save Template page.

EATTEXT | 347
Save Template Page
Allows you to save the attribute extraction settings you have made to a tem-
plate file with the .blk file name extension.
Save Template Displays the Save As dialog box, where you can specify
a location and name for a template file of the current
block attribute settings.
Next Displays the Export page.

Export Page
Allows you to specify the attribute extraction file name and format and
export the attribute information to the specified file.
In attribute names that will be field names in files exported to Microsoft
Access file format, Enhanced Attribute Extract substitutes an underscore
character (_) for the characters shown in the following table.

Restricted characters in Microsoft Access fields

Character Character name

. Period

! Exclamation mark

[ Left square bracket

] Right square bracket

For example, attribute tag names that appear as column headings will be field
names in Microsoft Access, and any instance of the restricted characters will
be replaced by an underscore.
File Name Specifies the file name for the extracted block attribute
information.
[...] Button Allows you to specify the file by locating it with the
standard file dialog box.

348 | EATTEXT
File Type Specifies the format for the attribute extraction file. File
formats that are displayed in the list depend on the
applications installed on the computer. If Microsoft
Excel and Microsoft Access are installed, the XLS and
MDB file formats are available. The comma-separated
file format (CSV) and tab-separated file format (TXT)
are always available.
The delimiter used in the comma-separated file format
(.csv) is based on the locale; the list separator for the
locale separates the exported data.
Finish Extracts the block attribute information and exports it
to the file specified.

EDGE
Changes the visibility of three-dimensional face edges

Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Edge
Command line: edge

Specify edge of 3dface to toggle visibility or [Display]: Select an edge or enter d

Edge
Controls the visibility of the edges you select.
Specify edge of 3d face to toggle visibility or [Display]:

AutoCAD repeats the prompt until you press ENTER .

If the edges of one or more 3D faces are colinear, AutoCAD alters the visibility
of each colinear edge.

EDGE | 349
Display
Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them.
Enter selection method for display of hidden edges [Select/All] <All>: Enter an
option or press ENTER

All Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing

and displays them.
If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible
once again, use the Edge option. You must select each
edge with your pointing device to display it.
AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically
displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on
each invisible edge.
This prompt continues until you press ENTER .
Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and
displays them.
Select objects:

If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible

once again, use the Edge option. You must select each
edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap
markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed,
indicating the apparent snap locations on each
invisible edge.
This prompt continues until you press ENTER .

EDGESURF
Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh
EDGESURF constructs a three-dimensional (3D) polygon mesh approximating
a Coons surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges. A Coons surface
patch mesh is a bicubic surface interpolated between four adjoining edges
(which can be general space curves). The Coons surface patch mesh not only
meets the corners of the defining edges, but also touches each edge, provid-
ing control over the boundaries of the generated surface patch.

Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Edge Surface

350 | EDGESURF
Command line: edgesurf

3 Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current

2 Select object 1 for surface edge:
Select object 2 for surface edge:
4 Select object 3 for surface edge:
1
Select object 4 for surface edge:

You must select the four adjoining edges that define the surface patch. The
edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open 2D or 3D polylines. The edges must
touch at their endpoints to form a topologically rectangular closed path.
You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1) deter-
mines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the end-
point closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that
M N
touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh.

ELEV
Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects
The current elevation is the Z value that AutoCAD uses when it expects a
3D point but receives only X and Y values. AutoCAD maintains separate
current elevations in model space and paper space. Specifying an elevation
setting in one viewport makes that elevation current in all viewports regard-
less of whether viewports are set up to retain their own user coordinate
systems (UCSs). AutoCAD resets the elevation to 0.0 whenever you change
the coordinate system.
Command line: elev (or 'elev for transparent use)

Specify new default elevation <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

Specify new default thickness <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

ELEV | 351
The thickness sets the distance to which AutoCAD extrudes a 2D object
above or below its elevation. A positive value is extruded along the positive
Z axis; a negative value is extruded along the negative Z axis.
z

y
y

x x
with elevation with thickness

ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects.

ELLIPSE
Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Ellipse
Command line: ellipse

Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]: Specify a point or enter

an option

The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP
to Isometric.

352 | ELLIPSE
Axis Endpoint
Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis deter-
3
mines the angle of the ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the
1 2 minor axis of the ellipse.
Specify other endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
ellipse by axis end- Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
point or locating a point (3), or enter r

Distance to Other Defines the second axis using the distance from the
Axis midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second
axis (3).
Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about
Rotation
the first axis.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point (3), or
enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4

Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and

click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the
greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines
a circular ellipse.

ELLIPSE | 353
3
Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the
elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of
the elliptical arc.
ellipse by rotation
Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: Specify a point or enter c

Axis Endpoint
Defines the start point of the first axis.
Specify other endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r

The descriptions of the Distance to Other Axis and Rotation options match
those of the corresponding options under Center.

Center
Creates the elliptical arc using a center point you specify.
Specify center of elliptical arc:
Specify endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r

Distance to Other Axis

Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc,
or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify.
1 Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or enter p

The descriptions of the Start Angle and Parameter options match those of the
corresponding options under Rotation.
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about
the first axis. The higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater
the ratio of minor to major axis. Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a rotation angle
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter p

Start Angle Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start
Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle
mode. The mode you are in determines how AutoCAD
calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]: Specify
a point (2), enter a value, or enter an option

354 | ELLIPSE
Parameter Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the
elliptical arc using the following parametric vector
equation:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u)
where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its
major and minor axes, respectively.
2
Specify start parameter or [Angle]: Specify a point, enter a
value, or enter a
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]: Specify
a point, enter a value, or enter an option

End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical

arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start
Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to
Parameter mode. The mode you are in determines
how AutoCAD calculates the ellipse.
Angle: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc. The
Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle
mode. The mode you are in determines how
AutoCAD calculates the ellipse.
Included Angle: Defines an included angle beginning
at the start angle.

Center
3 Creates the ellipse by a center point you specify.
Specify center of ellipse: Specify a point (1)
1 2
Specify endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
or locating a point (3), or enter r

Distance to Other Defines the second axis as the distance from the center
Axis of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point
you specify.

ELLIPSE | 355
Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about
the first axis.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point, or
enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or
enter p

Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and

click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the
greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines
a circle.

Isocircle
Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.

Note The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of
SNAP to Isometric.

Specify center of isocircle:

Specify radius of isocircle or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius Creates a circle using a radius you specify.

Diameter Creates a circle using a diameter you specify.
Specify diameter of isocircle: Specify a distance

ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Erase
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Erase.
Command line: erase

Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects

AutoCAD removes the objects from the drawing.

356 | ERASE
object selected object erased

ETRANSMIT
Packages a set of files for Internet transmission
File Menu: eTransmit
Command line: etransmit

The Create Transmittal dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -etransmit at the Command prompt, ETRANSMIT displays
prompts on the command line.

Create Transmittal Dialog Box

Packages a set of files for Internet transmission.
All files to be included in the transmittal package are indicated by a check
mark next to the file name. Right-click in the file display area to display a
shortcut menu with several options.
Sheets Tab
Lists the sheets to be included in the transmittal package in a hierarchy based
on sheet subsets. On this tab, you can create a transmittal package from a
sheet set, sheet subset, or sheet. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set
Manager, and eTransmit must be selected from the shortcut menu that is dis-
played when a sheet set, sheet subset, or sheet node is right-clicked.

ETRANSMIT | 357
Note If a sheet in the list is unavailable, the sheet is referenced (as an xref) by
another sheet in the transmittal package, and the unavailable sheet is automat-
ically included in the transmittal package.

Files Tree Tab

Lists the files to be included in the transmittal package in a hierarchical tree
format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as
related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the trans-
mittal package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by
URLs are not included in the transmittal package.
The drawings to be transmitted are listed under the following categories:

Sheet Drawings. Lists the drawing files associated with the sheet set.
Sheet Set Files. Lists the support files associated with the sheet set.
Current Drawing. Lists the files associated with the current drawing.
User Added Files. Lists the files that have been added manually with the
Add File option.

358 | ETRANSMIT
Files Table Tab
Displays the files to be included in the transmittal package in a table format.
By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs,
plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the transmittal package
or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not
included in the transmittal package.

ETRANSMIT | 359
Add File
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an addi-
tional file to include in the transmittal package. This button is available on
both the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab.
Enter Notes to Be Included with This Transmittal Package
Provides a space where you can enter notes related to a transmittal package.
The notes are included in the transmittal report. You can specify a template
of default notes to be included with all your transmittal packages by creating
an ASCII text file called etransmit.txt. This file must be saved to a location
specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files tab in the
Options dialog box.
Select a Transmittal Setup
Lists previously saved transmittal setups. The default transmittal setup is
named STANDARD. Click to select a different transmittal setup. To create a
new transmittal setup or to modify an existing one in the list, click Transmit-
tal Setups. Right-click to display a shortcut menu with several options.
Transmittal Setups
Displays the Transmittal Setups dialog box, in which you can create, modify,
and delete transmittal setups.
View Report
Displays report information that is included with the transmittal package.
Includes any transmittal notes that you entered and distribution notes auto-
matically generated by AutoCAD that detail what steps must be taken for the
transmittal package to work properly. For example, if AutoCAD detects SHX
fonts in one of the transmittal drawings, you are instructed where to copy
these files so that AutoCAD can detect them on the system on which the
transmittal package is being installed. If you have created a text file of default
notes, the notes are also included in the report.
Save As Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify
a location in which to save a report file. Note that a
report file is automatically included with all transmittal
packages that you generate; by choosing Save As, you
can save an additional copy of a report file for archival
purposes.

360 | ETRANSMIT
Transmittal Setups Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, and deletes transmittal setups.

New
Creates a new transmittal setup.
New Transmittal Enter the name of the new transmittal setup.
Setup Name
Based On Select an existing transmittal setup from which the new
one will be created.
Rename
Renames the currently highlighted transmittal setup.
Modify
Displays the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box, in which you can specify
options for the transmittal package.
Delete
Removes the currently highlighted transmittal setup.

ETRANSMIT | 361
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box

Transmittal Package Type

Specifies the type of transmittal package created.
Folder Creates a transmittal package of uncompressed files in
a new or existing folder.
Self-Extracting Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed,
Executable self-extracting executable file. Double-clicking the
resulting EXE file decompresses the transmittal package
and restores the files to the folder location that you
specify.
Zip Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed
ZIP file. To restore the files to the folder location that
you specify, you need a decompression utility such as
the shareware application PKZIP or WinZip.

362 | ETRANSMIT
File Format
Specifies the file format to which all drawings included in a transmittal pack-
age will be converted. You can select an AutoCAD drawing file format from
the drop-down list.
Transmittal File Folder
Specifies the location in which the transmittal package is created. Lists the
last nine locations in which transmittal packages were created. To specify a
new location, click Browse and navigate to the location you want.
If this field is left blank, the transmittal file is created in the folder containing
the first specified drawing file. In a sheet set context, the transmittal file is
created in the folder containing the sheet set data (DST) file.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can navigate to a
location where you create the transmittal package.
Transmittal File Name
Specifies the method for naming the transmittal package. Displays the
default file name for the transmittal package. This option is not available if
the transmittal package type is set to Folder.
Prompt for a File Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you
Name can enter the name of the transmittal package.
Increment File Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already
Name if exists, a number is added to the end. This number is
Necessary incremented each time a new transmittal package is
saved.
Overwrite if Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already
Necessary exists, the existing file is automatically overwritten.
Transmittal Options
Provides options for organizing the files and folders that are included in the
transmittal package.
Use Organized Duplicates the folder structure for the files being
Folder Structure transmitted. The root folder is the top-level folder
within a hierarchical folder tree. The following
considerations apply:
Relative paths remain unchanged. Relative paths
outside the source root folder retain up to one level
of the folder path above them, and are placed in the
root folder.

ETRANSMIT | 363
Absolute paths within the root folder tree are
converted to relative paths. Absolute paths outside
the source root folder retain up to one level of the
folder path above them, and are placed in the root
folder.
Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are
converted to No Path and are moved to the root
folder or to a folder within the root folder tree.
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary.
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files
for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST)
file, however, is placed in the root folder.

This option is not available if youre saving a

transmittal package to an Internet location.
Source Root Defines the source root folder for relative paths of
Folder drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs.
The source root folder also contains the sheet set data
(DST) file when a sheet set is transmitted.
Browse Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which
you can navigate to specify a source root folder.
Place All Files in All files are installed to a single, specified target folder
One Folder when the transmittal package is installed.
Keep Files and Preserves the folder structure of all files in the
Folders As Is transmittal package, facilitating ease of installation on
another system. This option is not available if youre
saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
Include Fonts Includes any associated font files (TTF and SHX) with
the transmittal package.
Note Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, you should
make sure that the recipient of the transmittal package also
owns the TrueType fonts. If you are not sure whether the
recipient owns the TrueType fonts, clear this option. If any
required TrueType fonts are not available to the recipient,
the font specified by the FONTALT system variable is
substituted.

364 | ETRANSMIT
Send E-mail with Launches the default system email application when
Transmittal the transmittal package is created so that you can send
an email that includes the transmittal package as an
attachment.
Set Default Changes the printer/plotter setting in the transmittal
Plotter to None package to None. Your local printer/plotter settings are
usually not relevent to the recipient.
Bind External Binds all external references to the files to which they
References were attached.
Prompt for Opens the Transmittal - SetPassword dialog box (see
Password page 365), where you can specify a password for your
transmittal package.
Include Drawing Includes the sheet set data (DST) file, callout and label
Set Data and Files block (DWG) files, and the associated drawing template
(DWT) file with the transmittal package.
Transmittal Setup Description
Enter a description for the transmittal setup. This description is displayed in
the Create Transmittal dialog box below the list of transmittal file setups. You
can select any transmittal setup in the list to display its description.

Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box

Password for Compressed Transmittal

Provides a space for an optional password for the transmittal package. When
others attempt to open the transmittal package, they must provide this pass-
word to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder
transmittal packages.

ETRANSMIT | 365
Password Confirmation
Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password
field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.

ETRANSMIT Command Line

If you enter -etransmit at the Command prompt, ETRANSMIT displays
prompts on the command line.
Enter an option [Create transmittal package/Report only/CUrrent setup/
CHoose setup/Sheet set> <Report only>: Enter an option

Create Creates a transmittal package from the current drawing,

Transmittal including all dependent files. Uses the settings in the
Package current transmittal setup.
Report Only Creates a report (TXT) file without creating a
transmittal package. This report file is based on the
current transmittal setup.
Current Setup Displays the name of the current transmittal setup.
Choose Setup Specifies the transmittal setup to use for the transmittal
package.
Choose Transmittal Setup or [?] <current>: Enter a pre-
defined transmittal setup name, enter ? to display a list of
transmittal setups, or press ENTER

Sheet Set Specifies a sheet set and transmittal setup to use for the
transmittal package. This option is available only when
a sheet set is open.
Sheet Set name or [?] <current>: Enter a predefined sheet
set name, enter ? to display a list of sheet sets, or press
ENTER
Choose Transmittal Setup or [?] <current>: Enter a pre-
defined transmittal setup name, enter ? to display a list of
transmittal setups, or press ENTER

366 | ETRANSMIT
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects
A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example,
a block is a compound object.

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Explode
Command line: explode

Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish

The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change.
Other results differ depending on the type of compound object youre
exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the
results for each.

Note If youre using a script or an ObjectARX function, you can explode only
one object at a time.

2D and Discards any associated width or tangent information.

before EXPLODE Lightweight For wide polylines, AutoCAD places the resulting lines
Polyline and arcs along the center of the polyline.
3D Polyline Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to
the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line
after EXPLODE segment.
3D Solid Explodes planar surfaces into regions. Nonplanar
surfaces explode into bodies.
Arc If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into
elliptical arcs.
Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block
contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the
block exposes the polyline or nested block object,
which must then be exploded to expose its individual
objects.

EXPLODE | 367
Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their
component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z
scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into
unexpected objects.
When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that
cannot be exploded, they are collected into an
anonymous block (named with a *E prefix) and
referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the
objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected
block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid,
and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block
cannot be exploded.
Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the
attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions.
Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references
(xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded.
Body Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar
surfaces), regions, or curves.
Circle If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into
ellipses.
Leaders Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block
inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), multiline text,
or tolerance objects, depending on the leader.
Multiline Text Explodes into text objects.
Multiline Explodes into lines and arcs.
Polyface Mesh Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Two-
vertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes
explode into 3D faces.
Region Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.

EXPORT
Saves objects to other file formats
File menu: Export
Command line: export

The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.

368 | EXPORT
In Files of Type, select the format type to export objects to. In File Name,
enter the name of the file to create. AutoCAD exports the objects to the spec-
ified file format using the specified file name.
The following output types are available:

WMF: Microsoft Windows Metafile (see WMFOUT)

SAT: ACIS solid object file (see ACISOUT)
STL: Solid object stereolithography file (see STLOUT)
EPS: Encapsulated PostScript file
DXX: Attribute extract DXF file (see ATTEXT)
BMP: Device-independent bitmap file (see BMPOUT)
3DS: 3D Studio file (see 3DSOUT)
DWG: AutoCAD drawing file (see WBLOCK)

EXTEND
Extends an object to meet another object
Objects that you can extend include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and
3D polylines, and rays.

boundary selected objects to extend selected result

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Extend
Command line: extend

Select boundary edges...

Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER , or press ENTER to
select all objects (implied selection)
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an
object to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option

EXTEND | 369
Boundary Object Selection
Uses selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to
extend the object. Valid boundary objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs,
blocks, circles, ellipses, layout viewports, lines, rays, regions, splines, text,
and xlines.
If you select a 2D polyline as a boundary object, AutoCAD ignores its width
and extends objects to the centerline of the polyline. You can use only the
single, crossing, fence, and implied selection options to select boundaries
that include blocks.
If you extend a tapered polyline segment, AutoCAD corrects the width of the
extended end to continue its original taper to the new endpoint. If this
causes the segment to have a negative ending width, the ending width
becomes zero.

selected boundary polylines to extend result

Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the
polyline.

Object to Extend
Specifies the object to extend. AutoCAD repeats the main prompt so that you
can extend multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object trims it
to the nearest boundary rather than extending it. Pressing ENTER ends the
command.

Project
Specifies the projection method that AutoCAD uses when extending objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

370 | EXTEND
selected objects to
boundary extend

None Specifies no projection. AutoCAD extends only objects

that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space.

arc not intersecting

with boundary edge in
3D space

arc intersecting with

boundary edge in 3D
space

UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current

user coordinate system (UCS). AutoCAD extends
objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects
in 3D space.

projection of arcs onto

current UCS that intersect
with boundary edge

View Specifies projection along the current view direction.

EXTEND | 371
left viewport right viewport

Edge
selected boundary Extends the object to another objects implied edge, or only to an object that
actually intersects it in 3D space.

selected object to Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>: Enter an
extend option or press ENTER

Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to

intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space.
No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary
object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo
extended Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.

not extended

372 | EXTEND
EXTRUDE
Creates unique solid primitives by extruding existing two-dimensional objects
With EXTRUDE, you can create solids by extruding (adding thickness to)
selected objects. You can extrude an object along a path, or you can specify
a height value and a tapered angle.
Use EXTRUDE to create a solid from a common profile of an object, such as a
gear or sprocket. EXTRUDE is particularly useful for objects that contain fil-
lets, chamfers, and other details that might otherwise be difficult to repro-
duce except in a profile. If you create a profile using lines or arcs, use the Join
option of PEDIT to convert them to a single polyline object or make them into
a region before you use EXTRUDE.

Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Extrude
Command line: extrude

Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current

Select objects:
Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: Specify a distance or enter p

Object Selection
Specifies the objects to extrude. You can extrude planar 3D faces, closed
polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines, donuts, and regions. You
cannot extrude objects contained within a block or polylines that have cross-
select object
ing or self-intersecting segments.
A polyline must contain at least 3 but not more than 500 vertices. If a
selected polyline has width, AutoCAD ignores the width and extrudes from
the center of the polyline path. If a selected object has thickness, AutoCAD
ignores the thickness.

EXTRUDE | 373
Height of Extrusion
Extrudes the objects along the positive Z axis of the objects coordinate sys-
height tem if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value, AutoCAD
extrudes the objects along the negative Z axis.
Specify angle of taper for extrusion <0>: Specify an angle between 90 and +90
degrees or press ENTER

Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The
taper default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. AutoCAD
angle tapers all objects and loops in the selection set to the same value. Tapered
extrusions are possible only with loops that are continuous at the vertices.
Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object
or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion
height.
AutoCAD always extrudes individual loops of the region to the same height.
When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains con-
stant, and the radius of the arc changes. On a straight extrusion, each arc
results in a single cylindrical face. Whenever possible, EXTRUDE uses the
taper angle as the angle by which it slants faces from the Z axis.

Path
path Selects the extrusion path based on a specified object. AutoCAD extrudes the
profiles of the selected object along the chosen path to create solids.
Select extrusion path: Use an object selection method

profile Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths.
The path should not lie on the same plane as the profile, nor should it have
areas of high curvature.
The extruded solid starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane
perpendicular to the path at the paths endpoint. One of the endpoints of the
path should be on the plane of the profile; otherwise, AutoCAD moves the
path to the center of the profiles.
If the path is a spline, it should be perpendicular to the plane of the profile
at one of the endpoints of the path. Otherwise, AutoCAD rotates the profile
to be perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the endpoints of the spline
is on the plane of the profile, AutoCAD rotates the profile about the point;
otherwise, AutoCAD moves the spline path to the center of the profile and
rotates the profiles about its center.

374 | EXTRUDE
If the path contains segments that are not tangent, AutoCAD extrudes the
object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisect-
ing the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the profile should
lie on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to
match up. If the profile is not on the miter plane, AutoCAD rotates it until it
is on the miter plane.
AutoCAD extrudes profiles with multiple loops so that all the loops appear
on the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid.

EXTRUDE | 375
376
FIELD
Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field
value changes
Insert menu: Field
Shortcut menu: Right-click while any text command is active, and click
Insert Field.
Command line: field

The Field dialog box is displayed.

Field Dialog Box

Inserts a field in the drawing.

The options available in the Field dialog box change with the field category
and field name.
Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names.
Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a
field name to display the options available for that
field.

FIELD | 377
Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an
empty string (----) if the field value is invalid.
The label for this item changes with the field name. For
example, when Filename is selected in the Field Names
list, the label is Filename and the value is the name of
the current drawing file. The label is Property for object
fields. Exception: when a date field is selected, the
selected date format is displayed; for example, M/d/
yyyy.
Format List Lists options for display of the value of the field. For
example, date fields can display the name of the day or
not, and text strings can be uppercase, lowercase, first
capital, or title case. The value displayed in the Fields
dialog box reflects the format that you select.
Field Expression Displays the expression that underlies the field. The
field expression cannot be edited, but you can learn
how fields are constructed by reading this area.
Options for Sheet Set and Sheet View Fields
The following additional options are available when sheet-set-related fields
are selected:
Sheet Set Specifies the name of the sheet set.
Sheet Navigation Displays a tree view of sheets or sheet views from the
Tree Sheet Set Manager, from which you can select an item
for the field.
Property Displays the properties available as fields for the item
selected in the tree.
Associate Adds a hyperlink to the field when it is created. You can
Hyperlink use CTRL +click to jump to the sheet or view. This
option is not available for the ViewportScale field.

378 | FIELD
Options for SheetSetPlaceholder Fields
The following additional options are available when the SheetSetPlaceholder
field is selected:
Placeholder Type Displays a list of available placeholder fields.
Temporary Value Displays the value for the placeholder field in the
selected format.
For example, with SheetSet Placeholder selected in the
Field Names list, SheetTitle selected in the Placeholder
Type list, and Uppercase selected in the Format list,
Temporary Value displays SHEETTITLE. When the
drawing is placed in a sheet set, this field displays the
title of the sheet.
Options for Fields in the Objects Field Category
The following additional options are available when object fields are
selected:
Named Object When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the
Type/Object types of named objects in the drawing. When Object is
Type selected, displays the type of object selected. Use the
Select Object button to temporarily close the dialog box
and select an object in the drawing.
Property/Name When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the
names of all the objects in the drawing of the selected
type. When Object is selected in Field Names, lists the
properties of the selected object that are available as
fields. When a block with attributes is selected, the
attribute names are displayed in the list of properties.

FIELD | 379
FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, two-dimensional solids, and wide polylines
Some displays and plotters take a long time to fill the interior of objects; turn
off Fill mode to improve performance.
Objects affected by FILL include hatches, two-dimensional solids, wide
polylines, multilines, and traces.
Command line: fill (or 'fill for transparent use)

Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER

On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be

Fill mode on visible, its extrusion direction must be parallel to the
current viewing direction, and hidden lines must not be
suppressed.
Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are
displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects
existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The
display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode
Fill mode off
setting.
FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects
FILLET rounds the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines,
rays, splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. FILLET also rounds the
edges of 3D solids.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, FILLET trims the intersecting lines
to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If the selected lines do not intersect,
AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do.
before FILLET
If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates the
fillet line on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the fillet line on the cur-
rent layer. The same is true for the fillet color, lineweight, and linetype.

after FILLET
You can fillet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent, nonadjacent,
intersecting, or separated by one segment. If they are nonadjacent, the
polyline segments are extended to accommodate the fillet. If they are
intersecting, the polyline segments are trimmed to accommodate the fillet.
To create a fillet, the polyline segments must converge within the grid limits
when limits checking is on.

380 | FILL
The result is a single polyline that includes the fillet as an arc segment. All
the properties of this new polyline, such as its layer, color, and linetype, are
inherited from the first polyline selected.

Note Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line seg-
ments removes hatch associativity. If the boundary was defined from a polyline,
associativity is maintained.

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Fillet
Command line: fillet

Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current

Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: Use an object selection
method or enter an option

First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or the edge of a
3D solid to fillet.
Select second object:

first selected object second selected object result

If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, AutoCAD extends them until they inter-
sect or trims them at the intersection. You can fillet two lines with different
extrusion directions only if the Z values of the endpoints of both lines are
equal in the current user coordinate system (UCS).
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be
adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another
polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and
replaces it with the fillet.

FILLET | 381
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. AutoCAD chooses the
fillet with endpoints closest to the points you select.

selection points result (with radius greater than 0)

FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.

selection points results (with radius

greater than 0)

If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the
edges individually.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r

382 | FILLET
Edge
Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press
ENTER .

selecting edges single edge fillets

If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner
of a box, AutoCAD computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the
three incident fillets have the same radii.

Chain
Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent
edges.
Select edge chain or <Edge/Radius>: Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r

Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select

a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the
top of a 3D solid box, AutoCAD also selects the other
tangential edges on the top.
Edge Switches to a single edge selection mode.
chain fillets
Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc.

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

AutoCAD displays the previous prompt:

Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select one or more edges or enter c or r

Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments
meet.
Select 2D polyline:

FILLET | 383
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they
approach the arc segment, AutoCAD removes the arc segment and replaces
it with a fillet arc.

before after

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Specify fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent VR com-
mands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.

Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the fillet arc
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

Trim Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.

No Trim Does not trim the selected edges.

Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the
main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.

If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the fillets you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click
Undo.

384 | FILLET
FILTER
Creates reusable filters for object selection
FILTER creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included
in a selection set.
Use FILTER to

Select objects before using an editing command

Select objects during an editing command; at any Select Objects prompt,
use FILTER transparently to select objects to use with the current command
Create named filters to use later at any Select Objects prompt

FILTER finds objects by property only when you have assigned those proper-
ties to the object directly. If objects assume properties from the layer on
which they reside, FILTER does not find them. You can, however, use FILTER
to find objects with properties set by layer or by block.
Command line: filter (or 'filter for transparent use)

The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed.

Object Selection Filters Dialog Box

Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection.

Filter Property List

Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The cur-
rent filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.

FILTER | 385
Select Filter
Adds filter properties to the current filter.
Object Types and Lists object types that you can filter and logical
Logical Operators operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the
filter expressions.
If you use logical operators, make sure that you pair and
balance them correctly in the filter list. The number of
operands you can enclose depends on the operation.

Logical operators

Starting operator Encloses Ending operator

Begin AND One or more operands End AND

Begin OR One or more operands End OR

Begin XOR Two operands End XOR

Begin NOT One operand End NOT

For example, the following filter selects all circles

except the ones with a radius greater than or equal to
1.0:
Object=Circle
**Begin NOT
Circle Radius>= 1.00
**End NOT

X, Y, Z Define additional filter parameters depending on the

Parameters object. For example, if you select Line Start, you can
enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate values that you want to
filter.
In the filter parameters, you can use relative operators
such as < (less than) or > (greater than). For example,
the following filter selects all circles with center points
greater than or equal to 1,1,0 and radii greater than or
equal to 1:
Object=Circle
Circle CenterX >= 1.0000 Y >= 1.0000 Z >= 0.0000
Circle Radius>= 1.0000

386 | FILTER
Select Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified
type in the drawing. Select the items to filter. For
example, if you select the object type Color, Select
displays a list of colors to choose for the filter.
Add to List Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list.
Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter
remain available during the current AutoCAD session
unless you manually delete them.
Substitute Replaces the filter property selected in the filter
property list with the one displayed in Select Filter.
Add Selected Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list.
Object

Edit Item
Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. To
edit a filter property, select it and choose Edit Item. Edit the filter property
and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property.

Delete
Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter.

Clear List
Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.

Named Filters
Displays, saves, and deletes filters.
Current Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it
current. AutoCAD loads the named filter and its list of
properties from the default file, filter.nfl.
Save As Saves a filter and its list of properties. AutoCAD saves
the filter in the filter.nfl file. Names can contain up to 18
characters.
Delete Current Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default
Filter List filter file.

Apply
Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create
a selection set. AutoCAD uses the current filter on the objects you select.

FILTER | 387
FIND
Finds, replaces, selects, or zooms to specified text
You can find, replace, select, or zoom to text contained in any loaded object
in model space and in any layout defined in the current drawing.
If you partially opened the current drawing, FIND does not consider objects
that you did not load.
Edit menu: Find
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Find.
Command line: find

The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.

Find and Replace Dialog Box

Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope
and results of the search.

Find Text String Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a string,
or choose one of the six most recently used strings from
the list.

388 | FIND
Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the
found text. Enter a string, or choose one of the most
recently used strings from the list.
Search In Specifies whether to search the entire drawing or only
the current selection. If something is already selected,
Current Selection is the default value. If nothing is
selected, Entire Drawing is the default value. You can
use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the
dialog box and create or modify the selection set.
Select Objects Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select
Button objects in your drawing. Press ENTER to return to the
dialog box. When you select objects, Search In displays
Current Selection.
Options Displays the Find and Replace Options dialog box (see
page 390), in which you can define the type of objects
and words that you want to find.
Find/Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find Text String. If you
have not entered text in Find Text String, this option is
not available. AutoCAD displays found text in the
Context area. Once you find the first instance of the
text, the Find option becomes Find Next, which you
can use to find the next instance.
Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in
Replace With.
Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find
Text String and replaces it with the text in Replace
With. AutoCAD finds and replaces either text in the
entire drawing or in the current selection, as specified
in Search In. The status area confirms the replacements
and indicates the number of replacements that were
made.
Select All Finds and selects all loaded objects containing
instances of the text that you enter in Find Text String.
This option is available only when you set Search In to
Current Selection. When you choose Select All, the
dialog box closes and AutoCAD displays a message on
the command line indicating the number of objects
that it found and selected. Note that Select All does not
replace text; AutoCAD ignores any text in Replace With.

FIND | 389
Zoom To Displays the area in the drawing that contains the
results of a find or replace search. Although AutoCAD
searches model space and all layouts defined for the
drawing, you can only zoom to text in the current
Model or layout tab. When zooming to text found in a
multiline text object, in some cases the found text
string may not be displayed in a visible area of the
drawing.
Object Type Specifies the type of object the text was found in.
Context Displays and highlights the currently found text string
in its surrounding context. If you choose Find Next,
AutoCAD refreshes the Context area and displays the
next found text string in its surrounding context.
Status Displays confirmation of find and replace searches.

Find and Replace Options Dialog Box

Defines the type of objects and words that you want to find.

Include Specifies the type of objects you want to include in the

search. By default, all options are selected.
Match Case Includes the case of the text in Find Text String as part
of the search criteria.
Find Whole Finds only whole words that match the text in Find
Words Only Text String. For example, if you select Find Whole
Words Only and search for Front Door, FIND does not
locate the text string Front Doormat.

390 | FIND
FOG
Provides visual cues for the apparent distance of objects
Fog and depth cueing are actually two extremes of the same effect: a white
color is fog, and a black color is traditional depth cueing. You can use any
color in between.

Render Toolbar:
View menu: Render Fog
Command line: fog

AutoCAD displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box.

Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box

Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing
direction.

Enable Fog
Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box.

FOG | 391
Fog Background
Applies fog to the background as well as to the geometry.

Color System
Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red, green, blue (RGB) color system or
the hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color system.
Red, Green, Blue Adjusts the individual red, green, and blue components
of the selected color. Red, green, and blue are the
primary light colors shaded from black to the full
intensity of the color.
Moving one scroll box affects the mix of the three
colors. AutoCAD displays the result in the Color
Selected swatch. Moving all three scroll boxes all the
way to the left produces black; moving them all the way
to the right produces white. Moving red and green to
the right and blue to the left produces yellow.
Hue, Lightness, Adjusts the individual hue, lightness, and saturation
Saturation components of the selected color. AutoCAD displays
the result in the Color Selected swatch.
Moving the Hue scroll box changes the color. Moving
the Lightness scroll box increases the luminance or
brightness of the hue by adding white. Moving the
Saturation scroll box to the right increases the purity of
the color. The higher the saturation, the less gray in the
color.
Select Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the
color, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

Near/Far Distance
Define where the fog starts and ends. The values are percentages of the dis-
tance from the camera to the back clipping plane.

Near/Far Fog Percentage

Define the percentage of fog at the near and far distances, ranging from zero
fog to 100 percent fog.

392 | FOG
GOTOURL
Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object
Command line: gotourl

Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. The file or web page (URL)
that is associated with the hyperlink opens.

GRAPHSCR
Switches from the text window to the drawing area
Command line: graphscr (or 'graphscr for transparent use)

GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the
text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.

GRID
Displays a dot grid in the current viewport
The grid is for visual reference only. It is not plotted, and it is not part of the
drawing. You can turn the grid display on and off with the Grid button on
the status bar.
Command line: grid (or 'grid for transparent use)

Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: Specify a value or

GRID turned on
enter an option

Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the
value sets the grid spacing to the specified value
multiplied by the snap interval.
On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
Off Turns off the grid.
GRID turned off
Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by
the SNAP command.

GOTOURL | 393
Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions.
Specify the horizontal spacing(X) <current>: Enter a
value or press ENTER
Specify the vertical spacing(Y) <current>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
GRID set to Aspect
Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple
of the snap interval rather than the drawing units.
The Aspect option is not available when the current
snap style is Isometric.
GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups
Command line: group

The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on
the command line (see page 398).

Object Grouping Dialog Box

Displays, identifies, names, and changes object groups.

394 | GROUP
Group Name
Displays the names of existing groups.

Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0, no
groups are selectable.

Group Identification
Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group
Name list.
Group Name Specifies the group name. Group names can be up to 31
characters long and can include letters, numbers, and
the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and
underscore (_) but not spaces. AutoCAD converts the
name to uppercase characters.
Description Displays the description of the selected group, if there
is one.
Find Name Lists the groups to which an object belongs.
Pick a member of a group: Select one object

AutoCAD displays the Group Member List dialog box,

showing the groups to which the object belongs.
Highlight Shows the members of the selected group. AutoCAD
highlights the member objects in the drawing area.
Include Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed. When
Unnamed this option is cleared, only named groups are displayed.

Create Group
Specifies properties of new groups.
New Creates a new group from the selected objects. After you
select the objects, AutoCAD creates a group using the
name and description under Group Name and
Description.
AutoCAD displays the group name in the Group Name
desk, computer, and list.
telephone selected
Selectable Specifies that a new group is selectable.

GROUP | 395
Unnamed Indicates that a new group is unnamed. AutoCAD
assigns a default name, *An, to unnamed groups. The n
represents a number that increases with each new
group.

Change Group
Modifies existing groups.
Remove Removes objects from the selected group. To use this
option, clear the Selectable option.
Remove objects: Use an object selection method

AutoCAD removes the selected objects from the group

and redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box.

telephone selected telephone removed

from group

If you remove all the groups objects, the group remains

defined. You can remove the group definition from the
drawing by using the Explode option.
Note When you remove objects from a group and then
later add them back during the same drawing session,
AutoCAD returns them to their previous position in the
numerical order of the group.
Add Adds objects to the selected group.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

AutoCAD adds the selected objects to the group and

redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box.

chair selected chair added to group

Note AutoCAD alphabetizes the order of the group

names.

396 | GROUP
Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in
Group Name under Group Identification.
Re-Order Displays the Order Group dialog box (see page 397), in
which you can change the numerical order of objects
within the selected group. AutoCAD numbers objects in
the order in which you select them for inclusion in the
group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths.
For example, you can change the order in which
AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool
path pattern.
You can either change the numerical position of
individual group members or ranges of group members
or reverse the order of all members. The first object in a
group is number 0, not number 1.
Description Updates the selected groups description to the name
that you enter in Description. AutoCAD accepts up to
64 characters for a description name.
Explode Deletes the definition of the selected group. The groups
objects remain in the drawing.
Selectable Specifies whether the group is selectable.

Order Group Dialog Box

Reorders objects in groups.

Group Name Displays the names of all groups.

GROUP | 397
Description Displays the description of the selected group.
Remove from Specifies the current position of the object to reorder.
Position (0n)
Replace at Specifies the position to which the object moves.
Position (0n)
Number of Specifies the object number or range of numbers to
Objects (1n) reorder.
Re-Order Changes the numerical order of objects as specified.
Highlight Displays the members of the selected group. AutoCAD
highlights the group members in the drawing area, one
by one, in the current group order.
Reverse Order Reverses the order of all group members.

GROUP Command Line

If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter a group option
[?/Order/Add/Remove/Explode/REName/Selectable/Create] <Create>: Enter
an option or press ENTER

?List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.
Enter group name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups

Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful
when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the order in which
AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name list or enter ? to list all groups
Enter position number of the object to reorder (0 - n) or [Reverse order]: Enter
a position number or enter r

398 | GROUP
Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder.
To reorder a range of objects, specify the first objects
position number.
Replace at position <0 - n>: Enter the position number to
which you want the object to move
Number of objects to re-order <0 - n>: Enter the number
of objects to reorder

Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group.

Add
Adds objects to a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Select objects to add to group...
Select objects:

Remove
Removes objects from a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Select objects to remove from group...
Remove objects:

If you remove all the groups objects, the group remains defined. You can
remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.

Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component
objects.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups

Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.
Enter a group name to rename or [?]: Enter an existing group name or enter ? to
list all groups
Enter a new name for group or [?]: Enter a new name or enter ? to list all groups

GROUP | 399
Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
This group is current, do you want to change it [Yes/No]? <Y>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

Create
Creates a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?

Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, num-
bers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but
not spaces. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters.
Enter a group description: Enter up to 64 text characters or press ENTER
Select objects:

400 | GROUP
HATCH
Fills an area with a nonassociative hatch pattern
A nonassociative hatch is not updated when its boundaries are modified. A
hatch boundary consists of an object or objects that completely enclose an
area. If the boundary is made up of multiple objects, their endpoints must
coincide for the hatch to be created properly. You can also fill an area that
does not have a closed boundary, by defining a polyline hatch boundary
with the Direct Hatch option.
Unless you specify otherwise, HATCH combines the lines that make up the
hatch into a block.
Hatches are stored as single hatch objects, which can reduce the amount of
disk space a drawing occupies and can also reduce regeneration time.
The default draw order of the hatch is set by HPDRAWORDER, which stores the
draw order setting from the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box.

Note By default, AutoCAD wont create a hatch pattern that consists of over
10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To
reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv MaxHatch 50000) at
the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and
10,000,000.

Command line: hatch

Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or

custom pattern name, enter an option, or press ENTER

Use BHATCH to create hatches and fills in a dialog box and to create associa-
tive hatches.

Pattern NamePredefined or Custom

Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom
pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the name followed by an optional hatch
style code. Precede the name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individ-
ual lines instead of a hatch block.
Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a value or press ENTER

HATCH | 401
If the drawing is in model space and you enter a scale factor followed by xp,
AutoCAD calculates a scale factor relative to paper space.
Specify an angle for pattern <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
scale=.5 scale=1 Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary

Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary
of the hatching area and objects internal to the
angle=0 angle=30 hatching boundary. Selecting part of a block for
hatching selects the entire block. Press ENTER to end
the command and create the hatch.

Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the

hatching area.
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to
retain the hatch boundary or n to discard it after the area is
hatched
Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline
define boundary boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER

These options are also available in the PLINE command.

When you complete the polyline boundary, press
retain boundary ENTER . HATCH prompts you to create additional
polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>:
Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a hatch to the exist-
discard boundary ing hatch boundary

If you specify a point, AutoCAD prompts you for

additional points. Press ENTER to end the command
and create the hatch.

402 | HATCH
?List Pattern Names
Lists and provides a brief description of the hatch patterns defined in the
acad.pat or acadiso.pat file.
Enter pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all patterns

Solid
Specifies a solid fill.
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary

Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary
of the fill area and objects internal to the fill boundary.
Selecting part of a block for solid fill selects the entire
block. Press ENTER to end the command and create the
solid fill.
Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the fill
area.
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to
retain the fill boundary or n to discard it after the area is
filled
Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline
boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER

These options are also available in the PLINE command.

When you complete the polyline boundary, press
ENTER . HATCH prompts you to create additional
polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>:
Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a solid fill to the
existing fill boundary

HATCH | 403
If you specify a point, AutoCAD prompts you for
additional points. Press ENTER to end the command
and create the solid fill.
Note The boundary of a solid fill hatch must be closed
and must not intersect itself. In addition, if the hatch area
contains more than one loop, the loops must not intersect.
These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns.

User-Defined Pattern
Specifies a pattern of lines using the current linetype. Enter u, followed
optionally by a hatch style code (see Hatch Style Codes on page 405).
Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead
of a hatch block.
Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the distance between the
lines or press ENTER
Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of lines to
be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary

Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary
of the hatching area and objects internal to the
hatching boundary. Selecting part of a block for
hatching selects the entire block. Press ENTER to end
the command and create the hatch.
Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the
hatching area.
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to
retain the hatch boundary or n to discard it after the area is
hatched
Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline
boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER

404 | HATCH
These options are also available in the PLINE command.
When you complete the polyline boundary, press
ENTER . HATCH prompts you to create additional
polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>:
Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a hatch to the exist-
ing hatch boundary

If you specify a point, AutoCAD prompts you for

additional points. Press ENTER to end the command
and create the hatch.

Hatch Style Codes

Hatching styles control the method that AutoCAD uses to hatch internal
boundary objects. Specify a hatch style by following the pattern name with
a comma and the hatch style code. You can list the hatch style codes by fol-
lowing the pattern name with a comma (,) and a question mark (?).
For example, to hatch only the outermost area of a structure with several
internal boundaries using the MUDST pattern, enter mudst,o at the Pattern
prompt. To opt for a user-defined pattern and use the Ignore style, enter u,i.
AutoCAD stores the style by adding the comma and code to the pattern
name in the HPNAME system variable.
n (Normal) Hatches inward from the outermost area boundary. If
AutoCAD encounters an internal boundary, it turns off
hatching until it encounters another boundary. Thus,
areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by
an odd number of boundaries are hatched, and areas
separated by an even number of boundaries are not.
o (Outer) Hatches outermost areas only. This style hatches
inward from the area boundary, but it turns off
hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and
does not turn it back on again. Because this process
starts from both ends of each hatch line, this style
hatches only the outermost area of the structure and
leaves the internal structure blank.
i (Ignore) Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.
? (List Styles) Lists hatch styles.
Note Hatching concave curves using the Outer and
Ignore styles can cause discrepancies.

HATCH | 405
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or gradient fill

Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Hatch
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Hatch Edit.
Command line: hatchedit

Select associative hatch object: Use an object selection method

The Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, HATCHEDIT displays
prompts on the command line (see page 407).

Hatch Edit Dialog Box

Modifies the characteristics of an existing hatch or gradient fill. The Hatch
Edit dialog box displays the current properties of the selected hatch or fill
object. You can modify only the available properties.

406 | HATCHEDIT
Hatch Tab Modifies the hatch pattern properties. For information
about these options, see Hatch Tab (Boundary Hatch
and Fill Dialog Box) on page 112.
Advanced Tab Modifies the island detection style. The other options
on this tab are unavailable. See Island Detection Style
on page 115.
Gradient Tab Modifies the gradient fill properties. For information
about these options, see Gradient Tab (Boundary
Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) on page 118.
Inherit Properties Applies the properties of a selected hatch or fill object
to the object you are editing.
Draw Order Modifies the draw order of a hatch or fill. You can place
a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all
other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of
the hatch boundary.
Composition Controls whether the hatch is associative or
nonassociative.

Associative: Creates a hatch or fill that is updated

when you modify its boundaries.
Nonassociative: Creates a hatch or fill that is
independent of its boundaries.

Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the

selected object with the specified properties.

HATCHEDIT Command Line

If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, HATCHEDIT displays
prompts on the command line.
Select associative hatch object:
Enter hatch option [Disassociate/Style/Properties/DRaw order] <Properties>:
Enter an option or press ENTER

Note You may have difficulty when trying to select a solid-fill hatch pattern
because there are no visible grips or lines to click. For best results, either click the
outer edges of the hatch pattern or use a crossing window selection.

HATCHEDIT | 407
Disassociate
Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch.

Style
Changes the hatch style type. AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>:

Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.

Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.

AutoCAD stores the Ignore style code by adding ,I to the
pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches outermost areas only. This style hatches
inward from the area boundary, but it turns off
hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and
does not turn it back on again. Because this process
starts from both ends of each hatch line, this style
hatches only the outermost area of the structure and
leaves the internal structure blank.
AutoCAD stores the Outer style code by adding ,O to
the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Normal Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD
encounters an internal boundary, it turns off hatching
until it encounters another boundary. Thus, areas
separated from the outside of the hatched area by an
odd number of boundaries are hatched, and areas
separated by an even number of boundaries are not.
AutoCAD stores the Normal style code by adding ,N to
the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.

408 | HATCHEDIT
Properties
Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of
setting pattern properties on the command line, see BHATCH.

Draw Order
Sets the draw order of the hatch. The following prompt is displayed:
Enter draw order [do Not change/send to Back/bring to Front/send beHind
boundary/bring in front of bounDary] <do Not change>: Enter an option

Send to Back Sends the hatch in back of all other objects

Bring to Front Brings the hatch in front of all other objects
Send Behind Sends the hatch behind the hatch boundary
Boundary
Bring in Front of Brings the hatch in front of the hatch boundary
Boundary

HELP
Displays Help
Standard toolbar:
Help menu: Help
Command line: help or ? or press F1 (or 'help for transparent use)

To display Help for a menu, open the menu, and then press F1 .
Pressing F1 or entering 'help while a command is active displays Help for that
command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that
dialog box.

HELP | 409
HIDE
Regenerates a three-dimensional model with hidden lines suppressed
When you use VPOINT, DVIEW, or VIEW to create a 3D view of your drawing,
AutoCAD produces a wireframe display in the current viewport. All lines are
present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden
lines from the screen.

Render toolbar:
View menu: Hide
Command line: hide

HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles,
solids, traces, text, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon
meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness.
If they are extruded, AutoCAD treats circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline
segments as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on
objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects
whose layers have been turned off.
In order to hide text created with DTEXT, MTEXT, or TEXT, the HIDETEXT sys-
tem variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value.
When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable
before HIDE
is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines.

If the DISPSILH system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with sil-
houette edges only. It wont show the internal edges produced by objects that
have facets.
If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when produc-
after HIDE ing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether
they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text objects are
unaffected.

410 | HIDE
HLSETTINGS
Changes the display properties of hidden lines
Command line: hlsettings

The Hidden Line Settings dialog box is displayed. The settings in this dialog
box affect the display properties of hidden lines.

Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box

Sets the display properties of hidden lines. These settings are visible only
when the HIDE command or the Hidden option of the SHADEMODE com-
mand is used.

Obscured Lines
Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hid-
den line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype.
Linetype Lists the available linetypes to apply to obscured lines.
Unlike regular linetypes, obscured linetypes are not
affected by zoom level.
You can also set this option by using the
OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable.

Color Lists the available colors to apply to obscured lines.

You can also change this setting by using the
OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable.

HLSETTINGS | 411
Halo Gap Percentage
Specifies the distance to shorten a haloed line. A haloed line is shortened at
the point where it will be hidden.
The distance is specified as a percentage of 1 inch and is not affected by zoom
level.
You can also change this setting by using the HALOGAP system variable.

Include Text in HIDE Operations

Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT, DTEXT, or MTEXT com-
mand are included during a HIDE command.
You can also set this option by using the HIDETEXT system variable.

Face Intersections
Specifies the display and color of intersection polylines. An intersection
polyline is displayed at the face-to-face intersection of 3D surfaces.

INTERSECTIONDISPLAY INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to off set to on

Display Specifies the display of intersection polylines.

Intersections
You can also set this option by using the
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable.

Color Lists the available colors to apply to intersection

polylines.
You can also change this setting by using the
INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable.

412 | HLSETTINGS
Hide Precision
Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be set to either low (sin-
gle) precision or high (double) precision. You can also change this setting by
using the HIDEPRECISION system variable.
Low (single) Sets the hide precision to low (single), which uses less
memory.
High (double) Sets the hide precision to high (double), which
produces more precise hides, but also uses more
memory and can affect performance, especially when
hiding solids.

HYPERLINK
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink
Insert menu: Hyperlink
Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyper-
link, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink Edit Hyperlink.
Command line: hyperlink

Select objects: Use an object selection method

AutoCAD displays one of the following dialog boxes depending on the object
you selected:

Insert Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that do not already con-
tain hyperlinks)
Edit Hyperlink dialog box (see page 416) (for graphical objects that already
contain hyperlinks)

After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move
the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the
selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must be
set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, HYPERLINK displays options
on the command line, including an option to define an area to associate with
a hyperlink (see page 417).

HYPERLINK | 413
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box
Attaches hyperlinks to graphical objects.

Text to Display Specifies a description for the hyperlink. This is useful

when the file name or URL is not helpful in identifying
the contents of the linked file.

Existing File or Web Page Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)

Creates a hyperlink to an existing file or web page.

Type the File or Specifies the file or web page to associate with the
Web Page Name hyperlink. The file can be stored locally, on a network
drive, or on an Internet or intranet location.
Recent Files Displays a list of recently linked files, from which you
can select one to link to.
Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages, from
which you can select one to link to.
Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks, from
which you can select one to link to.
File Opens the Browse the WebSelect Hyperlink dialog
box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you
can navigate to the file that you want to associate with
the hyperlink.

414 | HYPERLINK
Web Page Opens the AutoCAD browser, in which you can
navigate to a web page that you want to associate with
the hyperlink.
Target Opens the Select Place in Document dialog box (see
page 416), in which you can select a named location in
a drawing to link to.
Path Displays the path to the file associated with the
hyperlink. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is selected,
only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for
Hyperlink is cleared, the full path and the file name are
listed.
Use Relative Path Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. If you select this
for Hyperlink option, the full path to the linked file is not stored with
the hyperlink. AutoCAD sets the relative path to the
value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable
or, if no value is specified for HYPERLINKBASE, to the
current drawing path. If this option is cleared, the full
path to the associated file is stored with the hyperlink.
Convert DWG Specifies that the DWG hyperlink will convert to a DWF
Hyperlinks to file hyperlink when you publish or plot the drawing to
DWF a DWF file.

View of This Drawing Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)

Specifies a named view in the current drawing to link to.

HYPERLINK | 415
Select a View of Displays an expandable tree view of the named views
This within the current drawing, from which you can select
one to link to.

E-mail Address Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)

Specifies an email address to link to. When the hyperlink is executed, a new
email is created using the default system email program.

E-mail Address Specifies an email address.

Subject Specifies a subject for the email.
Recently Used Lists recently used email addresses, from which you can
E-mail Addresses select one to use for the hyperlink.

Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box

Edits hyperlinks. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the
Insert Hyperlink dialog box, with one additional option.
Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects.

Select Place in Document Dialog Box

Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing. The named location that you
select is the initial view that is restored when the hyperlink is executed.

416 | HYPERLINK
Select an Existing Provides an expandable tree view of the named
Place in the locations within the linked drawing, from which you
Document can select a named location to link to.

HYPERLINK Command Line

If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, HYPERLINK displays options
on the command line. The command line version of HYPERLINK inserts
hyperlinks to areas or to selected objects and also removes hyperlinks.
Enter an option [Remove/Insert] <Insert>: Enter an option or press ENTER

Remove
Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects. If a selection set does not
exist, AutoCAD prompts you to create one.
Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing

If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink, AutoCAD presents a
numbered list on the command line of all the hyperlinks that were found.
Enter number, hyperlink, or * for all: Enter the number or name of the hyperlink,
or enter * to remove all hyperlinks in the selection set

AutoCAD displays the number of removed hyperlinks on the command line.

Insert
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area.
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Select a method for
attaching a hyperlink

Area Defines a bounding rectangle and places it on a layer

called URLLAYER. If this layer doesnt exist in the current
drawing, AutoCAD creates it.
Note To turn off the display of hyperlink bounding
rectangles in the drawing area or in your drawing plots,
you must freeze the URLLAYER layer. See Use Layers to
Manage Complexity in the Users Guide.
First corner: Specify the start point of the rectangle
Other corner: Specify the end point of the rectangle

AutoCAD prompts you to enter the path to the file you

want associated with the hyperlink.

HYPERLINK | 417
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to
a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press
ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current
drawing

AutoCAD prompts you to enter a named location for

the hyperlink, such as a view in an AutoCAD drawing
or a bookmark in a word processing file.
Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location,
or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one
Enter named description <none>: Enter a description, or
press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one

Object Specifies graphical objects to attach the hyperlink to.

Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing

AutoCAD prompts you to enter the path to the file you

want associated with the hyperlink.
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to
a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press
ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current
drawing

AutoCAD prompts you to enter a named location for

the hyperlink, such as a view in an AutoCAD drawing
or a bookmark in a word processing file.
Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location,
or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one
Enter description <none>: Enter a descriptive name for
the hyperlink, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without
one

HYPERLINKOPTIONS
Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu
Command line: hyperlinkoptions

Display hyperlink cursor, tooltip, and shortcut menu? [Yes/No] <Yes>:

Note Access to hyperlinks is not available if you choose No.

418 | HYPERLINKOPTIONS
ID
Displays the coordinate of a location
Tools menu: Inquiry ID Point
Command line: id (or 'id for transparent use)

Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point

The UCS coordinate of the location is displayed on the command line.

ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate
of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by
entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.
If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as
that of the selected feature of the object.

IMAGE
Manages images
In the Image Manager, you can attach or detach a raster or bit-mapped
bitonal, 8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image file to a drawing. You can
reload and unload images, as well as specify a new path for the images. You
can view image details such as pixel width, color depth, and resolution of the
selected image. IMAGE can combine images in a variety of formats (including
BMP, TIFF, RLE, JPG, PCX, and TGA) with AutoCAD drawings. You can dis-
play more than one image in any viewport. AutoCAD does not limit the
number and size of images.

Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Image Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Image Image Manager.
Command line: image

The Image Manager is displayed.

If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the
command line (see page 423).

ID | 419
Image Manager
Lists all the image files attached to the current drawing. You can view the
parameters and details for selected images. You can attach new image files
and detach, locate, reload, and unload attached images.

List of Images
Displays the names of all image files attached to the drawing. You can use F3
and F4 to toggle between list view and tree view.
List View Lists the image definitions attached to the drawing.
Each image name appears only once regardless of how
many times the image is attached (inserted). You can
sort the list of images by name, status (loaded,
unloaded, or not found), type (TIFF, for example), date,
size, or the saved path and file name. By default,
AutoCAD displays the list alphabetically by image
name.

To select multiple images, hold down SHIFT or CTRL

while selecting items.
To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a
specific column, click that columns heading.
To change the width of the column, drag the line
between the column headings to the right or left.
AutoCAD saves and restores the settings when you
reopen the dialog box.
To change an image name, select it and then click it
again, or select it and then press F2 . You cannot edit
names of images that reside in external references

420 | IMAGE
(xrefs). Image names can include up to 255
characters and can contain letters, digits, spaces, and
any special characters not used by
Microsoft Windows or AutoCAD. The image
name can be identical to the file name, but changing
the image name does not change the file name.

Tree View Displays all the image definitions and the levels of
nesting of images within xrefs. The top level of the tree
view shows images that you attached directly to the
drawing, images nested in block references, and the
names of externally referenced drawings containing
images. The names of the images attached to the
externally referenced drawings appear nested within
the drawing at the next tree level.
To insert a copy of an already attached image, select it,
and then choose Attach.
Tree view lists the image names only (not file names)
and lists the image name just once, regardless of how
many times the image is attached (insert).
You can edit an image name by selecting it and then
clicking it again, or by selecting it and then pressing F2 .
However, you cannot select more than one image at a
time.

Attach
Displays the Select Image File dialog box. See IMAGEATTACH. When you
unload and then reload an image, AutoCAD draws that image on top. For
more information about how to control where and how AutoCAD places the
image, see DRAWORDER. Images remain loaded or unloaded from one draw-
ing session to the next.

Detach
Removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases
all the associated image objects from the drawing and from the display.

Reload
Loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was pre-
viously unloaded. Reloading does not control whether the image is dis-
played, but it ensures display of the most current image.

IMAGE | 421
Unload
Unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image
objects from the drawing. It is recommended that you unload images no
longer needed for editing to improve performance. An unloaded image can-
not be displayed or plotted.
You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of
images associated with the drawing file.

Details
Opens the Image File Details dialog box, which displays the image name,
saved path, active path, file creation date and time, file size and type, color
system, color depth, width and height in pixels, resolution, default size in
units, and a preview image.

Image Found At
Shows the path where the selected image was found. If you select multiple
images, this field remains blank.
If the image file is not found in the path in the Saved Path column, several
other paths are automatically searched for the image file. For the list of these
paths and the order in which they are searched, see Set Paths to Externally
Referenced Drawings in the Users Guide.

Browse
Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
The path you select appears under Image Found At.

422 | IMAGE
Save Path
Stores the new path information. Press ESC while editing the path to restore
the old path. If AutoCAD cannot find the referenced image in the new path,
the images status changes to Not Found. If you do not choose Save Path after
editing the path, AutoCAD uses the original image path the next time you
load the drawing.

IMAGE Command Line

If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter image option [?/Detach/P ath/Reload/Unload/Attach/] <Attach>: Enter
an option or press ENTER

?List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is
attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. AutoCAD
lists images in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT
system variable.
Images to list <*>: Enter * to list all images, or enter an image name

Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and
erases all occurrences of the image.
Enter list of images to detach: Enter an image name, or enter * to detach all
images

Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular
image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file,
rename the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you
can update image01.pcx and save it as image02.pcx.
Enter list of images for path modification: Enter an image name, or enter * to list
all images

IMAGE | 423
If you enter an asterisk (*), AutoCAD lists the current path name for each
image and prompts for the new path.
Old path: Lists the current path name for each image
Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image

Reload
Reloads the selected images. AutoCAD reads image data into memory, mak-
ing that information available for display and plotting.
Enter list of images to reload: Enter an image name, or enter * to reload all images

Reloading...
Reload image <image name>: <hard-coded path name>
<image name> loaded and relinked.

Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not dis-
played, thus improving performance. All information associated with the
image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached
image remains visible.
Enter list of images to unload: Enter a loaded image name, or enter * to unload
all images

Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing.
AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
AutoCAD assigns the file name without the extension as the image name.
Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits,
spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or
AutoCAD. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the
Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. AutoCAD automatically gen-
erates a valid image name from the file name and appends an underscore and
number to the name, changing the number as necessary to avoid duplicate
image names.
Image file name_1 created from file file name.bmp

424 | IMAGE
If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, AutoCAD
displays the following prompts and inserts the image as a copy:
Image file name has already been loaded.
Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.
Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point
Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit
Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER

If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, AutoCAD displays the following

prompt instead of the dialog box:
Enter image file name to attach <last>: Enter an image name

The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the
default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended
that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows:
imagename=path name\long file name.bmp

or
imagename=path name\long file name.bmp

If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, AutoCAD searches
for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing,
and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. AutoCAD
searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of exten-
sion, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found,
AutoCAD displays the message Image Not Found and repeats the prompt.
To specify a long file name that does not conform to AutoCAD naming rules,
enter the name as follows:
"imagename=filename"

You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the image-
name=filename convention on the command line. Enter a tilde (~) at the
Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press ESC after the dialog box
opens, AutoCAD redisplays the Enter Image Name prompt.

IMAGE | 425
IMAGEADJUST
Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images

Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Adjust
Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Image Adjust.
Command line: imageadjust

Select image(s): Select one or more images

AutoCAD displays the Image Adjust dialog box.

If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, IMAGEADJUST displays
prompts on the command line (see page 427).

Image Adjust Dialog Box

Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast
and fade settings of the selected image. Adjusting these values changes the
display of the image but does not change the image file itself.

Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of

the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the brighter the image and the more
pixels that become white when you increase contrast.
Moving the slider to the left decreases the value;
moving the slider to the right increases the value.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect,
of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The

426 | IMAGEADJUST
greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its
primary or secondary color. Moving the slider to the left
decreases the value; moving the slider to the right
increases the value.
Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range
from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more the
image blends with the current background color. A
value of 100 blends the image completely into the
background. Changing the screen background color
causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting,
the background color for fade is white. Moving the
slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider
to the right increases the value.
Image Preview Displays a preview of the selected image. The preview
image updates dynamically to reflect changes to the
brightness, contrast, and fade settings.
Reset Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to
default settings (50, 50, and 0, respectively).

IMAGEADJUST Command Line

If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, IMAGEADJUST displays
prompts on the command line. With the command line version of IMAGE-
ADJUST, you can select more than one image to adjust.

Select image (s): Select one or more images

Enter image option [Contrast/Fade/Brightness] <Brightness>: Enter c or f, or
press ENTER to adjust brightness

If you selected a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and
Fade are the current property settings of the image selected. If you selected
multiple images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50,
50, and 0, respectively.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect,
of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its
primary or secondary color.
Enter contrast value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value

IMAGEADJUST | 427
Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range
from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more the
image blends with the current background color. A
value of 100 blends the image completely into the
background. Changing the screen background color
causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting,
the background color for fade is white.
Enter fade value (0-100) <0>: Enter a value

Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of

the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the brighter the image and the more
pixels that become white when you increase contrast.
Enter brightness value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value

IMAGEATTACH
Attaches a new image to the current drawing
IMAGEATTACH opens the Select Image File dialog box without displaying the
Image Manager first. You can view and attach raster or bitmapped bitonal,
8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image files to a drawing. Attaching an
image creates an image definition, loads the image into memory, and dis-
plays the image.

Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Raster Image
Command line: imageattach

AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Once you select an image file, AutoCAD displays the Image dia-
log box.

Image Dialog Box

Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached
images.

428 | IMAGEATTACH
Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach, either from the Select Image
File dialog box (an unattached image) or from the list of previously attached
images. To add another instance of an image file that is already attached,
select the image name from the list and choose OK.
Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). If Show Preview is selected,
AutoCAD displays a preview of the selected file.
Found In Displays the path where the image file was located.
Saved Displays the path specified when the image file was
attached to the current drawing.

Path Type
You can choose from three types of folder path information to save with an
attached image: an absolute path, a relative path, and no path. For a com-
plete description of each option, see Set Paths to Externally Referenced
Drawings in the the Users Guide.
Full Path Specifies the absolute path to the image file.
Relative Path Specifies a relative path to the image file.
No Path Specifies only the image file name. The image file
should be located in the folder with the current
drawing file.

IMAGEATTACH | 429
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image. Specify On-Screen is the
default. The default insertion point is 0,0.
Specify Directs input to the command line or the pointing
On-Screen device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the
insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
X Sets the X coordinate value.
Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. Specify On-Screen directs
input to the command line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is
cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1.
If INSUNITS is set to unitless or if the image does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If
INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the
image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true
width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. If Specify On-Screen is
selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with
your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value on the command line. If
Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box.
The default rotation angle is 0.

Details
Displays the Image Information section. You can view width and height in
pixels, the resolution, and the size in units (such as millimeters, centimeters,
meters, kilometers, inches, feet, yards, miles, unitless, and many others). The
default value for unitless images is unitless. The image size is automatically
converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height.
Image information consists of the following:

Image resolution in horizontal and vertical pixels per drawing unit

Width and height in pixels
Width and height in current drawing units

430 | IMAGEATTACH
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
With IMAGECLIP, you can define a subregion of an image for display and
plotting.

Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Clip Image
Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Image Clip.
Command line: imageclip

Select image to clip: Select an edge of an image

Enter image clipping option [ON/OFF/Delete/New boundary] <New>: Enter an
option or press ENTER

The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.

On
Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined
boundary.

Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame.
If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, AutoCAD automatically
turns clipping back on. AutoCAD prompts you to delete the old boundary
even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.

Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original
image.

IMAGECLIP | 431
New Boundary
Specifies a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or
polygonal, and consists only of straight line segments. When defining a clip-
ping boundary, specify vertices within the image boundary. Self-intersecting
vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you use the pointing
device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt, AutoCAD inter-
prets the point as the first corner of a rectangle.
Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Enter p or press
ENTER

Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary.

Specify first point: Specify a point
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point, or
enter c or u

You must specify at least three points to define a

polygon.
If the image already has a clipping boundary defined,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] <Yes>: Enter n or press
ENTER

If you choose Yes, AutoCAD redraws the entire image

and the command continues; if you choose No, the
command ends.
Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite
corners. AutoCAD always draws the rectangle parallel
to the edges of the image.
Specify first corner point: Specify a point
Specify opposite corner point: Specify a point

432 | IMAGECLIP
IMAGEFRAME
Controls whether image frames are displayed or hidden from view

Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Frame
Command line: imageframe

Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER

Raster images can be displayed with or without a frame. Because you select
an image by clicking its frame, setting IMAGEFRAME to Off prevents you from
accidentally selecting an image.
On Displays image frames so you can select images.
Off Hides image frames so you cannot select images.

IMAGEQUALITY
Controls the display quality of images
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take
longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately
without causing a regeneration of the drawing. AutoCAD always plots images
using a high-quality display.

Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Quality
Command line: imagequality

Enter image quality setting [High/Draft] <current>: Enter an option or press

ENTER

High Produces a high-quality display of the image. AutoCAD

displays the image more slowly than a draft-quality
image.
Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.
AutoCAD displays the image more quickly than a high-
quality image.

IMAGEFRAME | 433
IMPORT
Imports files in various formats

Insert toolbar:
Command line: import

The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
In Files of Type, select the format type to import. In File Name, select the file
to import. AutoCAD imports the file into the AutoCAD drawing. The follow-
ing input types are available:

WMFWindows metafile (see WMFIN)

SATACIS solid object file (see ACISIN)
3DS3D Studio file (see 3DSIN)

For the WMF file type, choosing Options from the Tools menu in this dialog
box displays the WMF In Options dialog box (see page 1098). You can display
this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS.
If FILEDIA = 0, AutoCAD displays the following prompt on the command line:
Enter import file name: Enter path and file name

INSERT
Places a drawing or named block into the current drawing

Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: Block
Command line: insert

The Insert dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, INSERT displays prompts on the
command line (see page 436).

Insert Dialog Box

Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.

434 | IMPORT
The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the
default block for subsequent uses of INSERT. The position of the inserted block
depends on the orientation of the UCS.

Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a
block.
Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard
file selection dialog box) where you can select a block
or drawing file to insert.
Path Specifies the path to the block.

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Specify Specifies the insertion point of the block using the
On-Screen pointing device.
X Sets the X coordinate value.
Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

INSERT | 435
Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X,
Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
Specify Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing
On-Screen device.
X Sets the X scale factor.
Y Sets the Y scale factor.
Z Sets the Z scale factor.
Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates.
A value specified for X is also reflected in the Y and Z
values.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS.
Specify Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing
On-Screen device.
Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.

Explode
Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When
Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects
having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the
CONTINUOUS linetype.

INSERT Command Line

If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, INSERT displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter block name or [?] <last>: Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press ENTER
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify a point or enter an option

Block Name
If you have inserted a block in the current drawing during the current editing
session, the name of the last block inserted appears as the current block in
the prompt.

436 | INSERT
Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. You
can list unnamed groups by selecting Unnamed Groups in the Object Group-
ing dialog box (see page 394).
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block
Name prompt by following the listed examples.

Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk
(*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block def-
inition is not added to the drawing.
Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name,
AutoCAD first searches the current drawing data for an existing block def-
inition by that name. If no such block definition exists in the current
drawing, AutoCAD searches the library path for a file of the same name. If
AutoCAD finds such a file, it uses the file name for the block name upon
insertion of the block definition. AutoCAD uses the same block definition
for subsequent insertions of that block. You can replace an existing block
definition with an external file by entering the following at the Enter
Block Name prompt:
block name=file name
Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is
inserted in your drawing and you want to change the existing block defi-
nition without creating a new block insertion, enter the following at the
Specify Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name prompt):
block name=
If you enter = after the block name, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Block current already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y, enter n, or
press ENTER
If you choose to redefine the block, AutoCAD replaces the existing block
definition with the new block definition. AutoCAD regenerates the draw-
ing and the new definition is applied to all existing insertions of it. Press
ESC when AutoCAD prompts you for the insertion point if you do not
want AutoCAD to insert a new block into the drawing.

?List Block Names

Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.

INSERT | 437
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the block or drawing.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors.

Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Specify rotation angle <0>:

All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are

multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or
drawing is rotated by the specified angle, using the
insertion point as the center of rotation.
Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using
the insertion point and another point as the corners of
a box. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the
X and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first
corner.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
Specify rotation angle <0>:

XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.

Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero
value, enter c, or press ENTER

X Scale Factor: Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the

block or drawing.
Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a
scale factor or press ENTER
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale
factor or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press
ENTER

438 | INSERT
Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time,
using the insertion point and another point as the
corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale
factor or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press
ENTER

Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

INSERT | 439
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the block.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under Rota-
tion match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion
Point (see page 438).

PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PScale
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 438).

PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PX
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 438).

440 | INSERT
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PY
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 438).

PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PZ
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 438).

PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PRo-
tate match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion
Point (see page 438).

INSERT | 441
INSERTOBJ
Inserts a linked or embedded object
When you insert an object into an AutoCAD drawing from an application
that supports OLE, the object can maintain a connection with its source file.
See Link and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
A linked object remains associated with its source file. When you edit a
linked object in AutoCAD, the source file changes. When you edit the object
in the source file, the linked object in AutoCAD changes.
An embedded object is not associated with its source file. You edit the embed-
ded data in the AutoCAD drawing using the source application; the source
file does not change.
Linked or embedded objects are displayed in AutoCAD and can be printed or
plotted using Windows system drivers.

Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: OLE Object
Command line: insertobj

The Insert Object dialog box is displayed.

Insert Object Dialog Box

Inserts a linked or embedded object. Options vary, depending on whether
you select Create New or Create from File.

Create New
Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you
can create a new object to insert.

442 | INSERTOBJ
Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and
embedding. To create an object to embed, double-click
an application to open it.
On the applications File menu, the Save option is
replaced with a new Update option. Choosing Update
inserts the object into the drawing or updates it.
Display as Icon Displays the source applications icon in the drawing.
Double-clicking the icon displays the embedded
information.

Create from File

Specifies a file to link or embed.

File Specifies the path and name of the file to be embedded

or linked.
Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box), in which you select a file to link or embed.

INSERTOBJ | 443
Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding
it.
Display as Icon Displays the source applications icon in the AutoCAD
drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked
or embedded information.

INTERFERE
Creates a composite 3D solid from the common volume of two or more solids

Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Interference
Command line: interfere

Select the first set of solids: Use an object selection method

first solid selected INTERFERE highlights 3D solids that overlap. If you define a single selection
set, AutoCAD checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you
define two selection sets, AutoCAD checks the solids in the first selection set
against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solid in
both selection sets, AutoCAD considers the 3D solid part of the first selection
set and ignores it in the second selection set.
Select the second set of solids: Use an object selection method or press ENTER

Pressing ENTER begins the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids. AutoCAD

highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of interfering 3D
solids and interfering pairs.
Create interference solids? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
second solid selected
Entering y creates and highlights new 3D solids on the current layer that are
the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids.
If there are more than two interfering 3D solids, it may not be clear which
pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D solids are highlighted at once.
Highlight pairs of interfering solids? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

If there is more than one interfering pair, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
interference solid
created Enter an option [Next pair/eXit] <Next>: Enter x or n, or press ENTER

Entering n or pressing ENTER cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D sol-

ids. Entering x ends the command.

444 | INTERFERE
INTERSECT
Creates composite solids or regions from the intersection of two or more solids or regions
and removes the areas outside of the intersection

Solids Editing toolbar:

Modify menu: Solids Editing Intersect
Command line: intersect

Select objects: Use an object selection method

You can select only regions and solids for use with INTERSECT.
INTERSECT calculates the overlapping area of two or more existing regions
and the common volume of two or more existing solids.

solids before INTERSECT solid after INTERSECT

The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of
arbitrary planes. AutoCAD divides the selection set into subsets and tests for
intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the solids in the
selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all sub-
sequent coplanar regions. The third subset contains the next region that is
not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent coplanar regions, and
so on until all regions belong to a subset.

regions before INTERSECT region after INTERSECT

INTERSECT | 445
ISOPLANE
Specifies the current isometric plane
Command line: isoplane (or 'isoplane for transparent use)

Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] <Top>: Enter an option or press

ENTER

The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode
is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho
mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current iso-
metric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by
ELLIPSE. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL + E or
F5 .

Left Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree

and 150-degree axis pair.
Top Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane,
defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair.
Right Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree
and 30-degree axis pair.

446 | ISOPLANE
JPGOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format
Command line: jpgout

AutoCAD creates a JPEG file that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot
options are preserved in the file when you use this command.

Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.

JUSTIFYTEXT
Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations

Text toolbar:
Modify menu: Justify Text
Modify menu: Object Text Justify
Command line: justifytext

Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish

You can choose single line text objects, multiline text objects, leader text
objects, and attribute objects.
Enter a justification option [Existing/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/
ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as the new
justification point

The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT com-
mand. The justification point options for single line text are similar to those
for multiline text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are equiva-
lent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point.

JPGOUT | 447
448
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties

Layers toolbar:
Format menu: Layer
Command line: layer (or 'layer for transparent use)

The Layer Properties Manager is displayed.

annotations If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the
command line (see page 463).
dimensions
Layer Properties Manager
objects
Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties. You can add,
delete, and rename layers, change their properties, or add descriptions. Layer
sample layers filters control which layers are displayed in the list and can also be used to
make changes to more than one layer at a time.

New Property Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box (see page
Filter 457), where you can create a layer filter based on one or
more properties of the layers.

LAYER | 449
New Group Filter Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select
and add to the filter.
Layer States Displays the Layer States Manager (see page 460), in
Manager which you can save the current property settings for
layers in a named layer state and then restore those
settings later.
New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named
LAYER1. The name is selected so that you can enter a
new layer name immediately. The new layer inherits
the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer
list (color, on or off state, and so on).
Delete Layer Marks selected layers for deletion. Layers are deleted
when you click Apply or OK. You can delete only
unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0
and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including
objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-
dependent layers.
Layers in a partially opened drawing are also considered
referenced and cannot be deleted.
Note Be careful about deleting layers if you are working
on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of
layering standards.
Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. Objects that
you create are drawn on the current layer. (CLAYER
system variable)
Current Layer Displays the name of the current layer.
Search for Layer Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter
characters. This filter is not saved when you close the
Layer Properties Manager.
Status Line Shows the name of the current filter, the number of
layers displayed in the list view, and the number of
layers in the drawing.
Invert Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the
selected layer property filter.

450 | LAYER
Apply to Layers Controls the display of layers in the list of layers on the
Toolbar Layers toolbar by applying the current layer filter.
Apply Applies changes that have been made to layers and
filters but does not close the dialog box.
The Layer Properties Manager has two panes:

Tree view
List view

Tree View
Displays a hierarchical list of layers and filters in the drawing. The top node,
All, displays all layers in the drawing. Filters are displayed in alphabetical
order. The All Used Layers filter is read-only.
Expand a node to see nested filters. Double-click a property filter to open the
Layer Filter Properties dialog box (see page 457) and view the definition of
the filter.
If there are xrefs attached to the drawing, an XREF node displays the names
of all the xrefs in the drawing and the layers in each xref. Layer filters defined
in xref files are not displayed.
Tree View Shortcut Menu
Provides commands for items selected in the tree view.
Visibility Changes the visibility state of all the layers in the
selected filter (or All or All Used Layers, if selected).

On: Objects on the layer are displayed, plotted, and

regenerated and hide other objects when you use
HIDE.
Off: Objects on the layer are not displayed and not
plotted but do hide other objects when you use
HIDE. The drawing is not regenerated when you turn
the layer on.
Thawed: Objects on the layer are displayed and
plotted and hide other objects when you use HIDE.
Frozen: Objects on the layer are not displayed and
not plotted but do hide other objects when you use
HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you thaw
the layer.

LAYER | 451
Lock Controls whether the objects on the layers in the
selected filter can be modified.

Lock: None of the objects on the layer can be

modified. You can still apply object snaps to objects
on a locked layer and perform other operations that
do not modify those objects.
Unlock: Objects on the layer can be modified.

Viewport In the current layout viewport, controls the VP Freeze

setting of the layers in the selected layer filter. This
option is not available for model space viewports.

Freeze: Sets Current VP Freeze for layers in the filter.

In the current viewport, objects on the layer are not
displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects
when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated
when you thaw the layer.
Thaw: Clears Current VP Freeze for layers in the
filter. In the current viewport, objects on the layer
are displayed and plotted and hide other objects
when you use HIDE. This option does not thaw
layers that are set to Off or Frozen in the drawing.

Isolate Group Turns off all layers not in the selected filter. The layers
that are visible are the layers in the filter.

All Viewports: In all viewports in a layout, sets

Current VP Freeze for all layers that are not in the
selected filter. In model space, turns off all layers
that are not in the selected filter.
Active Viewport Only: In the current layout viewport,
sets Current VP Freeze for all layers that are not in
the selected filter. In model space, turns off all layers
that are not in the selected filter.

New Properties Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box (see page
Filter 457), where you can create a new layer filter based on
layer names and settings; for example, on or off, color,
or linetype.

452 | LAYER
New Group Filter Creates a new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1
and adds it to the tree view. Enter a new name. Select
the All filter or any other layer filter in the tree view to
display layers in the list view, and then drag layers from
the list view into the new layer group filter in the tree
view.
You can use standard selection methods. Hold down
CTRL to select more than one layer name. Hold down
SHIFT and select the first and last layer names in a
sequence to select all layers in the sequence.
Convert to Group Converts the selected layer property filter to a layer
Filter group filter. Changing the properties of the layers in a
layer group filter has no effect on the filter.
Rename Renames the selected filter. Enter a new name.
Delete Deletes the selected layer filter. You cannot delete the
All, All Used Layers, or Xref filters. This option deletes
the layer filter but not the layers in the filter.
Properties Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where
you can modify the definition of the selected layer
property filter. This option is available only when a
layer property filter is selected.
Select Layers Temporarily closes the Layer Filter Properties dialog box
so that you can select objects in the drawing. This
option is available only when a layer group filter is
selected.

Add: Adds the layers of the selected objects to the

layer group filter that is selected in the tree view.
Replace: Replaces the layers of the selected layer
group filter with the layers of the objects that are
selected in the drawing.

List View
Displays layers and layer filters and their properties and descriptions. If a
layer filter is selected in the tree view, the list view displays only the layers in
that layer filter.
The All filter in the tree view displays all layers and layer filters in the draw-
ing. When a layer property filter is selected and there are no layers that fit its
definition, the list view is empty. You can use standard keyboard selection
methods.

LAYER | 453
To modify a property of a selected layer or of all layers in a selected filter, click
the icon for that property. When a mixed icon or Varies is displayed for a
layer filter, the property is not the same for all layers in the filter.
Status Indicates the type of item: layer filter, layer in use,
empty layer, or current layer.
Name Displays the name of the layer or filter. Press F2 to enter
a new name.
On Turns the selected layers on and off. When a layer is on,
it is visible and available for plotting. When a layer is
off, it is invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on.
Freeze Freezes the selected layers in all viewports. You can
freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other
operations; improve object selection performance; and
reduce regeneration time for complex drawings.
AutoCAD does not display, plot, hide, render, or
regenerate objects on frozen layers.
Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long
periods. If you plan to switch visibility settings
frequently, use the On/Off setting to avoid regenerating
the drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in
the current layout viewport, or in new layout viewports
as they are created.
Lock Locks and unlocks the selected layers. Objects on a
locked layer cannot be modified.
Color Changes the color associated with the selected layers.
Clicking the color name displays the Select Color dialog
box (see page 172).
Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected
layers. Clicking the linetype name displays the Select
Linetype dialog box (see page 462).
Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected
layers. Clicking the lineweight name displays the
Lineweight dialog box (see page 462).

454 | LAYER
Plot Style Changes the plot style associated with the selected
layers. If you are working with color-dependent plot
styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you
cannot change the plot style associated with a layer.
Clicking the plot style displays the Select Plot Style
dialog box (see page 736).
Plot Controls whether the selected layers are plotted. If you
turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on that layer are
still displayed. Layers that are off or frozen are not
plotted, regardless of the Plot setting.
Current VP Freeze Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport.
(available only You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport
from a layout tab) without affecting layer visibility in other viewports.
Current VP Freeze is an override to the Thaw setting in
the drawing. That is, you can freeze a layer in the
current viewport if its thawed in the drawing, but you
cant thaw a layer in the current viewport if its frozen
or off in the drawing. A layer is not visible when it is set
to Off or Frozen in the drawing.
New VP Freeze Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. For
(available only example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new
from a layout tab) viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that
layer in any newly created layout viewports but does
not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in existing viewports.
If you later create a viewport that requires dimensions,
you can override the default setting by changing the
current viewport setting.
Description (Optional) Describes the layer or the layer filter.
List View Shortcut Menu
Provides options for modifying the list and modifying selected layers and
layer filters.
Maximize Changes the width of the column to maximize display
Column of the column content. This option is available on the
shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a
column heading.
Maximize All Changes the width of all columns to maximize display
Columns of the column content. This option is available on the
shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a
column heading.

LAYER | 455
Show Filter Tree Displays the tree view. Clear this option to hide the tree
view.
Show Filters in Displays filters at the top of the list view. The filters are
Layer List listed in alphabetical order. Clear the check mark to
display only layers in the list view.
Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (CLAYER
system variable)
New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named
LAYER1. You can edit this layer name immediately. The
new layer inherits the properties of the currently
selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and
so on).
Delete Layer Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition.
You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced
layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers
containing objects (including objects in block
definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent
layers.
Note Be careful about deleting layers if you are working
on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of
layering standards.
Change Adds a description or changes the text in the
Description description for the selected layer or filter. The
description for a filter is added to the filter and to all
layers in the filter.
Remove from Removes the selected layers from the group layer filter
Group Filter that is selected in the tree view.
Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view.
Clear All Removes all selection in the list view except the most
recently selected layer or filter.
Select All but Selects everything displayed in the list view except the
Current current layer.
Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the
items that are currently selected.
Invert Layer Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the
selected layer property filter.

456 | LAYER
Layer Filters Displays a list of layer filters, including All and All Used
Layers. Click a filter to apply it to the list view.
Save Layer States Displays the New Layer State to Save dialog box (see
page 462), in which you save the layer state and layer
property settings of all layers in a drawing.
Restore Layer Displays the Layer States Manager (see page 460), in
State which you can select a named layer state to restore
settings of all layers in the drawing. Restores only those
layer state and property settings that were selected
when the named layer state was saved.

Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box

Filters layers based on criteria you select. When a layer filter is selected in the
tree view of the Layer Properties Manager, layers that match the filter criteria
are displayed in the list view.

Filter Name
Provides a space to enter a name for the layer properties filter.

Show Example
Displays the examples of layer property filter definitions in Layer Filter
Examples (see page 458).

Filter Definition
Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define
the filter. For example, you can define a filter that displays all layers that are
either red or blue and in use. To include more than one color, linetype, or
lineweight, duplicate the filter on the next line and select a different setting.
Status Click the In Use icon or the Not In Use icon.
Name Use wild-card characters to filter layer names. For
example, enter *mech* to include all layers with the
letters mech in the name.
All the wild-card characters are listed in the table in
Filter and Sort the List of Layers in the Users Guide.
On Click the On or the Off icon.
Freeze Click the Freeze or the Thaw icon.
Lock Click the Lock or the Unlock icon.

LAYER | 457
Color Click the [...] button to display the Select Color dialog
box (see page 172).
Linetype Click the [...] button to display the Select Linetype
dialog box (see page 462).
Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog
box (see page 462).
Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style
dialog box (see page 736).
Plot Click the Plot icon or the Do Not Plot icon.

Filter Preview
Displays the results of the filter as you define it. The filter preview shows
which layers will be displayed in the layer list in the Layer Properties
Manager when you select this filter.

Layer Filter Examples

Each example shows a layer filter definition that is set up in the Layer Filter
Properties dialog box.
Example 1
The filter named In-use Wall layers displays layers that meet all of the fol-
lowing criteria:

Are in use
Have a name that contains the letters wall
Are on

458 | LAYER
Example 2
The filter named Red Yellow White displays layers that meet all of the fol-
lowing criteria:

Are on
Are thawed
Are red or yellow or white

LAYER | 459
Layer States Manager
Saves, restores, and manages named layer states.

460 | LAYER
Layer States Lists the named layer states that have been saved in the
drawing, the space in which they were saved, and an
optional description.
New Displays the New Layer State to Save dialog box, where
you can provide a name and a description for the new
named layer state.
Delete Removes the selected named layer state.
Import Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you
can load a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into
the current drawing. Additional layers may be created
as a result of importing a layer state file.
Export Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you
can save the selected named layer state to a layer state
(LAS) file.
Layer Settings to Specifies the layer state settings and layer properties
Restore that are to be restored when the selected named layer
state is restored. When you save a named layer state on
the Model tab, the Current VP Frozen/Thawed and New
VP Frozen/Thawed check boxes are not available.
Select All Selects all the settings.
Clear All Removes selection from all the settings.
Turn Off Layers When you restore a named layer state, turns off new
Not Found in layers for which settings were not saved so that the
Layer State drawing looks the same way it did when the named
layer state was saved.
Restore Restores state and property settings of all layers in a
drawing to previously saved settings. Restores only
those layer state and property settings that were
selected when the named layer state was saved.
Close Closes the Layer States Manager and saves changes.

LAYER | 461
New Layer State to Save Dialog Box
Specifies a name and a description for the layer state defined in the Layer
States Manager.
New Layer State Specifies a name for the new layer state to be saved.
Name
Description (Optional) Provides a description of the layer state that
is displayed in the Layer States Manager.

Select Linetype Dialog Box

Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.

Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current

drawing.
Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see
page 501), in which you can load selected linetypes into
the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.

Lineweight Dialog Box

Displays fixed lineweight values available in AutoCAD. You can customize
your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor.
See Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype in the Users Guide.

462 | LAYER
Lineweights Displays the available lineweights that can be applied
to a layer. Available lineweights consist of fixed values
that are most commonly used in drawings. Select a
lineweight to apply it.
Original Displays the previous lineweight assigned to the layer.
The default lineweight assigned when a layer is created
is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0.01 inches
or 0.25 mm). The value of DEFAULT is controlled by the
LWDEFAULT system variable.

New Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer.

LAYER Command Line

If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the
command line.
Current layer: <"current">
Enter an option [?/Make/Set/New/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/Plot/PStyle/
Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte]:

Note The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.

LAYER | 463
?List Layers
Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states,
color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally
dependent layers.
Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list, or press ENTER to list all layers

Make
Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current
layer.
Enter name for new layer (becomes the current layer) <current>: Enter a name
or press ENTER

If no layer exists for the name you enter, AutoCAD creates a new layer with
that name. The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by
default: color number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of
DEFAULT.

If the layer exists but is turned off, AutoCAD turns it on.

Set
Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not
already exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, AutoCAD turns it on and
makes it current. A frozen layer cannot be made current.
Enter a layer name to make current or <select object>: Enter a name or press
ENTER and select an object

New
Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated
by commas.
Enter name list for new layer(s):

On
Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to turn On:

Off
Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to turn Off or <select objects>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER and select objects

464 | LAYER
Color
Changes the color associated with a layer.
Enter color name or number (1-255)[Truecolor/COlorbook]: Enter a color name
or a number from 1 through 255, enter t, or enter co

True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255
separated by commas to specify a true color

Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for
the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that
has been installed, such as PANTONE

If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you

to enter the color name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the
selected color book, such as PANTONE 573

Enter name list of layer(s) for color current <current>: Enter a name or a list of
names separated by commas, or press ENTER

The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To
assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign ().

Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.
Enter a loaded linetype name or [?] <CONTINUOUS>: Enter a currently loaded
linetype name, enter ?, or press ENTER

If you enter a linetype or press ENTER , the following prompt is displayed:

Enter name list of layer(s) for linetype "current" <current>: Enter a wild-card
pattern, a name, or a list of names separated by commas, or press ENTER

If you enter ? at the Enter a Loaded Linetype Name prompt, the following
prompt is displayed:
Enter linetype name(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern, or press ENTER to
list all names in the drawing

LAYER | 465
Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
Enter lineweight (0.0mm - 2.11mm):

If you enter a valid lineweight, the current lineweight is set to the new value.
If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the
nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to plot an object with a cus-
tom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the
Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.
Enter name list of layers(s) for lineweight current <current>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER

The lineweight is assigned to the layer or layers.

Plot
Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is cur-
rently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted.
Enter a plotting preference [Plot/No plot] <Plot>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Enter layer name(s) for this plot preference <current>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER

The plot setting is assigned to the layer or layers.

Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are
using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY
system variable is set to 1). See Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects
in the Users Guide.
Enter plot style or [?] <Normal>: Enter a name, enter ? to list existing plot styles,
or press ENTER

If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, the following prompt is dis-
played:
Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current <current>: Enter the names of the
layers to use this plot style, or press ENTER to apply the style to the current layer only

466 | LAYER
Freeze
Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration
and plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to freeze or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER and select objects

Thaw
Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and
plotting.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to thaw:

Lock
Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to lock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER and select objects

Unlock
Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to unlock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER and select objects

State
Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing.
Enter an option [?/Save/Restore/Edit/Name/Delete/Import/EXport]:

?List Named Lists the named layer state (LAS) files in the support
Layer States path for the drawing.
Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a
drawing under a specified layer state name. When
saving a layer state, you specify which layer settings are
affected when the layer state is later restored.
Enter new layer state name: Enter a name and press
ENTER
Enter states to change
[On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/line-
Weight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to save
and then press ENTER

LAYER | 467
Restore Restores the state and property settings of all layers to
previously saved settings. Restores only those layer state
and property settings that were selected when the layer
state was saved.
Enter name of layer state to restore or [?]: Enter the layer
state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names

Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer

state. When the layer state is restored, the specified
settings are used.
Enter name of layer state to edit or [?]: Enter the layer
state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names
Enter states to change
[On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/line-
Weight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to
change and then press ENTER

Name Changes the name of a saved layer state.

Enter name of layer state to rename or [?]: Enter the layer
state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names
Enter new layer state name:

Delete Removes a saved layer state.

Enter name of layer state to delete or [?]: Enter the layer
state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names

Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into

the current drawing. Additional layers may be created
as a result of importing a layer state file.
Enter file name to import <current>:

Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS)

file.
Enter name of layer state to export or [?]: Enter the layer
state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names
Export state to file name:

468 | LAYER
LAYERP
Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings

Layers toolbar:
Command line: layerp

Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If
settings are restored, AutoCAD displays the message Restored previous layer
states.
LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes:

Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer Pre-
vious restores the original properties but not the original name.
Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not
restore it.
Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does
not remove it.

LAYERPMODE
Turns the tracking of changes made to layer settings on and off
Command line: layerpmode

Enter LAYERP mode <ON>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER

When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When
Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.

LAYOUT
Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs
A layout is used to compose or lay out your drawing for plotting. A layout
may consist of a title block, one or more viewports, and annotations.

LAYERP | 469
Note Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name.

Layouts toolbar:
Insert Menu: Layout
Command line: layout

Enter layout option [Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAveas/Set/?] <set>:

Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new

layout assumes the name of the copied layout with an
incremental number in parentheses. The new tab is
inserted before the copied layout tab.
Enter name of layout to copy <current>:
Enter layout name for copy <default>:

Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default.

Enter name of layout to delete <current>:

The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the

geometry from the Model tab, you must select all
geometry and use the ERASE command.
New Creates a new layout tab. Up to 255 layouts can be
created in a single drawing.
Enter name of new layout <Layout#>:

Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up

to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only
the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab.
Template Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in
a template (DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing
interchange (DXF) file. If the FILEDIA system variable is
set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed
for selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file. After you select
a file, AutoCAD displays the Insert Layouts dialog box,
which displays the layouts saved in the selected file.
After you select a layout, the layout and all objects from
the specified template or drawing file are inserted into
the current drawing.

470 | LAYOUT
Rename Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the
default for the layout to rename.
Enter layout to rename <current>:
Enter new layout name <current>:

Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up

to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only
the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab.
Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template (DWT) file without
saving any unreferenced symbol table and block
definition information. You can then use the template
to create new layouts in your drawings without having
to eliminate unnecessary information. See Reuse
Layouts and Layout Settings in the Users Guide.
Enter layout to save to template <current>:

The last current layout is used as the default for the

layout to save as a template. If the FILEDIA system
variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box
is displayed in which you can specify the template file
in which to save the layout. The default layout template
directory is specified in the Options dialog box (see
page 624).
Set Makes a layout current.
Enter layout to make current <last>:

?List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.

LAYOUTWIZARD
Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings
Insert menu: Layout Layout Wizard
Tools menu: Wizards Create Layout
Command line: layoutwizard

The Layout wizard is displayed.

LAYOUTWIZARD | 471
Layout Wizard
The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the pro-
cess of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from
scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout.
Depending on which plotting device is currently configured, you can select
a paper size from those available. You can select a predefined title block to
apply to your new layout. The Preview area displays a preview image of the
title block you select.
When youve finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you
can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within
the new layout.

LAYTRANS
Changes a drawing's layers to layer standards you specify

CAD Standards toolbar:

Tools menu: CAD Standards Layer Translator
Command line: laytrans

The Layer Translator is displayed.

Layer Translator
In the Layer Translator, you specify the layers in the current drawing that you
want to translate, and the layers to translate them to.

Translate From
Specifies the layers to be translated in the current drawing. You can specify
layers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection
filter.

472 | LAYTRANS
The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the
layer is referenced in the drawing. A dark icon indicates that the layer is ref-
erenced; a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced. Unreferenced layers
can be deleted from the drawing by right-clicking in the Translate From list
and choosing Purge Layers.
Selection Filter Specifies layers to be selected in the Translate From list,
using a naming pattern that can include wild-cards. For
a list of valid wild-cards, see the table in Filter and Sort
the List of Layers in the Users Guide. The layers
identified by the selection filter are selected in addition
to any layers previously selected.
Select Selects the layers specified in Selection Filter.

Map
Maps the layers selected in Translate From to the layer selected in Translate
To.

Map Same
Maps all layers that have the same name in both lists.

Translate To
Lists the layers you can translate the current drawings layers to.
Load Loads layers in the Translate To list using a drawing,
drawing template, or standards file that you specify. If
the specified file contains saved layer mappings, those
mappings are applied to the layers in the Translate
From list and are displayed in Layer Translation
Mappings.
You can load layers from more than one file. If you load
a file that contains layers of the same name as layers
already loaded, the original layers are retained and the
duplicate layers are ignored. Similarly, if you load a file
containing mappings that duplicate mappings already
loaded, the original mappings are retained and the
duplicates are ignored.
New Defines a new layer to be shown in the Translate To list
for translation. If you select a Translate To layer before
choosing New, the selected layers properties are used as
defaults for the new layer. You cannot create a new layer
with the same name as an existing layer.

LAYTRANS | 473
Layer Translation Mappings
Lists each layer to be translated and the properties to which the layer will be
converted. You can select layers in this list and edit their properties using
Edit.
Edit Opens the Edit Layer dialog box, where you can edit the
selected translation mapping. You can change the
layers linetype, color, and lineweight. If all drawings
involved in translation use plot styles, you can also
change the plot style for the mapping.
Remove Removes the selected translation mapping from the
Layer Translation Mappings list.
Save Saves the current layer translation mappings to a file for
later use.
Layer mappings are saved in the DWG or DWS file
format. You can replace an existing file or create a new
file. The Layer Translator creates the referenced layers in
the file and stores the layer mappings in each layer. All
linetypes used by those layers are also copied into the
file.

Settings
Opens the Settings dialog box, where you can customize the process of layer
translation.

Translate
Starts layer translation of the layers you have mapped.
If you have not saved the current layer translation mappings, you are
prompted to save the mappings before translation begins.

Settings Dialog Box

Controls the process of layer translation.
Force Object Specifies whether or not every object translated takes
Color to BYLAYER on the color assigned to its layer. If this option is
selected, every object takes on the color of its layer. If
this option is cleared, every object retains its original
color.

474 | LAYTRANS
Force Object Specifies whether or not every object translated takes
Linetype to on the linetype assigned to its layer. If this option is
BYLAYER selected, every object takes on the linetype of its layer.
If this option is cleared, every object retains its original
linetype.
Translate Objects Specifies whether or not objects nested within blocks
in Blocks are translated. If this option is selected, nested objects
in blocks are translated. If this option is cleared, nested
objects in blocks are not translated.
Write Transaction Specifies whether or not a log file detailing the results
Log of translation is created. If this option is selected, a log
file is created in the same folder as the translated
drawing. The log file is assigned the same name as the
translated drawing, with a .log file name extension. If
the Write Transaction Log option is cleared, no log file
is created.
Show Layer Specifies which layers to display in the drawing area. If
Contents When this option is selected, only the layers selected in the
Selected Layer Translator dialog box are displayed in the
drawing area. If this option is cleared, all layers in the
drawing are displayed.

Edit/New Layer Dialog Box

Sets or modifies layer properties.
Name Specifies the layer name.
Linetype Specifies the layer linetype.
Color Specifies the layer color.
Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweight.
Plot Style Specifies the layer plot style. You can modify the plot
style only if all drawings referenced by the Layer
Translator use named plot styles.

LAYTRANS | 475
LEADER
Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature
A leader line is an object that can be composed of an arrowhead attached to
splines or straight line segments. In some cases, a short horizontal line, called
a hook line, dogleg, or landing, connects text and feature control frames to
the leader line. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the
leader start point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object
is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line
stretches, but the text or feature control frame remains in place.
You can use various dimensioning system variables to format the leader line,
such as placing the text above the hook line with DIMTAD.

LEADER creates complex leader lines that can be made up of more than two
line segments. DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS create simple automatic leader
lines with two line segments for circles and arcs.
Command line: leader

Specify leader start point:

Specify next point:

AutoCAD draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to
prompt for points and options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point,
enter an option, or press ENTER

Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt
you for points and options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point,
enter an option, or press ENTER

476 | LEADER
Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be
single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric
tolerances, or a block.
Enter first line of annotation text or <options>: Enter text or press ENTER

If you enter text at the Annotation prompt, AutoCAD places the text at the
end of the leader line. AutoCAD prompts you for additional lines of text until
you end the command by pressing ENTER twice.
If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] <Mtext>:
Enter an option or press ENTER

Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric

tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog boxes
(see TOLERANCE).
You can create datum indicators and basic dimension
notation in these dialog boxes. After you specify the
geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.
Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control
frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and
connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The
copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if
the end of the leader line moves, the copied object
moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on
the object copied.
Select an object to copy:

AutoCAD places the object and ends LEADER. The value

of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP
system variable) determines where AutoCAD inserts the
text and multiline text objects. AutoCAD attaches any
blocks or feature control frames with geometric
tolerances to the end of the leader line.
Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. AutoCAD
uses the same prompts as the INSERT command. The
block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of
the leader line and is associated to the leader line,

LEADER | 477
meaning that if the end of the leader line moves, the
block moves with it. No hook line is displayed.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a block name or enter ? to
list all blocks in the drawing

None Ends the command without adding any annotation to

the leader line.
Mtext Creates text using the Multiline Text Editor (see page
567) when you specify an insertion point and a second
point for the text boundary.
Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings
for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). Enclose
format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]).
For more information about adding a prefix or suffix,
see Control the Display of Dimension Units in the
Users Guide.
The units settings and the current text style determine
how AutoCAD displays the text. AutoCAD vertically
centers the multiline text and horizontally aligns it
according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices
of the leader line. AutoCAD offsets the multiline text
from the hook line by the distance specified under
Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New,
Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box (see
page 284). If the offset specified is negative, AutoCAD
encloses the multiline text in a box as a basic
dimension.
After you specify the text, LEADER ends.

Format
Controls the way AutoCAD draws the leader and whether it has an
arrowhead.
Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] <Exit>: Enter an
option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt

After each option, the Specify Next Point prompt is redisplayed.

478 | LEADER
spline leader line straight leader line sample arrowheads no arrowhead

Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the

leader line are the control points, each of equal unit
weight.
Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments.
Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line.
None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start
point.
Exit Exits the Format options.

Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. AutoCAD then redisplays the
previous prompt.

LENGTHEN
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs
LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the
selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordi-
nate system (UCS).
Modify menu: Lengthen
Command line: lengthen

Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object or enter an

option

Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object.
Current length: <current>, included angle: <current>
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object, enter an
option, or press ENTER to end the command

LENGTHEN | 479
Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the
endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle
of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value
trims it.
Enter delta length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a, or press
ENTER

Delta Length
Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u

The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.

delta length

object selected

Angle
Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.
Enter delta angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u

The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.

delta angle

object selected

480 | LENGTHEN
Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Per-
cent also changes the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total
included angle of the arc.
Enter percentage length <current>: Enter a positive nonzero value or press
ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u

The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.

Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length
from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc
by a specified total angle.
Specify total length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a positive
nonzero value, enter a, or press ENTER

total length

object selected

Total Length
Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u

The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.

Angle
Sets the included angle of the selected arc.
Specify total angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u

The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.

LENGTHEN | 481
total angle

object selected

Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected
object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u

The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.

LIGHT
Manages lights and lighting effects
You can use light in model space only. You can display ambient, point, dis-
tant, and spot lights in SHADEMODE and 3DORBIT. To display these lights, you
must set SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On,
or Gouraud Shaded Edges On. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE
options do not display lights. To turn on lights, from the Tools menu, select
Options. In the Options dialog box, select the System tab. On the System tab
under Current 3D Graphics Display, choose Properties.

Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Light
Command line: light

The Lights dialog box is displayed.

Note In the 3DCONFIG command, under Render Options, the Lights option
must be set to ON for lights to appear in your drawing.

482 | LIGHT
Lights Dialog Box
Manages lighting and controls the location, color, and intensity of lighting
effects.

Lights
Lists all lights in the current drawing.

Modify
Modifies the selected light.
AutoCAD displays the Modify Point Light dialog box (see page 485), Modify
Distant Light dialog box (see page 487), or Modify Spotlight dialog box (see
page 489), depending on the type of light you select.

Delete
Deletes the selected light from the drawing.

Select
Selects a light using the pointing device. AutoCAD temporarily closes the dia-
log box while you select a light. The Lights dialog box is redisplayed with the
name of the light selected in the Lights list.

New
Creates a new light in the current drawing. AutoCAD displays the New Point
Light dialog box (see page 485), New Distant Light dialog box (see page 487),
or New Spotlight dialog box (see page 489), depending on the type of light
you select.

LIGHT | 483
Point Light Emits radiating light beams. You can specify no
attenuation, or attenuation that is inverse linear or
inverse square. See Overview of Lights in Rendering
in the Users Guide.
Distant Light Emits parallel light beams in one direction. Distant
lights have no attenuation. Emitted light remains at
constant intensity no matter how far it travels.
Spotlight Emits light in a cone in a specified direction. See Add,
Modify, and Delete Lights in the Users Guide.
When you create a light, AutoCAD inserts a light block in the drawing to
show the lights type and position.

point light block distant light block spotlight block

North Location
Displays the North Location dialog box (see page 491), in which you can set
the north direction.

Ambient Light
Controls background light that provides constant illumination of all the sur-
faces in your model. Keep ambient light low to avoid saturating or dulling
your image.
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of ambient light from no ambient light (0) to full
brightness (1).
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of ambient light. The color swatch
shows the current color.
Select Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the color
of light, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

484 | LIGHT
New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box
Creates a new point light or modifies the selected point light.

Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight char-
acters long.

Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. Entering 0 turns off a light.
The maximum point light intensity depends on the attenuation setting and
the extents of the drawing. If attenuation is none, maximum intensity is 1.
If attenuation is inverse linear, maximum intensity is the value of twice the
extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to
the maximum upper-right coordinate. The default value for inverse linear is
half the maximum intensity.
If attenuation is inverse square, maximum intensity is twice the square of the
extents distance.

Position
Modifies or displays the X,Y,Z coordinate location of the light and its target.

LIGHT | 485
Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the
pointing device to specify a location for the light.
Enter light location <current>: Specify a point or press
ENTER

Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box, which

displays the X,Y,Z coordinate of the lights location and
target. Point lights radiate light in all directions with no
target.

Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the point light. The color swatch
shows the current color. To define the color of light, you can select from the
255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
Select Color Displays the Select Color dialog box, True Color tab.
Select Indexed Displays the Select Color dialog box Index tab.

Attenuation
Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is
from a point light, the darker the object appears.
None Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are
as bright as objects close to the light.
Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance
from the point light. For example, at a distance of 2
units from a point light, light is half as strong as at the
point light; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter
as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the
maximum intensity.
Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the
distance from the point light. For example, at a distance
of 2 units from a point light, light is one quarter as
strong as at the point light; at a distance of 4 units, light
is one sixteenth as strong.

Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.
Shadow On Makes the point light cast shadows. The type of shadow
depends on the current renderer type and on the
settings in the Shadow Options dialog box.

486 | LIGHT
Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 491).

New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box

Creates a new distant light or modifies the selected distant light.

Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight char-
acters long.

Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The intensity value can range
from 0 (off) to 1 (full intensity).

Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the distant light. The color swatch
shows the current color.
Select Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the color
of light, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.

LIGHT | 487
Shadow On Makes the distant light cast shadows. The type of
shadow depends on the current renderer type and on
the settings in the Shadow Options dialog box.
Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 491).

Sun Angle Calculator

Displays the Sun Angle Calculator dialog box (see page 492), in which you
can specify a time and place so the renderer can calculate the position of the
sun.

Azimuth
Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. The
Azimuth scroll bar ranges from 180 to 180. Values you enter are converted
to this range. For example, if you enter 315, the scroll bar correctly displays
this as equivalent to 45.
When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and alti-
tude, the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change
the values of azimuth and altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams
themselves.

Altitude
Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. The
Altitude scroll bar ranges from 0 to 90. You can enter values between 0 and
90.
When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and alti-
tude, the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change
the values of Azimuth or Altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams
themselves.

Light Source Vector

Displays the light source vector that results from the light position you set
using Azimuth and Altitude. You can also enter values directly in X, Y, and Z.
When you use the light source vector to specify the distant lights direction,
AutoCAD updates the Azimuth and Altitude controls to show the new
position.
Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the
pointing device to define a light source vector by
specifying two points.

488 | LIGHT
New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box
Creates a new spotlight or modifies the selected spotlight.

Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight char-
acters long.

Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The maximum spotlight inten-
sity depends on the attenuation setting and the extents of the drawing. If
attenuation is none, maximum intensity is 1.
If attenuation is inverse linear, maximum intensity is the value of twice the
extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to
the maximum upper-right coordinate. The default value for inverse linear is
half the maximum intensity.
If attenuation is inverse square, maximum intensity is twice the square of the
extents distance.

Position
Modifies or displays the X,Y,Z coordinate location of the light and its target.

LIGHT | 489
Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the
pointing device to specify a location for the light and its
target. A vector connects the spotlight location to its
current target.
Enter light target <current>: Specify a point or press
ENTER
Enter light location <current>: Specify a point or press
ENTER

Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box, which

displays the X,Y,Z coordinates of the lights location
and target.

Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the spotlight. The color swatch shows
the current color.
Select Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the color
of light, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

Hotspot
Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known
to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160
degrees. The default is 44 degrees.

Falloff
Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as
the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 45
degrees.

Attenuation
Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is
from a spotlight, the darker the object appears.
None Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the spotlight are
as bright as objects close to the light.
Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance
from the spotlight. For example, at a distance of 2 units
from a spotlight, light is half as strong as at the
spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as
strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the
maximum intensity.

490 | LIGHT
Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the
distance from the spotlight. For example, at a distance
of 2 units from a spotlight, light is one quarter as strong
as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one
sixteenth as strong.

Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.
Shadow On Makes the spotlight cast shadows. The type of shadow
depends on the current renderer type and on the
settings in the Shadow Options dialog box.
Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 491).

North Location Dialog Box

Sets the north direction.

By default, north is the positive Y direction in the world coordinate system

(WCS). To change it, enter a new angle, or use the scroll bar. The Y axis is 0
degrees, the X axis is 90 degrees, and so on clockwise.
You can also specify north in a user coordinate system (UCS) if there are any
named in your drawing. Select from the Use UCS list. AutoCAD uses the Y
axis in that UCS as the north direction.

Shadow Options Dialog Box

Specifies the type of shadow.

LIGHT | 491
Shadow Produces volumetric shadows (Photo Real renderer) and
Volumes/Ray raytraced shadows (Raytrace renderer) for this light.
Traced Shadows Shadow maps are not available, but the shadow map
size and softness settings are retained.
Shadow Map Size Controls the size, in pixels, of one side of the shadow
map. Select from a range of values between 64 and
4096. The larger the map size, the more accurate the
shadows, but the longer it takes to render them.
Shadow Softness Controls the softness or fuzziness of shadow-mapped
shadows. The value you enter represents the number of
pixels at the edge of the shadow that are blended into
the underlying image. The value can range from 1 to
10, but usually values from 2 to 4 give the best results.
Shadow Prompts you to modify a selection set of objects whose
Bounding bounding box is used to clip the shadow maps.
Objects

Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box

Specifies a time and place so that the renderer can calculate the position of
the sun.

Note The Sun Angle Calculator takes its north as the current AutoCAD north
direction. By default this is the positive Y direction of the current coordinate sys-
tem. You can change the north direction in the North Location dialog box (see
page 491).

492 | LIGHT
The right side of the dialog box shows the azimuth, altitude, and solar time
resulting from the local time you select. (You cannot alter the azimuth and
altitude directly as you can in the New Distant Light or Modify Distant Light
dialog box.) You specify time on the left side of the dialog box.
Date Specifies the date. You can enter a date or use the scroll
bar. The date can range from January 1 (1/1) to
December 31 (12/31).
Clock Time Sets the local time on a 24-hour clock. You can enter a
time or use the scroll bar.
Time Zone Specifies the time zone (assuming standard hours, as
opposed to daylight savings).
Daylight Savings Specifies daylight savings for the date and time zone.
Latitude Specifies the latitude. You can enter a value or use the
scroll bar. Zero degrees indicates the equator; 90 degrees
indicates the pole in the current hemispherenorth or
south.
Longitude Specifies the longitude. You can enter a value or use the
scroll bar. Zero degrees indicates the Greenwich
meridian; 180 degrees indicates the opposite meridian
in the direction of the current hemisphereeast or
west.
Northern or Specifies the northern or southern hemisphere.
Southern
Hemisphere

LIGHT | 493
Western or Specifies the eastern or western hemisphere.
Eastern
Hemisphere
Geographic Displays the Geographic Location dialog box (see page
Location 494), in which you can specify the suns latitude and
longitude indirectly by naming a city or pointing to a
map.

Geographic Location Dialog Box

Specifies the suns latitude and longitude indirectly by using a city or a loca-
tion on a map. The map panel shows one of several maps. Use the list above
the map to select the map you want. Click the map to change the longitude
and latitude.

City Lists the cities available on the current map. Select a

city from this list to display its latitude and longitude.
The currently selected city is displayed below the list. If
you select a map location while the Nearest Big City
option is cleared, no city name is displayed below the
list.

494 | LIGHT
Latitude and Displays the location of the currently selected city or
Longitude your most recent map selection. You can also enter
these values directly. When you choose OK, AutoCAD
updates the Sun Angle Calculator with the new latitude
and longitude.
In this dialog box, you can specify the latitude and
longitude as less than 0, depending on which
hemisphere is current.
Current Map Specifies the current map. To change the map, select
another option from the list.
Nearest Big City Finds the city nearest the map position that you click
and makes that city current.

LIMITS
Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or layout tab
Grid limits determine the area of the drawing that can display grid dots, the
area displayed by one of the scale options of ZOOM, and the minimum area
displayed by ZOOM All. When plotting a drawing, you can also specify the
grid limits as the area to plot.
When limits checking is turned on, the grid limits restrict the coordinates
you can enter to the specified rectangular area.
From a layout tab, when either the paper background or the printable area is
displayed, you cannot set the grid limits with LIMITS. In this case, limits are
calculated and set by the layout according to the selected paper size. You can
control the display of the paper background and printable area from the Dis-
play tab of the Options dialog box (see page 624).
Format menu: Drawing Limits
Command line: limits (or 'limits for transparent use)

LIMITS | 495
Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a point, enter on or off,
upper right
or press ENTER

Lower-Left Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits.

Corner
Specify upper right corner <current>: Specify a point or
press ENTER

On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on,

lower left you cannot enter points outside the grid limits. Because
limits checking tests only points that you enter,
portions of objects such as circles can extend outside
the grid limits.
Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current
values for the next time you turn on limits checking.

LINE
Creates straight line segments
You can specify the endpoints of lines using two-dimensional (2D) or three-
dimensional (3D) coordinates.
AutoCAD draws a line segment and continues to prompt for points. You can
draw a continuing series of line segments, but each line segment is a separate
object. Press ENTER to end the command.
For example, the following command sequence draws a single line segment.
2 Command: line
Specify first point: Specify a point (1)
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point (2)
1 Specify next point or [Undo]: Press ENTER

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Line
Command line: line

Specify first point: Specify a point or press ENTER to continue from the last drawn
line or arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:

Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most

recently drawn line.

496 | LINE
before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER

If the most recently drawn line is an arc, its endpoint

defines the starting point of the line, and the line is
drawn tangent to the arc.

before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER

Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first
line segment, which forms a closed loop of line
segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a
series of two or more segments.

before entering c after entering c

Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.

before entering u after entering u

Entering u more than once backtracks through line

segments in the order you created them.

LINE | 497
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes
Line characteristics consist of combinations of dashes, dots, and spaces. You
continuous
can use LINETYPE to load linetype definitions from a linetype library (LIN)
file, make a linetype current, or modify linetype scales.
hidden
Format menu: Linetype
center Command line: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use)

dash-dot The Linetype Manager is displayed.

If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, LINETYPE displays prompts
sample complex on the command line (see page 501).
linetype

Linetype Manager
Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.

Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter line-
types based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are refer-
enced by objects.

498 | LINETYPE
Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria
you select. Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria
are displayed in the linetype list.

Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see page 501), in which
you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and
add them to the linetype list.

Current
Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current line-
type to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned
to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object
assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever
the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE sys-
tem variable stores the linetype name.

Delete
Deletes selected linetypes from the list. You can delete only unreferenced
linetypes. Default referenced linetypes include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and
CONTINUOUS.

Note Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a

shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype
definition remains stored in the acad.lin or acadiso.lin file and can be reloaded.

Show Details or Hide Details

Controls whether the Details section of the Linetype Manager is displayed.

List of Linetypes
Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype
Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype
list to display the shortcut menu.

LINETYPE | 499
Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a
linetype, select it and then click it again and enter a
new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and xref-
dependent linetypes cannot be renamed. The linetype
name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names
can contain letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special
characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (), and underscore
(_). Linetype names cannot include the special
characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question
mark (?), asterisk (*), less-than and greater-than
symbols (> <), forward and back slashes (/ \), vertical
bar (|), quote (), or back quote (`).
Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes.
Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be
edited in the Details area.

Details
Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings.
Name Displays the selected linetype name, which can be
edited. The linetype name can include up to 255
characters. Linetype names can contain letters, digits,
blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($),
hyphen (), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot
include the special characters comma (,), colon (:),
equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), less-than
and greater-than symbols (> <), forward and back
slashes (/ \), vertical bar (|), quote (), or back quote (`).
Description Displays the description of the selected linetype, which
can be edited.
Use Paper Space Scales linetypes in paper space and model space
Units for Scaling identically. Useful when working with multiple
viewports. This option is also controlled by the
PSLTSCALE system variable.

Global Scale Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes.
Factor (LTSCALE system variable)
Current Object Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The
Scale resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by
the objects scale factor. This option is also controlled
by the CELTSCALE system variable.

500 | LINETYPE
ISO Pen Width Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO
values. The resulting scale is the global scale factor
multiplied by the objects scale factor.

Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box

Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. The
acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.

File Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter
the name of another LIN file or choose File to select a
different file from the Select Linetype File dialog box.
Available Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or
Linetypes clear all of the linetypes on the list, right-click and
choose Select All or Clear All.

LINETYPE Command Line

If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, LINETYPE displays prompts
on the command line.
Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]:

?List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard
file selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file,
AutoCAD lists the linetypes available in a file.

LINETYPE | 501
Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file.
Enter name of linetype to create:

AutoCAD displays the Create or Append Linetype File

dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Specify
the file to which you want the linetype added.
Descriptive text: Enter optional descriptive text

Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long.

The description can be a comment or a series of
underscores, dots, dashes, and spaces to show a simple
representation of the linetype pattern.
Enter linetype pattern (on next line):
A,

Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers

separated by commas. Enter positive values to specify
lengths of dashes, and enter negative values to specify
lengths of spaces. Use a zero to represent a dot.

2.5 -.5 .5 -.5 the pattern is repeated

The A in the pattern definition prompt specifies the

pattern alignment used at the ends of individual lines,
circles, and arcs. AutoCAD supports A-type alignment
only. With A-type alignment, AutoCAD guarantees that
lines and arcs start and end with a dash. The A is
automatically included in the definition. If you use a
text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the
beginning of the definition.
After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it
accessible.
You cannot create complex linetypes with LINETYPE.
For more information, see Custom Linetypes in the
Customization Guide.

502 | LINETYPE
Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The
acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.
Enter linetype(s) to load: Enter a name or a list of names
separated by commas

The Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file

selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter or select the file
in which the linetype you want to load is stored.
Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn
subsequently. You can control the linetype of objects
individually or by layer.
Specifies linetype name or [?] <current>: Enter a linetype
name, ? to list all loaded linetype names, bylayer, or
byblock, or press ENTER

The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype.

AutoCAD draws all new objects with this linetype,
regardless of the current layer. If the linetype you
request is not loaded, AutoCAD searches for its
definition in the acad.lin file. If the linetype is neither
loaded nor in acad.lin, AutoCAD displays a message and
returns you to the Command prompt.
Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter
bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated
with the layer on which the object is drawn. If you
enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the
CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a
block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects
inherit the linetype of the block.

LIST
Displays database information for selected objects

Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry List
Command line: list

Select objects: Use an object selection method

LIST | 503
AutoCAD lists the object type, object layer, and X,Y,Z position relative to the
current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model
space or paper space.
LIST reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if these items are not
set to BYLAYER. The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coor-
dinate information defines the elevation. If the extrusion direction of the
entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, LIST also reports the
extrusion direction in UCS coordinates.
LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected.

LOAD
Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command
You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; AutoCAD loads it
thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing.
Command line: load

AutoCAD displays the Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list.

LOGFILEOFF
Closes the log file opened by LOGFILEON
Command line: logfileoff

AutoCAD stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Main-
tain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to
turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log
file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.

504 | LOAD
LOGFILEON
Writes the text window contents to a file
Command line: logfileon

AutoCAD records the text window contents in the log file until you exit
AutoCAD or use the LOGFILEOFF command.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Main-
tain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to
turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log
file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.

LSEDIT
Edits a landscape object
A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped
onto it. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in
the Landscape New dialog box. The geometry of the object depends on
whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned.
You make these choices according to your rendering requirements.
Each landscape object has grips at the base, top, and each corner. Use the base
grip to move the object, the top grips to adjust its height, and the bottom
corner grips to scale it and, if its not view aligned, rotate it. You can use all
standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching, scaling, and rotating
landscape objects.
With two related commands, LSNEW and LSLIB, you can create landscape
objects and maintain landscape object libraries.

Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Landscape Edit
Command line: lsedit

Select a landscape object: Use an object selection method

When you select a landscape object, AutoCAD displays the Landscape Edit
dialog box.

LOGFILEON | 505
Landscape Edit Dialog Box
Previews landscape objects and defines the geometry and height of the
objects.

The object type is selected in the library list; if the list is unavailable, you can-
not change the object type. For a description of the available options, see
LSNEW.

LSLIB
Maintains libraries of landscape objects

Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Landscape Library
Command line: lslib

AutoCAD displays the Landscape Library dialog box.

Landscape Library Dialog Box

Defines libraries of landscape objects.

506 | LSLIB
Library Contents Lists the objects in the current library. Select one to
modify or delete.
Modify Displays the Landscape Library Edit dialog box (see
page 508). Changes the image files associated with the
selected object (or double-click the object name). All
landscape objects require both an image file and an
opacity map file to define the see-through areas of the
image.
New Displays the New Landscape Library dialog box, which
is identical to the Landscape Library Edit dialog box
except that the boxes are blank. Enter an object name,
an image file name, and an opacity map file name for
your new object.
Delete Deletes the selected object from the library. This does
not delete the files associated with the object name, but
deletes only the object definition in the library.
Open Displays a standard file selection dialog box. Locate and
select an LLI file to open a new library file. The contents
of the file appear in the Library Contents list.
Save Saves the current library file. A standard file selection
dialog box is displayed so that you can save the library
under another name if you want. If the file already
exists, the program prompts you to replace it.

LSLIB | 507
Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box
Changes the image files associated with the object selected in the Landscape
Library dialog box.

Default Geometry
Specifies the geometry and alignment of the object. The geometry of an
object depends on its number of faces and alignment. A single-face view-
aligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You cannot use grips to
rotate it. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can rotate
with grips. This type of object also displays its name either forward or back-
ward to indicate its orientation to the camera, which is helpful for signs. A
crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right
angles. When view-aligned, they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you
cant change their rotation. When the object is fixed, you can change its
rotation.
Single Face/ Specifies a single-face object or a crossing-face object. A
Crossing Faces single-face object is faster to render but not quite as
realistic as a crossing-face object, especially for
animation and raytraced shadows.
View Aligned Makes the object always face the camera. This is
generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar
objects.
When the View Aligned option is cleared, the object
maintains a fixed orientation. This can be effective with
planar objects like road signs that you dont want to
view straight on.

508 | LSLIB
Name
Shows the current name of the object. To change the name, edit the entry.

Image File
Specifies a file name. You can choose Find File to display a standard file selec-
tion dialog box in which you can locate the file you want.

Opacity Map File

Specifies a file name. You can choose Find File to display a standard file selec-
tion dialog box in which you can locate the file you want.

LSNEW
Adds realistic landscape items, such as trees and bushes, to your drawings

Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Landscape New
Command line: lsnew

AutoCAD displays the Landscape New dialog box.

Landscape New Dialog Box

Previews landscape objects, defines the geometry and height of new objects,
and inserts a landscape object into a drawing.

LSNEW | 509
A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped
onto it. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in
the Landscape New dialog box. The geometry of the object depends on
whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned.
You make these choices according to your rendering requirements.
Each landscape object has grips at the base, top, and each corner. Use the base
grip to move the object, the top grips to adjust its height, and the bottom
corner grips to scale it and, if its not view aligned, rotate it. You can use all
standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching, scaling, and rotating
landscape objects.
With two related commands, LSEDIT and LSLIB, you can modify landscape
objects and maintain landscape object libraries.

Landscape Objects
Lists landscape objects available in the current landscape library. Select the
one you want to insert in the drawing.

Geometry
Specifies the geometry and alignment of the landscape object. The geometry
of an object depends on its number of faces and alignment. A single-face
view-aligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You cannot use grips
to rotate it. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can
rotate with grips. This type of object also displays its name either forward or
backward to indicate its orientation to the camera, which is helpful for signs.
A crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right
angles. When view-aligned, they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you
cant change their rotation. When the object is fixed, you can change its
rotation.
Single Face/ Specifies a single-face object or a crossing-face object. A
Crossing Faces single-face object is faster to render but not quite as
realistic as a crossing-face object, especially for
animation and raytraced shadows.
View Aligned Makes the object always face the camera. This is
generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar
objects.
When the View Aligned option is cleared, the object
maintains a fixed orientation. This can be effective with
planar objects like road signs that you dont want to
view straight on.

510 | LSNEW
Height
Specifies the height of the landscape object in current drawing units. The
default is 20, and the height is always in the positive Z direction of the cur-
rent user coordinate system (UCS). Use the scroll bar or enter a value.

Position
Uses the pointing device to specify a location in the drawing. The default
position is at the origin of the UCS.

LTSCALE
Sets the global linetype scale factor
Command line: ltscale (or 'ltscale for transparent use)
LTSCALE = 1
Enter new linetype scale factor <current>: Enter a positive real value or press
LTSCALE = .5 ENTER

LTSCALE = .25 Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a draw-
ing. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated.
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units
Use lineweights to add width to your objects. Lineweights are useful for the
graphical representation of different objects and information, but they
should not be used to represent specific object widths.
Lineweight can be applied to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts, ras-
ter images (except the image border), points, and solid fills (2D solids). These
exceptions plot with a default lineweight of 0 (the thinnest possible line that
the printer or plotter can plot). The default lineweight value for objects is
BYLAYER; the default lineweight value for layers is set by the Default option
in the Lineweights Settings dialog box. You can also customize lineweights
to plot at whatever width you want by using the Plot Style Table Editor of the
PLOT command. See Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype in the Users
Guide.

LTSCALE | 511
Wide polylines in a plan view are displayed at their width setting rather than
their lineweight setting.

Note Objects with lineweights of more than one pixel may increase regenera-
tion time. To optimize AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab,
set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value, or turn off Display Line-
weight altogether.

Format menu: Lineweight

Shortcut menu: Right-click the Lwt button on the status bar and choose
Settings.
Command line: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use)

The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, LWEIGHT displays prompts on
the command line (see page 514).

Lineweight Settings Dialog Box

Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display
and display scale of lineweights in the Model tab, and sets the DEFAULT line-
weight value for layers. For a table of valid lineweights, see Overview of Lin-
eweights in the Users Guide.

512 | LWEIGHT
Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of stan-
dard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value
is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01
inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting. The lineweight
value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting
device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space.

Current Lineweight
Displays the current lineweight. To set the current lineweight, select a line-
weight from the lineweight list and choose OK.

Units for Listing

Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can
also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable.
Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters.
Inches (in.) Specifies lineweight values in inches.

Display Lineweight
Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If this
option is selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space.
You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable.
AutoCAD regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented
by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if AutoCAD performance
slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This
option does not affect how objects are plotted.

Default
Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is
0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. You can also set the DEFAULT lineweight by using
the LWDEFAULT system variable.

Adjust Display Scale

Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab. On the Model tab,
lineweights are displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel
width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. If you
are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the lineweight display
scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects
the current display scale.

LWEIGHT | 513
Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one
pixel may increase AutoCAD regeneration time. If you want to optimize
AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab, set the lineweight
display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether.

LWEIGHT Command Line

If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, LWEIGHT displays prompts on
the command line.
Current lineweight: current
Enter default lineweight for new objects or [?]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ?

The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER,

BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches.

Default Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values

Lineweight consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK,
and DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or
millimeters; millimeters are the default. If you enter a
valid lineweight, AutoCAD sets the current default
lineweight to the new value. With any other value,
AutoCAD adjusts the value entered and sets the current
default lineweight to the nearest valid value.
To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in
the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot
Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights. See
Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype, in the
Users Guide. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT
system variable and has an initial value of 0.01 inches
or 0.25 mm. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the
thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting
device and is displayed at a value of one pixel in model
space.
?List Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current
Lineweights lineweight units.

Note If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format,
the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the
earlier format does not display lineweights.

514 | LWEIGHT
MARKUP
Displays the details of markups and allows you to change their status

Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: Markup Set Manager
Command line: markup

Opens the Markup Set Manager.

Markup Set Manager

Displays information about loaded markup sets and their status. You can
show or hide markups and their originating drawing files in your AutoCAD
drawing area. You can change the status of individual markups and add notes
and comments to them.

Markup Set List Control

The Markup Set List control displays the name of the markup set, or, if no
markup sets are open, the Open option. The Markup Set List control provides
the following options.
Names of Open Lists all open markup sets, if any. A check is displayed
Markup Sets next to the current markup set. The current markup set
is the open markup set that is displayed in the Markup
Set Manager window.
Recent Displays a list of recently opened markup sets.
Open Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard
file selection dialog box), in which you can select a
Design Web Format (DWF ) file that contains
markups. When you click Open, the markups in the
selected DWF file are loaded into the Markup Set
Manager.

Republish Markup DWF

Provides options for republishing the marked-up DWF file. If any sheets were
added to the DWF file in Autodesk DWF Composer, those sheets will not be
included in the republished DWF file.

MARKUP | 515
Republish All Republishes all sheets in the marked-up DWF file.
Sheets Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can select the
previously published DWF to overwrite it , or you can
enter a new name for the DWF file. When you click
Select, the previously published DWF file is overwritten
or a new DWF file is created that contains any changes
you made to the drawing file geometry and the status
of the markups.
Republish Republishes only those sheets in the marked-up DWF
Markup Sheets file that have associated markups. Opens the Select
DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), in which you can select the previously published
DWF to overwrite it, or you can enter a new name for
the DWF file. When you click Select, the previously
published DWF file is overwritten or a new DWF file is
created that contains any changes you made to the
drawing file geometry and the status of the markups.
View Redline Geometry
Displays or hides redline markup geometry in the AutoCAD drawing area.
When this button is displayed as selected, redline markup geometry is dis-
played in the AutoCAD drawing area.
View DWG Geometry
Displays or hides the originating drawing file in the AutoCAD drawing area.
When this button is displayed as selected, the drawing file is displayed in the
AutoCAD drawing area.
View DWF Geometry
Displays or hides the DWF file geometry in the AutoCAD drawing area.
When this button is displayed as selected, the DWF file geometry is displayed
in the AutoCAD drawing area.

516 | MARKUP
Markups
Displays loaded markup sets. The top-level node in the tree view represents
the currently loaded markup set. A drawing sheet node is displayed for each
drawing sheet that has associated markups. Any sheets that were added to
the DWF file in Autodesk DWF Composer are listed in italics. Each markup is
displayed as an individual node under its corresponding drawing sheet. The
icon associated with each markup represents the status of the markup. You
can double-click any of the markups in the tree view to view the associated
drawing sheet in the AutoCAD drawing area. When you double-click either
a sheet that was added in Autodesk DWF Composer or a markup for that
sheet, that sheet in the DWF file will open in Autodesk DWF Viewer (or in
Autodesk DWF Composer, if you have it installed).
Markup Set Node Indicates the currently loaded markup set.
Drawing Sheet Indicates a drawing sheet that has one or more
Node associated markups. Only drawing sheets that have
corresponding markups are displayed in the tree view of
the Markups area. You can double-click a drawing sheet
node to open the originating drawing file for that
drawing sheet.
<None> Indicates an individual markup that does not yet have
an assigned status. This is the default status for new
markups.
Question Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned
status of Question. When you open and view a markup,
you can change the status to Question if you need
additional information about the markup.
For Review Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned
status of For Review. When you implement a markup,
you can change the status to For Review to indicate that
the markup creator should review the changes to the
drawing sheet and the status of the markup.
Done Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned
status of Done. When a markup has been implemented
and reviewed, you can change the status to Done.

MARKUP | 517
Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Set Node)
Right-clicking a markup set node in the Markups area displays the following
shortcut menu options.
Open Markup Opens the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard
DWF file selection dialog box), in which you can select a
DWF file that contains markups. When you click Open,
the markups in the selected DWF file are loaded into
the Markup Set Manager.
Close Markup Closes the selected marked-up DWF and removes it
DWF from the Markup Set Manager.
Save Markup Saves changes to the status of markups and added
History Changes comments to the marked-up DWF file.

Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Drawing Sheet Node)

Right-clicking a drawing sheet node in the Markups area displays the follow-
ing shortcut menu options.
Open Sheet Opens the originating drawing file for that drawing
sheet and makes that layout the active layout in the
AutoCAD drawing area.
Republish Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file
Markup DWF selection dialog box), in which you can select the
previously published DWF to overwrite or enter a new
name for the DWF file. When you click Select, a new
DWF file is created that contains any changes you made
to the drawing file geometry and the status of the
markups.

Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Node)

Right-clicking an individual markup node in the Markups area displays the
following shortcut menu options.
Open Markup Opens the originating drawing file for the drawing
sheet associated with the selected markup and makes
that layout the active layout in the AutoCAD drawing
area. The associated markup DWF file is also opened as
a read-only reference in the AutoCAD drawing area.

518 | MARKUP
Markup Status Displays a shortcut menu that provides a list of status
options. A check mark precedes the currently assigned
status for the selected markup.

<None>: Indicates that the markup does not yet have

an assigned status. This is the default status for new
markups.
Question: After you open and view a markup, you can
change its status to Question if you need additional
information about the markup.
For Review: After you have implemented a markup,
you can change the status to For Review to indicate
that the markup creator should review the changes
to the drawing sheet and the status of the markup.
Done: After a markup has been implemented and
reviewed, you can change its status to Done.

Restore Initial If you panned or zoomed the selected markup, or

Markup View rotated the view in model space, restores the original
view of the selected markup.
Republish Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file
Markup DWF selection dialog box), in which you can select the
previously published DWF to overwrite or enter a new
name for the DWF file. When you click Select, the
previously published DWF file is overwritten or a new
DWF file is created that contains any changes you made
to the drawing file geometry and the status of the
markups.

Show All Sheets/Hide Non-Markup Sheets

Displays all sheets in the marked-up DWF file in the tree view of the Markup
Set Manager, or hides the sheets that do not have associated markups.

Markup Details
Provides information about the currently selected node (markup set, drawing
sheet, or individual markup) in the Markups area.
When an individual markup is selected in the Markups area, Markup Details
displays the status of the markup. You can change the status.
The Markup History area (in the lower portion of the Markup Details area)
provides a noneditable history log of the selected markup in reverse chrono-
logical order. In the Notes area, just below the Markup History area, you can
add notes and comments that are automatically saved with the markup.

MARKUP | 519
Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup
Preview area and displays a thumbnail image of the
selected drawing sheet or markup. You can click the
Details button to change the area back to the Markup
Details area.

Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup

Details area, which provides information about the
selected node in the Markups area. You can click the
Preview button to change the area back to the Markup
Preview area.
Markup Preview
Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently selected drawing sheet or
markup.
Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup
Details area, which provides information about the
selected node in the Markups area. You can click the
Preview button to change the area back to the Markup
Preview area.

Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup

Preview area and displays a thumbnail image of the
selected drawing sheet or markup. You can click the
Details button to change the area back to the Markup
Details area.
MARKUPCLOSE
Closes the Markup Set Manager
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: Markup Set Manager
Command line: markupclose

Closes the Markup Set Manager window.

520 | MARKUPCLOSE
MASSPROP
Calculates the mass properties of regions or solids
MASSPROP calculates properties of two-dimensional (2D) and three-
dimensional (3D) objects that are essential in analyzing the characteristics
of the drawn objects.

Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry Region/Mass Properties
Command line: massprop

Select objects: Use an object selection method

If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first
selected region are accepted.
MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if
you want to write the mass properties to a text file.
Write analysis to a file? <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

If you enter y, MASSPROP prompts you to enter a file name.

The properties that MASSPROP displays depend on whether the selected
objects are regions, and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the
XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS), or solids. For a list of
the parameters that control the MASSPROP units, see Calculations Based on
the Current UCS (see page 524).

MASSPROP | 521
Regions
The following table shows the mass properties that AutoCAD displays for all
regions.

Mass properties for all regions

Mass property Description

Area The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions.

Perimeter The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. AutoCAD
does not calculate the perimeter of solids.

Bounding box The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that are
coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system, the
bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a
rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not coplanar
with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is defined by
the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the region.

Centroid A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions
that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate
is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the
current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point.

If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, AutoCAD
displays the additional properties shown in the following table.

Additional mass properties for coplanar regions

Mass property Description

Moments of A value used when computing the distributed loads, such as fluid
inertia pressure on a plate, or when calculating the forces inside a bending or
twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia is

area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius2

The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power.

Products of Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
inertia It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The
formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is

product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ

This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.

522 | MASSPROP
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions (continued)

Mass property Description

Radii of Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The

gyration formula for the radii of gyration is

gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)1/2

Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.

Principal Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have
moments and the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a
X,Y,Z directions certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest
about centroid through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also
passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results is
somewhere between the high and low values.

Solids
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for solids.

Mass properties for solids

Mass property Description

Mass The measure of inertia of a body. Because AutoCAD uses a density of

one, mass and volume have the same value.

Volume The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses.

Bounding box The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid.

Centroid A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. AutoCAD assumes a
solid of uniform density.

Moments of The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force
inertia required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating
about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is

mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2

Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the

distance squared.

MASSPROP | 523
Mass properties for solids (continued)

Mass property Description

product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ

This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.

Radii of Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The

gyration formula for the radii of gyration is

gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)1/2

Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.

Calculations Based on the Current UCS

The following table shows the parameters that control the units in which
mass properties are calculated.

Parameters that control MASSPROP units

Parameter Used to calculate

DENSITY Mass of solids

LENGTH Volume of solids

LENGTH*LENGTH Area of regions and surface area of solids

LENGTHLENGTHLENGTH Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and

perimeter

DENSITYLENGTHLENGTH Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and

principal moments

524 | MASSPROP
MATCHCELL
Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells
Shortcut menu: With a table selected and a cell selected, right-click and then
click Match Cell on the shortcut menu.
Command line: matchcell

Select source cell: Click inside a cell in a table whose properties you want to copy
Select destination cell: Click inside table cells to copy properties from the source cell,
and right-click or press ENTER or ESC to exit

All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except
for the cell type: text or block.

MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects

Standard toolbar:
Modify menu: Match Properties
Command line: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use)

Select source object: Select the object whose properties you want to copy
Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to
copy properties to

Destination Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the

Object(s) properties of the source object. You can continue
selecting destination objects, or press ENTER to apply
the properties and end the command.
Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box (see page
526), in which you can control which object properties
to copy to the destination objects. By default, AutoCAD
selects all object properties in the Property Settings
dialog box for copying.

MATCHCELL | 525
Property Settings Dialog Box
Specifies properties to be copied with MATCHPROP. Select one or more
settings.
Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of
the source object. Available for all objects.
Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of
the source object. Available for all objects.
Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that
of the source object. Available for all objects except
attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and
viewports.
Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination
object to that of the source object. Available for all
objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text,
points, and viewports.
Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to
that of the source object. Available for all objects.
Thickness Changes the thickness of the destination object to that
of the source object. Available only for arcs, attributes,
circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions, text, and
traces.
Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that
of the source object. If you are working in color-
dependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1),
this option is unavailable. Available for all objects.
Dimension In addition to basic object properties, changes the
dimension style of the destination object to that of the
source object. Available only for dimension, leader, and
tolerance objects.
Polyline In addition to basic object properties, changes the
width and linetype generation properties of the
destination polyline to those of the source polyline.
The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source
polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline.
If the source polyline has variable width, the width
property is not transferred to the destination polyline.

526 | MATCHPROP
Text In addition to basic object properties, changes the text
style of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available only for single-line and multiline text
objects.
Viewport In addition to basic object properties, changes the
following properties of the destination paper space
viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off,
display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot,
snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location.
The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and
the freeze/thaw state of the layers are not transferred to
the destination object.
Hatch In addition to basic object properties, changes the
hatch pattern of the destination object to that of the
source object. Available only for hatch objects.
Table In addition to basic object properties, changes the table
style of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available only for table objects.

MATLIB
Imports and exports materials to and from a library of materials
You can import a predefined material from a materials library file (MLI). You
can use a material as is or modify it.
A new drawing contains only the GLOBAL material. The GLOBAL material is a
set of default material values.

Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Materials Library
Command line: matlib

The Materials Library dialog box is displayed.

MATLIB | 527
Materials Library Dialog Box
Imports materials into and exports materials from the drawing.

Current Drawing
Displays the materials currently in the drawing. A material can be in the
drawing but not assigned to any object. Such a material is called unattached
or unassigned.
In the Current Drawing list, you can save or purge materials. Selecting mate-
rials in the Current Library list removes selection from all items selected in
the Current Drawing list and vice versa.
Purge Deletes all unattached materials from the Current
Drawing list.
Save As Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), where you can specify the name
of the materials library (MLI) file in which AutoCAD
saves the Current Drawing list.

Current Library
Displays the materials in the currently selected library file. The default library
is render.mli.
Open Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), which lists MLI files.
Save Saves the changes to the MLI file in the current folder.

528 | MATLIB
Save As Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), where you can specify the name
of the materials library (MLI) file in which AutoCAD
saves the Current Library list.

Preview
Displays a sample of the material selected in the Current Library list or Cur-
rent Drawing list. Use the list to specify whether the sample is applied to a
sphere or a cube. You can preview only one material at a time.

Import
Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Library list to the Current
Drawing list. If you try to import a material already in the Current Drawing
list, AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog box
(see page 529).

Export
Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Drawing list to the Cur-
rent Library list. If you try to export a material already in the Current Library
list, AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog box
(see page 530).

Delete
Deletes materials selected in the Current Drawing list or the Current Library
list.

Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box

Creates and modifies imported material names.

Options
Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the
objects that are currently attached to that material.
Overwrite Replaces the material in the Current Drawing list with
Existing Material the selected material in the Current Library list.
If this option is cleared and you enter different names
for the materials under Old Material in List and New
Material from Library, AutoCAD adds the library
material to the Current Drawing list.

MATLIB | 529
Transfer Attaches the object to the material being imported from
Attachments the library. If this option is cleared, AutoCAD keeps the
object attached to the material in the Current Drawing
list.

Material Names
Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being imported.
Old Material in Displays the name of the material in the Current
List Drawing list. If Overwrite Existing Material is not
selected, you can edit the name of the material.
New Material Displays the name of the material in the Current
from Library Library list. You can always edit this name. If Overwrite
Existing Material is not selected, you must enter a
different name for the new material.

OK
Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box.

OK to All
Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box.

Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box

Creates and modifies exported material names.

Options
Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the
objects selected.
Overwrite Replaces the material in the Current Library list with
Existing Material the selected material in the Current Drawing list.
If this option is cleared and you enter different names
under Old Material in Library and New Material from
List, AutoCAD adds the material to the Current Library
list.

Material Names
Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being exported.
Old Material in Displays the name of the material in the Current
Library Library list. If Overwrite Existing Material is not
selected, you can edit the name of the material.

530 | MATLIB
New Material Displays the name of the material in the Current
from List Drawing list. You can always edit this name. If
Overwrite Existing Material is not selected, you must
enter a different name for the new material.

OK
Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box.

OK to All
Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box.

MEASURE
Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object
Draw menu: Point Measure
Command line: measure

Select object to measure:

Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b

The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection
set, so you can choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects
prompt. You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to
the point objects. You can then remove the points by entering erase
previous.
AutoCAD places the markers in the user coordinate system (UCS) of the
object being measured (except for 3D polylines in the current UCS). Markers
are always placed on the object, regardless of the elevation settings.
If you use point objects for the markers, you can make the points easier to see
by changing their appearance with the PDMODE system variable.
Length of Places point objects at the specified interval along the
Segment selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the
point you used to select the object.
Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial
vertex (the first one drawn).
Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the
center set as the current snap rotation angle. If the snap
rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle
starts to the right of center, on its circumference.

MEASURE | 531
segment
length

selected object

The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit

distances along a polyline, with the PDMODE system
variable set to 35.

segment length

select polyline measure every 0.5 units

Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected

object.
Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block
currently defined in the drawing
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or
press ENTER

If you enter y, the block is rotated about its insertion

point so that its horizontal lines are aligned with, and
drawn tangent to, the object being measured. If you
enter n, the block is always inserted with a 0 rotation
angle.
Specify length of segment:

After you specify the segment length, AutoCAD inserts

the block at the specified interval. If the block has
variable attributes, these attributes are not included.

532 | MEASURE
MENU
Loads a menu file
A menu file is a text file containing the AutoCAD command strings and
menu syntax that define the menu labels and menu macros. A menu file can
contain a section for each of these menu areas: drop-down menus, toolbars,
shortcut menus, image tile menus, screen menus, pointing device button
menus, accelerator keys, and digitizer tablet menus.
You can create a customized menu file and use MENU to load the file for use
in AutoCAD.
Command line: menu

The Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is dis-
played. Enter or select a menu file name. When you press ENTER or choose
Open, the named file is loaded into AutoCAD.

MENULOAD
Loads partial menu files
MENULOAD adds partial menu files to an existing base menu file, such as
acad.mnu. Each menu file (base and partial) has an associated menu group
name. From each menu group, you can access each drop-down menu that
resides in its associated menu file.
After you load the partial menus, you can customize the AutoCAD menu bar
by adding or deleting drop-down menus.
Tools menu: Customize Menus
Command line: menuload

The Menu Customization dialog box is displayed (see page 533).

When FILEDIA is set to 0, MENULOAD displays a prompt on the command line
(see page 536).

Menu Customization Dialog Box

Controls the view of menu groups and menu bars for the AutoCAD window.

Menu Groups Tab (Menu Customization Dialog Box)

Loads or unloads specified menus.

MENU | 533
Menu Groups Lists the currently loaded menu files.
File Name Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. You
can either enter the file name or choose Browse to
display the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
Replace All Removes all existing menu groups from the Menu
Groups list when you load a new file menu.
Unload Unloads the menu group selected in the Menu Groups
list.
Load Loads the file specified under File Name.
Browse Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can select a menu
file to load.

Menu Bar Tab (Menu Customization Dialog Box)

Adds or deletes menus from the menu bar.

534 | MENULOAD
Menu Group Displays a selected menu file in the Menu Group list.
Menus Lists all the menus from the menu group specified in
the Menu Group list.
Menu Bar Lists all the menus loaded in the AutoCAD window. The
menu at the top of the list corresponds to the leftmost
menu on the menu bar in the AutoCAD window. The
menu at the bottom of the list corresponds to the
rightmost drop-down menu.
Insert Inserts the menu selected in the Menus list above the
selected menu in the Menu Bar list. If no menu is
selected in the Menu Bar list, the menu selected in the
Menus list is inserted at the top of the Menu Bar list.
Move Up Moves the menu that is selected in the Menu Bar list up
one position.
Move Down Moves the menu that is selected in the Menu Bar list
down one position.
Remove Removes the selected menu from the Menu Bar list.
Remove All Removes all menus from the menu bar in the AutoCAD
window.

MENULOAD | 535
MENULOAD Command Line
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), MENULOAD displays the following prompt on
the command line.
Enter name of menu file to load: Enter a file name

MENUUNLOAD
Unloads partial menu files
Command line: menuunload

The Menu Customization dialog box (see page 533) is displayed, which has
the same options as MENULOAD. The only difference between the two com-
mands is in the command line prompts.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), MENUUNLOAD displays the following prompt
on the command line.
Enter the name of the MENUGROUP to unload: Enter a name

MINSERT
Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array
Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded.
Command line: minsert

Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined blocks
in the drawing, or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box

Note You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the
blocks objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT.

Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:

Specify a point or enter an option

Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before
you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale
factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options,
respond to the AutoCAD prompts by specifying a distance for the scale
options or an angle for rotation.

536 | MENUUNLOAD
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the blocks.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors.

Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Specify rotation angle <0>:

The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block

inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose
width and height represent the distance between rows and
between columns

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance

Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point
and the opposite corner.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
Specify rotation angle <0>:

The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block

inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

the following prompt:

MINSERT | 537
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose
width and height represent the distance between rows and
between columns

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance

XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.

Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor

If you enter c, you specify a corner point. The specified

point and the block insertion point determine the X
and Y scale factors.
Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a
value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Specify rotation angle <0>:

The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block

inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance

538 | MINSERT
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets
the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance

X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

MINSERT | 539
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:

540 | MINSERT
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance

Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option or press ENTER

X Scale Factor Sets the X scale factor.

Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value or specify a distance

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance

MINSERT | 541
Corner Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block
insertion point.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value or specify a distance

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance

XYZ Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero

value, enter c, or press ENTER

You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering

a scale factor value or by specifying a corner point. If
you specify a corner point, the specified point and the
block insertion point determine the X and Y scale
factors for the block.
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value

If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value or specify a distance

If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance

542 | MINSERT
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 541).

PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 541).

MINSERT | 543
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER

The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 541).

MIRROR
Creates a mirror image copy of objects

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Mirror
Command line: mirror

Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point (2)
objects selected

2 The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the
selected objects are reflected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring plane per-
pendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing
1 the mirror line.
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER

544 | MIRROR
Yes Places the reflected image into the drawing and deletes
the original objects.
No Places the reflected image into the drawing and retains
original objects
the original objects.
deleted
To manage the reflection properties of text objects, use the MIRRTEXT system
variable. The default setting of MIRRTEXT is 1 (on), which causes a text object
to be mirrored just like any other object. When MIRRTEXT is off (0), text is not
mirrored.
original objects
retained

before mirroring after mirroring after mirroring

(MIRRTEXT=1) (MIRRTEXT=0)

MIRROR3D
Creates a mirror image of objects about a plane
Modify menu: 3D Operation Mirror 3D
Command line: mirror3d

Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object/Last/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/
ZX/3points] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press ENTER

Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the

mirroring plane.
Select a circle, arc, or 2D-polyline segment:
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.

MIRROR3D | 545
Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined
mirroring plane.
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
select object as
mirroring plane enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and
a point normal to the plane.
Specify point on mirror plane: Specify a point (1)
2 1 Specify point on Z-axis (normal) of mirror plane: Specify
a point (2)
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of
the current viewport through a point.
Specify point on view plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point or
press ENTER
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard
planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) through a specified point.
Specify point on (XY, YZ, ZX) plane <0,0,0>: Specify a
point (1) or press ENTER

546 | MIRROR3D
1 1 1

XY YZ ZX

Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or

press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you
select this option by specifying a point, AutoCAD does
not display the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt.

1
Specify first point on mirror plane: Enter a point (1)
3 Specify second point on mirror plane: Enter a point (2)
2 Specify third point on mirror plane: Enter a point (3)
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER

If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
MLEDIT
Edits multiple parallel lines
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines. MLEDIT controls intersections
between multilines.
Modify menu: Object Multiline
Command line: mledit

The Multiline Edit Tools dialog box is displayed.

MLEDIT | 547
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box
Creates and modifies multiline patterns. The dialog box displays sample
images in four columns. The first column governs multilines that cross, the
second governs multilines that form a tee, the third governs corner joints and
vertices, and the fourth governs multilines to be cut or joined.

You can click any of the image samples to display a brief description in the
lower-left corner of the dialog box.

Closed Cross
Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. After you select
the sample image,the following prompt is displayed:
Select first mline: Select the foreground multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline

The closed-cross intersection is completed and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

first mline selected second mline selected result

548 | MLEDIT
Undo Undoes the closed-cross intersection. The Select First
Mline prompt is displayed.

Open Cross
Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. Breaks are
inserted in all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements
of the second multiline. After you select the sample image, the following
prompt is displayed:
Select first mline: Select a multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline

The open-cross intersection is completed, and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

first mline selected second mline selected result

Undo Undoes the open-cross intersection. The Select First

Mline prompt is displayed.

Merged Cross
Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in
which you select the multilines is not important. After you select the sample
image, the following prompt is displayed:
Select first mline: Select a multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline

The merged-cross intersection is completed, and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

MLEDIT | 549
first mline selected second mline selected result

Undo Undoes the merged-cross intersection. The Select First

Mline prompt is displayed.

Closed Tee
Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline
is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline. After
you select the sample image, the following prompt is displayed:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline

The closed-tee intersection is completed, and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

first mline selected second mline selected result

Undo Undoes the closed-tee intersection. The Select First

Mline prompt is displayed.

Open Tee
Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline
is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline. After
you select the sample image, the following prompt is displayed:

550 | MLEDIT
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline

The open-tee intersection is completed, and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

first mline selected second mline selected result

Undo Undoes the open-tee intersection. The Select First Mline

prompt is displayed.

Merged Tee
Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines.The multiline is
trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline. After you
select the sample image, the following prompt is displayed:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline

The merged-tee intersection is completed, and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

first mline selected second mline selected result

MLEDIT | 551
Undo Undoes the merged-tee intersection. The Select First
Mline prompt is displayed.

Corner Joint
Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or
extended to their intersection. After you select the sample image, the follow-
ing prompt is displayed:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select second mline: Select the second half of the corner

The corner joint is completed, and the following prompt is displayed:

Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u

First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline

prompt is displayed.

first mline selected second mline selected result

Undo Undoes the corner joint. The Select First Mline prompt
is displayed.

Add Vertex
Adds a vertex to a multiline. After you select the sample image, the following
prompt is displayed:
Select mline: Select a multiline

A vertex is added at the selected point, and the following prompt is

displayed:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed again.

552 | MLEDIT
mline selected result

Undo Removes the added vertex. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed.

Delete Vertex
Deletes a vertex from a multiline. After you select the sample image, the fol-
lowing prompt is displayed:
Select mline: Select a multiline

The vertex nearest to the selected point is deleted, and the following prompt
is displayed:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed again.

mline selected result

Undo Restores the deleted vertex. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed.

Cut Single
Cuts a selected element of a multiline. After you select the sample image, the
following prompt is displayed:
Select mline: Select a multiline

The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point, and the fol-
lowing prompt is displayed:
Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline

MLEDIT | 553
The element is cut, and the following prompt is displayed:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed again.

mline selected second point selected result

Undo Undoes the cut. The Select Mline prompt is displayed.

Cut All
Cuts a multiline in two. After you select the sample image, the following
prompt is displayed:
Select mline: Select a multiline

The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point, and the fol-
lowing prompt is displayed:
Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline

All elements of the multiline are cut, and the following prompt is displayed:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed again.

mline selected second point selected result

Undo Undoes the cut. The Select Mline prompt is displayed.

Weld All
Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. After you select the sample
image, the following prompt is displayed:

554 | MLEDIT
Select mline: Select a multiline

The selection point on the multiline is used as the start of the weld, and the
following prompt is displayed:
Select second point: Specify the end of the weld on the multiline

The multiline is welded, and the following prompt is displayed:

Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u

Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is

displayed again.

mline selected second point selected result

Undo Undoes the weld.The Select Mline prompt again.

MLINE
Creates multiple parallel lines
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines.
Draw menu: Multiline
Command line: mline

Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current

Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option

Start Point
Specifies the next vertex of the multiline.
Specify next point:
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u

MLINE | 555
If you create a multiline with two or more segments, AutoCAD displays a
prompt that includes the Close option.
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option

Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using

the current multiline style and continues to prompt for
points.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline.
AutoCAD redisplays the previous prompt.
Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with
the first segments.
Justification
Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

top Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line
with the most positive offset is at the specified points.

Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the

cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of
zero 0.0 is at the specified points.
Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line
with the most negative offset is at the specified points.
Scale
bottom Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect line-
type scale.
Enter mline scale <current>: Enter a scale or press ENTER

556 | MLINE
The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style
definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style
scale at 1
definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset linethe small-
est on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale
value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0 collapses
the multiline into a single line. For information about the multiline style
scale at 2 definition, see MLSTYLE.
Style
Specifies a style to use for the multiline. See Draw Multiple-Line Objects in
the Users Guide, and see MLSTYLE.
Enter mline style name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?

Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been
loaded or thats defined in a multiline library (MLN) file
youve created.
?List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles.

MLSTYLE
Defines a style for multiple parallel lines
Multilines comprise up to 16 lines called elements. The multiline style con-
trols the number of elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE
also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline.
Format menu: Multiline Style
Command line: mlstyle

AutoCAD displays the Multiline Styles dialog box.

MLSTYLE | 557
Multiline Styles Dialog Box
Defines the style and properties of multilines. The Multiline Styles dialog box
displays multiline style names, makes them current, loads them from a file,
and saves, adds, and renames them. You can also create or edit a description
of a style.

Current Displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a

name from the list to make it current. If there are
multiple styles, the name of the current style is selected.
The list of multiline styles can include externally
referenced multiline stylesthat is, multiline styles
that exist in an externally referenced drawing (xref).
AutoCAD displays externally referenced multiline style
names using the same syntax it uses for other externally
dependent nongraphical objects. See Overview of
External References in the Users Guide.
Note You cannot edit the element and multiline
properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any
multiline style that is being used in the drawing. If you try
to edit the options in either the Element Properties dialog
box (see page 560) or the Multiline Properties dialog box
(see page 561), the options are unavailable. To edit an
existing multiline style, you must do so before you draw
any multilines in that style.

558 | MLSTYLE
Name Names a new multiline style or renames one. The
element and multiline properties are unavailable until
you enter a new name and make it current by choosing
Add.
Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the
multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file.
AutoCAD saves the definition in the MLN file you
specify. If you specify an MLN file that already exists,
the new style definition is added to the file and existing
definitions are not erased. The default file name is
acad.mln.
To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename.
You cannot rename, modify, or delete the default
STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the
current style, enter a name and then choose Save.
Multiline style names adhere to the naming
conventions for named objects.
Description Adds a description to a multiline style. Enter up to 255
characters, including spaces.
Load Displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box (see page
560), in which you can load multiline styles from a
specified MLN file.
Save Saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then
choose Save.
Add Adds the multiline style in Name to the Current list.
Rename Renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then
choose Rename.
Element Displays the Element Properties dialog box (see page
Properties 560).
You cannot edit the element properties of an existing
multiline style.
Multiline Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box (see page
Properties 561).

MLSTYLE | 559
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box
Loads a multiline style from an MLN file. The default file name is acad.mln.
If acad.mln does not exist, or if it exists but AutoCAD cannot find it, choose
File to specify another file or file location.
File Displays a standard file selection dialog box in which
you can locate and select another library file.
List Lists the multiline styles available in the current library
file. To load another multiline style, select a style from
the list and choose OK.

Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties, such as the offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing
multiline elements.

Elements Displays all the line elements in the current multiline

style. Each line element in the style is defined by its
offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color, and
linetype. The line elements are always displayed in
descending order of their offsets.
Add Adds a new line element to the multiline style. Not
available until color or linetype has been selected for a
multiline style other than STANDARD.
Delete Deletes a line element from the multiline style.
Offset Specifies the offset for line elements in the multiline
style.

560 | MLSTYLE
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.3
0.45
a four-element multiline, each element offset from 0.0

Color Displays and sets the color for line elements in the
multiline style. When you choose Color or the color
swatch, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box
(see page 172). You can use the Select Color dialog box
to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and
color book colors.
Linetype Displays and sets the linetype for line elements in the
multiline style. When you choose Linetype, AutoCAD
displays the Select Linetype Properties dialog box,
which displays loaded linetypes. Select a linetype from
this dialog box. To load a new linetype, choose Load.
AutoCAD displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog
box (see page 501) for loading selected linetypes into
the drawing from linetype files.

Multiline Properties Dialog Box

Sets the multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start
and end caps and their angle, and the background color.

MLSTYLE | 561
Display Joints
Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment.
A joint is also known as a miter.

Display Joints off Display Joints on

Caps
Controls the start and end caps of the multiline.
Line Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline.

without Line with Line

Outer Arc Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the

multiline.

without Outer Arc with Outer Arc

Inner Arcs Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If

theres an odd number of elements, the center line is
unconnected. For example, if there are six elements,
inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and
4. If there are seven elements, inner arcs connect

562 | MLSTYLE
elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left
unconnected.

without Inner Arc with Inner Arc

Angle Specifies the angle of the end caps.

without Angle with Angle

Fill
Controls the background fill of the multiline.
On Turns background fill on.
Color Displays and sets the color of the background fill. When
you choose Color or the color swatch, AutoCAD
displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 172).

MODEL
Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab
Command line: model

On the Model tab, you can create drawings in model space. The Model tab
automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1, and you can create
model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once youve com-
pleted your drawing, you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout
environment from which to plot.

MODEL | 563
For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or
between the Model tab and a layout tab, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system
variable to control how the display list is updated.

Note The Model tab replaces the TILE button that appeared on the status bar
in earlier releases of AutoCAD.

MOVE
Displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Move
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Move.
Command line: move

Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Specify base point or displacement: Specify a base point (1)
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point (2) or press ENTER

1
2
object selected object moved

The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how
far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press
ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is
interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for
the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the object moves 2 units
in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position.

564 | MOVE
MREDO
Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands
Reverses the action of multiple UNDO commands. To redo more than one
action at a time, click the arrow next to the Redo button on the Standard
toolbar, and then select the last in the sequence of actions you want to redo.

Standard toolbar:
Command line: mredo

Enter number of actions or [All/Last]: Specify an option, enter a positive number,

or press ENTER

Number of Reverses the specified number of actions.

Actions
All Reverses all previous actions.
Last Reverses only the last action.

MSLIDE
Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout
Command line: mslide

The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is dis-
played. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. A slide file
is a raster image of a viewport.
In model space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only. In
paper space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the paper space display, including
all viewports and their contents.
Off-screen portions of the drawing, or layers that are off or frozen, are not
included in the slide.
Use the VSLIDE command to view slides, or the SLIDELIB utility to create a
slide library.
When you view slides of images shaded with the SHADE command in a larger
window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black
lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid
this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when
creating slides.

MREDO | 565
MSPACE
Switches from paper space to a model space viewport
AutoCAD operates in either model space or paper space. You use model space
(the Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimen-
sional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space (a layout
tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting.
When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace on the command line to
make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space
in that viewport within the layout. You can switch to model space by double-
clicking a viewport, and you can switch to paper space by double-clicking an
area of paper space.
Command line: mspace

MTEXT
Creates multiline text
MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within a boundary that defines the width
of the paragraph and its location in the drawing. Each multiline text (mtext)
object is a single object, regardless of the number of lines it contains. The text
boundary, although not plotted, printed, or displayed, remains part of the
objects framework.

Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Text Multiline Text
Command line: mtext

Current text style: current Text height: current

Specify first corner:
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:

After you specify the point for the opposite corner, the Multiline Text Editor
is displayed.
If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Com-
mand prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and displays addi-
tional prompts on the command line (see page 576).

566 | MSPACE
Multiline Text Editor
Creates or modifies multiline text objects and imports or pastes text from
other files.

text style stack/unstack

user set tab stop text
font text height text color

ruler

default tab stops

paragraph indent marker save changes and

first line indent marker close the editor

The Multiline Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a shortcut
menu.

Text Formatting Toolbar

Controls the text style for the multiline text object and the character format-
ting for selected text.
Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The
current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system
variable.
Character formatting for font, height, and bold or italic
attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an
existing multiline text object. Stacking, underlining,
and color attributes are retained in characters to which
a new style is applied.
Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are
not applied. If a style defined with a vertical effect is
applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed
horizontally in the Multiline Text Editor.
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of
selected text. TrueType fonts are listed by font family
name. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed
by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored.

MTEXT | 567
Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed in the
editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts.
A sample drawing (TrueType.dwg) showing each font is
provided in the sample directory.
Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text
or changes the height of selected text. If the current text
style has no fixed height, the text height is the value
stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text
object can contain characters of various heights.
Bold Turns on and off bold formatting for new or selected
text. This option is available only for characters using
TrueType fonts.
Italic Turns on and off italic formatting for new or selected
text. This option is available only for characters using
TrueType fonts.
Underline Turns on and off underlining for new or selected text.
Undo Undoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including
changes to either text content or text formatting. You
can also use CTRL + Z .
Redo Redoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including
changes to either text content or text formatting. You
can also use CTRL + Y .
Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the
selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks
text if stacked text is selected. When the stack
characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign
(#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is
stacked on top of the text to the right.
By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-
justified tolerance values. Text that contains the
forward slash converts to center-justified fractional
numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the
length of the longer text string. Text that contains the
pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a
diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The
characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottom-
right aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar
are top-left aligned.

568 | MTEXT
Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of
selected text.
You can assign text the color associated with the layer
it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the block it is
contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also select one of the
colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select
Color dialog box (see page 172).
Close Closes the Multiline Text Editor and saves any changes
that you made. You can also click in the drawing
outside the editor to save changes and exit the editor.
To close the Multiline Text Editor without saving
changes, press ESC .

Multiline Text Editor Shortcut Menu

Provides standard editing options and options specific to multiline text
(mtext). Right-click in the Multiline Text Editor to display the shortcut
menu. The options at the top of the menu are basic editing options: Undo,
Redo, Cut, Copy, and Paste. The following options are specific to the Multi-
line Text Editor.
Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box (see page 377), where you
can select a field to insert in the text. When the dialog
box closes, the current value of the field is displayed in
the mtext object.
Edit Field When a field is selected, displays the Field dialog box
(see page 377), where you can modify the selected field.
When the dialog box closes, the current value of the
field is displayed in the mtext object.
Update Field When a field is selected, updates the selected field. The
current value is displayed immediately.
Convert Field to When a field is selected, converts the current value to
Text plain text that cannot be updated.
Indents and Tabs Displays the Indents and Tabs dialog box (see page
572), where you can set indentation for the paragraph
and also set tab stops. You can use different indentation
for the first line and the remaining lines in the
paragraph.
Set Mtext Width (Available when you right-click the ruler.) Displays the
Set Mtext Width dialog box, in which you can specify a
width for the multiline text object in drawing units.

MTEXT | 569
Justification Sets justification and alignment for the multiline text
object. Top Left is the default setting. Spaces entered at
the end of a line are included as part of the text and
affect the justification of the line. Text is center-, left-,
or right-justified with respect to the left and right text
boundaries. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned
with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. See
MTEXT Command Line on page 576 for an
illustration of the nine justification options.
Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box (see page 572).
Select All Selects all the text in the multiline text object.
Change Case Changes the case of selected text. Options are
Uppercase and Lowercase.
AutoCAPS Converts all newly typed and imported text to
uppercase. AutoCAPS does not affect existing text. To
change the case of existing text, select the text, right-
click, and click Change Case on the shortcut menu.
Remove Removes bold, italic, or underline formatting from the
Formatting selected text.
Combine Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph
Paragraphs and replaces each paragraph return with a space.
Stack/Unstack Stacks text if any of the stack characters are contained
in the selected text. Unstacks text if stacked text is
selected.
Properties Displays the Stack Properties dialog box (see page 573).
Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor
position. Symbols can also be inserted manually.
See Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special
Characters on page 580.
Note The nonbreaking space is unavailable in double-
byte operating systems.
Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu,
along with their control code or Unicode string. Click
Other to display the Character Map dialog box, which
contains the entire character set for each font available
on your system. Select a character and click Select to
place it in the Characters to Copy box. When you have

570 | MTEXT
selected all the characters that you want to use, click
Copy to close the dialog box. In the Multiline Text
Editor, right-click and click Paste.
Note In the Multiline Text Editor, the diameter symbol is
displayed as %%c and the nonbreaking space is displayed
as a hollow rectangle. Both are displayed correctly in the
drawing.
You can use the euro symbol with SHX fonts and their
TrueType equivalent fonts shipped with AutoCAD 2000
and later releases. If your keyboard does not contain a
euro symbol, hold down the ALT key and enter 0128 on
the numeric keypad.
Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Select any file that is in ASCII or
RTF format. Imported text retains its original character
formatting and style properties, but you can edit and
format the imported text in the Multiline Text Editor.
After you select a text file to import, you can replace
either selected text or all text, or append the inserted
text to text selected within the text boundary. The file
size for imported text is limited to 32 KB.
The Multiline Text Editor automatically sets the text
color to BYLAYER. When black characters are inserted
and the background color is black, the Multiline Text
Editor automatically changes to white or the current
color.
Note An Excel spreadsheet imported into an AutoCAD
drawing is truncated at 72 rows unless the spreadsheet
was created in Office 2002 with service pack 2 installed.
The same limitation applies when the drawing that
contains the OLE object is opened on a system with an
earlier version of Office installed; the spreadsheet is
truncated.
Background Displays the Background Mask dialog box.
Mask
Use Background Mask: Puts an opaque background
behind the text.

MTEXT | 571
Border Offset Factor: Specifies the margin around the
text for the opaque background. The value is based
on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the
multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 extends the
background by 0.5 times the text height.
Use Background: Provides a background that is the
same color as the background of the drawing.
Color: Specifies a color for the opaque background.
You can select one of the colors in the list or click
Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box (see
page 172).

Help Displays the MTEXT topic in the Help system.

Character Set Displays a menu of code pages. Select a code page to
apply it to the selected text.

Indents and Tabs Dialog Box

Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs and sets tab
stops. You can also set indentation by moving the sliders on the ruler and set
tab stops by clicking on the ruler.
Indentation
Sets indentation in the paragraph where the cursor is located or in selected
paragraphs.
First Line Sets indentation for the first line of the current
paragraph or selected paragraphs.
Paragraph Sets indentation for the current paragraph or selected
paragraphs.
Tab Stop Position
Sets tab positions for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. The list
below the text box shows the current tab stops.
Set
Copies the value in the Tab Stop Position box to the list below the box.
Clear
Removes the selected tab stop from the list.

Replace Dialog Box

Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.
Find What Defines the text string to search for.

572 | MTEXT
Replace With Defines the text string to replace the text in Find What.
Find Button Starts a search for the text string in Find What. To
continue the search, click Find again.
Replace Button Replaces the highlighted text with the text in Replace
With.
Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What
and replaces it with the text in Replace With.
Match Whole Matches the text in the Find box only if it is a single
Word Only word. Text that is part of another word is ignored.
When this option is cleared, AutoCAD finds a match for
text strings, whether they are single words or parts of
other words.
Match Case Finds text only if the case of all characters in the text
string is identical to the case of the text in Find What.
When this option is cleared, AutoCAD finds a match for
specified text strings regardless of case.

Stack Properties Dialog Box

Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text. To open the
Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Prop-
erties on the shortcut menu.
You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options
control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text.

Text
Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction.
Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a
stacked fraction.

MTEXT | 573
Lower Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a
stacked fraction.

Appearance
Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.
Style
Specifies a style format for stacked text.
Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
the second number. There is no line between the
numbers.
Fraction Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
(Horizontal) the second number separated by a horizontal line.
Fraction Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
(Diagonal) the second number separated by a diagonal line.
Note Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do
not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object
contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to
horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-
AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored
when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a
later release. If a single multiline text object contains both
horizontal and diagonal fractions, all fractions are
converted to diagonal fractions when the drawing is
reopened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release.
Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All
stacked text in an object uses the same alignment.
Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text
line.
Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text
line.
Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.
Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current
text style (from 25 to 125 percent). Default text size is 70 percent.

574 | MTEXT
Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to
the current stacked text.

AutoStack Button
Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box. AutoStack only stacks numeric
characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound charac-
ters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select the
text and choose the Stack button.

AutoStack Properties Dialog Box

Turns on automatic stacking, removes leading blank spaces before stacked
text, specifies whether the slash character converts to diagonal or horizontal
fractions, and suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box.

Enable Automatically stacks numeric characters entered

AutoStacking before and after the carat, slash, or pound character.
For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric
character or space, the text is automatically stacked as
a diagonal fraction.
Remove Leading Removes blanks between a whole number and a
Blank fraction. This option is available only when
AutoStacking is turned on.
Convert It to a Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction
Diagonal Fraction when AutoStack is on.

MTEXT | 575
Convert It to a Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction
Horizontal when AutoStack is on.
Fraction
Note Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound
character is always converted to a diagonal fraction, and
the carat character is always converted to a tolerance
format.
Dont Show This Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog
Dialog Again; box. The current property settings are used for all
Always Use These stacked text. When this option is cleared, the AutoStack
Settings Properties dialog box is automatically displayed if you
type two numbers separated by a slash, carat, or pound
sign followed by a space or nonnumeric character.

Note To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have sup-
pressed automatic display, select stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on
the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack.

MTEXT Command Line

If you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline
Text Editor and displays additional prompts on the command line.
Current text style: current Text height: current
Specify first corner:
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:

Opposite Corner
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows
within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.

Height
Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters.
Specify height <current>:

The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise,
it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. Character height is cal-
culated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value stored in
TEXTSIZE.

576 | MTEXT
Justify
Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in
relation to the text boundary. The current justification (Top Left, by default)
is applied to new text. The text is justified within the specified rectangle
based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the
rectangle. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify
the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left
and right text boundaries. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as
part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Text flow controls
whether text is aligned from the middle, the top, or the bottom of the para-
graph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries.
Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] <TL>:

Justify options

Option Meaning

TL Top Left

TC Top Center

TR Top Right

ML Middle Left

MC Middle Center

MR Middle Right

BL Bottom Left

BC Bottom Center

BR Bottom Right

MTEXT | 577
The following illustrations show each justification option.

top left: top center: top right:

left-justified, center-justified, right-justified,
spills down spills down spills down

middle left: middle center: middle right:

left-justified, center-justified, right-justified,
spills up and down spills up and down spills up and down

bottom left: bottom center: bottom right:

left-justified, center-justified, right-justified,
spills up spills up spills up

Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical
distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom
of the next line of text.

Note Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table.
Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does
not overlap.

Enter line spacing type [At least/Exactly] <current>:

578 | MTEXT
At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height
of the largest character in the line. When At Least is
selected, lines of text with taller characters have added
space between lines.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:

Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of

single-line spacing.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text
characters. You enter the spacing increment as a
number followed by x to indicate a multiple of
single spacing. For example, specify single spacing
by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering
2x.
Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value
measured in drawing units. Valid values must be
between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).

Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text
in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text
height of the object or text style.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:

Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of

single-line spacing.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text
characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a
number followed by x to indicate a multiple of
single spacing. For example, specify single spacing
by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering
2x.
Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value
measured in drawing units. Valid values must be
between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.
Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify a point or enter a value

If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is deter-
mined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most
recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point.

MTEXT | 579
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite cor-
ner of the text boundary.

Style
Specifies the text style to use for multiline text.
Enter style name or [?] <current>:

Style Name Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined
and saved using the STYLE command.
?List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics.
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite cor-
ner of the text boundary.

Width
Specifies the width of the text boundary.
Specify width: Specify a point or enter a value

If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as
the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within
each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text bound-
ary. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the
multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line
of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing ENTER . To end the
command, press ENTER at the MTEXT prompt.

Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special

Characters
You can enter the following control codes and Unicode strings to create spe-
cial characters.

Unicode strings and control codes

Control Codes Unicode Strings Result

%%d \U+00B0 Degree symbol ()

%%p \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol ()

%%c \U+2205 Diameter symbol ()

580 | MTEXT
Note that the circle diameter dimensioning symbol appears as %%c in the
Multiline Text Editor but converts to the special character in your drawing.
The following text symbols can also be inserted by entering the appropriate
Unicode string or from the MTEXT shortcut menu:

Text symbols and Unicode strings

Name Symbol Unicode String

Almost equal \U+2248

Angle \U+2220

Boundary line \U+E100

Centerline \U+2104

Delta \U+0394

Electrical phase \U+0278

Flow line \U+E101

Identity \U+2261

Monument line \U+E102

Not equal \U+2260

Ohm \U+2126

Omega \U+03A9

Plate/property line \U+214A

Subscript 2 \U+2082

Superscript 2 \U+00B2

These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX
fonts:

Simplex
RomanS
Isocp
Isocp2
Isocp3

MTEXT | 581
Isoct
Isoct2
Isoct3
Isocpeur (TTF only)
Isocpeur italic (TTF only)
Isocteur (TTF only)
Isocteur italic (TTF only)

MULTIPLE
Repeats the next command until canceled
Command line: multiple

Enter command name to repeat:

The command that you enter is repeated until you press ESC . Because MUL-
TIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified
each time.
MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes.

Note You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP command

function.

MVIEW
Creates and controls layout viewports
When working in a layout tab, MVIEW controls the creation and display of
layout viewports. When working in the Model tab, you can use VPORTS to
create model viewports.
View menu: Viewports 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, 4 Viewports
Command line: mview

Specify corner of viewport or [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/

Restore/2/3/4] <Fit>: Enter an option or specify a point

In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64
viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space
are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank.
Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.

582 | MULTIPLE
Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.
Specify opposite corner:

On
Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in
model space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number
of viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more
viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off to
make another one active.
Select objects: Select one or more viewports

Off
Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed
in an inactive viewport.
Select objects: Select one or more viewports

Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the printable area.
When the paper background and printable area are turned off, the viewport
fills the display.
Shadeplot
Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted.
fit
Shade plot? [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered] <As displayed >: Enter a
shade plot option

As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is

displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless
of the current display.
Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines
removed regardless of the current display.

MVIEW | 583
Rendered Specifies that a viewport is plotted rendered regardless
of the current display.
Select objects: Select one or more viewports

Lock
Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed
when working in model space.
Viewport View Locking [ON/OFF]: Enter on or off
Select objects: Select one or more viewports

Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a
viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three
vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line
segments.
Select object to clip viewport: Select an object

Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. The prompts
are similar to those displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for
external references (xrefs), but you can specify arcs when you create a polyg-
onal viewport boundary.
Specify start point: Specify a point
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an
option

Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport.

[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/
Undo/Endpoint of arc] <Endpoint>: Enter an option or
press ENTER

For a description of the options for creating arc

segments, see Arc on page 706.
Close Closes the boundary. If you press ENTER after specifying
at least three points, AutoCAD automatically closes the
boundary.

584 | MVIEW
Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same
angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment
is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new line segment tangent
to that arc segment.
Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to
the polygonal viewport.

Restore
Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command.
Enter viewport configuration name or [?] <*ACTIVE>: Enter ?, enter a name, or
press ENTER
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window
selection method; AutoCAD fits the viewports into the
selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of
equal size.
Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical] <Vertical>: Enter h or press
ENTER
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
2/vertical
First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window
selection method; AutoCAD fits the viewports into the
selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

3
Divides the specified area into three viewports.
Enter viewport arrangement
[Horizontal/Vertical/Above/Below/Left/<Right>: Enter an option or press ENTER

The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The
other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two

MVIEW | 585
smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the
larger viewport is placed.
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window
selection method; AutoCAD fits the viewports into the
3/right
selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of
equal size.
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window
selection method; AutoCAD fits the viewports into the
4
selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

MVSETUP
Sets up the specifications of a drawing
Command line: mvsetup

When you enter mvsetup at the command line, the prompts displayed
depend on whether you are on the Model tab (model space) or on a layout
tab (paper space).
On the Model tab, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size
from the command line using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide,
AutoCAD draws a rectangular border at the grid limits.
On a layout tab, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the
drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. You can
specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the
layout and the drawing on the Model tab. The Model tab is most useful for
plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border.
To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plot-
ting, you can also use the Page Setup dialog box, which is automatically dis-
played when you select a layout in a new drawing session.

586 | MVSETUP
Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab
When the TILEMODE system variable is on (the default), AutoCAD displays
the following prompt:
Enable paper space? [No/Yes] <Y>: Enter n or press ENTER

Pressing ENTER turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the follow-
ing section, Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab.
Entering n displays the following prompt:
Enter units type [Scientific/Decimal/Engineering/Architectural/Metric]: Enter an
option

AutoCAD displays a list of available units and prompts for the scale factor
and paper size.
Enter the scale factor: Enter a value
Enter the paper width: Enter a value
Enter the paper height: Enter a value

AutoCAD draws a bounding box and ends the command.

Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab

When the TILEMODE system variable is off, or when you enter y or press
ENTER at the Enable Paper Space prompt, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Enter an option [Align/Create/Scale viewports/Options/Title block/Undo]: Enter
an option or press ENTER to end the command

Align
Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another
viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to.
Enter an option [Angled/Horizontal/Vertical alignment/Rotate view/Undo]:
Enter an option

MVSETUP | 587
Angled Pans the view in a viewport in a specified direction.
Specify base point: Specify a point
Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in
the viewport to be panned

The next two prompts specify the distance and angle

from the base point to the second point.
Specify the distance and angle to the new alignment point
in the current viewport where you specified the base point.
Specify distance from base point: Specify a distance
Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle

Horizontal Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns

horizontally with a base point in another viewport.
This option should be used only if the two viewports
are oriented horizontally. Otherwise, the view might be
panned outside the limits of the viewport.
Specify base point: Specify a point
Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in
the viewport to be panned

Vertical Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically

Alignment with a base point in another viewport. This option
should be used only if the two viewports are oriented
vertically. Otherwise, the view might be panned outside
the limits of the viewport.
Specify base point: Specify a point
Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in
the viewport to be panned

Rotate View Rotates the view in a viewport about a base point.

Specify base point in the viewport with the view to be
rotated: Specify a point
Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle

Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP

session.

588 | MVSETUP
Create
Creates viewports.
Enter an option [Delete objects/Create viewports/Undo] <Create>: Enter an
option or press ENTER

Delete Objects
Deletes existing viewports.
Select the objects to delete...
Select objects: Select the viewports to delete and press ENTER

Create Viewports
Displays options for creating viewports.
Available layout options:

0: None
1: Single
2: Std. Engineering
3: Array of Viewports

Enter layout number to load or [Redisplay]: Enter an option number (03), or

enter r to redisplay the list of viewport layout options

Layout Number Controls creation of viewports.

to Load
Entering 0 or pressing ENTER creates no viewports.
Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is
determined by the following prompts.
Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s):
Specify a point for the first corner
Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner

Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified

area into quadrants. AutoCAD prompts you for the area
to be divided and the distance between the viewports.
Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s):
Specify a point for the first corner
Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner
Specify distance between viewports in X direction
<0.0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

MVSETUP | 589
Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER

The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in

the table.

Standard engineering viewports

Quadrant View

Upper-left Top (XY plane of UCS)

Upper-right SE isometric view

Lower-left Front (XZ plane of UCS)

Lower-right Right side (YZ plane of UCS)

Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X

and Y axes. Specifying points at the next two prompts
defines the rectangular area of the drawing that
contains the viewport configuration. If you have
inserted a title block, the Specify First Corner prompt
also includes an option for selecting a default area.
Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s):
Specify a point for the first corner
Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner
Enter number of viewports in X direction <1>: Enter the
number of viewports to place along the X axis
Enter number of viewports in Y direction <1>: Enter the
number of viewports to place along the Y axis

If you enter more than one viewport in each direction,

AutoCAD displays the following prompts:
Specify distance between viewports in X direction
<0.0>: Specify a distance
Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>:
Specify a distance

AutoCAD inserts the array of viewports into the defined

area.
Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options.

590 | MVSETUP
Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

Scale Viewports
Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The
zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and
the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports.
Select the viewports to scale...
Select objects: Select the viewports to scale

If you select only one viewport, AutoCAD skips the next prompt.
Set zoom scale factors for viewports. Interactively/<Uniform>: Enter i or press
ENTER
Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER

Interactively Selects one viewport at a time and displays the

following prompts for each:
Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a
value or press ENTER
Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a
value or press ENTER

For example, for an engineering drawing at a scale of

1:4, or quarter scale, enter 1 for paper space units and 4
for model space units.
Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports.
Number of paper space units. <1.0>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
Number of model space units. <1.0>: Enter a value or
press ENTER

Options
Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing.
Enter an option [Layer/LImits/Units/Xref] <exit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
to return to the previous prompt

MVSETUP | 591
Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block.
Enter layer name for title block or [. (for current layer)]:
Enter an existing or a new layer name, enter a period (.) for
the current layer, or press ENTER

Limits Specifies whether to reset the limits to the drawing

extents after a title block has been inserted.
Set drawing limits? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or press ENTER

Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are

translated to inch or millimeter paper units.
Enter paper space units type [Feet/Inches/MEters/Millime-
ters] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER

Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally

referenced.
Enter title block placement method [Xref attach/Insert]
<current>: Enter x, enter i, or press ENTER

Title Block
Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a
drawing border and a title block.
Enter title block option [Delete objects/Origin/Undo/Insert] <Insert>: Enter an
option or press ENTER

Delete Objects
Deletes objects from paper space.
Select the objects to delete . . .
Select objects: Use an object selection method

Origin
Relocates the origin point for this sheet.
Specify new origin point for this sheet: Specify a point

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

592 | MVSETUP
Insert
Displays title block options.
Available title blocks:...

0: None
1: ISO A4 Size(mm)
2: ISO A3 Size(mm)
3: ISO A2 Size(mm)
4: ISO A1 Size(mm)
5: ISO A0 Size(mm)
6: ANSI-V Size(in)
7: ANSI-A Size(in)
8: ANSI-B Size(in)
9: ANSI-C Size(in)
10: ANSI-D Size(in)
11: ANSI-E Size(in)
12: Arch/Engineering (24 x 36in)
13: Generic D size Sheet (24 x 36in)

Enter number of title block to load or [Add/Delete/Redisplay]: Enter an option

number (0 through 13) or enter an option

Title Block to Inserts a border and a title block. Entering 0 or pressing

Load ENTER inserts no border. Entering 1 through 13 creates
a standard border of the appropriate size. The list
includes ANSI and DIN/ISO standard sheets.
Add Adds title block options to the list. Selecting this option
prompts you to enter the title block description to be
displayed in the list and the name of a drawing to
insert.
Enter title block description: Enter a description
Enter drawing name to insert (without extension): Enter
a file name
Define default usable area? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter n or press
ENTER

Pressing ENTER displays the following prompts:

Specify lower-left corner: Specify a point
Specify upper-right corner: Specify a point

MVSETUP | 593
AutoCAD adds a line similar to the following example
after the last entry in the mvsetup.dfs default file:
A/E (24 x 18in),arch-b.dwg,(1.12 0.99
0.00),(18.63 17.02 0.00),in
The last field of the line specifies whether the title block
has been created in inches or in millimeters. The units
field allows title blocks created in either unit system to
be changed by setting the unit type using the Options
option.
You can also add title blocks that have variable
attributes.
Delete Removes entries from the list.
Enter number of entry to delete from list: Enter the num-
ber of the entry to delete

Redisplay Redisplays the list of title block options.

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

594 | MVSETUP
NETLOAD
Loads a .NET application
Command line: netload

The Choose .NET Assembly dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box,
is displayed.

NEW
Creates a new drawing
File menu: New
Command line: new

The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the Startup setting on

the System tab of the Options dialog box.

Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog
box.
Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Select Template dia-
log box (a standard file selection dialog box).

If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a prompt on the com-

mand line is displayed (see page 602). If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is
displayed regardless of the Startup setting.

Create New Drawing Dialog Box

Defines the settings for a new drawing. There are three main methods that
you can use to create a new drawing. (The first option, Open a Drawing, is
not available from the NEW command. To open an existing drawing, use
OPEN.) Choose one of the buttons at the top of the dialog box.

Start from Scratch

Starts an empty drawing using default imperial or metric settings (MEA-
SUREINIT system variable). You can change the measurement system for a
given drawing by using the MEASUREMENT system variable. To start a new
drawing based on a customized template, see Use a Template on page 596.
The Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that
is started from scratch.

NETLOAD | 595
Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the imperial
measurement system. The default drawing boundary
(the grid limits) is 12 9 inches.
Metric Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement
system. The default drawing boundary (the grid limits)
is 429 297 millimeters.

Use a Template
Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings store
all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimen-
sion styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from
other drawing files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the
template directory.
Several template drawings are included with AutoCAD. You can make addi-
tional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file names
to .dwt. See Use a Template File to Start a Drawing in the Users Guide.

596 | NEW
Select a Template Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing
template file location, which is specified in the Options
dialog box (see page 624). Choose a file to use as a
starting point for your new drawing. A preview image of
the selected file is displayed to the right.
Browse Displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) where you can access template
files that are not available in the Select a Template list.

Use a Wizard
Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. You can choose from two
wizards: Quick Setup and Advanced Setup.

NEW | 597
Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard (see page 598), in
which you can specify the units and area for your new
drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings,
such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate
scale.
Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard (see page 600), in
which you can specify the units, angle, angle measure,
angle direction, and area for your new drawing. The
Quick Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text
height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale.

Quick Setup Wizard

Defines the units and area of your drawing.

The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this
wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the
last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you
specified.

598 | NEW
Units
Indicates the format in which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays
coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available in AutoCAD.
Two of them, Engineering and Architectural, have a specific base unit
(inches) assigned to them. You can select from other measurement styles that
can represent any convenient unit of measurement.

Note You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all
measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command.
The default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0.0000).

Decimal Displays measurements in decimal notation.

Engineering Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches.
Architectural Displays measurements in feet, inches, and fractional
inches.
Fractional Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and
fractional) notation.
Scientific Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers
expressed in the form of the product of a decimal
number between 0 and 10 and a power of 10).

Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectan-
gular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and
off with the LIMITS command.

NEW | 599
Advanced Setup Wizard
Defines the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area of your
new drawing.

The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure,
Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next
to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard
and create the new drawing with the settings you specified.
You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using
the UNITS command, and you can change area using the LIMITS command.

Units
Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit format is the format in
which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays coordinates and measure-
ments. The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats.
See Units on page 599 for more information.
The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional
size for displaying linear measurements.

600 | NEW
Angle
Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which AutoCAD dis-
plays angles.
Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals.
Deg/Min/Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds.
Grads Displays angles as grads.
Radians Displays angles as radians.
Surveyor Displays angles in surveyors units.

Angle Measure
Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. When you enter
an angle value in AutoCAD, AutoCAD measures the angle either counter-
clockwise or clockwise from the compass direction that you select on this
page. You control the counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle
Direction page.
East Specifies the compass direction east as the 0 angle.
North Specifies the compass direction north as the 0 angle.
West Specifies the compass direction west as the 0 angle.
South Specifies the compass direction south as the 0 angle.
Other Specifies a direction other than east, north, west, or
south. Enter a specific compass angle to treat as the 0
angle.

Angle Direction
Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which
AutoCAD displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise.

NEW | 601
NEW Command Line
If you turned off the display of the Create New Drawing dialog box, or if FILE-
DIA is set to 0, NEW displays the following prompt:

Enter template file name or [. (for none)] <current>: Enter a name, enter a period
(.), or press ENTER

Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box).

NEWSHEETSET
Creates a new sheet set
Insert menu: File New Sheet Set
Tools menu: Wizards New Sheet Set
Sheet Set Manager control: New Sheet Set
Command line: newsheetset

The Create Sheet Set wizard contains a series of pages that step you through
the process of creating a new sheet set. You can choose to create a new sheet
set from existing drawings, or use an existing sheet set as a template on
which to base your new sheet set.

602 | NEWSHEETSET
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves
OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or
through a specified point.

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Offset
Command line: offset

Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>: Specify a distance, enter t, or press

ENTER

polyline polyline
with offset

Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an

existing object.
Select object to offset or <exit>: Select one object or press
ENTER to end the command
Specify point on side to offset?: Specify a point (1) on the
side of the object you want to offset

1
offset distance

object
selected side selected object offset

AutoCAD repeats the two prompts so that you can

create multiple offset objects. To end the command,
press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.

OFFSET | 603
Through Creates an object passing through a specified point.
Select object to offset or <exit>: Select one object or press
ENTER to end the command
Specify through point: Specify a point (1) through which
you want the offset object to pass

object
selected
through point object offset

AutoCAD repeats the two prompts so that you can

create multiple offset objects. To end the command,
press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.

OLELINKS
Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links
AutoCAD supports the Microsoft Windows feature called object linking and
embedding (OLE). When you use PASTESPEC to insert a linked object into an
AutoCAD drawing from an application that supports OLE, the object main-
tains a connection with its source file.
See Link and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
You can set AutoCAD to update links automatically or manually when infor-
mation in the source document changes.
Edit menu: OLE Links
Command line: olelinks

The Links dialog box is displayed. If there is no existing OLE link in the draw-
ing, OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is
not displayed. To specify a different source application for an embedded
object, right-click the embedded object and click Convert on the shortcut
menu to display the Convert dialog box (see page 606).

604 | OLELINKS
Links Dialog Box
Lists and modifies linked files and objects.

Links Lists information about linked objects. The

information listed depends on the type of link. To
change information for a linked object, select the
object.
Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type
of object.
Type Displays the format type.
Update: Updates the link automatically whenever the source
Automatic changes.
Update: Manual Prompts you to update a link when you open the
document.
Update Now Updates the selected links.
Open Source Opens the source file and highlights the portion linked
to the AutoCAD drawing.
Change Source Displays the Change Source dialog box (a standard file
dialog box), in which you can specify a different source
file. If the source is a selection within a file (instead of
the entire file), Item Name displays a string
representing the selection.
Break Link Severs the link between the object and the original file.
AutoCAD changes the object in your AutoCAD drawing
into a Windows metafile, which is not affected by
future changes to the original file.

OLELINKS | 605
Convert Dialog Box
Specifies a different source application for an embedded object.

Current Type Displays the type of object you are converting or

activating.
Object Type Displays a list of available object types. If you select
AutoCAD Entities, text is converted to a multiline text
(mtext) object, a spreadsheet is converted to a table
object, and a bitmap file is converted to an image
object.
Convert To Converts the embedded object to the type specified
under Object Type.
Activate As Opens the embedded object as the type selected under
Object Type but returns the object to its current type
after editing.
Display as Icon Displays the source applications icon in the AutoCAD
drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked
or embedded information.
Change Icon Displays the Change Icon dialog box. This option is
available only if you select Display as Icon.
Result Describes the result of the selected options.

606 | OLELINKS
Change Icon Dialog Box
Changes the icon that represents an embedded or linked object in an
AutoCAD drawing.

Icon
Specifies an icon to represent an embedded or linked object.
Current Specifies the currently selected icon.
Default Specifies the default icon for the source application.
From File Specifies an icon from a file (valid types include EXE,
DLL, and ICO).

Label
Specifies a caption for the icon. AutoCAD displays the file type unless you
specify otherwise.

Browse
Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in
which you can select an icon from a file.

OLELINKS | 607
OLESCALE
Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object
Shortcut menu: With an OLE object selected, right-click and click Text Size.
Command line: olescale

The OLE Text Size dialog box is displayed.

Note You must select an OLE object before entering the OLESCALE command.

OLE Text Size Dialog Box

Maps the point size of one of the fonts in an OLE object to a text height in
the drawing. The OLE object is scaled automatically to accommodate the size
of the text.

OLE Text Font Displays a list of the fonts used in the OLE object.
OLE Point Size Displays a list of the point sizes available for the
selected font.
Text Height Sets a text height for the font at the selected point size.
Reset Restores the OLE object to its size when it was inserted
in the drawing.

OOPS
Restores erased objects
Command line: oops

OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command.

608 | OLESCALE
erased objects before OOPS after OOPS

You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can
erase the selected objects after creating a block. You cannot use OOPS to
restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command.

OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file

Standard toolbar:
File menu: Open
Command line: open

The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
You can open and load a portion of a drawing, including geometry on a spe-
cific view or layer. In the Select File dialog box, click the arrow next to Open
and choose Partial Open or Partial Open Read-Only to display the Partial
Open dialog box.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a prompt on the command line
(see page 622).

Note If the drawing you open contains macros, AutoCAD displays the
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box (see page 1054).

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes

Several AutoCAD commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in
which you can navigate through local and network drives and through FTP
sites and Web folders to select files. While each dialog box may vary slightly,
following is a list of the possible options.

OPEN | 609
Places
list

Places List
Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Click the Look In arrow to
view the path for each icon. You can reorder the icons in the Places list by
dragging them to a new location. To add a new icon to the Places list, drag a
folder from the files list to the Places list, or right-click an existing icon and
choose Add or Add Current Folder from the shortcut menu. This shortcut
menu also provides options for removing and modifying icons, or restoring
default icons that have been removed. You cannot remove the Autodesk
Buzzsaw icon. Changes to the Places list affect all standard file selection
dialog boxes.
History Displays shortcuts to the files most recently accessed
from the dialog box. It is recommended that you
periodically remove unwanted shortcuts from the
History list. Select History, then select the unwanted
shortcuts from the Files list and choose Delete. To sort
the shortcuts by date, choose Views Details, and then
click the Modified column in the Files list.
Personal/My Displays the contents of the Personal or My Documents
Documents folder for the current user profile. The name of this
location (Personal or My Documents) depends on
your operating system version.

610 | OPEN
Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder for the
current user profile. This folder consists of shortcuts to
files or folders that you added to Favorites using the
Tools Add to Favorites option in the dialog box.
FTP Displays the FTP sites that are available for browsing in
the standard file selection dialog box. To add FTP
locations to this list, or to modify an existing FTP
location, choose Tools Add/Modify FTP Locations in
the dialog box.
Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop.
Buzzsaw Provides access to Buzzsaw projects. Buzzsaw is a secure
Internet-based collaboration and project management
service that connects project teams in different
locations for the building design and construction
industry. If you do not yet have a project hosting
account on Buzzsaw, clicking Buzzsaw displays the Add
a New Site option in the Buzzsaw Folders list where you
can set up a project. Also, the first time you access
Buzzsaw, your default web browser opens with the
project hosting page displayed. If you already have a
project hosting account, clicking Buzzsaw shows all of
your project sites in the Files list.

Look In/Save In
Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to view the hierarchy of
the folder path and to navigate up the path tree or to other drives, network
connections, FTP locations, or web folders (either Web Folders or My Network
Places, depending on the version of your operating system). You can create
web folders in Windows Explorer. Consult your system administrator or
Windows Explorer Help for more information about web folders.
To control whether the last used paths in each particular standard file selec-
tion dialog box are stored across sessions, use the REMEMBERFOLDERS system
variable.

Back
Returns to the previous file location.

Up One Level
Navigates one level up in the current path tree.

OPEN | 611
Search the Web
Displays the Browse the Web dialog box, from which you can access and
store drawing files on the Internet.

Delete
Deletes the selected file or folder.

Create New Folder

Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify.

Views
Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a pre-
view image.
List Displays the contents of the Files list in a multicolumn
format.
Details Displays the contents of the Files list in a single-column
format with file details.
Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. The Preview area
is blank if you do not select a file. To save a bitmap with
a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image
option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog
box.

Tools
Provides the following tools:
Find Displays the Find dialog box (see page 616), in which
you can search for files using name, location, and date-
modified filters.
Locate Uses the AutoCAD search path to locate the file
specified in File Name. You set the search path on the
Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page 624).
Add/Modify FTP Displays the Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box (see
Locations page 618), in which you can specify the FTP sites to
make available for browsing. To browse these sites,
select FTP from the Places list.
Add Current Adds an icon for the selected folder to the Places list,
Folder to Places providing quick access to that folder from all standard
file selection dialog boxes. To remove the icon, right-
click the icon and choose Remove.

612 | OPEN
Add to Favorites Creates a shortcut to the current Look In location, or to
the selected file or folder. The shortcut is placed in the
Favorites folder for the current user profile, which you
can access by choosing Favorites in the Places list.
Options Provides additional options for certain standard file
selection dialog boxes.
Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password
that are invoked when you save a file.

Files List
Displays the files and folders in the current path and of the selected file type.
Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and
Details view.

Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file when you choose Views Preview in
the dialog box. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file. To save a
bitmap with a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option
on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.

File Name
Displays the name of the file you select in the Files list. If you select multiple
files, File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks. If you
enter a file name in the File Name box, AutoCAD clears any selection. You
must use quotation marks when entering multiple file names. You can use
wild-card characters to filter files displayed in the Files list.

Files of Type
Filters the list of files by file type. When you are saving files, Files of Type
specifies the format in which the file is saved.

Select Initial View

Displays the specified view when you open the drawing if the drawing con-
tains more than one named view.

Update Sheet and View Thumbnails Now

Reflects the current setting of the UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable. This
option temporarily overrides that setting. Clear the checkbox to save the file
without updating thumbnails. Check the box to update all thumbnails. This
option does not change the current setting of UPDATETHUMBNAIL.

OPEN | 613
Open/Save
Opens or saves the selected file, depending on the purpose of the specific file
selection dialog box. Certain file selection dialog boxes may also include the
following options, accessed by clicking the arrow next to the Open button:
Open Read-Only Opens a file in read-only mode. You cannot save
changes to the file using the original file name.
Partial Open Displays the Partial Open dialog box (see page 619). You
can open and load a portion of a drawing, including
geometry on a specific view or layer. You can only use
this option with drawings created in AutoCAD 2000 or
later.
Partial Open Opens the specified drawing portions in read-only
Read-Only mode.

Add a New Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box

Provides access to a new Autodesk Buzzsaw location that you specify. You can
open drawings or save drawings at this location. If a sheet set is open, the
Autodesk Buzzsaw location is associated with your current sheet set. The only
Buzzsaw locations displayed are those associated with the current sheet set.
Buzzsaw Location Accepts a descriptive name for the new Autodesk
Name Buzzsaw location.
Buzzsaw Site Specifies the Autodesk Buzzsaw site for the project. You
can enter the name or use the drop-down list to choose
the Buzzsaw site. The Browse button opens a standard
file selection dialog box to the Autodesk Buzzsaw site.
Buzzsaw Folder Specifies the folder within the Autodesk Buzzsaw site.
User Name Accepts your login name for the Autodesk Buzzsaw
location.
Password Accepts your password for the Autodesk Buzzsaw
location.
Save User Name Determines whether the User Name and Password
and Password information is stored for this Autodesk Buzzsaw
location.

614 | OPEN
Edit Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box
Provides edit access to an Autodesk Buzzsaw location that you specify. If a
sheet set is open, the Autodesk Buzzsaw location is associated with your cur-
rent sheet set. The only Buzzsaw locations displayed are those associated
with the current sheet set.
Buzzsaw Location Displays the descriptive name for the current Autodesk
Name Buzzsaw location.
Buzzsaw Site Displays the Autodesk Buzzsaw site for the project. You
can enter a new name or use the drop-down list to
choose the Buzzsaw site. The Browse button opens a
standard file selection dialog box to the Autodesk
Buzzsaw site.
Buzzsaw Folder Displays the current folder within the Autodesk
Buzzsaw site.
User Name Accepts a new login name for the Autodesk Buzzsaw
location.
Password Accepts a new password for the Autodesk Buzzsaw
location.
Save User Name Determines whether the User Name and Password
and Password information is stored for this Autodesk Buzzsaw
location.

OPEN | 615
Find Dialog Box
Searches for files using name, location, and date modified filters.

Name & Location Tab

Filters the file search based on file type, file name, and location.
Named Specifies the full or partial file names to include in the
search. When entering multiple file names, enclose
each name in quotation marks. Use the following wild-
card characters to broaden your search:
* (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used
anywhere in the search string.
? (Question mark): Matches any single character; for
example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on.

The type of files to include in the search is determined

by Type, so you dont need to enter a file extension in
Named. For example, to find house102.dwg, enter
house* and set Type to Drawing (*.dwg).
Type Specifies the type of files to include in the search.
Available file types are limited to those supported by
the specific standard file selection dialog box.

616 | OPEN
Look In Specifies the location to search. Enter a location, choose
a location from the list, or choose Browse to navigate to
a location. When entering multiple locations, enclose
each location in quotation marks.
Browse Displays the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you
can navigate to a location for the search.
Include Searches all subfolders within the Look In location.
Subfolders

Date Modified Tab

Filters the file search based on the files creation or modified date.
All Files Searches without a date filter.
Find All Files Restricts the search to files created or modified within a
Created or specified time.
Modified
Between: Searches for files created or modified
between two dates. Enter the dates or click the
arrows to choose dates from a calendar. To navigate
the calendar, use the left and right arrows, or click
the month and year.
During the Previous N Months: Searches for files
created or modified within a specified number of
months.
During the Previous N Days: Searches for files created
or modified within a specified number of days.

Find Now
Searches for files using the criteria specified in both tabs.

Stop
Ends the search.

New Search
Clears the search results and resets the default values for all search options.

OK
When one or more files are selected in the search results, closes the Find dia-
log box and enters the selected file names in the standard file selection dialog
box.

OPEN | 617
Search Results
Lists all files found by the search. To change the sort order of the files, click
a column heading. To pass a file to the standard file selection dialog box,
select a file and choose OK. When used with a standard file selection dialog
box that allows multiple file selection, you can pass multiple files from the
Search Results.

Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box

Defines the FTP sites that you can browse within standard file selection dia-
log boxes. To browse the sites that you add, select FTP from the Places list in
the standard file selection dialog box.

Name of FTP Site

Specifies the site name for the FTP location (for example, ftp.autodesk.com).

Log On As
Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific
user name.

618 | OPEN
Anonymous Logs you on to the FTP site as an anonymous user. If the
FTP site does not allow anonymous logons, select User
and enter a valid user name.
User Logs you on to the FTP site using the specified user
name.

Password
Specifies the password to use to log on to the FTP site.

Add
Adds a new FTP site to the list of FTP locations available from the standard
file selection dialog box.

Modify
Modifies the selected FTP site to use the specified site name, logon name, and
password.

Remove
Removes the selected FTP site from the list of FTP locations available from the
standard file selection dialog box.

FTP Sites
Lists the FTP sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file
selection dialog boxes.

URL
Displays the URL for the selected FTP site.

Partial Open Dialog Box

Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry
to load into the selected drawing. When working with large drawing files,
you can select the minimal amount of geometry you need to load when
opening a drawing.

OPEN | 619
When a drawing is partially open, all AutoCAD named objects, as well as the
specified geometry, are loaded into the file. AutoCAD named objects include
blocks, dimension styles, layers, layouts, linetypes, text styles, UCSs, views,
and viewport configurations.

View Geometry to Load

Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing. Only model
space views are available for loading. You can load paper space geometry by
loading the layer that the paper space geometry is drawn on.
View Name Displays the currently selected view. Geometry that is
common to both the selected view and the layers is
loaded into the drawing.
View List Displays all the model space views available in the
selected drawing file. When a view is selected,
AutoCAD loads only the geometry in the selected view.
The default view is Extents. Geometry that is common
to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into
the drawing. You can load geometry from only one
view.
You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load
additional geometry into a partially open drawing.

620 | OPEN
Note When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the
file along with the specified geometry from the selected view. All views are still
available in the partially open drawing, but only geometry from the view speci-
fied to load is displayed in the drawing.

Layer Geometry to Load

Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file. The geometry on
selected layers is loaded into the drawing, including both model space and
paper space geometry. The default loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
but you can load geometry from one or more layers. If you specify to load no
layer geometry into the drawing, no geometry from the selected view is
loaded either because no layer geometry in that view or in the entire drawing
is loaded. Xref-dependent layers are displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load
list only if the selected drawing was last saved with the VISRETAIN system vari-
able set to 1. Any layers created in the xref since the xref was loaded into the
selected drawing are not displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list.
You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a
partially open drawing.

Note When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the
file along with the specified geometry from the selected layers. All layers are still
available in the partially open drawing, but only geometry from the layers spec-
ified to load appears in the drawing.

Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing.

Load Geometry Loads geometry from the layer when the drawing is
opened.
Load All Loads geometry from all layers when the drawing is
opened. You can right-click and use the shortcut menu
to load geometry from all layers into the drawing.
Clear All Loads no geometry from any layer when the drawing is
opened. No geometry at all is loaded, including
geometry specified to load from a view. You can right-
click and use the shortcut menu to load no geometry
into the drawing.

OPEN | 621
Index Status
Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index.
INDEXCTL controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the
drawing file.
Use Spatial Index Controls whether a spatial index is used when partially
opening a drawing. AutoCAD uses a spatial index to
locate what portion of the drawing is read; this
minimizes the time required to open the drawing. If a
drawing does not contain a spatial index, this option is
unavailable.
Spatial Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a
spatial index. A spatial index organizes objects based on
their location in space. When partially opening a
drawing, AutoCAD uses a spatial index to locate what
portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time
required to open the drawing.
Layer Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a
layer index. A layer index is a list showing the objects
that are on each layer. When partially opening a
drawing, AutoCAD uses a layer index to locate what
portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time
required to open the drawing.

Unload All Xrefs on Open

Unloads all external references when opening the drawing. Selecting this
option enhances the opening process. If you partially open a drawing that
contains a bound xref, only the portion of the xref that is loaded (defined by
the selected view) is bound to the partially open drawing.

Open
Opens the drawing file, loading only combined geometry from the selected
view and layers.

OPEN Command Line

When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays the following prompt on the
command line.
Enter name of drawing to open:

Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dia-
log box (see page 609), a standard file selection dialog box.

622 | OPEN
OPENDWFMARKUP
Opens a DWF file that contains markups
File menu: Load Markup Set
Command line: opendwfmarkup

Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), in which you can select a Design Web Format (DWF ) file that con-
tains markups to load into the Markup Set Manager. When you select a DWF
file and click Open, the Markup Set Manager is displayed. The markup set
from the selected DWF file is loaded into the Markup Set Manager.

OPENSHEETSET
Opens a selected sheet set
File menu: Open Sheet Set
Sheet Set Manager control: Open
Command line: opensheetset

The Open Sheet Set dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed.
In this dialog box, you can select a sheet set data (DST) file to load sheet set
information into the Sheet Set Manager.

OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Tools menu: Options
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no com-
mands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Options.
Command line: options

The Options dialog box is displayed.

OPENDWFMARKUP | 623
Options Dialog Box
Customizes many AutoCAD settings.

Current Profile Displays the name of the current profile above the tabs.
To set the current profile, create a new profile, or edit an
existing profile, use the Profiles tab. (CPROFILE system
variable)
Current Drawing Displays the name of the current drawing above the
tabs. A drawing file icon is displayed next to any option
saved with the drawing. An option saved with the
drawing affects only the current drawing. An option
saved in the registry affects all drawings in an AutoCAD
session. Options that are saved in the registry (and are
not displayed with a drawing file icon) are saved in the
current profile. (DWGNAME system variable)

Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the folders in which AutoCAD searches for support, driver, menu,
and other files. Also specifies optional, user-defined settings such as which
dictionary to use for checking spelling.

624 | OPTIONS
To specify a location for a folder or file, double-click its name in the list.
Choose Browse and use the Browse for Folder dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) to locate the folder or file you want to use.
Support File Search Path
Specifies the folders in which AutoCAD searches for drawing support files. In
addition to the files that are required to run AutoCAD, you can include files
for fonts, menus, drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns in the
drawing support file search path. Environment variables can also be included
in the drawing support file search path.
Working Support File Search Path
Specifies the active folders in which AutoCAD searches for drawing support
files that are specific to your system. The working drawing support file list
displays valid paths from the drawing support file search path that exist in
the current folder structure and network paths. Any valid environment vari-
ables listed in the drawing support file search path are displayed as expanded
folders in the Working Support File Search Path. Environment variables that
contain other environment variables are displayed with only the parent vari-
able as an expanded folder.
Device Driver File Search Path
Specifies where AutoCAD looks for device drivers for the video display, point-
ing devices, printers, and plotters.

OPTIONS | 625
Project Files Search Path
Specifies a project name for the drawing. The project name corresponds to a
search path for external reference (xref) files associated with the project. You
can create any number of project names with associated folders, but each
drawing can have only one project name. (PROJECTNAME system variable)
Menu, Help, and Miscellaneous File Names
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.
Menu File Specifies the location of the AutoCAD menu file.
Help File Specifies the location of the AutoCAD Help file.
Default Internet Specifies the default Internet location used by both the
Location BROWSER command and the Browse the Web button on
the Web toolbar.
Configuration Specifies the location of the configuration file used to
File store hardware device driver information. This value is
read-only and can be changed only by using the /c
command line switch. See Customize Startup in the
Users Guide.
Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names
Specifies a number of optional settings.
Text Editor Specifies the text editor application to use for editing
Application multiline text objects. (MTEXTED system variable)
Main Dictionary Specifies the dictionary to use for checking spelling.
(DCTMAIN system variable)
Custom Specifies a custom dictionary to use (if you have one).
Dictionary File (DCTCUST system variable)
Alternate Font Specifies the location of the font file to use if AutoCAD
File cannot locate the original font and an alternate font is
not specified in the font mapping file. If you choose
Browse, AutoCAD displays the Alternate Font dialog
box (see page 654), from which you can choose an
available font. (FONTALT system variable)
Font Mapping Specifies the location of the file that defines how
File AutoCAD should convert fonts it cannot locate.
(FONTMAP system variable)
Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names
Specifies settings related to plotting.

626 | OPTIONS
Plot File Name for Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files
Legacy Plotting used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD
Scripts Release 14 or earlier. The default name is the drawing
name plus the .plt file extension. The default name used
with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawings is the drawing
name-layout name plus the .plt file name extension.
Some plotting device drivers, however, use a different
plot file extension. This option affects only the default
plot file name used for plotting scripts created with
earlier versions of AutoCAD.
Print Spool Specifies the application to use for print spooling. You
Executable can enter the executable file name as well as any
command line arguments you want to use. For
example, you can enter myspool.bat %s to spool plot
files to myspool.bat and have a unique plot file name
automatically generated. See Use AutoSpool in the
Driver and Peripheral Guide.
Printer Support File Path
Specifies search path settings for printer support files.
Print Spooler File Specifies the path for print spool files. AutoCAD writes
Location the plot to this location.
Printer Specifies the path for printer configuration files (PC3
Configuration files).
Search Path
Printer Specifies the path for files with a .pmp file extension, or
Description File printer description files.
Search Path
Plot Style Table Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb extension,
Search Path or plot style table files (both named plot style tables and
color-dependent plot style tables).
Search Path for ObjectARX Applications
Specifies the path for ObjectARX application files. You can enter multiple
URL addresses under this option. (Multiple URLs should be separated by semi-
colons.) AutoCAD searches the specified URLs when an associated
ObjectARX application cannot be located. Only URL addresses can be
entered in this option.
Automatic Save File Location
Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the
Open and Save tab. (SAVEFILEPATH system variable)

OPTIONS | 627
Color Book Locations
Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors
in the Select Color dialog box. You can define multiple folders for each path
specified. This option is saved with the user profile.
Data Sources Location
Specifies the path for database source files. Changes to this setting do not
take effect until you close and restart AutoCAD.
Drawing Template File Settings
Specifies the drawing template settings.
Drawing Specifies the path and file name for the template files
Template File used by the setup wizards and New dialog box.
Location
Default Template Specifies the path and file name for the template files
File Name for used by the QNEW command.
QNEW
Default Template Specifies the template file that is used to store
File Alternative alternative page setups that can be applied to Publish
Page Setups operations from the Sheet Set Manager.
Tool Palettes File Locations
Specifies the path for tool palette support files.
Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File
on the Open and Save tab. (LOGFILEPATH system variable)
Plot and Publish Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file that is created if you select the Automati-
cally Save Plot and Publish Log option on the Plot and Publish tab.
Temporary Drawing File Location
Specifies the location AutoCAD uses to store temporary files. AutoCAD
creates temporary files and then deletes them when you exit the program. If
you plan to run AutoCAD from a write-protected folder (for example, if you
are working on a network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate
location for your temporary files. The folder you specify must not be write-
protected.
The TEMPPREFIX system variable (read-only) also stores the current location
of temporary drawing files.

628 | OPTIONS
Temporary External Reference File Location
Specifies the location of external reference (xref) files. This location is used
for the copy of the xref when you select Enabled with Copy in the Demand
Load Xrefs list on the Open and Save tab. (XLOADPATH system variable)
Texture Maps Search Path
Specifies the folders AutoCAD searches for rendering texture maps.
i-drop Associated File Location
Specifies the location of data files associated with i-drop content. When the
location is not specified, the location of the current drawing file is used.
Browse
Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box, depending on what
you selected in the List of Folders and Files.
Add
Adds a search path for the selected folder.
Remove
Removes the selected search path or file.
Move Up
Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path.
Move Down
Moves the selected search path below the following search path.
Set Current
Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.

Display Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Customizes the AutoCAD display.

OPTIONS | 629
Window Elements
Controls display settings specific to the AutoCAD drawing environment.
Display Scroll Displays scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the
Bars in Drawing drawing area.
Window
Display Screen Displays the screen menu on the right side of the
Menu drawing area. The AutoCAD screen menu font is
controlled by the Windows system font settings. If you
use the AutoCAD screen menu, you should set the
Windows system font setting to a font and font size
that fits the screen menu size restrictions.
Colors Displays the Color Options dialog box (see page 655).
Use this dialog box to specify colors of elements in the
AutoCAD window.
Fonts Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box
(see page 657). Use this dialog box to specify the font
for the command line text.

630 | OPTIONS
Layout Elements
Controls options for existing and new layouts. A layout is a paper space envi-
ronment in which you can set up drawings for plotting.
Display Layout Displays the layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the
and Model Tabs drawing area.
Display Printable Displays printable area in a layout. The printable area is
Area represented by the area within the dashed line and is
determined by the selected output device. Objects
drawn outside of the printable area are clipped or
omitted when the drawing is plotted.
Display Paper Displays a representation of the specified paper size in
Background a layout. The paper size and plot scale determine the
size of the paper background.
Display Paper Shadow: Displays a shadow around the
paper background in a layout. This option is
unavailable if the Display Paper Background option
is cleared.

Show Page Setup Displays the Page Setup Manager (see page 665) the first
Manager for New time you choose a layout tab. Use this dialog box to set
Layouts options related to paper and plot settings.
Create Viewport Creates a single viewport automatically when you
in New Layouts create a new layout.
Crosshair Size
Controls the size of the crosshairs. The valid range is from 1 to 100 percent
of the total screen. At 100 percent, the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.
When the size is decreased to 99 percent or below, the crosshairs have a finite
size, and the ends of the crosshairs are visible when situated at the edge of
the drawing area. The default size is 5 percent. (CURSORSIZE system variable)
Display Resolution
Controls the quality of the display of objects. If you set high values to
improve display quality, the impact on performance is significant.
Arc and Circle Controls the smoothness of circles, arcs, and ellipses. A
Smoothness higher number produces smoother objects, but
AutoCAD requires more time to regenerate, pan, and
zoom the objects. You can improve performance by
setting this option to a low value such as 100 for
drawing, and increasing the value for rendering. The
valid range is 1 to 20,000. The default setting is 1000.
This setting is saved in the drawing. To change the

OPTIONS | 631
default for new drawings, consider specifying this
setting in the template files on which you base your
new drawings.
This value is also controlled by the VIEWRES command.
Segments in a Sets the number of line segments to be generated for
Polyline Curve each polyline curve. The higher the number, the greater
the performance impact. Set this option to a low value
such as 4 to optimize performance for drawing. Values
range from 32767 to 32767. The default setting is 8.
This setting is saved in the drawing. (SPLINESEGS system
variable)
Rendered Object Controls the smoothness of shaded and rendered
Smoothness curved solids. AutoCAD multiplies the value you enter
for Rendered Object Smoothness by the value you enter
for Arc and Circle Smoothness to determine how to
display solid objects. To improve performance, set
Rendered Object Smoothness to 1 or less when
drawing. A higher number decreases display
performance and increases rendering time. The valid
range is 0.01 to 10. The default setting is 0.5. This
setting is saved in the drawing. (FACETRES system
variable)
Contour Lines per Sets the number of contour lines per surface on objects.
Surface A higher number decreases display performance and
increases rendering time. The valid range is 0 to 2047.
The default setting is 4. This setting is saved in the
drawing. (ISOLINES system variable)
Display Performance
Controls display settings that affect AutoCAD performance.
Pan and Zoom Controls the display of raster images and OLE objects
with Raster and when you use Realtime PAN and ZOOM. Clear this
OLE option to optimize performance. If dragging display is
turned on and you select Pan and Zoom with Raster and
OLE, a copy of the object moves with the cursor as you
reposition the original. Dragging display controls
whether an outline of the object is displayed while you
drag it. The DRAGMODE system variable controls
dragging display. (RTDISPLAY system variable)

632 | OPTIONS
Highlight Raster Controls the display of raster images during selection. If
Image Frame this option is selected, only the frame of the raster
Only image is highlighted when selected. Select this option
to optimize performance. (IMAGEHLT system variable)
Apply Solid Fill Displays solid fills in objects. You must regenerate the
drawing for this setting to take effect. This setting is
saved in the drawing. Clear this option to optimize
performance. (FILLMODE system variable)
Objects affected by FILL include hatches (including
solid-fill), two-dimensional solids, wide polylines,
multilines, and traces.
Show Text Displays the frames for text objects instead of
Boundary Frame displaying the text objects. After you select or clear this
Only option, you must use REGEN to update the display. This
setting is saved in the drawing. Select this option to
optimize performance. (QTEXTMODE system variable)
Show Silhouettes Controls whether silhouette curves of 3D solid objects
in Wireframe are displayed as wireframes. This option also controls
whether mesh is drawn or suppressed when a 3D solid
object is hidden. This setting is saved in the drawing.
Clear this option to optimize performance. (DISPSILH
system variable)
Reference Fading Intensity
Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in-place reference
editing. With in-place reference editing, you can edit a block reference or
external reference from within the current drawing. While references are
being edited in place, objects that are not being edited are displayed at a
lesser intensity than objects that can be edited. The valid range is 0 through
90 percent. The default setting is 50 percent. (XFADECTL system variable)

OPTIONS | 633
Open and Save Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls options that relate to opening and saving files in AutoCAD.

File Save
Controls settings related to saving a file in AutoCAD.
Save As Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file
with SAVE, SAVEAS, and QSAVE. The file format selected
for this option is the default format that all drawings
are saved as when you use SAVE, SAVEAS, and QSAVE.
Saving an AutoCAD 2004 file to any DXF format
affects performance. Set the Save As option to AutoCAD
2004 Drawing to optimize performance while saving.
Note AutoCAD 2000 is the drawing file format used by
the AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 2000i, and AutoCAD 2002
releases.
Thumbnail Displays the Thumbnail Preview Settings dialog box.
Preview Settings

634 | OPTIONS
Incremental Save Sets the percentage of potentially wasted space in a
Percentage drawing file. When the specified percentage is reached,
AutoCAD performs a full save instead of an incremental
save. Full saves eliminate wasted space. If you set
Incremental Save Percentage to 0, every save is a full
save.
Although incremental saves increase the size of your
drawing, do not set a very low value. Low values
degrade performance because AutoCAD performs time-
consuming full saves more often. For optimum
performance, set the value to 50. If hard disk space
becomes an issue, set the value to 25. If you set the
value to 20 or less, performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS
commands slows significantly. (ISAVEPERCENT system
variable)
File Safety Precautions
Assists in avoiding data loss and in detecting errors.
Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you
specify. You can specify the location of all Autosave files
by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable. SAVEFILE
(read-only) stores the name of the Autosave file.
Minutes Between Saves: Specifies how often the
drawing is saved when using Automatic Save.
(SAVETIME system variable)

Create Backup Specifies whether a backup copy of a drawing is created

Copy with Each when you save the drawing. The backup copy is created
Save in the same location as the drawing. (ISAVEBAK system
variable)
For information about using backup files, see Recover
a Damaged File in the Users Guide.
Full-Time CRC Specifies whether a cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
Validation should be performed each time an object is read into
the drawing. CRC is an error-checking mechanism. If
your drawings are being corrupted and you suspect a
hardware problem or AutoCAD error, turn this option
on.

OPTIONS | 635
Maintain a Log Writes the contents of the text window to a log file. To
File specify the location and name of the log file, use the
Files tab in the Options dialog box. You can also set the
log file location by using the LOGFILEMODE system
variable. The LOGFILENAME system variable (read-only)
stores the log file name of the current drawing.
File Extension for Specifies a unique extension for the current user to
Temporary Files identify temporary files in a network environment. The
default extension is .ac$.
Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password
that are invoked when you save a file.
Display Digital Presents digital signature information when a file with
Signature a valid digital signature is opened. (SIGWARN system
Information variable)
File Open
Controls settings that relate to recently used files and open files.
Number of Controls the number of recently used files that are
Recently Used listed in the File menu for quick access. Valid values are
Files to List 0 to 9.
Display Full Path Displays the full path of the active drawing in the
In Title drawings title bar, or in the AutoCAD title bar if the
drawing is maximized.
External References (Xrefs)
Controls the settings that relate to editing and loading external references.
Demand Load Controls demand loading of xrefs. Demand loading
Xrefs improves performance by loading only the parts of the
referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current
drawing. (XLOADCTL system variable)

Disabled: Turns off demand loading.

Enabled: Turns on demand loading and improves
AutoCAD performance. Select the Enabled setting to
enhance the loading process when working with
clipped xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index.
When this option is selected, other users cannot edit
the file while it is being referenced.
Enabled with Copy: Turns on demand loading but
uses a copy of the referenced drawing. Other users
can edit the original drawing.

636 | OPTIONS
Retain Changes Saves changes to layer properties and states for xref-
to Xref Layers dependent layers. When the drawing is reloaded, the
properties currently assigned to xref-dependent layers
are retained. This setting is saved in the drawing.
(VISRETAIN system variable)
Allow Other Users Determines whether the current drawing file can be
to Refedit Current edited in place if it is being referenced by another
Drawing drawing or multiple drawings. This setting is saved in
the drawing. (XEDIT system variable)
ObjectARX Applications
Controls settings that relate to AutoCAD Runtime Extension applications
and proxy graphics.
Demand Load Specifies if and when AutoCAD demand-loads a third-
ObjectARX Apps party application if a drawing contains custom objects
created in that application. (DEMANDLOAD system
variable)

Disable Load on Demand: Turns off demand-loading.

Custom Object Detect: Demand-loads the source
application when you open a drawing that contains
custom objects. This setting does not demand-load
the application when you invoke one of the
applications commands.
Command Invoke: Demand-loads the source
application when you invoke one of the
applications commands. This setting does not
demand-load the application when you open a
drawing that contains custom objects.
Object Detect and Command Invoke: Demand-loads
the source application when you open a drawing
that contains custom objects or when you invoke
one of the applications commands.

Proxy Images for Controls the display of custom objects in drawings.

Custom Objects (PROXYSHOW system variable)

Do Not Show Proxy Graphics: Specifies not to display

custom objects in drawings.
Show Proxy Graphics: Specifies to display custom
objects in drawings.
Show Proxy Bounding Box: Specifies to show a box in
place of custom objects in drawings.

OPTIONS | 637
Show Proxy Specifies whether AutoCAD displays a warning when
Information you open a drawing that contains custom objects.
Dialog Box (PROXYNOTICE system variable)

Plot and Publish Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls options related to plotting and publishing.

Default Plot Settings For New Drawings

Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in
AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000
or later format.
Use As Default Sets the default output device for new drawings and for
Output Device drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that
have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later
format. The list displays any plotter configuration files
(PC3) found in the plotter configuration search path
and any system printers that are configured in the
system.
Use Last Sets the plotting settings to match those of the last
Successful Plot successful plot.
Settings

638 | OPTIONS
Add or Configure Displays the Plotter Manager (a Windows system
Plotters window) (see page 737). You can add or configure a
plotter with the Autodesk Plotter Manager.
Plot To File
Specifies the default location for plot to file operations. You can enter a loca-
tion or click the [...] button to specify a new location.
Background Processing Options
Specifies options for background plotting and publishing. You can use back-
ground plotting to start a job you are plotting or publishing and immediately
return to work on your drawing while your job is plotted or published as you
work.
Backround plot and publish details are available through the Plot and Pub-
lish status bar icon shortcut menu (see page 1071).
You can plot or publish jobs in the background even if AutoCAD is not run-
ning by entering acad/pl <DSD file name> at the Windows Command
Prompt.
Enable Specifies whether or not background plotting is turned
Background on for plotting and publishing.
Plotting When
Plotting: Specifies that plot jobs are processed in the
background. This setting is also affected by the
BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable.
Publishing: Specifies that published jobs are
processed in the background. This setting is also
affected by the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable.

Note When -PLOT, PLOT, -PUBLISH, and PUBLISH are used in a script (SCR file),
the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable value is ignored, and -PLOT, PLOT,
-PUBLISH, and PUBLISH are processed in the foreground.

Plot and Publish Log File

Controls options for saving a plot and publish log file as a comma-separated
value (CSV) file that can be viewed in a spreadsheet program.
This log file contains information about plot and publish jobs such as:

Job ID
Job name
Sheet set name
Category name
Date and time started and completed

OPTIONS | 639
Sheet name
Full file path
Selected layout name
Page setup name
Named page setup path
Device name
Paper size name
Final status

Automatically Specifies that a log file that contains information about

Save Plot and all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved.
Publish Log
Save One Specifies that a single log file that contains information
Continuous Plot about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved.
Log
Save One Log File Specifies that a separate log file is created for each plot
Per Plot and publish job.
General Plot Options
Controls options that relate to the general plotting environment, including
paper size settings, system printer alert behavior, and OLE objects in an
AutoCAD drawing.
Keep the Layout Uses the paper size specified in the Page Setup dialog
Paper Size If box as long as the selected output device can plot to this
Possible paper size. If the selected output device cannot plot to
this paper size, AutoCAD displays a warning message
and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter
configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings
if the output device is a system printer. You can also
select this option by setting PAPERUPDATE to 0.
Use the Plot Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter
Device Paper Size configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings
if the output device is a system printer. You can also set
this option by setting PAPERUPDATE to 1.

640 | OPTIONS
System Printer Controls whether you are alerted when the plotted
Spool Alert drawing is spooled through a system printer because of
an input or output port conflict.

Always Alert (And Log Errors): Alerts you and always

logs an error when the plotted drawing spools
through a system printer.
Alert First Time Only (And Log Errors): Alerts you once
and always logs an error when the plotted drawing
spools through a system printer.
Never Alert (And Log First Error): Never alerts you and
logs only the first error when the plotted drawing
spools through a system printer.
Never Alert (Do Not Log Errors): Never alerts you or
logs an error when the plotted drawing spools
through a system printer.

OLE Plot Quality Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects. The
options are Monochrome, Low Graphics, High
Graphics, and Automatically Select. The automatic
option assigns a plot quality setting based on the type
of OLE object. (OLEQUALITY system variable)
Use OLE Launches the application used to create the OLE object
Application when plotting a drawing with OLE objects. You can use
When Plotting this option to optimize the quality of plotted OLE
OLE Objects objects. This setting is saved in the drawing.
(OLESTARTUP system variable)
Hide System Controls whether Windows system printers are
Printer displayed in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes. This
option hides standard Windows system printers only. It
does not hide Windows system printers that have been
configured using the AutoCAD Add-a-Plotter wizard.
You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot
and Page Setup dialog boxes by moving a devices PC3
file out of the Plotters folder and its subfolders.

OPTIONS | 641
Specify Plot Offset Relative To
Specifies whether the offset of the plot area is from the lower-left corner of
the printable area or from the edge of the paper (PLOTOFFSET system
variable).
Printable Area Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the printable
area.
Edge of Paper Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the edge of the
paper.
Plot Style Table Settings
Opens the Plot Style Table Settings dialog box.
Plot Stamp Settings
Opens the Plot Stamp dialog box.

System Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls AutoCAD system settings.

Current 3D Graphics Display

Controls settings that relate to system properties and configuration of the 3D
graphics display system.
Current 3D Lists the available 3D graphics display systems. The
Graphics Display default is the Heidi 3D graphics display system
System (GSHEIDI10).

642 | OPTIONS
Properties Displays a 3D Graphics System Configuration dialog
box for the current 3D graphics display system. In the
3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box, you set
options that affect the way objects are displayed and
system resources are used in the 3D Orbit view. The
options you set also affect the way objects are shaded
with SHADEMODE.
Current Pointing Device
Controls options that relate to the pointing device.
Current Pointing Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers.
Device
Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system
pointing device as current.
Wintab Compatible Digitizer: Sets the Wintab-
compatible digitizer as current.

Accept Input Specifies whether AutoCAD accepts input from both a

From mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a
digitizer is set.
Layout Regen Options
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model and layout tabs. For
each tab, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when
you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to memory and regenerat-
ing only the modified objects when you switch to that tab. Changing these
settings can improve performance. (LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable)

Note The effectiveness of changing these settings depends on several factors.

See LAYOUTREGENCTL for more information.

Regen When Regenerates the drawing each time you switch tabs.
Switching
Layouts
Cache Model Tab For the Model tab and the last layout made current,
and Last Layout saves the display list to memory and suppresses
regenerations when you switch between the two tabs.
For all other layouts, regenerations still occur when you
switch to those tabs.
Cache Model Tab Regenerates the drawing the first time you switch to
and All Layouts each tab. For the remainder of the drawing session, the
display list is saved to memory and regenerations are
suppressed when you switch to those tabs.

OPTIONS | 643
dbConnect Options
Controls options that relate to database connectivity.
Store Links Index Stores the database index in the AutoCAD drawing file.
in Drawing File Select this option to enhance performance during Link
Select operations. Clear this option to decrease drawing
file size and to enhance the opening process for
drawings with database information.
Open Tables in Specifies whether to open database tables in Read-only
Read-Only Mode mode in the AutoCAD drawing file.
General Options
Controls general options that relate to system settings.
Single-Drawing Limits AutoCAD to one open drawing at a time. If you
Compatibility clear this option, AutoCAD can open multiple drawings
Mode at once. If multiple drawings are open, this option
cannot be turned on until the additional drawings are
closed. (SDI system variable)
Show All Warning Displays all dialog boxes that include a Dont Display
Messages This Warning Again option. All dialog boxes with
warning options are displayed, regardless of previous
settings specific to each dialog box.
Beep on Error in Sounds an alarm beep when AutoCAD detects an
User Input invalid entry.
Load acad.lsp Specifies whether AutoCAD loads the acad.lsp file into
with Every every drawing. If this option is cleared, only the
Drawing acaddoc.lsp file is loaded into all drawing files. Clear this
option if you do not want to run certain LISP routines
in specific drawing files. (ACADLSPASDOC system
variable)
Allow Long Permits long names to be used for named objects in the
Symbol Names drawing definition table. Object names can be up to
255 characters and include letters, numbers, blank
spaces, and any special character not used by Windows
and AutoCAD for other purposes. Long names can be
used for layers, dimension styles, blocks, linetypes, text
styles, layouts, UCS names, views, and viewport
configurations. This option is saved in the drawing.
(EXTNAMES system variable)

644 | OPTIONS
Startup Controls whether the Startup dialog box or no dialog
box is displayed when starting AutoCAD or creating a
new drawing.
Live Enabler Options
Specifies whether AutoCAD checks for object enablers. Using object enablers,
you can display and use custom objects in AutoCAD drawings even when the
ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable.
Check Web for Controls whether AutoCAD checks the Autodesk
Live Enablers website for object enablers.
Maximum Specifies the number of times that AutoCAD checks for
Number of object enablers if unsuccessful.
Unsuccessful
Checks
For more information about object enablers, see Work with Custom and
Proxy Objects in the Users Guide.

User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls options that optimize the way you work.

Windows Standard Behavior

Controls keystroke and right-click behavior.

OPTIONS | 645
Windows Follows Windows standards in interpreting keyboard
Standard accelerators (for example, CTRL + C equals COPYCLIP). If
Accelerator Keys this option is cleared, AutoCAD interprets keyboard
accelerators by using AutoCAD standards rather than
Windows standards (for example, CTRL + C equals
Cancel, CTRL + V toggles among the viewports).
Shortcut Menus Displays a shortcut menu in the drawing area when you
in Drawing Area right-click the pointing device. If this option is cleared,
AutoCAD interprets right-click as ENTER .
Right-Click Displays the Right-Click Customization dialog box (see
Customization page 660). This dialog box provides further definition
for the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area option.
(SHORTCUTMENU system variable)
Drag and Drop Scale
Controls the default scale for dragging objects into a drawing using
DesignCenter or i-drop.
Source Content Sets the units AutoCAD uses for an object being
Units inserted into the current drawing when no insert units
are specified with the INSUNITS system variable.
If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not
scaled when inserted. (INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system
variable)
Target Drawing Sets the units AutoCAD uses in the current drawing
Units when no insert units are specified with the INSUNITS
system variable. (INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable)
Hyperlink
Controls settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks.
Display Hyperlink Displays the hyperlink cursor and tooltip whenever the
Cursor, Tooltip, pointing device pauses over an object that contains a
and Shortcut hyperlink. The shortcut menu provides additional
Menu hyperlink options when you select an object that
contains a hyperlink and then right-click in the
drawing area. If this option is cleared, hyperlinks in the
drawing are ignored.

646 | OPTIONS
Fields
Sets preferences related to fields.
Display Displays fields with a light gray background that is not
Background of plotted. When this option is cleared, fields are
Fields displayed with the same background as any text.
(FIELDDISPLAY system variable)
Field Update Displays the Field Update Settings dialog box (see page
Settings 662). (FIELDEVAL system variable)
Priority for Coordinate Data Entry
Controls how AutoCAD responds to input of coordinate data. (OSNAPCOORD
system variable)
Running Object Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate
Snap entry at all times. You can also select this option by
setting OSNAPCOORD to 0.
Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object
snaps at all times. You can also select this option by
setting OSNAPCOORD to 1.
Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object
Except Scripts snaps, except in scripts. You can also select this option
by setting OSNAPCOORD to 2.
Associative Dimensioning
Controls whether associative dimension objects or legacy-style, nonassocia-
tive dimension objects are created. Associative dimensions automatically
adjust their locations, orientations, and measurement values when the
geometric objects associated with them are modified. (DIMASSOC system
variable)
Hidden Line Settings
Displays the Hidden Line Settings dialog box, where you can change the
display properties of hidden lines.
Lineweight Settings
Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box (see page 512). Use this dialog
box to set lineweight options, such as display properties and defaults, and
also to set the current lineweight.

OPTIONS | 647
Drafting Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Specifies a number of general editing options.

AutoSnap Settings
Controls settings that relate to the visual aids, called AutoSnaps, that are
displayed when you use object snaps. AutoSnap settings are saved in the
registry. When the cursor, or aperture box, is on an object, you can press TAB
to cycle through all the snap points available for that object.
Marker Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The
marker is a geometric symbol that is displayed when
the crosshairs move over a snap point. (AUTOSNAP
system variable)
Magnet Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off. The magnet is an
automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks the
crosshairs onto the nearest snap point. (AUTOSNAP
system variable)
Display AutoSnap Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip. The
Tooltip tooltip is a label that describes which part of the object
you are snapping to. (AUTOSNAP system variable)

648 | OPTIONS
Display AutoSnap Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box. The
Aperture Box aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs
when you snap to an object. (APBOX system variable)
AutoSnap Marker Specifies the color of the AutoSnap marker.
Color
AutoSnap Marker Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker.
Object Snap Options
Specifies options for object snaps. (OSNAP command)
Ignore Hatch Specifies that object snaps ignore hatch patterns when
Objects object snapping is turned on.
AutoTrack Settings
Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available
when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS).
Display Polar Displays a vector along specified angles when polar
Tracking Vector tracking is on. With polar tracking, you can draw lines
along angles. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such
as 45, 30, and 15 degrees.
You can disable Display Polar Tracking Vector by setting
TRACKPATH to 2.

Display Controls the display of tracking vectors. Tracking

Full-Screen vectors are construction lines from which you can draw
Tracking Vector objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to
other objects. If selected, AutoCAD displays alignment
vectors as infinite lines.
You can disable Display Full-Screen Tracking Vector by
setting TRACKPATH to 1.
Display Controls the display of the AutoTrack tooltip. The
AutoTrack Tooltip tooltip is a label that displays the tracking coordinates.
(AUTOSNAP system variable)
Alignment Point Acquisition
Controls the method of displaying alignment vectors in a drawing.
Automatic Displays tracking vectors automatically when the
aperture moves over an object snap.
Shift to Acquire Displays tracking vectors when you press SHIFT and
move the aperture over an object snap.

OPTIONS | 649
Aperture Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap aperture. When Display AutoSnap
Aperture Box is selected (or when APBOX is set to 1), the aperture box is
displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object. The
aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the
magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. Values range from 1 to 50
pixels. (APERTURE system variable)

Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for selecting objects.

Pickbox Size
Controls the display size of the AutoCAD pickbox. The pickbox is the object
selection tool that appears in editing commands. (PICKBOX system variable)
Selection Modes
Controls settings that relate to object selection methods.

650 | OPTIONS
Noun/Verb Allows you to select an object before starting a
Selection command. The command affects the previously
selected object or objects. (PICKFIRST system variable)
You can use many editing and inquiry commands with
noun/verb selection, including

ALIGN DVIEW PROPERTIES

ARRAY ERASE ROTATE

BLOCK EXPLODE SCALE

CHANGE LIST STRETCH

CHPROP MIRROR WBLOCK

COPY MOVE

Use Shift to Add Adds an object to or removes it from the selection set
to Selection when you press SHIFT and select an object. To clear a
selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a
blank area of the drawing. (PICKADD system variable)
Press and Drag Draws a selection window by selecting a point and
dragging the pointing device to a second point. If this
option is cleared, you can draw a selection window by
selecting two separate points with the pointing device.
(PICKDRAG system variable)
Implied Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you
Windowing select a point outside an object.
Drawing the selection window from left to right selects
objects that are entirely inside the windows
boundaries. Drawing from right to left selects objects
within and crossing the windows boundaries.
(PICKAUTO system variable)
Object Grouping Selects all objects in a group when you select one object
in that group. With GROUP you can create and name a
set of objects for selection. You can also set this option
by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 1.

OPTIONS | 651
Associative Hatch Determines which objects are selected when you select
an associative hatch. If this option is selected, boundary
objects are also selected when you select an associative
hatch. You can also set this option by setting the
PICKSTYLE system variable to 2.

Grip Size
Controls the display size of AutoCAD grips. (GRIPSIZE system variable)

grip sizes

Grips
Controls the settings that relate to grips. Grips are small squares displayed on
an object after it has been selected.
unselected grips
Unselected Grip Determines the color of an unselected grip. If you
Color choose Select Color from the color list, AutoCAD
selected grip displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 172).
AutoCAD displays an unselected grip as a small, filled
square. (GRIPCOLOR system variable)
Selected Grip Determines the color of a selected grip. If you choose
Color Select Color from the color list, AutoCAD displays the
Select Color dialog box (see page 172). AutoCAD
displays a selected grip as a small, filled square.
(GRIPHOT system variable)
Hover Grip Color Determines the color a grip displays when the cursor
rolls over the grip. If you choose Select Color from the
color list, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box
(see page 172). (GRIPHOVER system variable)
Enable Grips Displays grips on an object when you select it. You can
edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using
the shortcut menu. Displaying grips in a drawing
significantly affects performance. Clear this option to
optimize performance. (GRIPS system variable)
Enable Grips Controls how grips are displayed on a block after you
within Blocks select it. If this option is selected, AutoCAD displays all
grips for each object in the block. If this option is
cleared, AutoCAD displays one grip located at the
insertion point of the block. You can edit an object with
grips by selecting a grip and using the sho